NSD570

CommunicateIT NSD570
Teleprotection System
p Operating Instructions
1KHW000890-EN
Edition April 2004
2002 ABB Switzerland Ltd Baden
Released Editions 1st Edition 2nd Edition 3rd Edition 4th Edition
Release Date 2002-12-20 2003-01-31 2003-09-01 2004-04-16
This Operating Instructions applies to the NSD570 Teleprotection System. All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and registration of other industrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorized use, in particular reproduction or making available to third parties, is prohibited. This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of this the reader find an error, she/he is requested to inform us at her/his earliest convenience. The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a warranty of performance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our customers in mind that we constantly strive to improve our products and keep them abreast of advances in technology. This may, however, lead to discrepancies between a product and its Technical Description or Operating Instructions.
1. Introduction
2. Safety instructions
3. System description
4. User interface program
5. Configuration and settings
6. Installation and wiring
7. Commissioning
8. Operation and maintenance
9. Troubleshooting
10. Storage, decommissioning and disposal
11. Appendices
12. Annex
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
1.
1.1. 1.2. 1.2.1. 1.2.2. 1.3.
Introduction
Using these Operating Instructions .......................................... 1-3 Personnel qualifications ........................................................... 1-3 Operating personnel ................................................................ 1-3 Service personnel .................................................................... 1-4 Warranty restriction .................................................................. 1-4
Introduction
April 2004
1-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
1.
Introduction
The NSD570 teleprotection equipment is used for the dependable and secure transmission of protection commands in electrical power systems. In the event of a fault it makes a decisive contribution to rapidly and selectively isolating the faulty part. The NSD570 can be used for the transmission of blocking and tripping signals via analog or digital communication links. Analog links include pilot wires, speech channels of power line carrier equipment and voice channels of analog or digital communication systems, whereas digital channels include G.703 co-directional, RS-422/V.11 - RS-449/RS-530/ X.21 (56 kbps, 64 kbps), E1, T1 interfaces and optical fibers. The conversion from an analog to a digital system is possible by exchanging of only one module (the line interface of the NSD570). The NSD570 comprises printed circuit boards with a height of three standard units (3U) mounted in a 19" equipment rack. Two NSD570 devices with different line interfaces may be plugged in the rack. The rack itself has a height of four standard units, providing a cable duct of 1U below the equipment at the rear side.
Fig. 1.1
Front view of NSD570
1-2
April 2004
Introduction
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1.1.
Using these Operating Instructions

These Operating Instructions are intended for maintenance and operating personnel responsible for communication in the Electric Utility. All safety rules in force in the users plant must be strictly observed. Only properly trained personnel may work on the equipment. The Operating Instructions contain all the information and instructions needed during the life-cycle of the equipment, i.e. shipping, storage, commissioning, maintenance, decommissioning and disposal. Please refer to the respective Section for the particular topic you are dealing with. The operations in the life of the equipment, i.e. shipping, installation, testing and commissioning are normally carried out by different people. For this reason some of the safety instructions occur several times in the various sections. These Operating Instructions distinguish between two groups mainly concerned with the equipment, service personnel and operating personnel. This manual applies to the NSD570 teleprotection system. Actual hardware, firmware and software versions are to be found in the document "Compatibility requirements" in the annex of the manual.
1.2. 1.2.1.
Personnel qualifications Operating personnel

Operating personnel must: have general knowledge of electronic and electrical systems have had basic theoretical and practical training on teleprotection equipment and its principles be able to work with a PC/notebook, Windows operating systems and web browsers in order to configure and program the assemblies be trained and familiar in handling potential sources of danger with the corresponding caution comprehend and heed warning signs and devices to avoid injury to persons and damage to the plant not carry out any of the changes or settings described in the Sections: Section 6 Section 7 Section 9 Section 10
Introduction
Installation and wiring Commissioning Troubleshooting Storage, decommissioning and disposal

April 2004 1-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
1.2.2.
Service personnel
Service personnel must: have read and understood the Operating Instructions before commencing work on the NSD570 should attend a training course in the handling and operation of the equipment take the usual ESD precautions when working on the modules of the NSD570 system take all precautions and observe all warnings to avoid injury and damage to the plant ensure that in advance to any manipulation on the NSD570, the equipment has to be set clear or standby and the signaling be switched into a safe mode, to protect against unwanted tripping signals.
1.3.
Warranty restriction
The manufacturer disclaims any responsibility for hazards and material damage, if the equipment is operated other than for its intended use as described in these Operating Instructions or if the equipment is serviced by non qualified personnel.
1-4
April 2004
Introduction
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
2.
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4.
Safety Instructions
Presentation of safety information ........................................... 2-2 Basic principles........................................................................ 2-3 General instructions ................................................................. 2-3 Product-specific instructions .................................................... 2-4
Safety Instructions
April 2004
2-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
2.
2.1.
Safety Instructions
Presentation of safety information
The NSD570 equipment itself is safe and without any risk. This is not valid for its containment and the peripheral surrounding, like the high voltage area and lines. Therefore only properly trained service personnel may handle the equipment and make settings. Some other work may be performed by operating personnel (see Section 1 Introduction). In this manual the safety instructions are marked as follows:
DANGER
Information or dos and donts to prevent serious personal injury or extensive equipment damage. Specific information or dos and donts to prevent minor damage and operating problems.
Caution
Note:
Specific information with regard to the optimum use of the appliance.
Safety signs marked on the equipment itself:
DANGER
Hazardous voltage and hazardous energy level. Beware of electric shock.

Specific information to prevent minor damage and operating problems.
Caution
Caution ESD
Specific information to prevent equipment damage by electrostatic discharge.
2-2
April 2004
Safety Instructions
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
2.2.
Basic principles
The NSD570 is a state-of-the-art equipment that fulfils generally recognized safety standards. Nevertheless, danger may exist if it is used improperly. Only use an NSD570 unit that is in perfect working order and observe the Operating Instructions.
2.3.
General instructions
Personnel qualification
DANGER
An authorized and properly trained personnel only is admitted to carry out installing, programming, commissioning, maintenance, troubleshooting and work of the equipment.
Instruction Manual
DANGER
The Operating Instructions should be read and clearly understood before working on the equipment.
Safety and monitoring facilities
DANGER
Mechanical safety facilities such as cover plates must not be removed or by-passed.
Alteration
DANGER
Alteration of the equipment is not allowed.
Warning labels
DANGER
Precautions and indications to hazardous voltages and hazardous energy level must be strictly observed.
Safety Instructions
April 2004
2-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
2.4.
Product-specific instructions
Technical specifications
DANGER
The equipment must be operated within the technical specifications. Failure to do so may result in personal injuries or equipment damage.
Alteration
DANGER
Alteration of the equipment is not allowed.
Insertion and removal of plug-in modules Caution Neither removal nor insertion of modules - except for redundant power supply units - is permitted when the equipment is powered on. Before plugging modules in and out, the power supply of the equipment has to be switched OFF.
ESD protection Caution ESD The modules in this equipment contain devices, which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges. Appropriate measures must be taken before unpacking modules or withdrawing them from equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent ESD damage when handling or working on modules are grounding straps for technical personnel and the provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may only be shipped either in their original packing or installed in equipment racks.
Mechanical Installation
DANGER
The equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.
DANGER
Cabinets, which are not secured to the floor, tip forwards when the hinged frame is opened. Do not open the hinged frame without precautions.
2-4
April 2004
Safety Instructions
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Shipping Caution To avoid damage while being shipped, note the instructions in Section 6 Installation and wiring in the Operating Instructions.
Electrical Installation
DANGER
This is a Class equipment specified in IEC 60950. The equipment and the cabinet must be earthed. The equipment must be supplied over circuit breaker. The circuit breaker for the power supply of the equipment must be switched OFF. The circuit breakers for optional equipment in the cabinet must be switched OFF. Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or from the equipment. The isolating terminals of the external cables must be kept open during installation, maintenance and before storage, decommissioning and disposal. The Faston supply connectors at the rear of the rack must be covered with an isolation sleeve. The power supply is dangerous (hazardous voltage and/or hazardous energy level). Do not install the equipment with a live supply. When an analog NSD570 is connected to cables, pilot wires or leased circuits, the equipment must only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers withstanding a 15 kVrms or 20 kVrms test voltage at 50 Hz / 60 Hz for 1 minute, according to national regulations or to electric utilities' practice. Connecting a load between terminals NO (normally open) and NC (normally closed) is not allowed. Use only one contact set NO or NC.
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
Caution
Caution
Safety Instructions
April 2004
2-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Fiber optic Installation Caution Optical connectors Clean all optical connectors by an approved method before making any optical connection. When making an optical connection, do not rotate the optical connector unnecessarily. When not connected, fit all optical plugs and couplings with captive caps. Caution Damage to optical fibers When dressing fibers, take care not to exceed the minimum bend radius (typically 35 mm) and do not over tighten binders used for dressing as damage may result. When connecting other external cables and also the rear cover, ensure that the optical fibers are not bruised or crimped. Back cover
DANGER
Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level behind the back cover. Before removing the back cover, the isolating terminals of the external cables must be opened or the cables to the terminals must be disconnected.
Working on the equipment
DANGER
Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning.
Electrical strength test
DANGER
Do not repeat any electrical strength tests. Improper test methods can cause severe damage to the equipment. Electric strength and earth continuity tests have been performed in the factory.
EMC Caution This is a class A equipment specified in CISPR 22 (EN 55022). In a domestic environment, this equipment may cause radio interference. In this case, the user may be required to take adequate measures.
2-6
April 2004
Safety Instructions
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Power supply for alarm Caution The alarm power supply must be short current and over current protected.
Common Interface G3LC
DANGER
Hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy level on the module and the cable. Do not touch the module and the cable leads.
Relay Interface G3LR
DANGER
LAN Interface G3LL
DANGER
The LAN Interface G3LL contains a lithium battery. Danger of explosion exists if the lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. For replacing and inserting the battery always use a potentially-free soldering iron. Check the polarity before inserting the battery.
Caution
For disposal of the lithium battery, the regional and national regulations for electrical and electronic waste have to be observed.
Laser / LED Caution Laser / LED Class Laser/LED Product.
Commissioning Caution Do not close/establish the connections to the protection devices until the NSD570 is properly commissioned.
Safety Instructions
April 2004
2-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Using HMI570 Caution The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commissioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote test mode). However, when a user is logged in with only "view permission", it is not possible to disable the device. During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation the "Reset Device" link in the Maintenance menu of the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for approx. 10 seconds. During this time no commands can be transmitted.
Caution
2-8
April 2004
Safety Instructions
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
3.
3.1. 3.1.1. 3.1.2. 3.1.3. 3.2. 3.3. 3.3.1. 3.3.2. 3.3.3. 3.3.4. 3.3.5. 3.3.6. 3.3.7. 3.4. 3.4.1. 3.4.1.1. 3.4.1.2. 3.4.2. 3.4.2.1. 3.4.2.2. 3.4.2.3. 3.4.2.4. 3.4.2.5. 3.4.2.6. 3.4.2.7. 3.4.3. 3.4.3.1. 3.4.3.2. 3.4.3.3. 3.4.3.4. 3.4.3.5. 3.4.3.6. 3.4.3.7. 3.4.4. 3.4.4.1. 3.4.4.2. 3.4.4.3.
System Description
Introduction .............................................................................. 3-5 General NSD570 Features ...................................................... 3-6 Features of the NSD570 Analog .............................................. 3-8 Features of the NSD570 Digital ............................................... 3-8 Communication Channels........................................................ 3-9 System Architecture............................................................... 3-10 System Block Diagram........................................................... 3-10 Mechanical Design ................................................................ 3-11 External connections.............................................................. 3-12 Frontplate Signals and Controls............................................. 3-13 Service interface (COM 1) ..................................................... 3-13 Power supply G3LH ............................................................... 3-14 Examples of rack assemblies ................................................ 3-14 Modules descriptions ............................................................. 3-17 Common Interface G3LC ....................................................... 3-17 Block diagram G3LC.............................................................. 3-17 Short description G3LC.......................................................... 3-18 Analog Line Interface G3LA................................................... 3-19 Block diagram G3LA .............................................................. 3-19 Short Description G3LA ......................................................... 3-19 External Interfaces G3LA....................................................... 3-20 Processor Environment G3LA ............................................... 3-20 Transmitter G3LA .................................................................. 3-21 Receiver G3LA ...................................................................... 3-21 Boosting Output G3LA ........................................................... 3-22 Digital Line Interface G3LD.................................................... 3-22 Block diagram G3LD.............................................................. 3-22 Short Description G3LD ......................................................... 3-22 External Interfaces G3LD....................................................... 3-23 Processor Environment G3LD ............................................... 3-23 External Cable and Connector G3LD..................................... 3-24 E1/T1 Interface G1LE ............................................................ 3-24 Optical Interface G1LO .......................................................... 3-25 Relay Interface G3LR ............................................................ 3-26 Block diagram G3LR.............................................................. 3-26 Short Description G3LR ......................................................... 3-26 Inputs G3LR........................................................................... 3-27
System Description April 2004 3-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.4.4.4. 3.4.4.5. 3.4.4.6. 3.4.4.7. 3.4.5. 3.4.5.1. 3.4.5.2. 3.4.5.2.1. 3.4.5.2.2. 3.4.5.2.3. 3.4.5.2.4. 3.4.5.2.5. 3.4.5.3. 3.4.5.3.1. 3.4.5.3.2. 3.4.5.3.3. 3.4.5.4. 3.4.5.4.1. 3.4.5.4.2. 3.4.5.4.3. 3.4.5.4.4. 3.4.5.4.5. 3.4.6. 3.4.6.1. 3.4.6.2. 3.5. 3.5.1. 3.5.2. 3.5.3. 3.5.3.1. 3.5.3.2. 3.5.3.3. 3.5.4. 3.5.4.1. 3.5.4.2. 3.5.4.3. 3.5.4.4. 3.5.4.5. 3.5.5. 3.5.5.1. 3.5.5.2. 3.5.5.3. 3.5.6. 3.5.7. 3.5.7.1.
Solid State Outputs G3LR...................................................... 3-27 Relay Contacts G3LR ............................................................ 3-28 Input Tripping Voltage G1LR ................................................. 3-28 External Cable and Connector G3LR..................................... 3-28 Display Panel G1LC............................................................... 3-29 Short Description G1LC ......................................................... 3-29 How to use the Display Panel G1LC...................................... 3-30 Display Panel activation and standby .................................... 3-30 Buttons on G1LC ................................................................... 3-30 Menu navigation hints ............................................................ 3-31 Reset ..................................................................................... 3-31 Display Panel settings............................................................ 3-31 Menu Structure Display Panel G1LC ..................................... 3-32 Top level menu ...................................................................... 3-32 Menu tree if connected to a local device................................ 3-32 Menu tree if connected to a remote device ............................ 3-34 Additional Features of Display Panel G1LC........................... 3-35 Requirements ........................................................................ 3-35 Display device communication baud rate............................... 3-35 Reset counters via display panel ........................................... 3-35 Disabling reset counters via display panel ............................. 3-35 Automatic display of Tx or Rx commands.............................. 3-36 LAN Interface G3LL ............................................................... 3-37 Short Description G3LL.......................................................... 3-37 Block diagram G3LL .............................................................. 3-38 Functional description ............................................................ 3-39 General Operating Principle................................................... 3-39 Signal processing .................................................................. 3-39 Analog Operating Principle .................................................... 3-40 Single-tone principle .............................................................. 3-40 Dual-tone principle ................................................................. 3-41 Programming of the analog system ....................................... 3-41 Analog Operating Modes ....................................................... 3-43 1 single tone command A ...................................................... 3-43 2 independent single tone commands A, B............................ 3-44 2 independent dual tone commands A, B .............................. 3-44 3 independent dual tone commands A, B, C.......................... 3-45 4 independent dual tone commands A, B, C, D ..................... 3-46 Digital Operating Principle ..................................................... 3-48 Digital code structure ............................................................. 3-48 Digital frame structure............................................................ 3-48 Programming of the digital system......................................... 3-49 Digital Operating Modes ........................................................ 3-49 Common Functions................................................................ 3-50 Command Application............................................................ 3-50
3-2 April 2004 System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.7.2. 3.5.7.3. 3.5.7.4. 3.5.7.5. 3.5.7.6. 3.5.7.7. 3.5.8. 3.5.8.1. 3.5.8.2. 3.5.8.3. 3.5.8.4. 3.5.9. 3.5.9.1. 3.5.9.2. 3.5.9.3. 3.5.10. 3.5.10.1. 3.5.10.2. 3.5.10.3. 3.5.10.4. 3.5.10.5. 3.5.11. 3.5.12. 3.5.12.1. 3.5.12.2. 3.5.12.3. 3.5.12.4. 3.5.12.5. 3.6. 3.6.1. 3.6.1.1. 3.6.1.2. 3.6.2. 3.6.3. 3.6.4. 3.6.5. 3.6.6. 3.6.6.1. 3.6.6.2. 3.6.6.3. 3.6.6.4. 3.6.6.5. 3.6.6.6. 3.6.6.7. 3.6.6.8.
Unblocking ............................................................................. 3-50 Tx Trip Duration Monitoring ................................................... 3-51 Tx input command delay........................................................ 3-51 Command Prolongation ......................................................... 3-52 Command Acknowledge ........................................................ 3-52 Rx Guard ............................................................................... 3-53 Functions of the analog system ............................................. 3-53 Transmit level setting / Transmit level monitoring .................. 3-53 Receive level setting / Receive level monitoring .................... 3-53 Boosting / Boost Output ......................................................... 3-54 Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) ................................... 3-54 Functions of the digital system............................................... 3-55 Bit error rate monitoring ......................................................... 3-55 Addressing............................................................................. 3-55 Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) ................................... 3-56 Event Recorder...................................................................... 3-57 General .................................................................................. 3-57 Command Events .................................................................. 3-57 Alarm Events ......................................................................... 3-58 Manipulation Events............................................................... 3-58 RTC Synchronization From an External Clock....................... 3-58 Counters ................................................................................ 3-59 Test facilities .......................................................................... 3-59 Testing during normal operation ............................................ 3-59 Cyclic Loop Test .................................................................... 3-60 Manual Loop Test .................................................................. 3-61 Local Test Mode .................................................................... 3-61 Remote Test Mode ................................................................ 3-62 NSD570 Applications ............................................................. 3-63 Permissive tripping schemes ................................................. 3-63 Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT) ............... 3-64 Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT) ................. 3-65 Blocking schemes .................................................................. 3-66 Unblocking ............................................................................. 3-68 Earth fault protection.............................................................. 3-70 Duplicated main protection .................................................... 3-71 Direct transfer tripping............................................................ 3-73 Line protection ....................................................................... 3-73 Re-closure lock out ................................................................ 3-74 Breaker back-up protection.................................................... 3-74 Shunt reactor protection......................................................... 3-75 Transformer protection........................................................... 3-76 Power system instability......................................................... 3-76 Generator shutdown and load shedding ................................ 3-77 Typical requirements in direct tripping applications ............... 3-78
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.6.7. 3.6.7.1. 3.6.7.2. 3.6.7.3. 3.6.7.4. 3.6.8. 3.6.8.1. 3.6.8.2.
Teed lines and tapped lines ................................................... 3-79 NSD570 Analog/Digital in normal T-operation..................... 3-81 NSD570 Analog/Digital in inverse T-operation .................... 3-82 Addressing of NSD570 Digital in T-operation ........................ 3-83 Tapped lines .......................................................................... 3-85 Phase-Segregated Command Transmission ......................... 3-86 Twin Line - Two Systems on Common Towers...................... 3-86 Long Single EHV Overhead Line ........................................... 3-87
3-4
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.
3.1.
System Description
Introduction
The sizes, complexity and power ratings of high voltage networks emphasize the need for highly reliable protection systems. Protection is based on information derived from the power system at one or more points, and fast selective protection applied to circuits with geographically separated terminals, such as cables and overhead lines, requires information interchange between these terminals. NSD570 is a teleprotection equipment intended for use in protection systems requiring a communication link. It is designed to convey qualitative information, i.e. command signals generated by protective devices in high-voltage electrical power systems. It is suitable for analog voice-grade communication facilities, such as pilot wires and speech channels of microwave radios or power line carrier links, and for digital communication facilities, provided by digital multiplexers, and for optical fiber. Since any communication system is subject to interference and noise of various forms, the performance of a teleprotection equipment is commonly described in terms of security, dependability and transmission time; further characteristics are the bandwidth of analog equipment and the signaling rate of digital equipment. Interference and noise on the communication link must neither simulate a command at the receiving end when no command signal was transmitted (security), nor impair the ability to convey commands correctly and promptly (dependability). Security, dependability, transmission time and bandwidth (or signaling rate) are interrelated and interchangeable parameters. High security and high dependability together with short transmission time and narrow bandwidth are therefore conflicting requirements, but the emphasis can always be placed on dependability or security or speed, depending on the application. A blocking protection scheme, for instance, needs a short transmission time and a high dependability, while a permissive tripping scheme needs a short transmission time with good security and a high dependability; direct transfer tripping schemes, by contrast, require very high dependability and security, achieved at the expense of a longer transmission time. The above mentioned protection schemes are explained at the end of this section (see Section 3.6 NSD570 Applications).
System Description
April 2004
3-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.1.1.
General NSD570 Features

Versatile application Transmission of command signals in blocking, permissive and direct transfer tripping schemes via pilot wires, speech channels of microwave radio systems or PLC links, speech channels of digital multiplexers, data channels conforming to ITU-T G.703 or to TIA/EIA-422 / ITU-T V.11 recommendations, E1 or T1 circuits, or via optical fibers. NSD570 may also be used for the transmission of persistent tripping signals in point-to-point or teed systems. Compact and flexible design Standard 19-inch rack for one or two NSD570 units; one unit for up to 4 independent protection commands via analog lines and up to 8 commands via digital lines; two independent units for duplicated protection schemes. Modular structure, few modules, low inventory The equipment is split up into a signal processing module including an analog or digital line interface and a relay interface which can transmit and receive two commands. Additional commands can be conveyed by simply inserting further relay interfaces (up to four per device). The module rack consists of a common front plate, an interface with shared functions (like alarm relays) and a supply backplane with connectors for the electrically isolated power supply units. Robust and reliable All interfaces and the power supply are d.c. isolated from all other circuits and from ground. Duplicated (redundant) power supply units can be fitted. Advanced technology, digital signal processing High equipment availability and reliability due to carefully selected components which have passed rigorous qualification tests. Algorithms optimized for protection signal transmission ensure safe and reliable operation even under extremely difficult conditions. Browser-based Human-Machine Interface HMI570 The user communicates with the NSD570 via a PC connected to the serial interface on the equipment front. A menu-guided HMI program, installed on the PC, enables various operating modes to be configured and detailed equipment settings and the operating or alarm status of the local and remote unit to be viewed. Remote access An optional LAN interface is available for remote access to the equipment via the Internet or a Corporate Network (Intranet). In a substation, several NSD570 units can be inter-connected via a two
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
wire serial bus (RS-485 interface), and each NSD570 is then accessible with a unique equipment address. Embedded operation channel (EOC) Allows remote NSD570 configuration and monitoring from one end. In-operation testing Automatic and manual testing routines enable the integrity of the communication channel to be tested during normal operation. The equipment availability is continuously monitored by self-testing procedures. Teed lines and tapped lines Cost-saving schemes for protection of multi-ended circuits. Redundant protection, 1 + 1 configuration Two independent NSD570 units in a common rack, for improved reliability in duplicated protection schemes. A mix of digital and analog units in the same rack is possible. Universal relay interface The relay interfaces provide two opto-coupler inputs and two solidstate outputs plus two heavy duty (electromechanical) relay outputs. Each input and output is potential-free and isolated from ground and all other circuits. Commands can be individually mapped to any input/output. Single-pole or double-pole tripping can be arranged, and command outputs can be clamped to an off or on state during channel alarm conditions. Several additional functions like individual alarms can be mapped to the remaining outputs. Integrated event recorder and trip counters More than 7000 command start/stop and alarm events can be recorded and stored with time stamp in a non-volatile memory. The event recorder can be synchronized to an external time signal (e.g. GPS receiver) for accurate time stamping. The display of events is possible in text view on the HMI570. In addition to the event recorder, integrated trip counters for each transmitted and received command facilitate investigations in case of faults or abnormal conditions in the high voltage network. Optional display panel For monitoring the equipment status and alarms of the two devices in a rack and of the devices in their remote stations (if the EOC is enabled).
System Description
April 2004
3-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.1.2.
Features of the NSD570 Analog

Hardware The NSD570 is arranged for use on audio-frequency communication facilities when an analog line interface card is plugged. Programmable bandwidth and centre frequencies Tx and Rx bandwidth programmable from 120 Hz to 2800 Hz; center frequencies programmable from 360 Hz to 3900 Hz in 60 Hz steps. Programmable command configuration Any command programmable for blocking, permissive tripping or direct transfer tripping. Up to 4 independent commands per unit Suitable for protection of dual-circuit lines. Several NSD570 can be operated in parallel on one AF channel in frequency-division multiplex mode. High speed Short transmission times (as low as 4 ms transmitting one command, or 6 ms transmitting two to four commands) meet demanding transmission time requirements. Level boosting Command signals can be transmitted at a considerably higher power level than the guard signal.
3.1.3.
Features of the NSD570 Digital

Hardware The NSD570 is arranged for use on digital communication facilities when a digital line interface card is plugged. Programmable signaling rate and data interfaces Four signaling rates can be programmed via HMI570 (56 kbps, 64 kbps, 1.544 Mbps and 2.048 Mbps), depending on the data interface in use. Programmable command configuration Any command programmable for blocking, permissive tripping or direct transfer tripping. Up to 8 independent commands per unit One NSD570 can for example handle phase-segregated line protection and breaker back-up protection of both systems of a dual circuit line. High speed Transmission time < 4 ms, or < 6 ms at the highest security level.
3-8
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Addressable Addresses assigned to the devices indicate for which station the guard and command signals are intended; this prevents maloperations in case of inadvertently transposed channels.
3.2.
Communication Channels
an a lo g di gi ta l an a lo g dig i op tal t ic al
og al an al t gi di g o al an l ta gi di al tic op
o al an
an a lo
Protection commands
Protection commands
analog
g analo
3-Com.-Channels.vsd
Fig. 3.1
Communication channels
Analog channels with voice frequency bandwidth: - pilot wires - analog leased lines - voice channels of analog or digital communication systems - PLC links Digital channels: - serial data channels of digital multiplexers - radio links and optical fiber systems - leased digital telecommunication circuits Optical channels: - optical point-to-point connection - optical connection to a digital multiplexer
System Description
April 2004
3-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.3. 3.3.1.
System Architecture System Block Diagram

OUTPUT
G3LR
(or G3LR/G1LR)
BOOST
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
(analog)
Laptop
Display Panel G1LC Common Interface Line Interface (analog, digital or optical) G3LC Supply Backplane Busplane (with Front Cover) G1LB G1LA G3LA or G3LD
(or G3LD/G1LE or G3LD/G1LO)
SYNC GPS Station Bus DC / MAINS 1 DC / MAINS 2

Power Supply 1 G3LH
Relay Interface
Power Supply 2 G3LH
LAN Interface / Web Server
Line Interface (analog, digital or optical) G3LL G3LA or G3LD

(or G3LD/G1LE or G3LD/G1LO)

(or G3LR/G1LR)
RELAY
G7BI
LAN
INPUT
OUTPUT
LINE
INPUT
LINE
BOOST
(analog)
3-System block diagram.vsd
Fig. 3.2
System block diagram
The Module Rack type G7BI consists of: 1 rack with cable tray 1 Bus Plane With Front Cover, type G1LA 1 Supply Backplane, type G1LB 1 Common Interface, type G3LC 1 Blanking Cover Plate The analog NSD570 system consists of: 1 Module Rack, type G7BI 1 Analog Interface, type G3LA 1-4 Relay Interface(s), type G3LR
3-10
April 2004
System Description
RELAY
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The digital NSD570 system consists of: 1 Module Rack, type G7BI 1 Digital Interface, type G3LD 1-4 Relay Interface(s), type G3LR Available options for both NSD570 systems are: 1 Display Panel per Module Rack G7BI, type G1LC 1 LAN Interface per Module Rack G7BI, type G3LL 1 piggyback per Relay Interface G3LR for tripping the two command inputs by an internal d.c. voltage and an external dry contact only, type G1LR Options available for the digital NSD570 system are: 1 piggyback per Digital Interface G3LD with an E1/T1 Interface, type G1LE 1 piggyback per Digital Interface G3LD with an Optical Interface, type G1LO
3.3.2.
Mechanical Design
Supply Backplane G1LB
G3LA, G3LD
G3LA, G3LD
Power Supply G3LH
Power Supply G3LH
300 mm
G3LR
Analog Interface Digital Interface Relay Interface LAN Interface
G3LA G3LD G3LR G3LL
Optional: Display Panel G1LC
Blanking Cover Plate
Bus Plane with front cover G1LA
Top view
3-Rack Top View.vsd
Fig. 3.3
Mechanical design
System Description
April 2004
G3LR, G3LL
G3LR
G3LR
G3LR
G3LR
G3LR
G3LR
3-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
The mechanical design of the NSD570 teleprotection system is as follows: - 19 inch rack, housing one or two NSD570 devices, 4 height units (4U) including 1U for cable tray, blanking plate with labeling strip, connectors, etc. - one bus plane with front cover for one or two NSD570 in the same rack - 2 slots with 8 raster units (8R) for single or redundant power supply - 1 slot with 6R for common interface - 2 x 5 slots for line interface and relay interfaces (accessible from the back side of the rack, after removing of the screening cover) - optional display panel (instead of power supply front cover plate) - optional LAN Interface instead of 4th Relay interface in the second half of the module rack
3.3.3.
External connections
All connections to the equipment, i.e. incoming and outgoing signals, are made by plug-in connectors at the rear of the unit, which are either Sub-D connectors, RJ45 connectors or spring-clamp terminal connectors (2.5 mm2). By using the optionally available connecting cables, the signals can then be routed to isolating terminals (4 mm2), to Sub-D connectors in the case of the data interfaces RS-449/RS-530/X.21 or to RJ45 connectors in case of the data interfaces G.703/E1/T1. The length of the connecting cables is 2.5 meters (refer to Section 6 of this manual for details). The optical transmit and receive components are mounted on the Optical Interface type G1LO. It is a piggyback module that can be plugged on the Digital Interface type G3LD. The fiber optical connectors used are E2000.
Caution
When an analog NSD570 is connected to cables, pilot wires or leased circuits, the equipment must only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers withstanding a 15 kVrms or 20 kVrms test voltage at 50 Hz / 60 Hz for 1 minute, according to national regulations or to electric utilities' practice.
3-12
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.3.4.
Frontplate Signals and Controls
Fig. 3.4
Frontplate signals and controls
Status and alarm LEDs on the front panel: - light up immediately when a condition is detected (Guard / Trip), when an Input / Output / Relay is activated or after an alarm source is detected (light up immediately, i.e. not only after the delay which is configurable for the alarm outputs) - One hardware status LED per line interface, relay interface and LAN interface (green/red signals Ok/Fail) - One status LED for each input/output and relay contact (dark/green) - Two status LEDs for Guard and Trip reception (dark/green) - Four alarm LEDs per system Transmit, Receive, Local, Remote Alarm (dark/red) - One hardware status LED per power supply module (green/red signals Ok/Fail; "dark" indicates that no module is plugged) - One status LED for the LAN interface; indicates when the ethernet link has established (green/dark)
3.3.5.
Service interface (COM 1)

A serial interface is provided on the frontplate for service and diagnostic purposes and as a commissioning aid. By connecting a PC/notebook to this interface, data on equipment settings, firmware in use and operating parameters can be accessed without affecting the normal operation of the NSD570. It is also possible to configure the equipment and download new firmware releases via the interface. For these actions the equipment has to be taken out of service and re-commissioned afterwards.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
A serial 1:1 cable (shielded) with 9 pin Sub-D connectors is necessary for connecting the PC/notebook to the equipment. The cable must have a female (to the PC) and a male (to the NSD570) Sub-D connector. Via the serial RS-232 interface a 57600 bps connection to both NSD570 systems in the same module rack can be obtained. This high transmission rate can only be achieved when the connecting cable is not longer than 3 meter. If longer cables have to be used, the transmission rate has to be reduced (refer to Section 4 of this manual).
3.3.6.
Power supply G3LH

The rack can be equipped with one single power supply unit type G3LH or may have a redundant supply with two units. The input voltage range of the power supply unit covers all the standard battery voltages between 48 VDC and 250 VDC and a mains supply of 115 VAC to 230 VAC. The power supply cable is connected to FASTON terminals located on the side of the unit (refer to Section 6 of this manual). The power supply modules are hot pluggable.
3.3.7.
Examples of rack assemblies

Find below a few examples how a 19" rack NSD570 can be equipped.
Basic Equipment Analog: Minimal rack assembly, comprising of one Module Rack type G7BI, one Analog Interface type G3LA, one Relay Interface type G3LR and a single Power Supply type G3LH; capable of transmitting up to two commands.
G7BI REAR VIEW
(COVER REMOVED)
G3LR
G3LA
G3LC
G3LH
G1LB
PS2
PS1
X102
X103
X105 PE 84 76 70 64 58 52 46 40 34 28 22 09
POWER SUPPLY 2
X104 PE 01
3-Rear View_Analog.vsd
Fig. 3.5
Basic equipment analog
3-14
April 2004
System Description
POWER SUPPLY 1
X101
X100
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Basic Equipment Digital: Minimal rack assembly, comprising of one Module Rack type G7BI, one Digital Interface type G3LD, one Relay Interface type G3LR and a single Power Supply type G3LH; capable of transmitting up to two commands.
G7BI REAR VIEW
(COVER REMOVED)
G3LR
G3LD
G3LC
G3LH
G1LB
PS2 X101
PS1
POWER SUPPLY 2
X201
X102
X103
X105 PE 84 76 70 64 58 52 46 40 34 28 22 09
X104 PE 01
EQUIPMENT 2
EQUIPMENT 1
3-Rear View_Digital.vsd
Fig. 3.6
Basic equipment digital
Two independent NSD570 in the same rack: Rack assembly for transmitting the maximum number of commands with an analog system (4 commands) and a digital system (8 commands) in the same module rack.
G7BI REAR VIEW
(COVER REMOVED)
G3LR
G3LR
G3LR
G3LR
G3LD
G3LR
G3LR
G3LA
G3LC
G3LH
G1LB
PS2 X101
PS1
POWER SUPPLY 2
X201
X102
X103
X105 PE 84 76 70 64 58 52 46 40 34 28 22 09
X104 PE 01
EQUIPMENT 2
EQUIPMENT 1
3-Rear View_Mixed.vsd
Fig. 3.7
Two independent NSD570 in the same rack
System Description
April 2004
POWER SUPPLY 1
X101
X101
X101
X101
X101
X101
X100
POWER SUPPLY 1
X101
3-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Fully equipped rack with redundant power supply units: Rack assembly, providing the maximum number of input (8) and output (16) circuits per device in the module rack; redundant power supply units.
G7BI REAR VIEW
(COVER REMOVED) G1LR G3LR G1LR G3LR G1LR G3LR G1LR G3LR G1LE G3LD G1LR G3LR G1LR G3LR G1LR G3LR G1LR G3LR
G3LA
G3LC
G3LH
G3LH
G1LB
PS2 X101
PS1
POWER SUPPLY 2
X201
X102
X103
X101
X105 PE 52 46 40 34 28 22 09
X104 PE 01
84
76
70
64
58
EQUIPMENT 2
EQUIPMENT 1
3-Rear View_Fully.vsd
Fig. 3.8
Fully equipped rack with redundant power supply units
3-16
April 2004
System Description
POWER SUPPLY 1
X101
X101
X101
X101
X101
X101
X101
X101
X100
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.4. 3.4.1. 3.4.1.1.
Modules descriptions Common Interface G3LC Block diagram G3LC

RX_DATA2 TX_DATA2 SUP1 SUP2 GND 12.3 V Supply 1 12.3 V Supply 2 GND DC/DC 5 V Supply max. 1 A Supply supervision & plug In check +5 V 2-wire communication bus for G1LC 12 V 12 V LCD-Display X101 +12 V
Check1 Check2
4
Supply1_LED ALARM1_LED Supply2_LED ALARM2_LED
SUP_AL_1 SUP_AL_2 LED_0..3
RS-485
RS-485 transceiver & isolated supply
RS-232 X901 SYS_AL_1 SYS_AL_2
COM1
RS-232 transceiver & isolated supply
2-wire communication bus
RX_DATA1 TX_DATA2 Relay 1, X102 Relay 2, X102
extern IRIG-B
IRIG-B
extern GPS_SYNC
2 GPS_SYNC TxD_RTB RTB clock & frame sync
RxD_RTB 8.192 MHz FS_RTB
RTB
LOOP_DIS
RTB
3-Block-diagram-G3LC.vsd
Fig. 3.9
Block diagram G3LC
Signal description legend: SUP1 (normal) These signals are led through the PCI connector X100 to the Supply Backplane G1LB, where the external connector terminals are located. RS-232, X901 (bold) These signals are led to other external interfaces, such as the RS-232 interface through X901 (COM 1), the connection to the Display Panel G1LC through X101 and the additional alarm outputs through X102. SYS_AL_1 (italic) These signals are led to the backplane G1LA through the PCI connector X900 and further on to the line interfaces G3LA/G3LD.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.4.1.2.
Short description G3LC

The Common Interface G3LC comprises all the circuitry that has to be available to the entire system independently of the number of NSD570 that are equipped in the sub-rack. G3LC is an inherent part of the combination of rack, busplane and supply backplane. Both secondary voltage supplies (12.3 V) are taken from the redundant power supply modules and de-coupled with serial diodes. The secondary voltage supplies are separately monitored and their working conditions are displayed with LEDs on the front as well as signalized to the line interface. The 12 V supply voltage is distributed to the busplane to supply other modules (line interfaces, relay interfaces, etc.). On G3LC, it also supplies the DC/DC converter generating 5 V that is led to the busplane too. The auxiliary 5 V supply voltage serves the Common Interface to supply some of its own circuitry and other 5 V circuits in the system, e.g. the G.703 interface on the Digital Interface G3LD. The bus clock and frame synchronization signals of the Real Time Bus (RTB) are generated on G3LC and used by the DSP-Interface on the Line Interfaces. The Common Interface G3LC also contains the transceiver and the isolated power supply of the RS-232 interface (COM 1) that can be used to configure the NSD570. The external connection to this serial communication port is available at the Sub-D, 9 pin female connector X901 on the front panel. The transceiver and the isolated power supply of the RS-485 station bus are also located on G3LC. The station bus interconnects several NSD570 racks in a substation. This allows to access several racks over the COM 1 interface (or the LAN Interface G3LL) of one single rack. Prerequisite for such operation is a different addressing of every single NSD570 connected to the bus. The external connection to the RS-485 bus is located on the Supply Backplane G1LB at the rear side of the rack. Each of the two possible NSD570 devices that can be fitted in one rack has a system alarm. SYS_AL 1 is for the TPE 1 and SYS_AL 2 is for the TPE 2. The Common Interface G3LC offers a heavy duty relay with switchover contacts for each system alarm. The external connector X102 to the alarm relays is located at the rear side of the Common Interface. The external connection of the synchronization inputs (GPSsynchronization, IRIG-B) for the real time clock (located on the line
3-18
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
interfaces) are also located on Supply Backplane G1LB at the rear side of the rack. These signals are led over the X100 PCI connector to the Common Interface where opto-couplers provide electrical isolation. At last, the Common Interface G3LC contains an internal socket X101 to connect the optional Display Panel G1LC to the equipment. A detailed description of all module connectors as well as the optional connecting cables and their pin assignments can be found in Section 6 "Installation and Wiring".
3.4.2. 3.4.2.1.
X100/5
Analog Line Interface G3LA Block diagram G3LA

Out buffer
4W/2W Rx_Gain 8 SDRAM 32
Boost
X100/6
X100/3
x1 u1
Rx-AF
RA
RB
50Hz / 60Hz
Amplifier 4 kHz limiter
RTC
8
Sync_Bus
Tx_Gain
X100/4
Codec
24
Out buffer
LED's Local Alarm Slot-Coding HW Version G3LC HW Version G1LA # of G3LH Alarm on G3LH HW Version G3LA
X100/1
u1
x1
Tx-AF
TA
Digital signal processor
Data bus
24
TB
Output amplifier
Amplifier
Smoothing filter
32
In buffer
X100/2
Tx-Level
u1
x1
Buffer
8
DO DI FS CLK
12 V
12 V 3.3 V
+3.3 V
SPORT1 SPORT0 Flag
Reset WD Reset
uC
RS-232 RS-485
+12 V 12 V 12 V +12 V -12 V

Supply monitoring 33 MHz
Watchdog
-12 V
SerialFLASH
Loop Test RTB
Clk
3-Block-diagram-G3LA.vsd
Fig. 3.10
Block diagram G3LA
3.4.2.2.
Short Description G3LA

The Analog Interface G3LA converts the incoming protection commands of the Relay Interfaces G3LR into signals that are transmitted over an analog communication line. Also, the commands that are received by the analog line interface are passed onto the appropriate relay interfaces. Communication between the G3LA and
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
the G3LR takes place over the Real Time Bus (RT-Bus) which is located on the bus plane. For signal transmission any transparent analog channel with 4 kHz bandwidth, equipped with an appropriate standardized two-wire or four-wire interface with 600 Ohm line impedance can be employed. It is also possible to operate two NSD570s back-to-back via the Analog Interfaces G3LA.
3.4.2.3.
External Interfaces G3LA

The analog line interface includes an electrically isolated interface for transmitting and receiving analog signals on a four-wire or a two-wire connection. The bandwidth of the transmitted and received signal is situated in the range of 300 Hz to 4 kHz. The line termination can be configured to 600 Ohms or high impedance using jumpers. Additionally, the analog line interface includes an electrically isolated boosting output, which can be used for the boosting of the protection signals in connection with a PLC equipment (e.g. ETL500). The external signals are provided on the X100 connector (1 - 6; spring clamp terminals). An external cable can be plugged to the X100 connector, making the signals available over disconnectable terminals. A detailed description of all module connectors as well as the optional connecting cables and their pin assignments can be found in Section 6 "Installation and Wiring".
3.4.2.4.
Processor Environment G3LA

The processor circuits described here are similar to the ones found on the Digital Interface G3LD. The circuits include a signal processor which carries out the necessary signal generation and signal evaluation for all transmit and receive functions. The signal processor can access an external 32 bit wide memory that consists of two 4 Mbit SD-RAM chips. A buffered Real Time Clock (RTC) provides the system timing. It is also possible to synchronize the RTC with an external signal that offers 1 second pulses. Or, alternately, the RTC can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal from a GPS receiver. This signal is provided to the G3LA via the bus plane. The bus plane in turn receives the signal from the Common Interface G3LC. The micro-controller contains the interface to a PC/Notebook that has the User Interface HMI570 installed. The micro-controller controls the RS-232 interface, fetches the requested data from the DSP and passes the data onto the HMI570. The micro-controller is also responsible for the administration of the FLASH EEPROM memory,
3-20
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
which contains the configuration, the firmware and also the data from the event recorder. Configuration and firmware updates can also be downloaded from the PC to the FLASH EEPROM memory. The G3LA comprises two watchdog facilities: The first one is incorporated in the micro-controller. Should the microcontroller seize up its arithmetic operations, a reboot is issued to the micro-controller by its on-board watchdog. Then, a reset signal is transmitted to the signal processor which consequently will also restart. The second external watchdog supervises the signal processor. The watchdog recognizes when the signal processor ceases from operating correctly and issues a reset to the micro controller. As already described above, the micro-controller restarts and initiates a restart of the signal processor.
3.4.2.5.
Transmitter G3LA
In the transmission path there is a D/A converter followed by a smoothing filter, a level adjuster, an output amplifier and a matching transformer, which ensures the electrical isolation. The line termination is set using the TA/TB jumper (TA: 600 Ohm, TB: high-impedance). The transmitter level is configurable in the range from 24 dBm to +11 dBm, where the highest level can only be reached by boosting +9 dB. At the matching transformer, the transmitted signal is also looped back to the DSP over a second A/D converter in the Codec (Coder/Decoder). This allows the level monitoring of the transmitter.
Note: Level measurement is only accurate if the external line impedance matches approx. 600 Ohm.
The transmit signal is available on the external connector X100 (1/2).
3.4.2.6.
Receiver G3LA
In the receiver path a transformer that ensures the electrical isolation of the signal is followed by a 50 Hz highpass filter, a level adjuster, an anti-aliasing filter and an A/D converter with a resolution of 16 bit. The receiver is dimensioned for a nominal range from 30 dBm to +2 dBm. Additionally a dynamic range of 15 dB can be processed. The line termination is set using the RA/RB jumper (RA: 600 Ohm, RB: high-impedance). The receiver signal has to be plugged to the external connector X100 (3/4).
System Description
April 2004
3-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.4.2.7.
Boosting Output G3LA

The Analog Interface G3LA features an additional electrically isolated boosting output which may be used for example to signal a PLC equipment that speech and superimposed data channels shall be switched off, allowing the command signal being transmitted with increased level. This boosting output is always activated when a command is sent, i.e. the contact is closed. The boosting output is designed for a maximal switching-power of 60 VDC at 50 mA (current limited). The boosting contact is available on the external connector X100 (5/6) and is polarity independent.
3.4.3. 3.4.3.1.
Digital Line Interface G3LD Block diagram G3LD

Connector to piggy-back
8 SDRAM Signaling from FPGA 5 32
DO DI FS CLK
In buffer
24
G.703 Codirectional
Rx Data Rx Data +
G.703 Line interface
T+ T-
RTC
8 Signaling to FPGA 5
Sync_Bus
S+ SGLOS
Out buffer
Tx Data Tx Data +
24
24
Out buffer
LED's Local Alarm
Slot-Coding
FPGA
Data bus
24
HW Version G3LC
SD-A
RS-422 / V.11
SD-B
SD RD
32
In buffer
HW Version G1LA # of G3LH Alarm on G3LH HW Version G3LD
RS-422 Line interface
RD-A RD-B TT-A TT-B RT-A RT-B ST-A ST-B
ST RT TT
DO DI FS CLK
Digital signal processor
Buffer
8
SPORT1 SPORT0 Flag
Reset WD Reset
uC
RS-232 RS-485
16.384 MHz
33 MHz
Watchdog
SerialFLASH
RTB Loop Test
3-Block-diagram-G3LD.vsd
Fig. 3.11
Block diagram G3LD
3.4.3.2.
Short Description G3LD

The Digital Interface G3LD converts the incoming protection commands of the Relay Interfaces G3LR into digital data streams that
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
are transmitted over one of two on-board standard digital line interfaces. Also, the commands that are received by the digital line interface are passed on to the appropriate relay interfaces. Communication between the G3LD and the G3LR takes place over the Real Time Bus (RT-Bus) which is located on the bus plane. For data transmission any transparent digital channel and an appropriate standardized interface can be employed. It is also possible to operate two NSD570s back-to-back via the Digital Interfaces G3LD. The G3LD can be fitted with piggyback modules that provide the following options: E1/T1 Interface G1LE (refer to Section 3.4.3.6) Optical Interface G1LO (refer to Section 3.4.3.7)
3.4.3.3.
External Interfaces G3LD

The G3LD comprises two interfaces: The TIA/EIA-422 / V.11 interface can be operated at 64 or 56 kbps. It is equipped with a male Sub-D 25-pin connector. This connector X101 is located at the rear of the G3LD and conforms to TIA/EIA530. The G.703 codirectional interface with a data rate of 64 kbps. The connector X201 that is located at the rear of the G3LD consists of an 8-pin RJ45 receptacle. Only one of the two interfaces can be used at a time.
3.4.3.4.
Processor Environment G3LD

The processor circuits of the G3LD are similar to the ones on the Analog Interface G3LA (Section 3.4.2.4) The circuits include a signal processor which carries out the necessary signal generation and signal evaluation for all transmit and receive functions. The signal processor can access an external 32 bit wide memory that consists of two 4 Mbit SD-RAM chips. A buffered Real Time Clock (RTC) provides the system timing. It is also possible to synchronize the RTC with an external signal that offers 1 second pulses. Or, alternately, the RTC can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal from a GPS receiver. This signal is provided to the G3LD via the bus plane. The bus plane in turn receives the signal from the Common Interface G3LC. The micro-controller contains the interface to a PC/Notebook that has the User Interface HMI570 installed. The micro-controller controls the RS-232 interface, fetches the requested data from the DSP and passes the data onto the HMI570. The micro-controller is also
System Description
April 2004
3-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
responsible for the administration of the FLASH EEPROM, which contains the configuration, the firmware and also the data from the event recorder. Configuration and firmware updates can also be downloaded from the PC to the FLASH EEPROM. The G3LD comprises two watchdog facilities: The first one is incorporated in the micro-controller. Should the microcontroller seize up its arithmetic operations, a reboot is issued to the micro-controller by its on-board watchdog. Then, a reset signal is transmitted to the signal processor which consequently will also restart. The second external watchdog supervises the signal processor. The watchdog recognizes when the signal processor ceases from operating correctly and issues a reset to the micro-controller. As already described above, the micro-controller restarts and initiates a restart of the signal processor.
3.4.3.5.
External Cable and Connector G3LD

The RS-530 and G.703 signals can be accessed at the back of the NSD570. In case these signals have to be connected at the back of a cabinet, special cables can be supplied. The cables are equipped with terminal blocks that can be mounted on DIN rails. The cable for the RS-530 interface can be equipped with isolating terminals or alternately with Sub-D connectors that comply with the standards X.21, RS-449 or again with RS-530. The connector block for the G.703 interface is equipped with insulation displacement connectors that are terminated with a special punchdown tool. A detailed description of all module connectors as well as the optional connecting cables and their pin assignments can be found in Section 6 "Installation and Wiring".
3.4.3.6.
E1/T1 Interface G1LE

The E1/T1 Interface G1LE is an optional sub-module (piggyback) that can be plugged onto the G3LD. It provides an E1 or T1 interface, depending on the configuration. The E1/T1 interface permits the transmission via a digital PDH interface of 2.048 Mbps (PCM30/31 for SDH access) or 1.544 Mbps (PCM24 for SONET access). Framing, signaling and line coding can be programmed according to the prevalent standards. Of the 32/24 transmitted timeslots per frame (125 s), NSD570 data are transmitted only in the first timeslot (TS1) after the frame synchronization pulse. With E1, timeslot 0 (TS0) serves for frame
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
synchronization and signaling; with T1 this information is contained in only one bit that precedes TS1. Additionally, 0xFF is transmitted on TS3 to allow loss of signal detection when AMI line coding is used. When the G1LE is plugged onto the main board, only one of the available interfaces (RS-530, G.703, E1, T1) can be selected and operated at the same time. The E1/T1 interfaces can use the same external connecting cable as the G.703 interface on the G3LD.
3.4.3.7.
Optical Interface G1LO

The Optical Interface G1LO is an optional sub-module (piggyback) that can be plugged onto the G3LD. It complements the interfaces that are located on the main board with an optical 1310 nm or with an optical 850 nm interface, depending the module version. The optical interface permits the transmission of protection signals via fiber optical cables at a data rate of 2.048 Mbps. The G1LO can be programmed to operate with a direct fiber connection and additionally with FOX-6+, FOX-20 and the OTERM interface of the FOX515 with a wavelength of 1310 nm. The 850 nm interface can be utilized with a MUX that conforms to IEEE C37.94. The correct framing, signaling and line coding is automatically set after choosing the interface type out of the HMI570 pull down menu. When the G1LO is plugged onto the main board, only one of the available interfaces (RS-530, G.703, Optical Direct Fiber, Optical FOX/OTERM, Optical IEEE C37.94) can be selected and operated at the same time. The optical interfaces are equipped with modern E2000 type connectors that provide twin connections, one for the Tx and one for the Rx fiber. When multimode fibers at 850 nm are employed, distances of up to 3 km can be achieved. When the 1310 nm wavelength is used, 25 km can be achieved with multimode fibers and 50 km with single mode fibers. With this interface the NSD570 can be utilized in a point to point application.
System Description
April 2004
3-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.4.4. 3.4.4.1.
Relay Interface G3LR Block diagram G3LR

12 V 3.3 V 1B
12 V 3.3 V 5V 2.5 V
PROM
1C 1D 1A 2B 2C
X101 / 2 Tx Input 1
X101 / 1 X101 / 4 Tx Input 2
3.4.4.2.
Connector X100 to front plane bus
GND
2D
3.3 V Supervision
2A X101 / 3
Hardware release coding

3
FPGA (Xilinx Spartan II)
X101 / 6
Rx Output 1
X101 / 5
Slot coding
4
X101 / 8
Rx Output 2
SPORT0
4
X101 / 7 12 V
Loop disable
X101 / 9 Relay 1
LED
8 12 V
X101 / 11 X101 / 10 X101 / 12 X101 / 14 X101 / 13
Relay 2
3-Block-diagram-G3LR.vsd
Fig. 3.12
Block diagram G3LR
Short Description G3LR

The Relay Interface G3LR serves as the binary input/output logic interface for the NSD570. It provides the link between the line interface (G3LA or G3LD) and the external protection and logic circuits. Communication with the line interface takes place through the serial Real Time Bus (RT-Bus) on the busplane G1LA. The Relay Interface G3LR comprises two inputs with opto-couplers, two solid-state outputs and two relay outputs. Each one of these input and output circuits is electrically isolated from each other as well as from the internal circuitry and from ground. The command associations (inputs and outputs) can be programmed by means of the Web-Browser based user interface program (HMI570). The G3LR is plugged into the G1LA busplane from the rear of the rack G7BI assembly. At the front of the G3LR module, the internal signals are connected to the busplane via a PCI connector. The external signals are accessible by the customer via a Phoenix connector block with spring-clamp terminals (see 3.4.4.7). A pre-terminated cable with fixed length and terminal block with isolation knives is available as an option with the G3LR module. The terminal block assembly can be mounted on a DIN rail at the back or sides of the cabinet. All LED indicators are mounted on the front panel and are driven by the G3LR module via the PCI connector. Green LEDs are provided for each input, output and relay contact (an OK/Fail LED will indicate
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Green for OK condition or Red for a Failed condition; alarms for the various input/output circuits are signaled by the Red indication; for details refer to Section 9 "Troubleshooting"). All input and output circuits are equipped with over-voltage and reverse polarity protection.
3.4.4.3.
Inputs G3LR
The G3LR has two isolated command input circuits. The input circuits can be programmed by jumpers to one of three voltage ranges for the nominal station battery voltage. Each programming group covers the lower and upper nominal battery voltage as follows:
24 VDC 60 VDC 125 VDC and and and 48 VDC 110 VDC 250 VDC
The switching threshold is approximately 60% of the lower voltage of the programmed group. Each input can be programmed freely to any one of the commands. For example, Input 1 can be programmed to Command A and Input 2 to Command C. The command signals are sent to the signal processor on the line interface via the FPGA and the RT-Bus. Mal-operations of the G3LR module (e.g. failure of an opto-coupler) are recognized and will prevent the transmission of an unwanted command. The G3LR signals its status with the dual color OK/Fail LED (green = all hardware circuits okay / red = hardware alarm on the module). An optional piggyback module type G1LR "Input Tripping Voltage NSD570" can be supplied. This auxiliary power supply provides wetting voltage (internal 24 VDC). When the piggyback module is installed, the command inputs can be keyed by a dry contact. A single G1LR module is required for the two inputs of a G3LR module. Please refer to Section 3.4.4.6.
3.4.4.4.
Solid State Outputs G3LR

The G3LR has two isolated solid-state outputs. The output command is received via the RT-Bus. This signal is checked in the FPGA and when it is deemed valid, the semiconductor in the output loop is switched on.
System Description
April 2004
3-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
In order to protect the semiconductor output from excessive currents (excessively low impedance burden or capacitive discharge from the connecting cable), the output circuits are equipped with current limiting and current shutdown electronics. The activation threshold is about 2.6 A. After the current limiting circuit has been in operation for more than 5 ms, the output is blocked for approximately 1 s. Then, the output is again turned on and the process is repeated until the fault condition is cleared. When the current cut-off mechanism is triggered, an alarm signal is generated. Each output can freely be assigned to any one of the commands or other functions (by means of the HMI570 User Interface Program). For instance, it is possible to assign Output 1 to command A and Output 2 to Unblocking or Output 1 to Command B and Output 2 to a predefined alarm.
3.4.4.5.
Relay Contacts G3LR

In addition to the two solid-state outputs, the G3LR has two electromechanical outputs. The relays receive the switching signals from the RT-Bus. The NO (normally open), NC (normally closed) and C (common) contacts are wired to the external terminal blocks. The function of the relays can be assigned by means of the HMI570 User Interface Program. For instance, it is possible to assign Relay 1 to Command B and Relay 2 to a predefined alarm.
3.4.4.6.
Input Tripping Voltage G1LR

The Input Tripping Voltage G1LR is an optional sub-module (piggyback) that can be plugged onto the G3LR. It generates 24 VDC, automatically selects the lowest wetting voltage range and injects the voltage to the required locations. This enables the keying of the command inputs with an external dry contact but without the use of an external voltage. With the G1LR, both inputs must be keyed with a dedicated dry contact only. Any number of G3LR can be equipped with the G1LR and the G3LR that arent equipped with the G1LR can be operated with a contact and the station battery voltage as required by the design of the control circuits.
3.4.4.7.
External Cable and Connector G3LR

Each G3LR module is furnished with a 14-pin spring clamp terminal block for external connections. The user can choose to either connect directly to this terminals at the back of the rack or, alternatively, to make connections elsewhere via the optional pre-terminated external cable to isolating terminal blocks. The external cable for the G3LR
3-28
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
consist of a 14 pin knife-disconnect terminal block plus a ground terminal, a 15 core cable with wires of 0.75 mm2 cross sectional area. The Phoenix connectors fulfill the necessary requirements for high voltages (air and creeping distances according to IEC 60950) that can be applied to the terminals (250 VDC 20%). The isolating terminals are required so that the user can disconnect the NSD570 from the relays during maintenance work on the NSD570. Transmitting of unwanted commands can therefore be prevented and maintenance personnel can be protected from dangerous voltages (with command voltages > 60 VDC). The terminals accept stranded wires with a cross sectional area of up to 2.5 mm2 or solid wire with a cross sectional area of up to of 4 mm2. A detailed description of all module connectors as well as the optional connecting cables and their pin assignments can be found in Section 6 "Installation and Wiring".
3.4.5. 3.4.5.1.
Display Panel G1LC Short Description G1LC

The optional display Panel G1LC provides various information such as trip counter reading or alarm messages from the NSD570 Teleprotection Equipment - without having the need of a PC/notebook. The Display Panel is assembled to the Module Rack G7BI, replacing the blanking cover plate, which is mounted in front of the power supply units. An enclosed ribbon cable connects the Display Panel G1LC to the adjacent Common Interface G3LC, providing the 12 V supply voltage and a 2-wire data link to the line interface of the NSD570 teleprotection devices equipped in the Module Rack. The readout device is a dot matrix LCD display with two lines, 16 characters each, and a yellow/green background LED. The lightness of the background LED, the contrast of the LCD and the standby time of the display are adjustable. Four buttons, which enable the menu-driven handling, are accessible on the front of the Display Panel.
System Description
April 2004
3-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.4.5.2.
How to use the Display Panel G1LC

The following four buttons are used to navigate through the menu structure of the Display Panel G1LC:
Up Back Down Enter
Fig. 3.13
Display Panel G1LC
3.4.5.2.1.
Display Panel activation and standby

Press any button to activate the Display Panel. The background LED of the LCD-module will light up (if not configured to OFF in the display settings menu) and the top level menu SELECT DEVICE will appear. If there is no activity on the Display Panel (no button pressed or no ongoing task), it will be deactivated automatically after the preset standby time has elapsed.
3.4.5.2.2.
Buttons on G1LC
Use the Back button to leave a selected menu item and return to the upper menu level, to leave a display settings menu without saving the modifications, to interrupt an ongoing task or to select no from a yes/no query. Use the Enter button to select a menu item, to save modified display settings, to execute a task or to select yes from a yes/no query. Use the Up button to scroll through a menu level, to scroll through listed information (e.g. trip counters, alarm messages) or to increase the contrast and lighting settings of the LCD-module (in the corresponding menu). Use the Down button to scroll through a menu level, to scroll through listed information or to decrease the contrast and lighting settings of the LCD-module.
3-30
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.4.5.2.3.
Menu navigation hints

A flashing b sign will appear to indicate that the Up or Down button may be used to scroll in this menu level. Note that the flashing b sign will only appear while scrolling up or down in the different menu levels, it will not appear while scrolling through listed information (because all 16 characters are necessary for displaying the required data). Some of the device information (like alarm messages or configuration data) do exceed the available 16 characters of one display line. In this case, the text is shifted left automatically. To speed up this procedure press the Enter button and this will provide a word shift instead of character shift. Additionally, a sign will appear to indicate that the following words of the text can be obtained by continuing to press the Enter button. The text will start over after it was completely displayed. If no characters are visible at all or if the display is totally dark, the contrast setting of the LCD-module may be incorrect. Pressing the Back and the Enter button simultaneously as well as the Up or Down button will allow to change the contrast setting directly (independent of the actual menu level). Note that the Back button has to be released first in order to store the new contrast setting.
3.4.5.2.4.
Reset
A Display Panel reset will occur if the Back button is permanently pressed for more than 6 seconds.
3.4.5.2.5.
Display Panel settings

For the Display Panel itself, the following display settings may be modified: 1. Increase/decrease the contrast setting of the LCD-module (16 steps); default: 10 2. Increase/decrease the backlight setting of the LCD-Module (4 steps and OFF); default: 3 3. Change the standby time of the Display Panel (1 60 minutes); default: 10 minutes If a display setting was accidentally modified, press the Back button to restore the previous setting. To save the modified display settings in a non-volatile memory, press the Enter button after selecting the new value.
System Description
April 2004
3-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.4.5.3. 3.4.5.3.1.
Menu Structure Display Panel G1LC Top level menu

SELECT DEVICE | |---TPE 1 | |---MAIN MENU | |---TPE 2 | |---MAIN MENU | |---TPE 1 Remote | |---MAIN MENU | |---TPE 2 Remote | |---MAIN MENU | |---Display | |---CONTRAST | |---Lighting | |---Standby time | |---FW/HW Version Visible after pressing any button (Back, Enter, Up or Down)
3.4.5.3.2.
Menu tree if connected to a local device

MAIN MENU | |---TRIP COUNTER | |---CMD A TX/RX | |---CMD B TX/RX | |---CMD C TX/RX | |---CMD D TX/RX | |---CMD E TX/RX Digital Line Interface only | |---CMD F TX/RX Digital Line Interface only | |---CMD G TX/RX Digital Line Interface only | |---CMD H TX/RX Digital Line Interface only | |---LOOP TX/RX | |---UNBLOCKING | |---ALARMS Alarm messages according device state | |---STATUS | |---INTERFACE TYPE | |---LOOP TEST STATE | |---LOOP TEST TIME | |---RX LEVEL Analog Line Interface only | |---TX LEVEL Analog Line Interface only | |---SNR Analog Line Interface only | |---BER 16 s AVERAGE Digital Line Interface only | |---BER 262 min AVG. Digital Line Interface only | |---FIRMWARE | |---DSP | |---CONTROLLER | |---CONFIGURATION | |---CONFIGURATION | |---Device Info | | |---LINE IF TYPE | | |---LINE IF POSITION | | |---SERIAL NUMBER | | |---FW DOWNLOAD COUNTER | | |---CONFIG DOWNLOAD COUNTER | |
3-32
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
|---HW Version | |---COMMON IF G3LC | |---LINE IF G3LA | |---LINE IF G3LD | |---PIGGYBACK @ G3LD | |---REL. IF G3LR N34 | |---REL. IF G3LR N40 | |---REL. IF G3LR N46 | |---REL. IF G3LR N52 | |---REL. IF G3LR N64 | |---REL. IF G3LR N70 | |---REL. IF G3LR N76 | |---REL. IF G3LR N84 | |---BUSPLANE G1LA | |---Device ID | |---STATION NAME | |---HE NUMBER | |---DEVICE ADDRESS | |---Common Settings | |---DEVICE MODE | |---CMD OUT LNK FAIL | |---EOC | |---CYCL. LOOP TEST | |---Analog Settings | |---LINE TYPE | |---RX BANDWIDTH | |---RX CENTER FREQ. | |---TX BANDWIDTH | |---TX CENTER FREQ. | |---OPERATING MODE | |---POWER BOOST | |---UNBL. THRESHOLD | |---TX LEVEL | |---RX LEVEL | |---TX ALARM THRES. | |---RX ALARM THRES. | |---Digital Settings | |---INTERFACE TYPE | |---BER ALARM THRES. | |---ADDRESS CHECK | |---LOCAL ADDRESS | |---REMOTE ADDRESS | |---RS530 DATA RATE | |---RS530 RX CLOCK | |---RS530 TX CLOCK | |---RX CLOCK SYNC | |---TX CLOCK SYNC TT | |---TERMINAL TIMING | |---TX CLOCK SYNC | |---LONG HAUL | | | | | |---RX BUFFER | | | |---TX BUFFER | | | |---E1 CODING | |---E1 FRAME FORMAT | |---T1 CODING | |---T1 FRAME FORMAT | |---Command Settings | |---COMMAND A | |---COMMAND B | |---COMMAND C | |---COMMAND D | |---COMMAND E | |---COMMAND F | |---COMMAND G | |---COMMAND H |
Analog Line Interface only Digital Line Interface only Digital Line Interface only If connected to TPE 1 the HW Information of all 8 Relay Interfaces are visible If If If If connected connected connected connected to to to to TPE TPE TPE TPE 2 2 2 2
Analog Line Interface only
Digital Line Interface only
RS530 Interface Type only RS530 Interface Type only RS530 Interface Type only RS530 Interface Type only RS530 Interface Type only RS530 Interface Type only G.703 64kbps codir. Interface Type E1 2048kbps, T1 1544kbps, Optical Direct Fiber and Optical FOX/OTERM Interface Type E1 2048kbps and T1 1544kbps Interface Type E1 2048kbps and T1 1544kbps Interface Type E1 2048kbps Interface Type only E1 2048kbps Interface Type only T1 1544kbps Interface Type only T1 1544kbps Interface Type only
Digital Digital Digital Digital
Line Line Line Line
Interface Interface Interface Interface
only only only only
System Description
April 2004
3-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd

| |---Relay Interfaces | | |---TPE1 INTERFACE 1 | | | |---INPUT 1 | | | |---INPUT 2 | | | |---OUTPUT 1 | | | |---OUTPUT 2 | | | |---RELAY OUTPUT | | | |---RELAY OUTPUT | | |---TPE1 INTERFACE 2 | | | |---INPUT 1 | | | |---INPUT 2 | | | |---OUTPUT 1 | | | |---OUTPUT 2 | | | |---RELAY OUTPUT | | | |---RELAY OUTPUT | | |---TPE1 INTERFACE 3 | | | |---INPUT 1 | | | |---INPUT 2 | | | |---OUTPUT 1 | | | |---OUTPUT 2 | | | |---RELAY OUTPUT | | | |---RELAY OUTPUT | | |---TPE1 INTERFACE 4 | | | |---INPUT 1 | | | |---INPUT 2 | | | |---OUTPUT 1 | | | |---OUTPUT 2 | | | |---RELAY OUTPUT | | | |---RELAY OUTPUT | |---MAINTENANCE | |---Get Time & Date | | |---TIME | | |---DATE | |---Reset TPE x | |---RESET TPE x ? | |---DEVICE ADDRESS
1KHW000890-EN
If connected to TPE 2 (N34) TPE2 INTERFACE 1 (N64) If Relay Interface 1 = If Relay Interface 1 = If Relay Interface 1 = If Relay Interface 1 = 1 If Relay Interface 1 = 2 If Relay Interface 1 = (N40) TPE2 INTERFACE 2 (N70) If Relay Interface 2 = If Relay Interface 2 = If Relay Interface 2 = If Relay Interface 2 = 1 If Relay Interface 2 = 2 If Relay Interface 2 = (N46) TPE2 INTERFACE 3 (N76) If Relay Interface 3 = If Relay Interface 3 = If Relay Interface 3 = If Relay Interface 3 = 1 If Relay Interface 3 = 2 If Relay Interface 3 = (N52) TPE2 INTERFACE 4 (N84) If Relay Interface 4 = If Relay Interface 4 = If Relay Interface 4 = If Relay Interface 4 = 1 If Relay Interface 4 = 2 If Relay Interface 4 =
NSD570
0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n 0n
x = 1 or 2 x = 1 or 2
3.4.5.3.3.
Menu tree if connected to a remote device

MAIN MENU | |---TRIP COUNTER | |---CMD A TX/RX | |---CMD B TX/RX | |---CMD C TX/RX | |---CMD D TX/RX | |---CMD E TX/RX | |---CMD F TX/RX | |---CMD G TX/RX | |---CMD H TX/RX | |---LOOP TX/RX | |---UNBLOCKING | |---ALARMS | |---STATUS | |---INTERFACE TYPE | |---LOOP TEST STATE | |---LOOP TEST TIME | |---RX LEVEL | |---TX LEVEL | |---SNR | |---BER 16 s AVERAGE | |---BER 262 min AVG. | |---FIRMWARE | |---DSP | |---CONTROLLER | |---CONFIGURATION
Line Line Line Line
only only only only
Alarm messages according device state
Analog Line Interface only Analog Line Interface only Analog Line Interface only Digital Line Interface only Digital Line Interface only
3-34
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.4.5.4. 3.4.5.4.1.
Additional Features of Display Panel G1LC Requirements

The additional features of the Display Panel G1LC are only available if the micro controller firmware version of the line interfaces G3LA or G3LD is greater or equal to Vers. 1.04 and if the firmware version of the Display Panel G1LC is greater or equal to Vers. 1.01. For details refer to the document "Compatibility requirements NSD570" (1KHW000902-EN) in the annex of this Operating Instructions.
3.4.5.4.2.
Display device communication baud rate

If the item Device Address in the main menu is selected, the configured baud rate for the RS-232 communication of the connected line interface is displayed as well. This may be helpful for quickly finding out to what baud rate the HMI570 must be configured.
3.4.5.4.3.
Reset counters via display panel

If the conditions described in the Section 3.4.5.4.1 are met, it is possible to reset the counters of the local line interfaces via the display panel. The user can select clear all counters, clear command counters, clear loop test counters or clear unblocking counter. The event recorder of the line interface will consequentially record an event Trip counter reset. It is not possible to reset a single command counter only (e.g. Tx Counter Command A) via the display panel. Extended trip counter menu:
MAIN MENU | |---TRIP COUNTER | |---CMD A TX/RX | |---CMD B TX/RX | |---CMD C TX/RX | |---CMD D TX/RX | |---CMD E TX/RX | |---CMD F TX/RX | |---CMD G TX/RX | |---CMD H TX/RX | |---LOOP TX/RX | |---UNBLOCKING | |---CLEAR COUNTER? | | |---CLEAR ALL CTR. | | |---CLEAR CMD CTR. | | |---CLEAR LOOP CTR. | | |---CLEAR UNBL. CTR.
Line Line Line Line
only only only only
3.4.5.4.4.
Disabling reset counters via display panel

If it shall not be allowed to reset the trip counters via the display panel, this feature can be disabled, if required.
System Description
April 2004
3-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Two PCB pads have to be interconnected by a solder bridge for that purpose (see Fig. 3.14).
SY300
Reset of the trip counters via the display panel is enabled (default)
SY300
Reset of the trip counters via the display panel is disabled
Fig. 3.14
Disabling reset counters
3.4.5.4.5.
Automatic display of Tx or Rx commands

If a line interface G3LA or G3LD has sent or received a command, the Display Panel G1LC will automatically switch on and display the following messages (examples for commands on TPE 1): TX COMMAND SENT! ON TPE 1 RX CMD RECEIVED! ON TPE 1 Usually, if there is no activity on the display panel (no button pressed or no ongoing task), the display will be deactivated automatically after the preset standby time has elapsed. In case of an automatically displayed sent or received command, the display will not be deactivated after the preset standby time the last command state will be displayed until there is any manual activity. In large substations this feature permits a quick indication of a NSD570 link that has transferred protection commands.
3-36
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.4.6. 3.4.6.1.
LAN Interface G3LL Short Description G3LL

The NSD570 LAN Interface (G3LL) is an Ethernet 10/100BaseT interface. It can be used to connect one or more NSD570 systems to TCP/IP-networks for configuration, monitoring and maintenance. The user interface HMI570 LAN is embedded on the NSD570 LAN Interface. This allows to use the HMI570 LAN from every computer that is connected to the LAN/Intranet. There is no local installation of an application necessary. A common web browser only (e.g. Internet Explorer, Mozilla, Netscape) is needed on the PC/notebook for using the HMI570 LAN on G3LL.
Substation A
NSD570 Rack
G3LA or G3LD
1 .. 4 G3LR
G3LA or G3LD
1 .. 4 G3LR
Station bus NSD570 Rack
Ethernet 10/100BaseT HMI570 LAN LAN Interface G3LL
Internet / Intranet
G3LA or G3LD
1 .. 4 G3LR
G3LA or G3LD
1 .. 3 G3LR
Webbrowser
3-LANIFSubstation
Fig. 3.15
Connection to the NSD570 devices via G3LL
System Description
April 2004
3-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.4.6.2.
Block diagram G3LL
NSD570 Bus Plane Isolation bus driver Ok/Fail LAN Link LAN
5V_L PC/104 External connections at rear of equipment LAN (RJ45) X201 5V_485 10/100 BaseT COM1
DC/DC PC/104
12V
DC/DC RS485
12V
HW_COMI
Stationbus (RS485) X500
Isolation RS485 driver
Switch Logic
Isolation bus driver
3 BlockDiagramG3LL
Fig. 3.16
Block diagram G3LL
3-38
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5. 3.5.1.
Functional description General Operating Principle

In the guard state, i.e. when there is no command actuated at the inputs, the NSD570 transmits a guard signal. The guard signal is continuously processed by the receiver in the opposite station, which gives alarm should the signal quality become inadequate. In the command state, the NSD570 interrupts the guard signal to transmit the command signal within the chosen communication channel (analog, digital or optical). If the continuous command supervision is enabled and the duration of a command transmission exceeds a predefined value, an alarm will be given at the transmit end and the guard is switched on again. As soon as the receiver recognizes the missing guard signal and simultaneously detects a valid command signal of adequate quality, the command is relayed to the designated output. Simultaneous reception or simultaneous loss of a command signal and the guard signal leads to an alarm. In the latter case, the output(s) programmed for unblocking function are activated. An unblocking (deblocking) function is standard on all units, which closes a contact for 200 ms (default setting; configurable) in the event of loss of signal. Deblocking is sometimes used in the case of permissive overreaching schemes. All interfaces are potential free and DC isolated. A command is usually transmitted by applying a DC voltage (contact + battery). At the receiving end, each command may be mapped to a main (solid state) and an auxiliary (relay) contact on the relay interfaces. Outputs may also be used to signal various alarm sources or to acknowledge a Tx or Rx command signal.
3.5.2.
Signal processing
Signals are processed completely digitally by a signal-processor on the line interface, i.e. signal generation at the transmitting end and filtering and evaluation of the guard and tripping signals at the receiving end. The only A/D and D/A converters are at the AF inputs/outputs of the Analog Interface G3LA. The data interfaces on the Digital Interface G3LD convert the input commands into a line signal conforming to the interface in use. The digital techniques employed obviate any need for calibration.
System Description
April 2004
3-39
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Digital processing eliminates calibrating, as well as the influences of ageing and temperature fluctuations. Adaptive algorithms especially developed for this type of teleprotection equipment adjust themselves continuously to the prevailing channel conditions and achieve even under worst-case conditions the high degree of security against loss of genuine, respectively acceptance of false tripping commands, which is essential for protection signals even if the communications channel is disturbed.
3.5.3.
Analog Operating Principle

The NSD570 Analog operates according to the frequency shift principle. Guard and command signals are transmitted within the selected frequency band. The guard signal is always represented by a single tone. Command signals can either be a single-tone or a dual-tone signal, depending on the operating mode. Command signals can be transmitted at a higher power than the guard signal (power boosting). An NSD570 equipped for several commands transmits each signal or signal combination with the same (full) power so that the maximum possible signal-to-noise ratio is achieved at the receiver. Alarm is given at the receiver if the signal-to-noise ratio is too low or if the signal level is out of a pre-defined level range. Up to eight pre-set frequencies corresponding to the various commands or command combinations are provided in the chosen frequency band.
3.5.3.1.
Single-tone principle
A single tone command is represented by a single frequency for obtaining the best practical signal-to-noise ratio and short command transmission time. In the command state, with no power boosting being programmed, a discrete frequency of the same amplitude as the guard signal is transmitted.
Amplitude
Available Bandwidth
Frequency Guard Signal Trip Signal
Trip Test Group signal signal signal
Frequency
Time
3-Analog-operating-principle.vsd
Fig. 3.17
Single-tone principle
3-40
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.5.3.2.
Dual-tone principle
When dual tone command transmission is used, the tripping signal is represented by two discrete frequencies to give added security against speech and interference, e.g. an audio frequency generator. In the command state two discrete frequencies (tones) are transmitted simultaneously. With no power boosting being programmed, the multiplex signal has the same amplitude (peak envelope power) as the guard signal; but since each tone is transmitted at a 6 dB lower level, the power level of the command signal is 3 dB lower than the power level of the guard signal.
Amplitude
Available Bandwidth
Frequency Guard Signal Trip Signal
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Frequency
Time
3-Analog-operating-principle.vsd
Fig. 3.18
Dual-tone principle
3.5.3.3.
Programming of the analog system

A special user interface program, the HMI570 is provided for setting the unit, i.e. choice of channel frequency, bandwidth, commands and their application (blocking, permissive or direct tripping), the alarm threshold and the response of the unit in case of a link alarm. Being able to program the unit eliminates tuned frequency dependent components, which simplifies the stocking of spare parts and makes the units more readily interchangeable. The ability to program the unit enables the best use to be made of the available bandwidth and the operation to be adapted to the different requirements of the various protection schemes. For example, the bandwidth can be set by means of the HMI570 in accordance with the specified transmission time. NSD570s equipped for one command only permit the fastest transmission time to be obtained in the selected bandwidth. If more than one command is to be transmitted in the same bandwidth, a slightly higher transmission time has to be accepted. The frequency band is used in the same way as for a narrow band data channel with signaling speeds between 50 and 1200 Bd. The channel center frequencies (center of the band) can be selected in steps of 60 Hz.
System Description
April 2004
3-41
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
The levels of security and dependability are given after the application for the specific command is chosen. The basic version of the NSD570 Analog is designed to transmit two independent commands. By inserting an additional Relay Interface G3LR, it can be expanded to handle up to four independent commands. An NSD570 with two commands is ideal, for example, for protecting a dual-circuit line. The AF interfaces on the Analog Interface G3LA can be programmed for a rated impedance of 600 Ohms or for high-impedance termination, which enables units to be connected in parallel for frequency multiplexed operation. The following diagram shows a few typical examples of how channels can be allocated when using the analog NSD570, where the numbers in the shaded boxes denote the respective center frequencies:
1) SPEECH 2000 Hz 2760 1200
2)
960 960
1920 960
2880 960
3)
1500 2400
3480 960 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.4 3.96 kHz
0.3
0.5
1.0
1.5
3-Example_channel_allocation.vsd
Fig. 3.19
Channel allocation with analog NSD570
Example 1) shows a PLC application. An NSD570 channel 1200 Hz wide with a center frequency of 2760 Hz is superimposed on a PLC speech channel with a bandwidth limited to 2000 Hz. Example 2) shows how three NSD570, each set to a bandwidth of 960 Hz, can be accommodated in one AF channel limited to 3400 Hz. Example 3) shows two NSD570 in an AF speech channel if the whole frequency range of 300 Hz put to 3960 Hz may be used. One NSD570 with a bandwidth of 2400 Hz ensures extremely short transmission times, whereas the other with a bandwidth of 960 Hz, for example, can be used for direct transfer tripping.
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
In all three cases, each of the NSD570, i.e. each of the frequency bands shown, can handle one or up to four commands. Example 2 could therefore amount to a total of 12 independent commands. The corresponding transmission times are found in the Technical Data in the annex of this manual.
3.5.4.
Analog Operating Modes

The NSD570 can be programmed for the following operating modes.
3.5.4.1.
1 single tone command A

Single tone test and guard signal 1 single tone command "A" (for blocking application only!) Programmable for bandwidth: 120, 240, 360, 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz
Amplitude Available Bandwidth
F1
F2
F3
Frequency
Fig. 3.20
1 single tone command A
Command assignment to frequencies:

Injected Guard A Test F1 X X F2 F3 X Transmitted Guard A Test
Calculation of frequencies:
Bandwidth 120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 2800 Hz FShift 33.90 Hz 65.57 Hz 95.24 Hz 125.00 Hz 235.29 Hz 285.71 Hz 500.00 Hz 666.67 Hz Calculation Fc = Rx or Tx center frequency configured by HMI570 F1 = Fc FShift F2 = Fc F3 = Fc + FShift
System Description
April 2004
3-43
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.5.4.2.
2 independent single tone commands A, B

Single tone test and guard signal 2 independent single tone commands "A", "B" Programmable for bandwidth: 240, 360, 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Frequency
Fig. 3.21
2 independent single tone commands A, B

Injected Guard A B A&B Test F1 X X X X F2 F3 F4 F5 X Transmitted Guard A B A&B Test
Bandwidth 120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 2800 Hz FShift n.a. 36.36 Hz 52.63 Hz 71.42 Hz 142.86 Hz 181.82 Hz 285.71 Hz 400.00 Hz Calculation
Fc = Rx or Tx center frequency
configured by HMI570 F1 = Fc 2*FShift F2 = Fc FShift F3 = Fc F4 = Fc + FShift F5 = Fc + 2*FShift
3.5.4.3.
2 independent dual tone commands A, B

Dual tone test, single tone guard signal 2 independent dual tone commands "A", "B" Programmable for bandwidth: 240, 360, 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz
3-44
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
Available Bandwidth
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Amplitude
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Frequency
Fig. 3.22
2 independent dual tone commands A, B

Injected Guard A B A&B Test F1 X X F2 X X F3 F4 F5 X Transmitted Guard A B A&B Test
X X X
Bandwidth 120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 2800 Hz FShift n.a. 31.25 Hz 46.51 Hz 62.50 Hz 111.11 Hz 133.33 Hz 250.00 Hz 285.71 Hz Calculation Fc = Rx or Tx center frequency configured by HMI570 F1 = Fc 2*FShift F2 = Fc FShift F3 = Fc F4 = Fc + FShift F5 = Fc + 2*FShift
3.5.4.4.
3 independent dual tone commands A, B, C

Dual tone test, single tone guard signal 3 independent dual tone commands "A", "B", "C" Programmable for bandwidth: 360, 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz
Available Bandwidth
Amplitude
F1 F2
F3 F4 F5 F6
Frequency
Fig. 3.23
3 independent dual tone commands A, B, C

April 2004 3-45
System Description
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570

Injected Guard A B C A&B B&C A&C A&B&C Test F1 X X X X F2 X X X F3 X X X F4 F5 F6 X Transm itted G uard A B C A&B B&C A&C A&B&C Test
X X X
X X X
Bandwidth 120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 2800 Hz FShift
B B
Calculation n.a. n.a. 44.44 Hz 58.82 Hz Fc = Rx or Tx center frequency configured by HMI570 F1 = Fc 2.5*FShift
B
F2 = Fc 1.5*FShift
B
105.26 Hz 125.00 Hz 250.00 Hz 285.71 Hz
F3 = Fc 0.5*FShift
B
F4 = Fc + 0.5*FShift
B
B
B B
3.5.4.5.
4 independent dual tone commands A, B, C, D

Dual tone test, single tone guard signal 4 independent dual tone commands "A", "B", "C", "D" Programmable for bandwidth: 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 Frequency
Fig. 3.24
4 independent dual tone commands A, B, C, D
3-46
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Injected Guard A B C D A&B B&C C&D A&C B&D A&D A&B&C A&B&D A&C&D B&C&D A&B&C&D Test F1 X F2 X X F3 X X X X F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 X Transmitted Guard A B C D A&B B&C C&D A&C B&D A&D A&B&C A&B&D A&C&D B&C&D A&B&C&D Test
X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X
X X X
X X
X X X
Bandwidth 120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 2800 Hz FShift
B B
Calculation n.a. n.a. n.a. 42.55 Hz 83.33 Hz Fc = Rx or Tx center frequency configured by HMI570 F1 = Fc 3.5*FShift
B B
B
F2 = Fc 2.5*FShift
B B
B
F3 = Fc 1.5*FShift
B B
B
111.11 Hz 222.22 Hz 250.00 Hz
F4 = Fc 0.5*FShift
B B
B
System Description
April 2004
3-47
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.5.5.
Digital Operating Principle

The NSD570 Digital uses a cyclic block code to transmit guard, test and command messages in the digital communication channel. During normal operation the NSD570 transmits a guard message. This signal is generated by the digital signal processor (DSP) on the Digital Interface G3LD and passed on to the configured data interface which converts it to the corresponding line signal before sending it to the multiplexer. At the receiver, the line signal coming from the multiplexer is entered via the data interface into the signal processor and is continuously evaluated. Alarm is given should the bit error rate exceed a pre-set level. Upon being instructed to send one or more commands, the NSD570 interrupts the guard message and transmits the command message. Command messages recognized by the receiver as being genuine appear as command(s) at the appropriate output(s) after a code evaluation time which is depending on the application setting of the individual commands.
3.5.5.1.
Digital code structure

The block code used for guard, test and command messages is BCH (31,21,5) - the well-known and proven Bose-ChaudhuriHocquenghem code. The hamming distance of the code is 5, i.e. at least 5 bits are different between the individual guard/test/command code words). 21 bits are utilized for guard, commands, test, EOC and digital address (5 bit in each frame, 10 bit address combined after two frames). The remaining 10 bits are used for detection and correction of bit errors.
3.5.5.2.
Digital frame structure

The 31 bits of the BCH (31,21,5) code are extended with 17 synchronization bits which leads to a frame length of 6 x 8 bit = 48 bit in 64 kbps mode of the G.703 and RS-530 interface. For the 56 kbps mode of the RS-530 interface the code is extended with 18 synchronization bits which leads to a frame length of 7 x 7 bit = 49 bit. At least 2 frames and up to 6 frames are evaluated. A dynamic adaptive frame evaluation - depending on prevailing channel condition - is implemented in the receiver of the digital NSD570.
3-48
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The following number of consecutive frames are evaluated for a specific command (all of them having no bit errors or max. 1 bit error respectively): - blocking - permissive tripping - direct tripping 2 or 3 frames 3 or 5 frames 4 or 6 frames
3.5.5.3.
Programming of the digital system

A special user interface program, the HMI570 is provided for setting the unit, i.e. choice of the data interface in use, commands and their application (blocking, permissive or direct tripping), the alarm threshold and the response of the unit in case of a link alarm. Being able to program the unit eliminates tuned frequency dependent components, which simplifies the stocking of spare parts and makes the units more readily interchangeable. The ability to program the unit enables the best use to be made of the existing data interface of the multiplexer and the operation to be adapted to the different requirements of the various protection schemes. The levels of security and dependability are given after the application for the specific command is chosen. The basic version of the NSD570 Digital is designed to transmit two commands. By inserting up to three additional Relay Interfaces G3LR, it can be expanded to handle up to eight commands. An NSD570 with six commands is ideal, for example, for phase segregated protection of a dual-circuit line.
3.5.6.
Digital Operating Modes

There are no special operating modes for the digital NSD570 as they are known for the analog version - except for the fact that several digital (and optical) standard interfaces are available and various bit transfer rates are supported. The operating modes of the different interfaces are described in Section 5.7 of this manual.
System Description
April 2004
3-49
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.5.7. 3.5.7.1.
Common Functions Command Application

Each command can be configured individually for transmitting protection signals in blocking, permissive tripping or direct tripping protection schemes. Choosing the application of the command determines the individual evaluation of the corresponding tripping signals regarding security and dependability. The transmission time depends on the channel quality (SNR/BER). The processing of the line signal is adaptive and therefore always ensures the shortest possible transmission times for the chosen application and the available channel quality. The NSD570 Analog can transmit up to 4 commands (A - D), the NSD570 Digital can transmit up to 8 commands (A - H) in any combination.
3.5.7.2.
Unblocking
An unblocking command used in directional comparison or in permissive tripping schemes with overreaching first zone can be allocated to one or more outputs on the Relay Interface G3LR. Note that unblocking commands are not transmitted from the remote end, but automatically produced by certain types of line faults (PLC channels). Should the communication channel be almost completely lost, i.e. when the NSD570 is receiving neither guard nor tripping signals and the unblocking threshold is exceeded, the unblocking contacts close for a predefined time. After detection of the unblocking condition the release of this pulse can be delayed (filtered) for a certain time whilst the channel may recover. The internal signal evaluation time to detect the unblocking condition is typical less than the nominal command transmission time. For the NSD570 Analog, further to the unblocking condition "no guard and no trip signals being received", the total signal level in the chosen bandwidth must be below a configurable threshold (compared to the guard signal level) before an unblocking impulse is generated. The unblocking threshold for the analog version can be configured in the range of -20 -10 dB below the nominal guard signal level. For the NSD570 Digital, further to the unblocking condition "no guard and no trip signals being received", LOS (Loss Of Signal) or AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) or invalid frames must be received before an unblocking impulse is generated.
3-50
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The unblocking extra delay is configurable by means of the HMI570 in the range of 0 ... 100 ms in steps of 1 ms. The unblocking pulse duration is configurable by means of the HMI570 in the range of 50 500 ms in steps of 1 ms.
3.5.7.3.
Tx Trip Duration Monitoring

For each command a Tx trip duration monitoring can be programmed to OFF or ON, i.e. the transmission of persistent commands can be disabled. The duration of each single command injected at the relay interface (G3LR) inputs is individually monitored if the Tx trip duration alarm is enabled for this command. Alarm is given and if no persistent command is injected simultaneously - the guard signal is transmitted instead of the tripping signal should the command duration exceed the predefined value. Also the boost criterion of the NSD570 analog is set inactive before the guard signal is transmitted again. The maximum Tx Trip Duration can be configured in the range of 1 15 seconds in steps of 1 sec by means of the HMI570.
3.5.7.4.
Tx input command delay

Warning: If an input command delay is configured, it has a direct influence on the transmission time of the equipment. It is delayed correspondingly and thus means an artificial deterioration of the equipment performance regarding command transfer delay. Normally the receiver at the remote station decides whether it was a genuine command of adequate length or only a transient spark on a command input. Therefore the command inputs are not delayed by default. If there is a request for some special applications (e.g. direct tripping when using digital communication systems) a pick up time for the command inputs can be configured. A command is transmitted only after the corresponding command input was activated for the preset delay time. The command sending duration is then prolonged by the same time. The preset input command delay can be configured for each command separately. The Tx input command delay is configurable by means of the HMI570 and can be set in the range of 0 10 ms in steps of 1 ms.
System Description
April 2004
3-51
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.5.7.5.
Command Prolongation
A command prolongation ensures a steady output command even in the event of discontinuations of the signal being received. The NSD570 receiver compensates the time needed for evaluating the tripping signals, i.e. the command duration at the output has almost the same pulse width as the transmitted command at the remote station (if no prolongation time is configured).
Tac
Local: G3LR Input Remote: G3LR Output
Prolongation
3-Command-prolongation.vsd
Fig. 3.25
Command Prolongation Time
A command prolongation can be programmed for each command separately. The Rx command prolongation is configurable in the range of 0 3000 ms in steps of 1 ms by means of the HMI570. Default settings of the prolongation for the command application are: Blocking Permissive Tripping Direct Tripping 0 ms 10 ms 100 ms
3.5.7.6.
Command Acknowledge
A Tx command acknowledge is programmable for each command. The Tx command injected is then looped back from the line interface (G3LA or G3LD) to one of the various outputs on the relay interface type G3LR to acknowledge that the corresponding command was sent. This is, however, no confirmation that the command has been received by the opposite station. A "Tx command summary acknowledge" can be signaled on one of the outputs of the relay interfaces for acknowledging when any command has been sent. A "Rx command summary acknowledge" can be signaled on one of the outputs of the relay interfaces for acknowledging when any command is received.
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
A "Tx or RX command summary acknowledge" can be signaled on one of the outputs of the relay interfaces for acknowledging when any command has been sent or received. The operating time of the acknowledge outputs is as long as the commands are sent or received, i.e. the Tx input command delay and the Rx command prolongation are also considered.
3.5.7.7.
Rx Guard
The state of the NSD570 guard receiver can be signaled by the line interface to one of the various outputs on the relay interface type G3LR. Reception of the NSD570 guard with adequate signal quality means that the corresponding solid-state output is closed or the coil of the selected relay contact is energized. The configured output reflects the guard receiver state without any additional pick-up or hold delays.
3.5.8. 3.5.8.1.
Functions of the analog system Transmit level setting / Transmit level monitoring
The transmit (Tx) signal level can be set in the wide range of -24 dBm to +2 dBm in steps of 1 dBm by means of the HMI570. This setting is valid for the single tone guard signal. Including power boosting (refer to Section 3.5.8.3) the maximum output level for a single tone command signal is therefore +11 dBm and +8 dBm (RMS) for a dual tone command signal. The transmit (Tx) alarm threshold can be configured from -10 dB to -3 dB in steps of 1 dB by means of the HMI570. From this follows that the Tx level must drop off from nominal by the configured value before alarm is given.
3.5.8.2.
Receive level setting / Receive level monitoring

The receive (Rx) signal level can be set in the wide range of -30 dBm to +2 dBm in steps of 1 dBm by means of the HMI570. This setting is valid for the single tone guard signal. Including power boosting the maximum input level for a single tone command signal is therefore +11 dBm and +8 dBm (RMS) for a dual tone command signal. Since the dynamic range of the receiver is 15 dB from nominal, the overall input level range is in fact from -45 dBm to +17 dBm! The receive (Rx) alarm threshold can be configured for a lower / upper limit from 3 dB to 12 dB in steps of 1 dB by means of the HMI570. This means that the Rx level must drop off or rise from nominal by the configured value before alarm is given.
System Description
April 2004
3-53
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.5.8.3.
Boosting / Boost Output

In the case of NSD570 Analog, the tripping signal can be boosted and be transmitted at a higher power in relation to the guard signal. The ratio between the boosted tripping signal and the guard signal is referred to as boost ratio and is expressed in dB. The power boosting is selectable via HMI570 in the range of 0 to 9 dB and in steps of 1 dB. When transmitting a test signal, the boost signal will not be set active and the test signal will not be boosted. As long as any command is transmitted, the boost output on the Analog Interface G3LA is operated (refer to Section 3.4.2.7).
3.5.8.4.
Embedded Operation Channel (EOC)

By means of the EOC the configuration and monitoring of the remote equipment in a link is possible from the local terminal. The EOC needs no additional bandwidth, as it is operated in the guard channel and therefore switched off during command transmission.
Note: The EOC of the NSD570 Analog is not available during continuous command transmission! The EOC is shortly interrupted by the manual or cyclic loop test!
There is a limited functionality of the EOC when the equipment is in T-operation mode (refer to Section 3.6.7.1 and 3.6.7.2; i.e. only end-toend operation for configurations with T-offs). All HMI570 functions are supported also for the remote equipment, connected via the EOC, except for the following features: activating the local and remote test mode in the remote station switch back to previous configuration change the micro-controllers UART baud rate In principle also the "Firmware download" via the EOC is working, but due to the low transmission rate it would take a couple of hours to download a new version via the EOC. It is therefore strongly recommended to switch off the cyclic loop test during a firmware download via EOC!
3-54
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The following transmission rates will arise: channel bandwidth 120 / 240 / 360 Hz channel bandwidth 480 1 / 960 Hz channel bandwidth 1200 / 2400 / 2800 Hz 20 bps 50 bps 100 bps
On the other hand the immunity of the EOC against interference and noise is very high. It operates down to a SNR of 6 dB.
Note: The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and the Tx/Rx level measurement displayed by the HMI570 do only have an adequate accuracy if the EOC is switched off!
3.5.9. 3.5.9.1.
Functions of the digital system Bit error rate monitoring

The BER is determined in 16 seconds (short term average) and in 262 minutes (long term average). The actual values can be seen by uploading the status of NSD570 Digital by means of the HMI570. If the bit error rate (BER) reaches a pre-defined threshold, alarm is given and dependent actions are taken (e.g. the command outputs will go to the quiescent state if configured).
3.5.9.2.
Addressing
Provision is made by means of HMI570 for individually addressing NSD570 teleprotection devices. The data transmitted from station A can only generate a tripping command in station B, if station B's address is contained in the incoming signal. The address and the local alarm signals are transmitted to the remote station where they are continuously evaluated. This coded information is contained in both trip and guard messages. The time taken to recognize an address lies within the time taken to detect a tripping message. This can prevent false tripping, if for example channels of the data circuit-terminating equipment are switched during the transmission of a continuous command and the command signal is relayed to another station. The command outputs are switched to their programmed alarm states should a wrong address be detected (after the configured link alarm pick-up time; refer to Section 5.5.1 of this manual). This can also occur should addresses be corrupted by bit errors. The following
In 480 Hz channel bandwidth and with operating mode 4 independent dual tone commands A, B, C, D -> 20 bps only. All other modes -> 50 bps. April 2004 3-55
System Description
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
programming is therefore recommended for the alarm states of the command outputs: - in applications with continuous commands, the outputs should be programmed to retain the states they had prior to the alarm to avoid unwanted interruptions of commands. - for short time tripping commands, the outputs should be programmed to adopt their quiescent states. The equipment ignores any incoming signal (Guard / Trip) if an address error is detected. The LEDs on the frontplate indicate the corresponding state (alarm LEDs Receive/Local light up). The event recorder and the internal trip counters can only record a command during address error, if the programming of the command output states for the event of an alarm permits the command to be transferred to the relay interfaces. In any case an address error alarm is added to the event recorder list. The usable range of the digital address is from 0 1023 (not to be mixed up with the device address needed to connect the device by means of the HMI570!). The addressing facility is configurable via HMI570 to be switched ON or OFF.
3.5.9.3.

By means of the EOC the configuration and monitoring of the remote equipment in a link is possible from the local terminal. The EOC needs no additional bandwidth, as it is operated within the used data stream. Since there are specific bits reserved for the EOC in the digital frame structure, it is not switched off during command transmission.
Note: The EOC of the NSD570 Digital is available during continuous command transmission!
There is a limited functionality of the EOC when the equipment is in T-operation mode (refer to Section 3.6.7.1 and 3.6.7.2; i.e. only end-toend operation for configurations with T-off). All HMI functions are supported also for the remote equipment, connected via the EOC, except the following features: activating the local and remote test mode in the remote station switch back to previous configuration change the micro-controllers UART baud rate
3-56
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Also the "Firmware download" via the EOC is working, due to the relatively high transmission rate it would take approx. one hour to download a new version via the EOC. The following transmission rate will arise: channel data rate 56 kbps channel data rate 64 kbps 1000 bps 1333 bps
On the other hand the immunity of the EOC against bit errors is not too high. It operates up to a BER of 1E-05 without increased response time for HMI requests.
3.5.10. 3.5.10.1.
Event Recorder General

The event recorder registers special events of the NSD570 system, provides them with an accurate time stamp and stores the information sequentially into a non-volatile memory. The resolution of the events which can be discriminated between is 1 ms. There are three different types of NSD570 events: the command events, the alarm events and the manipulation events. The maximum number of events that can be stored is 7500. If more than 7500 events occur, the eldest events are deleted and the newest events are preserved. The timing information for the event recorder is provided by the real time clock (RTC) on the line interfaces type G3LA and G3LD. The date and time is set via the User Interface HMI570 (refer to Section 4). If the accuracy of the RTC is not sufficient, an external clock can be used (see Section 3.5.10.5). The events are displayed by means of the HMI570 in a text based view. Refer to Section 4 of this manual for instructions to upload, view and save events.
3.5.10.2.
Command Events
The event recorder acquires the timing information of all commands which are sent and received via the inputs and outputs of the relay interfaces type G3LR.
System Description
April 2004
3-57
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
The following events are recorded as NSD570 command events: Start time and end time of all commands sent excluding Tx input command delay (i.e. the command was injected earlier at the input by the amount of the configured delay) Start time and end time of all commands received including command prolongation (i.e. the command was longer released to the output by the amount of the configured prolongation) Start and end time of an unblocking pulse
3.5.10.3.
Alarm Events
The event recorder acquires the alarms as they appear on the system, i.e. pick up and hold times of the alarm relays are not included. The following events are recorded as alarm events: Start time and end time of all NSD570 low level alarms (refer to Section 9 of this manual for details).
3.5.10.4.
Manipulation Events
The following events are recorded as manipulation events: Time when a loop test was sent Time when a loop test was reflected Time when a loop test failed Time when a manual loop test was initiated (by means of the loop test button on the front panel) Time when the configuration was downloaded Time when switched back to the previous configuration Time when a firmware version was downloaded Time when a new date and time was set Time when the equipment started up Time when a command counter was set to zero Time when the event recorder was erased Time when a manual reset was conducted
3.5.10.5.
RTC Synchronization From an External Clock

An external clock source can be supplied to increase the accuracy of the NSD570 system time. The clock signal has to be provided in the IRIG-B format at TTL compliant level and it has to be connected to the supply backplane type G1LB (refer to Section 6 of this Manual).
3-58
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The IRIG-B format only informs about the time and the number of days having passed in the current year but not about the number of the year. So the date and time has to be set once manually in the NSD570 to supply the system with information about the current year. See Section 4 for the procedure about how to set the date and time. Alternatively the RTC can be synchronized using an external sync pulse only (every second).
3.5.11.
Counters
All transmitted and received NSD570 commands, all transmitted and received loop tests and the number of unblocking pulses are counted individually by separate counters. The counters will overflow after >216 = 65536 events. They are stored in non-volatile memory. Each single counter can be selectively set to zero or all counters at once by means of the HMI570. Refer to Section 4 for instructions to upload and reset command, loop test and unblocking counters. Two specific counters can be viewed after uploading the status from an NSD570 device (link Device Information in the Edit Configuration menu of the HMI570): Firmware Download Counter Configuration Download Counter These counters cannot be set to zero.
3.5.12. 3.5.12.1.
Test facilities Testing during normal operation

An automatic loop testing routine cyclically checks the teleprotection link. The test signal, which is transmitted in the same way as a genuine command signal (except for boosting in case of the NSD570 Analog version), is recognized by the receiver and "reflected" back to the transmit station. The test routine is terminated, provided that the test signal arrives back at the transmitter within a certain time, otherwise it is repeated and the NSD570 gives alarm should it fail repeatedly. The loop test can also be initiated manually at any of the stations by pressing a button on the frontpanel of the equipment or via the HMI570. The result of the test is indicated by the LEDs on the frontplate.
System Description
April 2004
3-59
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
There are also internal test routines that continuously monitor the availability of the NSD570. The testing facilities impair in no way the ability of the equipment to respond to a protection command, i.e. a genuine tripping command is always given priority over all tests. An NSD570 unit can also interrogate the status of the remote unit and give alarm if necessary. Information regarding the nature of the problem is contained in the signal received (via EOC). A serial interface is provided on the front of the unit for service and diagnostic purposes. With the aid of a PC/notebook and the HMI570 the following is available: details of equipment settings, firmware release, operating parameters and alarm signals generated by the local and remote units.
3.5.12.2.
Cyclic Loop Test

A cyclic loop test sequentially checks the integrity of the teleprotection link. The test signal simulates the transmission of a genuine tripping signal and is recognized as such at the receiving end, from where it is echoed back to the transmitter. The test is deemed successfully, providing the transmitter receives the echo. If it does not, the test is repeated and alarm is given should the results of three subsequent trials be negative. The loop test signal of the analog NSD570 is transmitted without boosting, i.e. with the nominal command tone level. The first cyclic loop test is sent 10 minutes after power-on the equipment. If the cyclic loop test is not turned off by the HMI570, a test signal with its own test frequency or test code is transmitted to the remote station and reflected back once every 1/3/6/12/24 hours, depending on the programming (default setting: 6 hour interval). The test signal is processed in the same way as a normal tripping signal (interruption of the guard signal and transmission of a test frequency or test message for 3 x T0 (T0 = nominal transmission time; refer to Section 5.9.2.1); the reception of the reflected signal must take place between 1.5 x T0 and 6 x T0 after sending it), which ensures that all the functions required for transmitting a tripping signal are fully tested. If an automatically initiated test is not received correctly it is being repeated at intervals of about 5 minutes until either the remote station answers or a continuous alarm is given after the third attempt.
3-60
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The testing facilities impair in no way the ability of the equipment to respond to a protection command, i.e. a genuine tripping command is always given priority over all tests. The loop test signal is always transmitted and evaluated in the same way as the command configured for the highest security requirements.
Note: The NSD570 Analog loop test is performed at the nominal command signal level and is not boosted. The loop test is thus performed under more exacting conditions than those of boosted transfer tripping signals.
3.5.12.3.
Manual Loop Test

The loop test can also be initiated manually from any station via the HMI570 or via the button on the local front panel. The result of the test can be viewed in the HMI570 window. The actual measured transmission time (Tac) is displayed (half the value of both directions there and back, a delay of 1 ms is added for one input and one output circuit of a relay interface type G3LR (which can not be included in this test).
Note:
The measured actual transmission time by means of the loop test does not include a configured input pickup delay for the commands.
The loop test signal is always transmitted and evaluated in the same way as the command configured for the highest security requirements. If the reflection of a manually transmitted test signal is not received correctly, this is displayed in the loop test window. A manually initiated loop test is transmitted in the same way as the cyclic loop test.
3.5.12.4.
Local Test Mode

The NSD570 can be set via HMI570 to a local test mode for checking the relay interfaces, e.g. for measuring the command prolongation. In this operating mode, which is indicated by a flashing "Ok / Fail" LED and via the HMI570 by the alarm message "LOCAL TEST MODE ACTIVE", the command input signal is looped via the line interface back to the corresponding command output of the local relay interface type G3LR.
Note:
The trip counters will count the local commands as well.
System Description
April 2004
3-61
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
During the test mode the guard signal is continuously transmitted to the opposite station. Caution Genuine commands cannot be transmitted between the stations when the equipment is in the local test mode.
3.5.12.5.
Remote Test Mode

The NSD570 can be set via HMI570 to a remote operating mode for checking the transmission channel, e.g. transmission time measurements without external looping of the commands in the remote station. Before starting the test, the local system must be isolated from the protection circuits. The remote system's command outputs are blocked; all commands are sent back as long as they are received. In this operating mode, which is indicated by a flashing "Ok / Fail" LED in the remote station and via the HMI570 by the alarm message "REMOTE TEST MODE ACTIVE" (the local station indicates a "Remote Alarm"), the command input signal is looped via the remote line interface back to the corresponding command output of the local relay interface type G3LR.
Note: The local and remote trip counters will count the sent/received commands as well.
Caution
Genuine commands cannot be transmitted between the stations when the equipment is in the remote test mode.
Caution
The remote test mode must only be used for commissioning point-to-point teleprotection links (not applicable for T-operation; i.e. the two NSD570 links in a T-off arrangement have to be commissioned by means of the remote test mode as normal link first).
3-62
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.
NSD570 Applications
Power system faults taking place at specific points in the power system are isolated by operation of the associated protection and circuit-breakers. About 85 percent of all faults at the higher voltage levels occur on overhead lines and are single phase to earth faults of a temporary nature, e.g. caused by lightning. Provided that fast fault clearance is achieved, they do not spread to other conductors and usually do not result in permanent damage; the fault path is rapidly deionized after isolation and the circuit can then be successfully reclosed. Faults due to deterioration of solid or liquid or gas insulation are generally permanent and, because of the energy containment, there is a risk of explosion and fire; reclosure is usually not possible, and there is again a requirement for fast fault clearance. Fast selective protection applied to cables and overhead lines requires communication between the circuit ends. The NSD570 teleprotection equipment is suitable for transmission of permissive tripping, direct tripping and blocking commands via analog (audio-frequency) and digital and fiber optical links; it is designed for duplex communication, and some typical applications are described below.
3.6.1.
Permissive tripping schemes

Permissive transfer tripping is used typically for the protection of transmission lines. The transfer-tripping link between the protection equipment at the ends of the line ensures that all faults can be cleared in the time of the first zone along 100 % of the line. In a permissive scheme, the transfer tripping signal from the NSD570 is connected in series with a local criterion (protection starting, directional decision or phase selection) and tripping can only take place at the receiving end, if a transfer tripping signal is being received and the local protection relay detects a fault in the direction of the protected line. The reception of a spurious tripping signal caused by interference on the communications channel cannot therefore give rise on its own to unwanted tripping, but it may cause unwanted tripping under external fault conditions when the protection is active and the fault is within the reach of its starting elements (permissive underreaching) or within the reach of the distance relay (permissive overreaching). On the other hand, a delayed transfer-tripping signal may mean that a fault on the line is tripped in zone 2 time instead of undelayed in zone 1.
System Description
April 2004
3-63
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
High dependability and a short transmission time therefore take priority over high security in a permissive scheme. Typical requirements are transmission times of less than 20 ms and false command rates under worst-case interference conditions of less than 1E-04 (overreaching schemes) respectively 1E-05 (underreaching schemes). The following typical settings result: Command application: Bandwidth analog: Relay interface output: Command prolongation: permissive 480 Hz for single tone commands 960 Hz for dual tone commands solid state 20 ms, must sometimes be reduced to 10 ms or less in permissive overreaching applications
3.6.1.1.
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)

Stepped distance/time protection is used, with its high-speed zone 1 reach set to typically 85 percent of the protected circuit length. The zone 1 relay is directional and does not operate for faults behind the relay position; it initiates tripping of the local circuit-breaker, and command transmission indicates that an internal fault within zone 1 reach is seen at the transmit end. The zone 1 reach must accommodate practical measurement errors without risking unwanted high-speed tripping for faults external to the protected circuit, while the reaches of zone 2 and 3, with their necessary time lags, extend beyond the protected circuit; their operation is associated with backup protection of adjacent busbars and line sections. For a fault on the protected circuit, one end, or the other, or both ends will experience zone 1 relay operation, and the communication link used is used to accelerate the protection in order to avoid delayed zone 2 tripping for internal fault positions close to the circuit ends. The command transmission time is much shorter than the zone 2 time delay, and the tripping action of the received command is made dependent on fault detecting devices, e.g. underimpedance, undervoltage or overcurrent starting relays, to achieve single-phase or three-phase tripping. Alternatively, the received command may be used to extend the zone 1 relay reach to typically 130 percent of the protected circuit length, or to bypass the time-lag of an independently operating zone 2 relay. Reception of a spurious tripping command, caused for instance by switchgear noise influencing the communication channel, cannot on its
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
own result in unwanted tripping, and the use of local fault detecting devices to control tripping action thus limits the risk of unwanted tripping to conditions for which these devices operate in case of external faults, e.g. to faults within the reach of an underimpedance starting relay. Failure of the communication link does not prevent correct operation of the protection; selectivity is retained, but tripping is delayed at one circuit end for certain fault positions. For this reason, the communication link is sometimes described as a supplementary feature in such applications. Typical requirements in a PUTT scheme are: nominal transmission time less than one power-frequency cycle, and typical permissible delay about one and a half cycle high dependability, because inadequate dependability may cause delayed tripping on internal faults good security, because inadequate security may cause unwanted tripping on external faults
3.6.1.2.
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT)

This method also uses transmission of tripping commands under internal fault conditions to obtain high-speed tripping with distance protection. The directional zone 1 reach is set beyond the end of the circuit, typically to 130 percent of the protected circuit length. The zone 1 relays then cannot be permitted to trip directly, and tripping at each end is made dependent upon both operation of the local zone 1 relay and reception of a tripping command from the far end. In other words, tripping at each end depends on zone 1 relay operation at both ends, and correct operation of both relays and correct functioning of the communication link in both directions are necessary for complete isolation of a faulted circuit. The communication link is thus an essential feature in such applications, and both a high dependability and a short command transmission time are required. POTT is sometimes used as second protection in duplicated main protection schemes, for distance protection of short lines where accurate zone 1 reach setting is difficult due to arc voltage and ground resistance, and for distance protection of longer overhead lines with series capacitors. A POTT scheme is applicable only where there is adequate feed of fault current at both ends of the protected circuit; if the circuit-breaker at one end is open, a received command at this end must be looped back to the other end to accomplish tripping on internal faults. Reversal of fault current following partial clearance of
System Description
April 2004
3-65
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
external faults, e.g. on parallel circuits, require consideration of operating and resetting times of relays and teleprotection equipment. The risk of unwanted tripping due to flashover or switchgear noise influencing the communication link is limited to external fault positions just beyond the ends of the protected circuit ends. Communication link failure will cause delayed zone 2 tripping at one end of the circuit, or at both ends. Typical requirements in a POTT scheme are: nominal transmission time less than one power-frequency cycle, and typical permissible delay about one and a half cycle high dependability, because inadequate dependability causes delayed tripping on all internal faults good security, because inadequate security may cause unwanted tripping on external faults
3.6.2.
Blocking schemes
These types of protection differ fundamentally from tripping schemes where inward fault current flow initiates a command to trip. The operating principle of blocking schemes is detection of outward fault current flow at one end of a protected circuit when the fault is external to it. Such detection initiates transmission of a blocking command which inhibits the tripping action at the other end where the fault current flow is inward. In case of external faults, either end may thus block the other, while no commands are transmitted in case of internal faults. Directional current relays or high-speed distance relays with zone 1 reach set beyond the far circuit end may be used as inward fault current detectors, and the devices detecting outward fault current are usually directional impedance or directional current relays. Alternatively, command transmission may be initiated by a nondirectional starting relay and interrupted by the zone 1 relay; one end or the other will then transmit a blocking command on external faults, and the blocking commands are only interrupted at both ends in case of internal faults. Blocking schemes work correctly for all fault positions on the protected circuit, even in case of a weak or missing in-feed or an open circuitbreaker at one circuit end. Zone 1 extension may also be used in a similar way as in a PUTT scheme; the zone 1 relay reach is then set to cover about 85 percent of the circuit length and is switched to typically 130 percent after a short waiting time, unless a blocking command is received. These zone 1 settings allow fast tripping at both circuit ends for any fault position where their characteristics overlap.
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
In blocking schemes, communication link failure generally does not affect the ability of the protection to trip correctly on internal faults; command transmission is, however, essential for avoiding unwanted tripping on external faults. Because of the importance of the communication link, the teleprotection supervision facilities may be arranged to switch the zone 1 relay settings from overreaching to underreaching in the event of a communication link failure. To obtain correct blocking action on external faults, the tripping action of the protection relay at the end feeding inward fault current must be delayed sufficiently to ensure that the do not trip command sent from the end feeding outward fault current has arrived. This delay must be kept to a minimum to ensure fast clearance of internal faults, and a short command transmission time is therefore required. The use of the communication link to convey blocking commands avoids the risk of unwanted tripping due to interference and noise, e.g. caused by circuit-breaker operation, unless this can prevent command reception. Even a short interruption of genuine blocking commands may cause spurious tripping, and a high dependability is therefore required. Impulsive interference and noise during internal faults, e.g. caused by circuit-breaker operation, may delay tripping by simulating a blocking signal; the duration of such delays is unlikely to exceed half a power frequency cycle, so that only a moderate security is required. Typical requirements in blocking schemes are: nominal transmission time about half a power-frequency cycle and maximum permissible delay one cycle; high dependability, because inadequate dependability may cause unwanted tripping on external faults moderate security, because inadequate security may cause delayed tripping on internal faults; delays shorter than half a power frequency cycle are usually considered acceptable.
Transmission times of less than 10 ms for a 50 Hz power system or less than 8 ms for a 60 Hz power system are therefore required for blocking. False command rates under worst-case interference conditions should be less than 1E-03 or even less than 1E-04.
System Description
April 2004
3-67
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
The following configuration and settings are recommended for a blocking line protection scheme: Command application: Bandwidth analog: Relay interface output: Command prolongation: blocking 960 Hz for single tone commands 1200 Hz for dual tone commands solid state 0 ms
3.6.3.
Unblocking
In the early days of power line carrier communication, blocking schemes were often used for overhead line protection in conjunction with single-purpose on/off (amplitude-shift type) carriers with common transmit/receive (simplex) channels. No carrier signals were transmitted under healthy line and inward fault current flow conditions, and the protection relays initiated carrier transmission only if outward fault current flow was detected. The carrier off condition thus meant permission to trip, while a received carrier signal meant block = do not trip. Since blocking commands are transmitted under external fault conditions only, i.e. over healthy line sections, cost-saving phase-toground couplings were used, and since carrier transmission is not required in case of internal faults, the actual line attenuation under fault conditions is of no importance. Link testing under normal healthy line conditions required the use of manual carrier send facilities, and automatic link monitoring required clock test devices transmitting carrier signals of short duration at regular time intervals, e.g. every 30 minutes. PUTT or POTT schemes were also used together with single-purpose on/off duplex carriers having separate transmit and receive channels. Continuous carrier signals were transmitted during healthy line conditions, and the protection relays interrupted the carrier transmission only if inward fault current flow was detected. These schemes avoided the use of outward fault current detecting devices, and a received carrier signal again meant block, while a carrier off condition meant unblock = permission to trip. Certain types of faults would prevent carrier signal reception by bridging the circuit, thus causing the carrier receivers to automatically output an unblocking command without the aid of the protection at the remote line end. The unblock output signal duration was limited to about 8 powerfrequency cycles to avoid unwanted tripping in the event of permanent channel failure, cost-saving phase-to-ground couplings were again
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
used, and the normal continuous carrier transmission simplified link monitoring. Most modern power line carriers are multi-purpose duplex equipment for speech plus data transmission and teleprotection, the latter usually being of the frequency-shift type allowing channel monitoring by a continuously transmitted guard signal, which is replaced by one or more command signals during fault conditions. The standard modulation method is single sideband suppressed carrier, and the preferred coupling arrangement is phase-to-phase, which in normal operation causes less interference with other circuits and provides lower line attenuation than phase-to-ground coupling, and exhibits only moderate additional attenuation under all phase-to-earth fault and most phase-to-phase fault conditions. Phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults represent a severe shock to a power system, in particular when they occur close to a busbar, and fast fault clearance is then mandatory. Three-phase faults and phase-to-phase faults involving the coupled phases close to one line end cause high additional line attenuation, and teleprotection receivers on power line carrier links may then be unable to decide if the remote line end was transmitting a guard or a command signal. However, a decision must be made from a protection point of view, and analog NSD570 receivers therefore include a device which outputs an unblocking signal of about 200 milliseconds duration if neither a clean guard nor a valid command signal is received for a specific pre-set time, typically one power-frequency cycle. It is noted that unblocking commands are not transmitted at protection relay request; they are automatically produced by certain fault types. The received unblocking signal permits tripping and should arrive at about the same time as the local protection relay picks up; this ensures minimum fault clearing time, because relay pick up time at the remote line end and command transmission time are not involved. NSD570 unblocking signals may be used to switch underreaching zone 1 distance relays to overreaching in PUTT schemes, or to bypass the time delay of independently operating zone 2 relays, but they are used more often as fleeting trip enable signals in POTT schemes, to assist the essential communication links under difficult internal line fault conditions. The main problem with fast unblocking devices is to avoid unwanted tripping on external faults. Unblocking is not a protection scheme, but a standard emergency feature included in all analog NSD570 receivers, whether they are intended for power line carrier applications or not. It is also included in all digital NSD570 receivers, where it indicates a complete loss of
System Description
April 2004
3-69
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
signal or a poor signal quality, i.e. a bit error rate insufficient for reliable command transmission. Typical requirements in unblocking applications are: nominal loss of receive signal detection time about one powerfrequency cycle, and typical permissible detection delay about two cycles high dependability, because inadequate immunity to fault arcing noise may result in guard signal simulation and suppression of unblocking output signal and thus cause delayed tripping on internal faults good security, because inadequate immunity to circuit-breaker noise may result in guard signal suppression and simulation of unblocking output signal and thus cause unwanted tripping on external faults.
3.6.4.
Earth fault protection

Earth faults have less effect on the power system stability than phase faults, in particular if the fault current is limited, and it may be difficult or even impossible to achieve correct distance relay operation under earth fault conditions on overhead lines, due to a high resistance value in the fault current path, e.g. in cases of mid-span faults, use of wooden poles, high ground resistivity, or bush fire. Such problems do not occur under phase-to-phase fault conditions, and a power direction comparison system is often used for earth fault protection together with a conventional stepped distance-time protection for phase-to-phase faults. The directional power relays (zero sequence and/or negative sequence) then detect all earth faults outside the pick up range of the distance relays, which detect all phase-to-phase and three-phase faults and all earth faults within their pick up range. The overall protection scheme involves the use of a communication link, and a common channel may be used in either a permissive tripping or a blocking scheme to achieve fast fault clearance both under earth fault and phase fault conditions. However, since the earth fault protection cannot provide phase information, it is sometimes preferred to use two separate command channels to achieve fast fault clearance, either single-phase or threephase, under low-impedance fault conditions and delayed three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out under high-impedance earth fault conditions, e.g. caused by bush fire. The delayed tripping action of the earth fault protection, about 10 power frequency cycles, avoids interference with the fast tripping action of the distance protection.
3-70
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.5.
Duplicated main protection

Two independently operating main protection systems are often used on important circuits; the purpose is to improve the reliability of tripping on internal faults. The overlapping characteristics of the two systems duplicate the tripping function, and this permits failure of one protection equipment or one communication link (and maintenance or repair work on one system) without loss of tripping on internal faults. One protection system may fail to trip under difficult or marginal fault conditions, and the different capabilities of the systems are then used to advantage. The types of protection and communication links and their independent use influence both the improved overall dependability (reliability of tripping on internal faults) and the reduced security (increased risk of unwanted tripping on external faults). The use of two main protection systems on important circuits is justified in relation to the attainable availability and tripping reliability of a single system. It is generally more economical to achieve the improved reliability of tripping on internal faults by two systems than designing one system to the higher reliability. Some associated equipment (e.g. current and voltage transformers, trip coils and power supplies) may also be duplicated, and triple systems consisting of two protections using telecommunication facilities and one stepped distance-time protection without communication are sometimes used. The NSD570 teleprotection equipment is particularly suited to duplicated protection applications, because each unit can convey two or more independent commands at the same time. The units are preferably allocated to different transmission media, line protection commands may be criss-crossed between NSD570s, and important (direct transfer tripping) commands may be conveyed in parallel over both communication links.
System Description
April 2004
3-71
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
R MP1 MP2 BFP GSD/LS

A B C D NSD570 A
R MP1 MP2 BFP GSD/LS
Route 1 (e.g. Cable, PLC, Radio, PCM)

NSD570
B C D
A B C D NSD570

NSD570
B C D
MP1: 1st main protection MP2: 2nd main protection
GSD: generator shut down LS: load shedding R: protection relay
BFP: breaker failure protection + overvoltage protection + shunt reactor protection

3-Single-line2.vsd
Fig. 3.26
Duplicated line protection and breaker-failure protection of an important single circuit
R2
R1
R1
R2
MP1 Line 1 MP2 Line 2 BFP Line 1 BFP Line 2
A B C D NSD570
MP1 Line 1 MP2 Line 2 BFP Line 1 BFP Line 2

NSD570
B C D
MP1 Line 2 MP2 Line 1
A B C D NSD570
MP1 Line 2 MP2 Line 1

NSD570
B C D
MP1: 1st main protection MP2: 2nd main protection
R1/R2: protection relay
BFP: breaker failure protection + overvoltage protection + shunt reactor protection

3-Dual-line2.vsd
Fig. 3.27
Duplicated line protection of a twin line, with breakerfailure protection on each circuit
3-72
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.6.
Direct transfer tripping

Most protective systems are intended to respond to faults within a precise zone, generally bounded by circuit-breakers. Their basis function is to decide whether a fault is external or internal and, in the latter case, to trip the circuit-breakers and isolate the protected zone. Provided that fault conditions are as expected and provided that the equipment functions correctly, such protection systems are very effective. The selective protection of circuits or components of a power system is concerned only with what happens in its protected zone and thus excludes consideration of the behavior of the power system as a whole. Protection systems should therefore also be able to respond to faults over a considerable area of the power system, in particular to provide for conditions of a failure to clear a fault by neighboring selective protections, which may be due to a failure to trip by these protections or by their associated circuit-breakers. Protection of this type is usually called back-up protection, and at the lower voltage levels the desired function may be obtained by time delays. The times involved are typically 0.5 to 2 seconds, and the possibility of experiencing such fault duration and subsequent tripping of a number of circuit-breakers is out of the question at the higher voltage levels in large heavily loaded power systems. It is therefore necessary to employ telecommunication techniques to reduce the operating time of back-up protections to a few power frequency cycles.
3.6.6.1.
Line protection
Direct transfer tripping may be used in conjunction with underreaching distance protection to initiate tripping at the remote line end when the local protection relay picks up. This ensures a high degree of tripping reliability for the protected line, because fast or delayed tripping is achieved at both line ends, even if one relay picks up after a time-lag or not at all, e.g. due to weak in-feed, saturation of current transformers, high earth-fault impedance, or relay failure. Direct transfer tripping is, however, rarely used for line protection, because reception of a spurious command always results in unwanted tripping. A longer command transmission time must then be allowed to achieve a considerably better security than required in permissive tripping applications, and direct transfer tripping is also hardly suitable in conjunction with single-phase automatic re-closure, unless a phasesegregated transmission (one command per phase) is used, because phase selection is needed at the receive end.
System Description
April 2004
3-73
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.6.6.2.
Re-closure lock out

Automatic re-closure is widely used in various forms to avoid permanent isolation of a circuit in case of temporary faults, which represent a high proportion of faults on overhead lines. Faults must be isolated for a short time, about 0.3 seconds, to de-ionize the fault path before the circuit is re-energized; the overall time must be kept to a minimum, and this requires fast coordinated tripping of the circuitbreakers at the line ends. High-speed tripping and fast automatic re-closure thus limit the dissipation of energy at the fault, minimize the disturbance to the power system and reduce interruption of supply to important loads. A re-closure lock-out command must sometimes be transferred to a remote line end after that a fault has been cleared. Since reception of a spurious command does not result in unwanted tripping, the dependability and security requirements pertaining to permissive tripping then apply.
3.6.6.3.
Breaker back-up protection

The purpose of breaker back-up protection, often called breaker failure protection, is to initiate fast tripping of the circuit-breaker(s) adjacent to a damaged circuit-breaker which, due to jamming or loss of air pressure, has failed to clear a fault. In case of a fault on a busbar and a jammed line circuit-breaker connected to it, the busbar protection first tries to clear the fault by three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out of all local circuit-breakers feeding fault current to the busbar. Since the local line circuit-breaker is stuck, fault current is still flowing, and the breaker back-up protection must now isolate the fault by sending a direct tripping command to the remote line end, requesting three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out. In case of a line fault and a jammed circuit-breaker at one line end, the line protection first tries to clear the fault by single phase or threephase tripping at both line ends. Due to the jammed circuit-breaker, fault current is still flowing, and the breaker back-up protection must now isolate the fault by three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out of all local circuit-breakers feeding fault current to the line. After thus having cleared the fault, it sends a direct tripping command to the remote line end, requesting re-closure lock out and three-phase tripping (to also disconnect the two healthy phases, if the line fault was single phase).
3-74
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.6.4.
Shunt reactor protection

The current flow in a lines shunt capacitance causes a voltage drop in its series inductance and series resistance, which in turn leads to a considerable voltage change at the receiving end from the no-load to full-load current. This reduces the lines current carrying capacity, causes increased power losses and may result in stability problems; the large inductance of the lines and transformers is in fact the main cause of stability problems for longer lines. The most common remedy is to provide shunt reactors at the substations. The shunt reactors reduce the problems associated with the lines shunt capacitance by partly canceling out the powerfrequency shunt capacitive current, and for cost reasons they are sometimes connected to the line without circuit-breakers. The line and the reactors must then be protected together, and since it may not be possible to provide adequate protection of the reactors by the relays at the line ends, some problems arise from this requirement. In case of a reactor fault, the fault current may be of limited or negligible value, and it is usually necessary to distinguish between reactor faults and line faults, because automatic re-closure is only desirable for line faults. The use of a communication link overcomes the problems when the reactor protection initiates three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out of the local line circuit-breaker and at the same time sends a direct tripping command to the remote line end, requesting three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out. Shunt reactor protection and breaker back-up protection may share a common direct transfer tripping channel, because tripping commands originate at the same location and terminate on the same remote circuit-breaker.
System Description
April 2004
3-75
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.6.6.5.
Transformer protection
Transformers are sometimes connected to a line with circuit-breakers only on the secondary lower voltage side. Transformer faults including core insulation and interturn faults cannot be detected by the line protection and require current differential protection in conjunction with gas and oil actuated Buchholz relays. When picking up, the transformer protection initiates tripping of the secondary-side circuit-breaker and transmission of a direct tripping command to the circuit-breaker(s) at the remote line end(s). High dependability, fast transmission (less than 0.1 second) and high security are required to avoid damage and unwanted tripping due to interference and noise influencing the communication link. In cases where the line is an important interconnection, automatic reclosure may be required to follow tripping and disconnection of the faulty transformer by a motor-operated isolator; this may require the use of further communication facilities.
3.6.6.6.
Power system instability

The complex interconnection of a number of generating centers by a power transmission system constitutes a network which, even when heavily loaded, is normally stable. When disturbed by some stimulus such as a fault, the system may become unstable and, depending on the type, location and duration of the fault, begin to oscillate; the generating centers then swing beyond the stability limit and drop out of step. Power swing conditions cause interchange of three-phase currents, amplitude-modulated at a frequency of typically 1 to 2 Hz, and present serious problems to the continued operation of the power system. When the generating centers are in anti-phase with each other, the currents and voltages correspond to those which would occur with a three-phase fault at the power systems electrical center, and protections based on directional relays or distance relays may operate at some point of the system and cause uncontrolled tripping. Such uncontrolled (and usually unwanted) tripping can be prevented by providing out-of-step blocking features; this can be done without the use of communication links and is therefore not dealt with here. It may, however, be desirable to initiate controlled tripping at certain points to sectionalize the power system and minimize the disturbance, and facilitate the restoration of normal conditions. These points do not necessarily coincide with those at which distance protections would operate, and the use of special devices and communication channels for transmission of direct transfer tripping commands may be required.
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.6.7.
Generator shutdown and load shedding

Two power systems, each basically self-contained, may be interconnected by a number of synchronous tie lines, e.g. for the purpose of interchanging surplus power. The loss of one tie line, e.g. caused by clearing of a permanent fault and subsequent re-closure lock out, may not produce tripping conditions on other ties; they may then become overloaded and, if this occurs at a time of heavy system load, the subsequent tripping of an overloaded tie line may produce successive overloading and tripping of other interconnections and thus result in a widespread disruption of the system. Since the effects of overload are thermal, they can be considered in a considerably longer time scale than faults, e.g. up to one minute compared to a fraction of a second; they may, however, affect a considerable portion of the power system. It may therefore be necessary to employ teleprotection links to transmit generator shutdown commands and load shedding commands from interconnection points over larger distances and through a number of intermediate stations to generator sites and to load locations. The dependability, security and transmission time requirements are similar to those which apply to breaker back-up protection, but the overall operating time must be considered, due to the tandem connection of communication links through a number of intermediate stations. It is noted that telecommunication facilities for generator shutdown and load shedding permit interconnections to be operated closer to their overload limits than without their use; they thus improve network utilization and commercial efficiency of the electricity supply. Without such facilities, larger safety margins are needed to avoid overload and stability problems in case of a tie line loss.
System Description
April 2004
3-77
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.6.6.8.
Typical requirements in direct tripping applications

nominal transmission time less than one and a half powerfrequency cycle, and maximum permissible delay about two and a half cycles very high dependability, because inadequate dependability causes delayed tripping; delays shorter than about one power frequency cycle are usually acceptable very high security, because inadequate security always causes unwanted tripping; the false trip probability must be kept extremely small in normal operation and in particular during fault and abnormal operating conditions.
Communication facilities for direct transfer tripping applications are often duplicated at the upper voltage levels, to improve the reliability of wanted operation. Very high security and dependability, achieved at the expense of transmission time, are therefore required in direct transfer tripping applications. Transmission times of 25 to 40 ms are generally sufficient for direct transfer tripping. False command rates under worst-case interference conditions should be less than 1E-07 or even less than 1E-08. The following typical settings result: Command application: Bandwidth analog: Relay interface output: Command prolongation: direct 240 Hz for single tone commands 360 Hz for dual tone commands solid state or relay contacts 10 ms up to 100 ms (it is recommended not to configure a prolongation below 10 ms) set to the quiescent state in case of an alarm
Command outputs
3-78
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.7.
Teed lines and tapped lines

In power systems undergoing development and extensions, multiended circuits are sometimes used for economic reasons instead of a number of two-ended circuits. Multi-ended circuits may be either teed circuits provided with circuit-breakers at each end at the same voltage level, where the ends are of equal or comparable importance, or tapped circuits where the two-ended main circuit is equipped with circuit-breakers at each end and the taps are transformers connected to the main circuit with circuit-breakers only on the secondary lower voltage sides. The taps supply loads are generally less important than the main circuit.
A teed circuit usually presents a difficult protection problem. When distance relays are used for line protection, their reaches are affected by the length of the line sections and the in-feed or out-feed of fault current at the line ends; the latter may increase or decrease the apparent line impedance seen under fault conditions and thus cause the protection to underreach or overreach. The distance relays can sometimes (under favorable conditions) be set to a suitable zone 1 reach at all ends, i.e. to underreach and avoid overreaching the nearest end. Operation of any zone 1 relay is then arranged to transmit permissive underreaching commands to all other ends, so that an internal fault detected at one end will initiate tripping at all ends. The choice of a suitable zone 1 reach is, however, often difficult or insufficient when the setting should avoid overreaching the nearest end, so that a considerable portion of the line would be protected by the delayed zone 2. The zone 1 relays are then be set to overreach beyond the line ends, and a blocking or a permissive overreaching protection must be used. Detection of outward fault current flow at any end may be arranged to transmit blocking commands to all other ends, so that an external fault detected at one end will prevent tripping at all ends. Alternatively, detection of inward fault current flow at any end may be arranged to transmit permissive overreaching commands to all other ends; an internal fault must then be detected at all ends to initiate tripping at any end. Individual analysis is always required to ensure correct function of the protective system, and attention must be paid to the risk of loss of tripping on internal faults when two ends of a teed circuit are also interconnected by a direct line. This may result in outward fault
System Description
April 2004
3-79
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
current flow at one end during some internal fault conditions, and the direction of power flow in the direct line must be considered. Protection of a multi-ended circuit generally requires communication between all ends, and the classical solution for protection of a multiended circuit with n terminals is to provide two transmitters and two receivers at each end and communication links between all ends, i.e. n x (n-1):2 communication links (2 out of n) and n x (n-1) transmitters and receivers. Command inputs must be parallel connected at all ends, while the command outputs are either parallel connected (wired OR) or series connected (wired AND), depending on the chosen protection scheme. Type NSD570 teleprotection offers solutions saving both information links and terminal equipment, and the diagram below shows the arrangement for a three-ended circuit: The operating principle is, however, also applicable to circuits with four or more ends and thus considerably reduces the required number of NSD570s and communication links, because only (n-1) communication links (from A to first T, from first T to second T, etc., and from last T to B) are required, together with 2 x (n-1) NSD570s (one at A and B and two at each T).
A
TX TX RX
B
TX TX
RX RX RX
TPE 1 TX RX RX
TPE 2 TX
TX
RX
3-T-operation.vsd
Fig. 3.28
T-operation principle
3-80
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.7.1.
NSD570 Analog/Digital in normal T-operation

One NSD570 is installed in A and one in B, and two NSD570 in a common rack are required in T. Under normal fault-free conditions with the NSD570 Analog, the guard signals transmitted from A and B are through-connected in T towards B and A. At the same time they are evaluated in T, while the guard signals originating at T are suppressed. In case of the NSD570 Digital, the guard signals are also generated at T, i.e. there is no through-connection of the guard from A to B or from B to A. Under fault conditions, blocking or permissive underreach tripping commands originating at A and/or B are through-connected at T and simultaneously lead to the NSD570 outputs ("dropping" of commands), which are parallel-connected to the protection relay input (wired OR). When a command originating at T is applied to the parallel-connected NSD570 transmitter inputs of a NSD570 Analog, the A-T-B and B-T-A through-connections are interrupted, and the T command is sent to A and B instead of the guard signals received from B and A. T-commands originating at an NSD570 Digital are sent to A and B instead of the guard signals generated in T. When a command from A or B is received in T and a local transmit command is active at the same time, a combined command signal is generated and conveyed to B or A ("inserting" of commands). The operating principle of the normal NSD570 T-operation is thus to perform all required OR combinations of blocking commands or permissive underreach tripping commands in the intermediate T stations. The command delays due to the signal through-connections at T are small and may be ignored in practical operation, while conventional tandem connections at the transmit and receive interfaces in T would result in addition of the A to T, T to T and T to B command transmission times. Loop tests may only be initiated at the outer stations A and B; test signals are relayed through all stations and thus test the complete teleprotection system. The cyclic loop test must be switched off in the T-station. Transmitter and receivers of the analog version must use the same bandwidth and center frequencies in "normal" T-operation, while endto-end operation allows a different transmit and receive channel bandwidth. The digital interfaces of the two links in a digital T-operation scheme may be different, i.e. one link may use the G.703 interface of G3LD while the other uses the RS-530 interface.
System Description
April 2004
3-81
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
In the "normal" T-operation the EOC is only operating between the outer stations A and B and - in case of the analog version - only if the guard signal is transmitted. If the NSD570 Analog is used, the guard signal is restored in the T station if one link fails, i.e. the "healthy" link remains active (as a simple point-to-point connection). If the guard signal reappears from the "lost" outer station, the guard signal originated in the T station will be removed and the original T-operation scheme is re-established. Because there is no through-connection of the guard signals in the NSD570 Digital, no restoring is needed in case of one link fails. The "healthy" link automatically remains active. Please refer to Section 5 "Configuration and settings" of this manual for details about configuring command application and T-operation mode.
3.6.7.2.
NSD570 Analog/Digital in inverse T-operation

One NSD570 is installed in A and one in B, and two NSD570 in a common rack are required in T. Under normal fault-free conditions, the guard signals originating at T are transmitted towards A and B. The guard signals received from A and B are evaluated at T but not through-connected towards B and A, just as in normal end-to-end operations. Under fault conditions, commands received from A and/or B are lead to the NSD570 outputs at T, which are series-connected to the protection relay input (wired AND), but received command signals are only through-connected when at least one command originates at T. In contrast to the NSD570 Digital the received guard signals of the NSD570 Analog are through-connected as well when a command is originating at T. Consequentially the boosting facility is disabled in the NSD570 Analog devices configured for Inverse T-Operation, but the boosting output on the Analog Interface G3LA is still operated when a command is injected at T. Commands originating at T are therefore not transmitted towards A and B; they just through-connect received guard (NSD570 Analog only) and command signals. No provisions are made for individual through-connection of specific command signals. Any command signal received from A is sent to B, and vice versa, when some command originates at T. All ends must thus transmit command signals to generate a receive command state at any end, and the operating principle of the inverse NSD570 T-operation is to perform all required AND combinations of permissive overreach tripping commands in the intermediate T stations. The command delays due the signal through-connections at
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
T are small and may be ignored in practical operation, but the application is generally confined to one command per end, because command signals cannot be selectively through-connected at T. Loop tests may be initiated at all stations; test signals from the outer stations are either reflected from the T station or from the remote outer station (when a command is injected at the T station) and thus test the complete teleprotection system. Transmitter and receivers of the analog version must use the same bandwidth and center frequencies in "inverse" T-operation, while endto-end operation allows a different transmit and receive channel bandwidth. The digital interfaces of the two links in a digital T-operation scheme may be different, i.e. one link may use the G.703 interface of G3LD while the other uses the RS-530 interface. In the "inverse" T-operation the EOC is operating between the outer stations A and T respectively B and T (when no command is injected at the T station) or - in case of the analog version and only if the guard signal is transmitted - between the outer stations A and B (when a command is injected at the T station). In a digital scheme the EOC always operates between A and T respectively B and T, independent of the command state in T. Please refer to Section 5 "Configuration and settings" of this manual for details about configuring command application and "inverse" Toperation mode.
3.6.7.3.
Addressing of NSD570 Digital in T-operation

For point-to-point links, the local address must be the same as the remote address at the opposite end of the line. The remote address is included in the outgoing signal and compared with the local address by the receiver. The address of the station for which the signal is intended thus forms part of the signal transmitted. The programming is somewhat special in teed stations. In normal Toperation (Section 3.6.7.1), the incoming signal is relayed through the teed station as long as no local command is being activated, i.e. the address in the incoming signal is also relayed unchanged. Should the protection in the teed station trip, the tripping signal is generated locally and has to be transmitted to the other stations with the same address information than previously. Thus in the teed station both the local and remote addresses applied to the Digital Interface G3LD are identical with the address in the incoming signal.
System Description
April 2004
3-83
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Local address: 15 Remote address: 23
B
TX TX RX TX
TX
RX RX RX
TPE 1 TX RX RX
TPE 2 TX
TX
RX
3-Normal-T-operation-with-digital-addresses.vsd
Fig. 3.29
Addressing example for normal T-operation
In inverse T-operation (Section 3.6.7.2), the outgoing signal in the teed station is generated locally in the quiescent state and in case a local command is being activated the incoming signal is relayed to the other stations. Since there are two independent links A-T and B-T in the quiescent state, the digital addresses have to be configured correspondingly.
B
TX TX RX TX
TX
RX RX RX
T
TPE 1 TPE 2
TX
RX
RX
TX
TX
RX
3-Inverse-T-operation-with-digital-addresses.vsd
Fig. 3.30
Addressing example for inverse T-operation
3-84
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3.6.7.4.
Tapped lines
(See also Direct Transfer Tripping, Section 3.6.6; Transformer Protection, Section 3.6.6.5) Stepped distance/time protection relays are well suited for multi-ended circuit applications involving transformer tapping points; the setting of their zone 1 coverage is eased, because it may reach into part of the transformer impedance, and a permissive underreaching transfer tripping scheme may be chosen for line protection. The transformers are often connected to the main circuit with circuitbreakers only on the secondary lower voltage sides; they usually supply loads and are less important than the main circuit, but power feedback to the main circuit may occur during fault conditions. The line protection must then be arranged to trip the breakers at the main circuit ends and some or all secondary-side circuit-breakers at the tapping points. Transformer faults cannot be detected by the main circuit protection, and a transformer protection must initiate tripping of its secondary-side circuit-breaker and transmission of direct tripping commands to the circuit-breakers at the main circuit ends and to some or all other circuit-breakers at the tapping points. Fast transmission, high dependability and high security are required as in all direct transfer tripping applications. Received direct tripping commands are usually arranged to cause three-phase tripping and re-closure lock out. Command transmission of limited duration is sufficient to achieve wanted operation, and subsequent restoration to normal operation is then accomplished by SCADA commands after that the faulty transformer has been disconnected from the main circuit. NSD570 in normal T-operation (refer to Section 3.6.7.1) are suitable for such applications, when direct tripping is arranged to take priority over blocking or permissive underreach tripping. In cases of important main circuits and tapping points, automatic reclosure may be required to follow tripping and disconnection of the faulty transformer by a motor-operated isolator. Command transmission must then be arranged to continue until the faulty transformer has been isolated from the main circuit; it must first be ensured that the circuit-breakers at all ends have tripped, and the use of further communication facilities is thus required. Please refer to Section 5 "Configuration and settings" of this manual for details about configuring command application and "normal" Toperation mode.
System Description
April 2004
3-85
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
3.6.8. 3.6.8.1.
Phase-Segregated Command Transmission Twin Line - Two Systems on Common Towers

E E
T1
T2
T1
R2
S1
S2
S1
S2
R1
R2
R1
T2
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
3-Twin-line.vsd
Fig. 3.31
Twin Line - Two Systems on Common Towers
The conductor arrangement in Fig. 2 is often preferred, because it provides a better balance of the line capacitances to earth than the arrangement shown in Fig1. Suppose now that a lightning stroke close to the line induces a voltage adding to all phase voltages, and suppose that this causes insulation breakdown on the phase T conductor of the circuit 1 and flash-over across a T1 insulator shown on Fig. 2, somewhere in the center portion of the line. Suppose further that insulation breakdown occurs a moment later on the phase R conductor of the circuit 2 (subsequent flash-over across a neighboring R2 insulator). In a POTT scheme, the circuit 1 and 2 protection relays are then in this situation: Underimpedance/undervoltage/overcurrent start relays detect phase-to-ground fault on phases R and T; the distance relays on both circuits transmit permissive tripping commands; permissive tripping commands (without phase names) are received at all line
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
ends; the received commands in combination with the local phase informations result in three-phase tripping * at all line ends, because the line protections believe that they are faced with either a phaseto-phase fault on both circuits, or with an intercircuit fault. A PUTT scheme would behave similarly, at least at one line end.
* The usual strategy is to use three-pole tripping in case of two-phase or threephase faults. Single-pole fault clearance may be used in case of phase-toground faults, if the protection and the power system arrangement permits; however, some power utilities are afraid of negative sequence and never use single-pole tripping.
That was an unnecessary and unwanted action, because the phase conductors R1 and T2 and both phase conductors S1 and S2 were healthy; it would have been sufficient to trip the phase T circuit breakers on circuit 1 and the phase R circuit breakers at the circuit 2 ends. Correct single-pole fault clearance can be achieved on both circuits when phase names are attached to the permissive tripping commands, e.g. if phase-segregated command transmission is used in a POTT scheme. This requires the use of three line protection commands (R, S, T) instead of only one permissive tripping command on each circuit, and the tripping action of a received R, S or T command must be made dependent of the local R, S or T fault detecting devices (logical AND combination, or series wiring).
3.6.8.2.
Long Single EHV Overhead Line

About 85 percent of all faults at the higher voltage levels occur on overhead lines and are single phase to ground faults of a temporary nature, e.g. caused by lightning. Provided that fast fault clearance is achieved, they do not spread to other conductors and usually do not result in permanent damage; the fault must be isolated for about 0.3 seconds to de-ionize the fault path, and the circuit can usually be successfully re-energized after about 0.5 seconds. Consider a single-circuit overhead line and suppose now that a lightning stroke has induced a voltage adding to all phase voltages, and that this causes insulation breakdown and flash-over across a phase R insulator somewhere on the line. Both line ends then detect a phase R to ground fault, and the circuit breakers are tripped at both line ends, either single-phase or three-phase, as appropriate and preprogrammed.
System Description
April 2004
3-87
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Longer EHV overhead lines sometimes exhibit a somewhat peculiar transient response upon re-closure, and the generating centers at the line ends may be slightly out of phase when the circuit breakers reclose, which may cause the line protection relays to pick up sporadically. This may result in unwanted re-tripping and re-closure lock-out, at least at one line end. It is noted that the re-closures at the line ends are not synchronized. When the last circuit breaker re-closes, the line protections at both ends may pick up sporadically and indicate a transient fault on phase R at one end and on phase T at the other end. Re-tripping and reclosure lock-out can be avoided under such conditions when phase names are attached to the permissive tripping commands, e.g. if phase-segregated command transmission is used in a POTT scheme; the tripping action of a received R, S or T command must then be made dependent of the local R, S or T fault detecting devices (logical AND combination). If a blocking scheme is used for line protection, the line end feeding outward fault current transmits a blocking command to the remote end in case of an external fault to prevent possible tripping due to infeed of inward fault current. Some users let this blocking command stand on the line for about 0.75 seconds, i.e. for a time sufficiently long to prevent unwanted tripping if the protection at the line end feeding inward fault current should pick up sporadically when the circuit breakers on the adjacent line section re-close. It is further noted that a distance relay set to underreach in a PUTT scheme may be switched to overreach while a re-closure pulse is applied to the line circuit breaker; this allows fast a fault clearance independent of communication facilities *, e.g. if a metallic connection exists across the insulation. Such rare faults are usually due to failure to remove grounding connections before replacing a circuit into service; they are normally three-phase and may cause considerable disturbance to the power system, in particular when they are close to a busbar. They are therefore usually considered to be permanent faults, requiring three-phase tripping and re-closure lock-out.
*
A power line carrier link is obviously unable to work, when maintenance work is done on the overhead line and maintenance grounds are placed at the working location, and the line is three-phase grounded at both ends.
3-88
April 2004
System Description
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
4.
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.5.1. 4.5.2. 4.6. 4.6.1. 4.6.2. 4.7. 4.8. 4.8.1. 4.8.1.1. 4.8.1.2. 4.8.1.3. 4.8.1.4. 4.9. 4.9.1. 4.9.2. 4.10. 4.10.1. 4.10.2. 4.10.3. 4.10.4. 4.10.5. 4.10.6. 4.10.7. 4.10.7.1. 4.10.7.2. 4.10.7.3. 4.10.8. 4.10.8.1. 4.10.8.2. 4.10.8.3. 4.10.8.4.
User interface program

Introduction .............................................................................. 4-3 Safety instruction ..................................................................... 4-4 System requirements and technical data for the HMI570 ........ 4-4 Installation of the HMI570 ........................................................ 4-4 Communication between the HMI570 PC and the NSD570..... 4-5 Local connection ...................................................................... 4-5 Remote connection over (EOC)............................................... 4-6 Communication between the HMI570 LAN and the NSD570... 4-6 Remote connection over LAN / WAN / Internet........................ 4-6 Security considerations for connections over Internet.............. 4-7 Multiple connection .................................................................. 4-8 Browser front end .................................................................... 4-9 Browser Settings...................................................................... 4-9 Internet Explorer 5.x............................................................... 4-10 Internet Explorer 6 ................................................................. 4-10 Mozilla 1.x, Netscape 6.x / 7.x ............................................... 4-11 Additional browser settings for the HMI570 LAN ................... 4-12 Starting the program .............................................................. 4-13 HMI570 PC ............................................................................ 4-13 HMI570 LAN .......................................................................... 4-13 Operation ............................................................................... 4-14 Introduction ............................................................................ 4-14 Basic operation principles ...................................................... 4-14 Design.................................................................................... 4-14 Login / Logoff ......................................................................... 4-15 User Administration and Permissions .................................... 4-15 Change password .................................................................. 4-17 Connect / Disconnect Device................................................. 4-17 Connect Device ..................................................................... 4-18 Error messages and troubleshooting ..................................... 4-19 Disconnect Device ................................................................. 4-20 Configuration ......................................................................... 4-21 Load From Disk ..................................................................... 4-21 View Configuration................................................................. 4-21 Edit Configuration .................................................................. 4-21 Save To Disk ......................................................................... 4-24
User interface program April 2004 4-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.10.8.5. 4.10.8.6. 4.10.8.7. 4.10.9. 4.10.9.1. 4.10.9.2. 4.10.9.3. 4.10.9.4. 4.10.9.5. 4.10.9.6. 4.10.10. 4.10.10.1. 4.10.10.2. 4.10.10.3. 4.10.11. 4.10.11.1. 4.10.11.2. 4.10.11.3. 4.10.11.4. 4.10.11.5. 4.10.11.6. 4.10.11.7. 4.10.12. 4.10.13. 4.10.13.1. 4.10.13.2. 4.10.13.3. 4.10.13.4. 4.10.13.5. 4.10.13.6. 4.10.13.7. 4.10.13.8. 4.10.13.9. 4.10.13.10. 4.10.13.11. 4.10.13.12. 4.10.13.13. 4.10.14. 4.10.14.1. 4.10.14.2. 4.10.14.3. 4.10.14.4.
Discard Configuration ............................................................ 4-24 Download To Device.............................................................. 4-24 Upload From Device .............................................................. 4-24 Event Recorder...................................................................... 4-25 Load From Disk ..................................................................... 4-25 View Events ........................................................................... 4-25 Save To Disk ......................................................................... 4-25 Upload Events ....................................................................... 4-25 Clear Event Recorder ............................................................ 4-25 Import events into a spreadsheet or word processing tool..... 4-26 Status / Alarm ........................................................................ 4-26 Upload Status ........................................................................ 4-26 Upload Alarm ......................................................................... 4-27 Trip Counter........................................................................... 4-27 Maintenance .......................................................................... 4-27 Manual Loop Test .................................................................. 4-27 Reset Device ......................................................................... 4-28 Previous Configuration........................................................... 4-28 Set Time and Date ................................................................. 4-28 Get Time and Date................................................................. 4-28 Device Communication .......................................................... 4-29 Firmware Download ............................................................... 4-29 Commissioning ...................................................................... 4-30 Alarm Polling.......................................................................... 4-30 Impact when the Alarm Polling is started ............................... 4-32 Start Alarm Polling ................................................................. 4-33 Stop Alarm Polling ................................................................. 4-33 Configure Alarm Polling ......................................................... 4-33 Graphical View....................................................................... 4-34 View Entire Logfile ................................................................. 4-35 View Latest 50 Entries ........................................................... 4-35 Clear Entire Logfile ................................................................ 4-35 Refresh Page......................................................................... 4-35 Stop Refreshing ..................................................................... 4-35 Start Auto Pop-Up.................................................................. 4-35 Stop Auto Pop-Up .................................................................. 4-35 Multiple users......................................................................... 4-36 HMI570 Options..................................................................... 4-36 Device Communication .......................................................... 4-36 LAN Interface......................................................................... 4-36 About ..................................................................................... 4-37 Exit HMI570 ........................................................................... 4-37
4-2
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.
4.1.

Introduction
The HMI570 software is the interface between the user and the NSD570 system. Therefore it is an integral component of the NSD570 equipment family. It allows the user to commission, configure and monitor a NSD570 device. The HMI570 has a client / server architecture. This means that the application runs on a server and the user interacts with the application through a web browser (client). There are two different kinds of HMI570 applications available:
The HMI570 PC can be installed from CD onto a PC/Notebook and allows connecting an NSD570 device locally and remote over EOC. This kind allows no connection over LAN/WAN but no LAN interface G3LL is needed. The HMI570 LAN needs a NSD570 LAN Interface (G3LL) in the NSD570 rack. It allows connecting an NSD570 device remotely over LAN/WAN.
The HMI570 supports:
Configuration of NSD570 systems Commissioning of NSD570 links Monitoring of NSD570 devices.
To establish a connection to the NSD570 system, the HMI570 has to communicate with the NSD570 device, see Section 4.5. Communication between the HMI570 PC and the NSD570. Some functions of the HMI570 can also be used without a device connected. Configuration data entered into the HMI570 in this mode can be saved to file for later use or data fetched previously from a device and saved to file can be analyzed and visualized later with the HMI570.
April 2004
4-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.2.
Safety instruction
Caution
The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commissioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote test mode). However, when a user is logged in with only "view permission", it is not possible to disable the device. During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation the "Reset Device" link in the Maintenance menu of the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for approx. 10 seconds. During this time no commands can be transmitted.
It is recommended to disconnect the PC / notebook from the LAN while running the HMI570 and connecting a device via the RS-232 interface.
Caution
Note:
4.3.
System requirements and technical data for the HMI570

Please refer to 1KHW000894 Software Installation Description HMI570.
4.4.
Installation of the HMI570

Please refer to 1KHW000894 Software Installation Description HMI570.
4-4
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.5.
Communication between the HMI570 PC and the NSD570

To connect the HMI570 PC running on a PC to a NSD570 via the RS-232 interface on the front panel, a 9-pole 1:1 modem cable (female to male) is required. Also the handshake signals (RTS and CTS) must be 1:1 connected. In case the COM port of the PC has a 25-pole RS-232 connector, an adapter (25-pole female to 9-pole male) is needed. The default baud rate (57600) requires a cable length below 3 meters.
Parameter Baud rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control
Setting 57600 8 None 1 RTS, CTS handshake
Table 4.1
RS-232 default interface settings
4.5.1.
Local connection
Substation A Station bus NSD570 TPE 1 100 TPE 2 101 NSD570 A1 RS232 Device address TPE 1 120 TPE 2 121 NSD570 A2
HMI570
4-Local-connection.vsd
Fig. 4.1
Example for local connection
A connection between the PC / notebook allows to connect all NSD570 that are within a substation and wired by the station bus. In the example above, the devices with address 100, 101, 120 and 121 can be connected via a local connection.
Note: Every NSD570 line interface within a substation must have a unique device address.
April 2004
4-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.5.2.
Remote connection over (EOC)

Embedded operation channel (EOC) Substation A Station bus NSD570 TPE 1 100 TPE 2 101 TPE 1 120 TPE 2 121 NSD570 A2 Device address TPE 1 220 TPE 2 221 NSD570 B1 Substation B
NSD570 A1 RS232
HMI570
4-Remote-connection.vsd
Fig. 4.2
Remote connection over EOC
Note:
This remote connection is only possible if both devices (the local and the remote) have the EOC switched on.
A connection over EOC allows connecting the remote peer device of a link. In the example above, a remote connection with device address 100 effectively connects device 220.
4.6. 4.6.1.
Communication between the HMI570 LAN and the NSD570 Remote connection over LAN / WAN / Internet
Substation A
Station bus
TPE1 100
NSD570 F1 TPE2 120
LAN Interface
Substation F
TPE1 100
TPE2 101 NSD570 A1
LAN Interface
TPE1 120
NSD570 A2
TPE2 121
Device address
LAN / WAN Internet
HMI570
4-Remote-connection.vsd
Fig. 4.3
Remote connection over LAN / WAN / Internet
In the example above, the devices with address 100, 101, 120 and 121 in Substation A can be connected from the HMI570 LAN via the LAN Interface in the NSD570 A1 rack. The devices with address 100, 120 in Substation B can be connected from the HMI570 LAN via the LAN
4-6 April 2004 User interface program
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Interface in the NSD570 F1 rack. The LAN Interfaces and the subsequent NSD570 devices can be distinguished by their IP address. However it is recommended to use unique NSD570 Device Addresses in a network (not as in the example above). Encrypted SSL connections are strongly recommended for communication channels that are not secure (e.g. Internet). Additionally, remote connection over Internet requires appropriate security measures (see Section 4.6.2). Never connect a NSD570 LAN Interface directly to the Internet!
Caution
Note:
This connection over LAN / WAN / Internet needs a LAN Interface G3LL plugged in the NSD570 module rack and connected to the corresponding communication media.
4.6.2.
Security considerations for connections over Internet

Recommended security measures:
Never connect a NSD570 LAN Interface directly to the Internet, there must be at least a firewall in between. Only use encrypted SSL connections to access the HMI570 LAN running on the NSD570 LAN Interface G3LL.
April 2004
4-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.7.
Multiple connection
Substation A Station bus
TPE1 100 NSD570 A1 Device address
TPE2 101
LAN Interface
TPE1 120 NSD570 A2
TPE2 121
RS232 HMI570 LAN / WAN Internet
HMI570
4-Multiple-connection.vsd
Fig. 4.4
Multiple connection from local and remote
Note:
Do not connect a device simultaneously from local and from remote site.
Substation A
Station bus
NSD570
TPE 1 100
TPE 2 101
TPE 1 120
TPE 2 121
NSD570 A2
NSD570 A1
RS232
RS232
HMI570
HMI570
4-Multiple-connection.vsd
Fig. 4.5
Multiple connection via the station bus
Note:
Do not plug more than simultaneously to NSD570 interconnected by a station bus.
one PC/notebook racks that are
4-8
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.8.
Browser front end

The HMI570 uses a web browser as front end (client part). This means that all interactions between the user and the HMI570 take place in a web browser window. Several web browsers supporting HTTP/1.1 and HTML 4 can be used as HMI570 front end. Subsequently listed are the web browsers that are recommended to use:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.x Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Mozilla 1.2 or higher (http://www.mozilla.org) Netscape 7.0 or higher (http://www.netscape.org)
4.8.1.
Browser Settings
In order to run the HMI570 properly, the following settings of the web browser must be configured:
Cookies must be enabled File download must be enabled The HMI570 pages must not be cached Bypass proxy server for local address and for the IP addresses that are used for the HMI570 LAN Interface JavaScript must be enabled
Detailed instructions will follow how you can set this for the most common browsers.
April 2004
4-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.8.1.1.
Internet Explorer 5.x

Enable Cookies Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Options Security choose local intranet press button Custom Level Cookies: Enable all cookies settings
Enable File Download Menu bar at the top Tools press button Custom Level Enable Internet Options Security Downloads File Download:
Avoid caching of HMI570 Pages Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Options General press button Settings (under Temporary Internet Files) Check for newer versions of stored pages: Select: Automatically
Bypass proxy server for local address Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Options Connection press button LAN Settings If the checkbox Use a proxy server is activated, also activate the checkbox Bypass proxy server for local address
Enable JavaScript Menu bar at the top choose local intranet Scripting: enable Tools Internet Options Security press button Custom Level Active
4.8.1.2.
Internet Explorer 6
Enable Cookies Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Option the Slider to the bottom (Accept all cookies) The META refresh tag must also be enabled: Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Option Enable Allow META REFRESH Security Privacy Move
Enable File Download Menu bar at the top Tools press button Custom Level Enable Internet Options Security Downloads File Download:
4-10
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Avoid caching of HMI570 Pages Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Option General press button Settings (under Temporary Internet Files) Check for newer versions of stored pages: Select: Automatically
Bypass proxy server for local address Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Option Connection press button LAN Settings If the checkbox Use a proxy server for your LAN is activated, also activate the checkbox Bypass proxy server for local address
Enable JavaScript Menu bar at the top choose local intranet Scripting: enable Tools Internet Options Security press button Custom Level Active
4.8.1.3.
Mozilla 1.x, Netscape 6.x / 7.x

Enable Cookies Menu bar at the top Edit Preferences Cookies Select: Enable all cookies Privacy & Security
Avoid caching of HMI570 Pages Menu bar at the top Edit Preferences Advanced Cache Select: Every time I view the page or when the page is out of date
Bypass proxy server for local address Menu bar at the top Edit Preferences Advanced Proxies If the checkbox Manual proxy configuration is activated, type localhost in the field No Proxy for
Enable JavaScript Menu bar at the top Edit Preferences & Windows Enable Script for Navigator Advanced Scripts
April 2004
4-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.8.1.4.
Additional browser settings for the HMI570 LAN

There are additional browser settings to observe when using the HMI570 LAN
Bypass proxy server for the IP addresses that are used for HMI570 LAN Interfaces
Internet Explorer 5.x and 6
Bypass proxy server for the IP addresses that are used for HMI570 LAN Interfaces Menu bar at the top Tools Internet Option Connection press button LAN Settings If the checkbox Use a proxy server for your LAN is activated, press the button Advanced. The window Proxy Settings opens. Enter the proxy IP address and port in the upper part of the window (inside the frame Servers). In lower part (inside the frame Exceptions) enter the IP addresses that are used for HMI570 LAN Interfaces.
Mozilla 1.x, Netscape 6.x / 7.x
Bypass proxy server for the IP addresses that are used for HMI570 LAN Interfaces Menu bar at the top Edit Preferences Advanced Proxies If the checkbox Manual proxy configuration is activated, enter the IP addresses that are used for HMI570 LAN Interfaces in the field No Proxy for.
4-12
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.9. 4.9.1.
Starting the program HMI570 PC

On the taskbar Start Programs HMI570-Shortcut Folder start HMI570 starts the HMI570. The server will be started and also a browser (Internet Explorer). If you would like to use another browser than Internet Explorer or the Internet Explorer does not start properly, restart the browser and type in the URL: http://localhost:10570/hmi570/index.jsp
Note: It is not possible to run more than one HMI570 application parallel on the same PC / notebook. Nevertheless it would be possible to open another browser window, type in the above URL and connect a different NSD570 (for the time being this is applicable and verified for Internet Explorer only).
4.9.2.
HMI570 LAN
Start a web browser (Internet Explorer, Mozilla, Netscape) and type in the following URL: http://<IP_LAN_Interface>/hmi570/index.jsp To access the LAN Interface over an encrypted SSL connection, use the subsequent URL: https://<IP_LAN_Interface>/hmi570/index.jsp where <IP_LAN_Interface> is the IP address of the LAN Interface that shall be connected (e.g. http://172.20.162.54/hmi570/index.jsp).
Note:
The usage of an SSL connection requires a NSD570 LAN interface that is SSL enabled. Encrypted SSL connections are strongly recommended for communication channels that are not secure (e.g. Internet).
April 2004
4-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.10. 4.10.1.
Operation Introduction
This section outlines the operation of the HMI570. It describes the different menus and functions, how they can be executed and particularities to be regarded when using the HMI570. It is recommended to read this chapter thoroughly before beginning to work with the HMI570.
4.10.2.
Basic operation principles

Due to the nature of the HMI570 as client / server software, there are some operation principles that may be different to other software tools:
Do not use the buttons from the toolbars of the browser (in particular do not use "Back", "Forward", "Stop", "Refresh" or Reload). A few functions need somewhat longer to execute. This execution time depends on the speed of the PC/notebook. The progress bar at the bottom right side of the browser shows the progress of the executed function. Do not use the "Stop" button from the browser toolbar because this will not stop the execution. Do not start another function by clicking a menu item before the previous function has finished. Do not edit manually the URL (web address). Do not close the browser window manually to exit the HMI570. Instead click on Exit HMI570 on the left side of the window.
4.10.3.
Design
The HMI570 window is divided into three parts. At the top there is a header with the logos and the green Status Box. At the left side there are the menu items. The display sector on the right hand side of the menu shows the information and input fields of the currently executed function, e.g. status, alarm, configuration info. Status Box The green box in the top right corner is the Status Box. It shows the name of the user that is logged in, the permissions the user has, the name of the configuration that is loaded, the name and address of the device that is connected and what kind of interface is used (analog or digital).
4-14
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.10.4.
Login / Logoff
Before starting to work with the HMI570, logging in with username and password is required. Click on "Log In" in the menu bar and type in username and password. To confirm, click on the "Log In" button or press "Enter".
Note: Username and password are case sensitive.
There are three predefined users: User: Administrator Service Operator Password: welcome welcome welcome Permissions: admin, modify, view view, modify view
Note:
For security reasons the passwords should be changed immediately after the installation of the HMI570.
After logging in, the username and the permissions are indicated in the green Status Box on the top. It is possible to add and delete users and to change the passwords and permissions. This is described in Section 4.10.5. User Administration and Permissions. To log off, just click on Log Off in the menu bar. It is recommended to disconnect the device first, before logging off.
4.10.5.
User Administration and Permissions

In this menu item, users can be added or deleted, permissions and passwords can be changed. Log in as a user with "admin" permission, e.g. Administrator. Click on User Administration. Add new User Type the name of a new user into the text field and click on the "Add new user" button. Set the permissions of the new user and press the "Change" button to confirm. To add a password, choose "Edit user" for the wanted user, type in the new password and confirm with "Set".
April 2004
4-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Delete User Click on "Edit user" button of the user to be deleted. Press "Delete User" to delete the user or "Cancel" to skip. Permissions View: a user with view permission can monitor an NSD570 but he/she can neither disturb a link nor clear any data stored on the NSD570. For details see the table below. Modify: a user with modify permission can monitor the NSD570 and can make changes to the configuration of a device. Some functions that could disturb or disable a running NSD570 can also be executed. For details see the table below:
Action Load/save configuration from/to disk Load/save event recorder from/to disk Connect and disconnect device Upload status, alarm and trip counter from device Upload configuration and event recorder from device Discard configuration in HMI Execute manual loop test Reset device Reset trip counter Set time and date Firmware download Change baud rate for device communication Clear event recorder of device Download configuration to device Execute commissioning functions Table 4.2 Permissions View and Modify View Permission X X X X X X X Modify Permission X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4-16
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Admin: admin permission allows the user to access the User Administration menu and make changes to the user settings, as described above. The permissions are also displayed in the green Status Box, when a user is logged in.
4.10.6.
Change password
A user without admin permission can only change his/her own password. Log in as a user without "admin" permission, e.g. Operator. Click on User Administration. The logged in user is prompted to type in a new password. The "update" button sets the new password.
4.10.7.
Connect / Disconnect Device

For details about different connections see Section Communication between the HMI570 PC and the NSD570. 4.5.
Local Connection: The HMI570 PC/notebook is physically and logically connected to the local NSD570.
Remote Connection over Embedded Operation Channel (EOC): The HMI570 PC/notebook is physically connected to the local NSD570. The logical connection is made to the remote peer device of the link.
Note: This remote connection is only possible if both devices (the local and the remote) have the EOC switched on.
A remote connection over EOC has the drawback of a slow communication between the HMI570 and the remote device. The respond time of the HMI570 may increase drastically (especially with an analog link). Please be patient and do not press any button from the toolbars of the browser.
Note:
April 2004
4-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.10.7.1.
Connect Device
To connect a device, click on Connect Device and then type in the device address. Choose between local or remote over EOC. Please note: to connect remotely, type the address of the local device and check the remote over EOC box. If the device address is unknown use 241 for the device plugged in TPE 1 respectively 246 for TPE 2. These addresses are the default addresses of the rack and cannot be used as device addresses. To connect a device with the default address, the two buttons TPE 1 and TPE 2 below Connect with Local Default Address can be used.
Note: If a device shall be connected with the default address, the station bus of this rack must be disconnected (because the devices TPE 1 or TPE 2 of all other racks share the same default address).
The device address range is from 1 to 240. If the connection is successful, information of the device will be displayed, an example is shown next: Device connected Analog line interface Device address DSP firmware version Controller firmware version Configuration version 101 local 1.05 1.03 1.00
The green Status Box displays the name and address of the connected device and what kind of interface is in use (digital, analog). A boot failure of the device is indicated by the red Fail LED on the frontplate whereas all other LEDs are off. In this case it is possible to connect the device with address 255. It is recommended to disconnect the station bus and plug off one line interface in the rack first, before connecting with 255 to the other line interface. After a successful connection to the device with address 255, execute a firmware download, see Section 4.10.11.7. Firmware Download.
4-18
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.10.7.2.
Error messages and troubleshooting

Error! The device is already connected by another user/ application Only one connection to a device can be established at the same time. If there already is a connection to the device it must be disrupted before a new connection can be established. If a session is aborted (the browser window was closed for example) with a device connected to, this device cannot be reconnected before the aborted session is timed out (this will take a maximum of 60 minutes). The only possible faster solution is to stop and restart the HMI570.
Note: Stop and restart of the HMI570 LAN is not possible (remote connection over LAN / WAN / Internet). See Section 4.10.14.2 LAN Interface what to do in this case (Reset communication). Error! Device communication, timeout The device could not be reached. Several reasons are possible: 1. The HMI570 PC / notebook is not or not correctly connected to the NSD570 check the cabling, try a shorter cable according to Section 4.5 2. The device address is wrong verify the device address or try it with the default device address 3. The NSD570 is not running verify that the desired device is running 4. The parameters for the Device Communication of the HMI570 and the NSD570 do not correspond try to connect the NSD570 with another baud rate 5. The station bus is not correctly wired check the cabling of the station bus Error ! Device communication is busy ! Please try it later again Another user is connected communication channel. to a device and occupies the
Note:
If it is not possible to connect the device after some retries, stop and restart the HMI570 PC. Stop and restart of the HMI570 LAN is not possible (remote connection over LAN / WAN / Internet). See Section 4.10.14.2 LAN Interface what to do in this case (Reset communication).
April 2004
4-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
COM port is not available or owned by another application The COM (RS-232) port cannot be used by the HMI570. Two reasons are possible. 1. The HMI570 PC / notebook does not support the desired COM port (RS-232) check the COM ports of the PC / notebook and the HMI570 settings 2. Another application uses the COM (RS-232) port stop the application that uses the COM port Error! This configuration version is not supported The firmware version of the device is not compatible with the HMI570. update the HMI570 to the latest version. The menu item Connect Device cannot be selected First make sure that you are logged in (see 4.10.4 Login / Logoff). If you are logged in and Connect Device is still not selectable, it is possible that another user has started the Alarm Polling (see Section 4.10.13 Alarm Polling). This can happen only when using the HMI570 LAN. The browser shows the error
"Connection Timed Out", response (504)
This can happen when the user tries to connect a device remotely over the EOC with the HMI570 LAN. In case of the NSD570 Analog it may take a long time due to the low transmission rate of the EOC. When the connection between the NSD570 LAN Interface (where the HMI570 LAN runs) and the browser goes over a proxy server, this timeout error comes from the proxy. To avoid the error, the browser must be configured to bypass the proxy for the NSD570 LAN Interface, see 4.8.1.4 Additional browser settings for the HMI570 LAN.
4.10.7.3.
Disconnect Device
To disconnect the device, click on Disconnect Device in the menu bar.
Note: It is strongly recommended to disconnect a device as soon as there are no more intentions to interact with it any longer.
April 2004 User interface program
4-20
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.10.8. 4.10.8.1.
Configuration Load From Disk

If Load From Disk is not accessible, the current configuration has to be discarded first, see Section 4.10.8.5. Discard Configuration. Load Default Configuration Loading a default configuration is a good start for the configuration of a NSD570 device. There are four default configurations:
Default_TPE1_Analog.xml Default_TPE2_Analog.xml Default_TPE1_Digital.xml Default_TPE2_Digital.xml Analog Line Interface TPE 1 plugged at the left side of the rack (slot N28) Analog Line Interface TPE 2 plugged at the right side of the rack (slot N58) Digital Line Interface TPE 1 plugged at the left side of the rack (slot N28) Digital Line Interface TPE 2 plugged at the right side of the rack (slot N58)
Click on the according load button to load a default configuration. Load Configuration from local disk An earlier saved configuration can be loaded from the local disk. Click on Load Configuration and then the Browse button to select the file on your local disk, press the load button afterwards.
4.10.8.2.
View Configuration
Choose this menu item to view the entire configuration of the NSD570 on one browser page. This gives an overview of all the settings and is especially intended for printing out the configuration.
4.10.8.3.
Edit Configuration
If a configuration is loaded (either from disk or uploaded from a device) Edit Configuration allows viewing and editing the settings. The Edit Configuration submenus are further described below. The first three submenus (Device Information, Hardware Versions and Firmware Versions) are not editable. To edit a configuration parameter, choose the submenu, click on the edit button and type in the desired values or choose them from a dropdown list. If the changes are to be skipped, click on the cancel button. Click on the update button to confirm.
April 2004
4-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Note:
Clicking the update button confirms only a change of the parameters stored inside the HMI570, it has no influence to a connected device.
Device Information Contains the type of the interface (analog, digital), the position where it is plugged in, the serial number and the counter of the firmware and configuration downloads. Hardware Versions Displays the hardware versions of the plugged modules. The power supply units have no version coding. Firmware Versions Displays the firmware version of the Micro Controller and the Digital Signal Processor (DSP). Device Identification Contains the version of the configuration, the configuration type (analog, digital), the name of the station, the HE number and the device address. Common Settings In this menu item the settings for the Extra Delay and Pulse Duration for Unblocking and for the Pickup Time and Hold Time for Link Failure can be edited, the Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) for remote connection can be enabled and the settings for GPS Synchronization can be configured. Analog Interface (only shown for analog configuration types) Defines the Line Type, the Rx and Tx Bandwidth, the Center Frequencies and the Analog Operating Mode. Power Boost, Unblocking Threshold, Rx and Tx Level and Alarm Threshold can also be changed. Digital Interface (only shown for digital configuration types) There are seven different types of digital and optical interfaces: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. G703 64kbps codirectional RS-530 E1 2048kbps T1 1544kbps Optical Direct Fiber Optical FOX/OTERM Optical IEEE C37.94
4-22
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Every interface type allows the configuration of the following parameters: Digital Address Check (on/off), Local Digital Address, Remote Digital Address, Bit Error Rate (BER) Alarm Threshold. Additional parameters per interface may be changed (type specific). Command Settings Contains the settings for every command. If the application is set to off, the corresponding command cannot be used. If Tx Trip Duration Monitoring is enabled, the Max. Tx Trip Duration can be given in seconds. Tx Input Delay and Rx Prolongation is given in milliseconds. Relay Interface Displays the settings for the relay interfaces. If the interfaces are used, commands can individually be mapped to the inputs and outputs of the relay interfaces. Alarm Settings The Pickup Time and Hold Time can be set. User Alarms 1...3 can be configured to combine some different alarms into a user alarm. Jumper Settings Displays the jumper settings for the Relay Interfaces and the Analog Interface.
Note: These parameters have no influence on the device and must be set manually for documentation purpose.
Rack Assembly Displays the type of the plugged components and boards.
Note:
These parameters have no influence on the device and must be set manually for documentation purpose.
April 2004
4-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.10.8.4.
Save To Disk
The configuration can be saved to disk. Choose Save To Disk in the menu. Click with the left mouse button on the link and choose "Save this file to disk" and select the destination folder. It is recommended to save configurations with the extension *.xml.
4.10.8.5.
Discard Configuration
Discards the current configuration of the HMI570. Has neither influence on the connected device nor on a saved configuration. After discarding a configuration it is possible to upload a configuration or load one from the local disk.
4.10.8.6.
Download To Device
Downloads the configuration to the device. It is recommended to save a configuration to disk (see Section 4.10.8.4. Save To Disk) before downloading to the device. To activate the downloaded configuration, reset the device after the download. The link gets disturbed during reset! A wrongly configured device can cause a malfunction of the teleprotection link! During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation the "Reset Device" link in the Maintenance menu of the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for approx. 10 seconds. During this time no commands can be transmitted.
Caution
4.10.8.7.
Upload From Device

Uploads a configuration from the device. If Upload From Device is not accessible, maybe there is no device connected (see Section 4.10.7.1. Connect Device) or the previously used configuration has not been discarded inside the HMI570 (see Section 4.10.8.5. Discard Configuration).
4-24
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.10.9.
Event Recorder
The event recorder is a feature of the NSD570 device. It logs command, alarm and manipulation events in the non-volatile memory of the NSD570. Every event is logged with a time stamp. To ensure the correctness of the time stamps, check time and time of the device, see Section 4.10.11.5. Get Time and Date. The event recorder can store approximately 7500 event entries. If this is exceeded, the oldest events will be overwritten.
4.10.9.1.
Load From Disk

Loads events from the local disk. Click on the Browse button to choose the file and press the load button.
4.10.9.2.
View Events
Shows the events available at the HMI570 (previously loaded from disk or uploaded from a device). It is also intended for printing the events.
4.10.9.3.
Save To Disk
Saves events available at the HMI570 to the local disk. Choose Save To Disk in the menu bar. Click with the left mouse button on the link and choose "Save this file to disk" and select the destination folder. It is recommended to save events with the ending *.xml.
4.10.9.4.
Upload Events
If Upload Events is not accessible, maybe no device is connected (Section 4.10.7.1 Connect Device). It is possible to upload and view the latest (last saved) 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000 or all entries of the Event Recorder.
4.10.9.5.
Clear Event Recorder

Clears the Event Recorder in the connected NSD570. After clicking Clear Event Recorder, pressing the clear button confirms the erasure of the Event Recorder. When the Event Recorder is cleared, only one entry is shown in the list: Event Recorder cleared.
Clear Event Recorder deletes all events recorded in an NSD570 device. It is not possible to restore them afterwards.
Note:
April 2004
4-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.10.9.6.
Import events into a spreadsheet or word processing tool

There are two ways to import events into a third party tool (e.g. Microsoft Excel): 1. The third party tool supports an XML file import Start the tool and import the saved NSD570 event file (*.xml). 2. Copy and paste Choose the menu Event Recorder, View Events and select the entire list of events or a part of it. Right click the selected events and choose "Copy". Change to the third party tool and insert the copied events.
4.10.10.
Status / Alarm
If Status / Alarm menu is not accessible, maybe no device is connected (see Section 4.10.7.1 Connect Device).
4.10.10.1.
Upload Status
Uploads the status information from the connected device. If the Status Upload was successful, the following information is displayed: Loop Test If a loop test has passed then the transmission time of the loop test is also indicated. Else Loop test did not pass! is shown without transmission time. Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) The results of the CRC memory checks are shown. The information about the Loop Test and CRC are shown on both analog and digital interface. Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) (NSD570 Analog Interface only) The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) in 4 kHz noise bandwidth is displayed for an NSD570 Analog device. Rx Level (NSD570 Analog Interface only) Receive level in dBm. Tx Level (NSD570 Analog Interface only) Transmit Level in dBm.
Note: The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and the Tx/Rx level measurement do only have an adequate accuracy if the EOC is switched off!
4-26
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Bit Error Rate (BER) (NSD570 Digital Interface only) The Bit Error Rate (BER) is displayed as 16 sec. average and 262 minutes average.
4.10.10.2.
Upload Alarm
Alarms are indicated by the red LED on the front panel of the NSD570. To view the alarms, upload them from the device by clicking on Upload Alarm. If no alarms occurred, the message no pending alarms is displayed.
4.10.10.3.
Trip Counter
The trip counters display the number of sent and received commands and loop tests of the connected device. The number of unblocking pulses is also shown. Each device has its own trip counter. Upload Trip Counter To upload and view the trip counters, click Upload Trip Counter. Reset Trip Counter Mark the checkbox of the command, loop test, unblocking counter(s) you want to delete and press the Reset Trip Counter button. Check All to delete all counters.
4.10.11.
Maintenance
If Maintenance is not accessible, maybe no device is connected (see Section 4.10.7.1 Connect Device). The user must have modify permission to execute the maintenance menu. Users having just view permission can only start a loop test. All other menu entries are prohibited.
4.10.11.1.
Manual Loop Test

Starts a loop test. If the loop test passes, the transmission time is displayed. If the loop test fails, an error message will appear and no transmission time is shown. The loop test state and the transmission time can be viewed in the status (see Section 4.10.10.1. Upload Status). A loop test can also be started by pushing the "Loop Test" button on the frontside of the NSD570.
April 2004
4-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.10.11.2.
Reset Device
Resets the connected device. After downloading a firmware or a configuration, you always have to reset the device. The link gets disturbed when a reset is executed! During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation the "Reset Device" in the Maintenance menu of the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for approx. 10 seconds. During this time no commands can be transmitted.
Caution
4.10.11.3.
Previous Configuration
When downloading a configuration, the device stores the previous configuration to fall back on in case the downloaded configuration does not work as expected. Execute Previous Configuration to switch to this fall back configuration and reset the device.
4.10.11.4.
Set Time and Date

Adjusting the Real Time Clock (RTC) of the device with the HMI570 PC, date and time are taken from the PC/Notebook connected to the device.
Note: The time and date of the PC/notebook must be correct to execute this function.
Adjusting the Real Time Clock (RTC) of the device with the HMI570 LAN, date and time are taken from the NSD570 LAN Interface.
Note:
The time and date of LAN Interface must be correct to execute this function, see 4.10.14.2 LAN Interface.
Set Time and Date executed with a connection to a remote device over EOC will mirror the time of the local device to the remote device. Therefore check first the time and date of the local device.
4.10.11.5.
Get Time and Date

Shows the current time and date of the connected device. To adjust time and date, see Section 4.10.11.4. Set Time and Date.
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.10.11.6.
Device Communication
The baud rate of the RS-232 connection to the connected NSD570 is changeable. There are three possible values: 57600, 19200 and 9600. To keep the connection to the device working it is necessary to set the baud rate of the HMI570 accordingly. Choose HMI570 Options and then Device Communication. Set the "RS-232 baud rate" to the same value as in Device Communication. Click on update to accept or cancel to skip.
Note: 57600 baud is the default baud rate. To connect a NSD570 with changed baud rate it is necessary to set the baud rate of the HMI570 accordingly.
4.10.11.7.
Firmware Download
To download a new firmware, click on Firmware Download. The link gets disturbed while using this function! After a successful firmware download, reset the device. This will activate the new firmware. The Firmware version can be viewed by clicking on Firmware Versions in the Configuration Menu after uploading the configuration from the device. Caution
During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation the "Reset Device" link in the Maintenance menu of the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for approx. 10 seconds. During this time no commands can be transmitted.
Note
Please read 1KHW000896 NSD570 Firmware Download Description before executing a Firmware Download.
April 2004
4-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.10.12.
Commissioning
In the Commissioning menu you can put the device into test modes. Depending on the connection type (remote, local) you can start a Remote Test Mode respectively a Local Test Mode when your connection is local. The user must have modify permission to start / stop test modes. To start a test mode press the Start Local / Start Remote Test Mode button. A yellow warning message appears in the header of the HMI570. This indicates that the device is in a test mode. To stop the test mode press the Stop Local / Stop Remote Test Mode button. The warning will disappear when the Test Mode is stopped. The link gets disturbed while using this function! For details refer to Sections 3.5.12.4. and 3.5.12.5. Caution The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commissioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote test mode). However, when a user is logged in with only "view permission", it is not possible to disable the device.
4.10.13.
Alarm Polling
The Alarm Polling functionality is only possible with a LAN Interface G3LL plugged into the NSD570 module rack and a connection to G3LL over LAN / WAN / Internet.
Caution
The Alarm Polling functionality of the HMI570 polls NSD570 devices in the same substation interconnected by the station bus for their alarms. The devices to be polled must be configured in the Device list (see Section 4.10.13.4 Configure Alarm Polling). To work with the Alarm Polling the user has to be logged in.
Note
It is not possible to connect any devices for any user while Alarm Polling is running.
The Alarm Polling can only be started when no device is connected.

NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Caution
Only one Alarm Polling can be started for all users at a time (see Section 4.10.13.13 Multiple users).
Substation A Station bus

TPE1 120
NSD570 A3 TPE2 121
TPE1 110
NSD570 A2
TPE2 111
TPE1 100
NSD570 A1
TPE2 101
LAN Interface
LAN / WAN
Device address
HMI570 LAN
4-Alarm Polling.vsd
Fig. 4.6
Alarm polling in an NSD570 network
In the above example, the LAN Interface in the rack NSD570 A1 can poll all NSD570 devices that are interconnected by the station bus (these are the devices with address 100, 101, 110, 111, 120 and 121). The result of every Alarm Polling cycle is displayed in the HMI570 LAN by the browser running on the PC/Notebook.
April 2004
4-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.10.13.1.
Impact when the Alarm Polling is started

Log in, Log out It is possible to log in and out while the Alarm Polling is running. But only logged in users can work with the Alarm Polling. Always possible. Only possible when Alarm Polling is stopped. It is possible to load from disk and save to disk when Alarm Polling is started. It is possible to load from disk and save to disk when Alarm Polling is started. Returns to the graphical view or to the entry screen, depending whether the Alarm Polling is started or not. Do not change Device Communication parameters during Alarm Polling ! Only possible when Alarm Polling is stopped.
User Administration Connect device Configuration Event Recorder Alarm Polling
HMI570 Options Exit HMI570
The table below shows all the functions of the Alarm Polling and when they are executable: Started Start Alarm Polling Stop Alarm Polling Configure Alarm Polling Graphical View View entire logfile View latest 50 entries Clear entire logfile Refresh page Stop refreshing Start Auto Pop-up Stop Auto Pop-up X X X X X X X X X X X X Stopped X
4-32
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.10.13.2.
Start Alarm Polling

Starts the Alarm Polling for all users and shows the graphical view of the devices (see Section 4.10.13.5 Graphical View). Please be patient, as this can take a long time (especially when an analog device gives no response) and all the devices in the list are polled once before the view appears.
4.10.13.3.
Stop Alarm Polling

The Alarm Polling stops for all users.
4.10.13.4.
Configure Alarm Polling

Different settings of the Alarm Polling functionality can be configured here. The Device List Shows the configurable parameters and the device list. Entering devices in the Device List: Type in the address of the device and mark the checkbox if you want to poll its remote peer as well. Click the Add Device Button.
Note: The device address must be in the range of 1 239.
The remote polling is only effective when the connection over EOC is enabled in the configuration. Changing devices in the Device List: Click on the Edit button next to the device and make your changes. Click on the Change button. Deleting devices from the Device List: Click on the Edit button next to the device. Click on the Delete button. There is no other way to restore an accidentally deleted device than to add it anew. Changing Polling Parameters: Polling Cycle: Select the desired Polling Cycle time. The polling waits at the end of each cycle until the specified time is over (counted from the start of the cycle).
Note:
If the polling of all devices takes longer than the selected Polling Cycle, the polling continues immediately with the first device.
April 2004
4-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Auto Pop-Up: If the checkbox is marked, the graphical view pops up every time an error occurs. This setting is the general setting for all users. Each user can stop it individually, when this feature is switched on (see Section 4.10.13.12 Stop Auto Pop-Up). Logfile: The size is the maximum size of the logfile. If the logfile exceeds this size, the oldest entry is deleted. When the new size is smaller than the old one, the file is shortened. To save the changes made to the parameters click on the update button. Exit configuration: Exits the configuration and shows the entry screen of the Alarm Polling.
4.10.13.5.
Graphical View
Shows the alarm LED picture of the devices. When an alarm occurs, a click on the picture shows the individual alarm message view. No Alarm:
Alarms:
No Response:
Note:
The red Receive LED means, that the connection between the device and its peer is disturbed.
Note:
The picture No Response is shown for the remote device when it is not possible to upload its alarms.
4-34
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4.10.13.6.
View Entire Logfile

Shows the entire logfile on screen. When the Alarm Polling is started, the page refreshes itself every 60 seconds. To stop the Refreshing, click on Stop Refreshing. The page is not updated, although the logfile is still being written. To refresh the page choose Refresh page. When the Alarm Polling is stopped the whole logfile is shown and cannot be refreshed.
4.10.13.7.
View Latest 50 Entries

The 50 newest entries of the logfile are shown. The page refreshing works like with the whole logfile. The difference is the amount of entries and that the oldest of the 50 entries are not shown anymore when newer entries are in the file.
4.10.13.8.
Clear Entire Logfile

The whole logfile is cleared by clicking on the clear button. The entry Logfile cleared by user: (name of the logged in user) is entered. Caution It is not possible to undo the clearing. All data will be lost after clearing.
4.10.13.9.
Refresh Page
Refreshes the logfile views.
4.10.13.10. Stop Refreshing

The logfiles stop updating its views. The logfile is still being written.
4.10.13.11. Start Auto Pop-Up

When the Auto PopUp is switched on for all users, the clicking on Start Auto Pop-Up causes the graphical view to pop up as active window whenever it refreshes itself and any device has an alarm.
Note: The Auto Pop-Up functionality does only work with Microsoft Internet Explorer
4.10.13.12. Stop Auto Pop-Up

To stop the graphical view from popping up, choose Stop Auto Pop up. To switch this feature off for all the users, uncheck the corresponding checkbox in the Alarm Polling Configuration.
April 2004
4-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
4.10.13.13. Multiple users

Because the status of the Alarm Polling affects all users, the executable features depend also on what the other users are doing. Starting and stopping the Alarm Polling does this for all users Only one user at the time is allowed in the configuration. No user can enter the configuration while the Alarm Polling is started No user can connect any device while the Alarm Polling is started No user can start the Alarm Polling while a user is connected to a device No user can start the Alarm Polling while another user is in the configuration. Only this user can start the Alarm Polling.
Messages are displayed when other users affect the status of the Alarm Polling for all users.
4.10.14. 4.10.14.1.
HMI570 Options Device Communication

These settings refer to the RS-232 connection. Set the COM Port number for your serial connection to the NSD570, the baud rate or turn on/off the handshake protocols. If you have enabled RTS/CTS In, you also have to enable RTS/CTS Out and vice versa. Click on update to accept or cancel to skip.
Note: The HMI570 settings are stored and become effective in all HMI570 sessions.
4.10.14.2.
LAN Interface
Note: This menu is only available with the HMI570 LAN and contains LAN Interface specific options.
The date and time of the LAN Interface is displayed here. This time must be correct to set the date and time of a connected NSD570 Device (see 4.10.11.4 Set Time and Date). Please refer to the Commissioning Instructions LAN Interface G3LL (1KHW001289) on how to set time and date of the LAN Interface.
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The button Reset communication disconnects all devices, even the devices that are connected by other users are disconnected.
Note: This function can cause unexpected malfunctions to other users. Use this function just in case of a communication error.
4.10.14.3.
About
This menu shows information about the version of the HMI570. There are also address, phone number, fax number and the email address for contact displayed. A link allows visiting the ABB Utility Communications website.
4.10.14.4.
Exit HMI570
Click on the Exit button to end and exit the application. The HMI570 PC will shutdown the server and closes the browser window. If the browser shows a dialog Do you want to close this window? click the Yes button. The HMI570 LAN shows the dialog Please close the browser. Then you can manually close the browser window.
Note:
Do not close the browser window manually before clicking the Exit button.
April 2004
4-37
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
5.
5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.4.1. 5.4.2. 5.5. 5.5.1. 5.6. 5.6.1. 5.6.2. 5.6.3. 5.6.4. 5.6.5. 5.6.6. 5.7. 5.7.1. 5.7.2. 5.7.3. 5.7.3.1. 5.7.3.2. 5.7.3.3. 5.7.3.4. 5.7.4. 5.7.4.1. 5.7.4.2. 5.7.5. 5.7.5.1. 5.7.5.2. 5.8. 5.8.1. 5.8.2.
Configuration and settings

Introduction .............................................................................. 5-3 Configuration ........................................................................... 5-4 Use of HMI570 files.................................................................. 5-4 Configuration with HMI570....................................................... 5-5 Configure device type .............................................................. 5-5 Configure device parameters................................................... 5-5 General configuration notes..................................................... 5-6 Status of the command outputs during a link failure ................ 5-6 Configuration notes for the NSD570 Analog ............................ 5-8 Analog Channel selection ........................................................ 5-8 Parallel operation of analog NSD570s ..................................... 5-9 2-wire and 4-wire operation of NSD570 Analog..................... 5-11 Transmit level and power boosting for NSD570 Analog......... 5-12 Receive level for NSD570 Analog.......................................... 5-13 NSD570 Analog over PLC equipment ETL500 ...................... 5-14 Configuration notes for the digital NSD570 Digital ................. 5-16 Digital Channel selection ....................................................... 5-16 G.703 interface application notes .......................................... 5-16 RS-530 (RS-422/V.11) interface application notes ................ 5-18 Transmit and receive timing provided by the DCE................. 5-18 Transmit timing provided by the DCE .................................... 5-18 Transmit timing for the DCE provided by the G3LD ............... 5-19 Transmit and receive timing generated internally (G3LD)...... 5-20 E1/T1 Interface application notes .......................................... 5-21 E1 Interface ........................................................................... 5-21 T1 Interface............................................................................ 5-22 Optical interface application notes ......................................... 5-22 Optical Direct Fiber and Optical FOX/OTERM Interface ........ 5-22 Optical IEEE C37.94 Interface ............................................... 5-23 Configuration examples ......................................................... 5-24 Example of NSD570 Analog configuration............................. 5-24 Example of NSD570 Digital configuration .............................. 5-29
April 2004
5-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.9. 5.9.1. 5.9.2. 5.9.2.1. 5.9.2.2. 5.9.3. 5.9.4. 5.9.5. 5.9.6.
Performance Criteria.............................................................. 5-34 General .................................................................................. 5-34 Transmission time.................................................................. 5-35 Nominal transmission time..................................................... 5-36 Maximum Actual Transmission Time ..................................... 5-36 Security.................................................................................. 5-37 Security Measurements ......................................................... 5-37 Dependability ......................................................................... 5-38 Dependability Measurements ................................................ 5-38
5-2
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.
5.1.

Introduction
The NSD570 system is configured by means of the user interface program NSD570 Human Machine Interface (also called HMI570) supplied with it. The user interface program runs on a PC connected to the RS-232 interface of the NSD570 rack or connected via Ethernet to the optional LAN interface G3LL. The configuration of the NSD570 has to be done according to document "Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570" (1KHW000898-EN). The two major steps of the procedure are: 1. Programming and 2. Testing. Each of these steps consists of a number of substeps with associated instructions listed in the document. Each substep is documented in a report to be filled in during the procedure. Templates for these reports one for programming and one for testing - are included in the document. These reports should be kept for reference as long as the equipment is in use. Programming is done with the equipment not powered. Few hardware programming is made by inserting or removing jumpers. Software settings are entered via the HMI570 menu "Configuration". Usually these settings are saved to a file, which is downloaded into the equipment later during testing of the system.
Note: The configuration download operation will only be successful when the system components (including the HMI570 program) are compatible. To verify this, refer to document "Compatibility requirements for NSD570" (1KHW000902-EN). In case of uncertainty, use the newest available HMI570 version.
Testing is done with the equipment powered. Some of the test procedures are supported by the HMI570, menu "Maintenance", "Status / Alarm" and "Event Recorder".
April 2004
5-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.2.
Configuration
From a communications point of view the main parameters of consequence are: Analog channels bandwidth, center frequencies Tx/Rx, line interface levels Digital channels type, data rate and operating mode of the data interface security and dependability transmission time command prolongation (= trip extension) status of the command outputs in the event of an alarm arranging the command inputs to suit the battery voltage
For the protection the main parameters of consequence are:
The corresponding programming instructions can be found in the document "Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570" (1KHW000898-EN) which is available in the annex of this manual. The configuration is complete if all links in the "Configuration" menu are worked off from "Device Identification" down to "Rack Assembly" and the editable items are set to the desired values.
5.3.
Use of HMI570 files

Data entered into HMI570 as described in Section 5.4 can be saved to file. The extension of such files is xml. The data can be loaded back anytime into HMI570 from these files for modifications or for downloading to an NSD570 terminal connected to HMI570. To save the data to file, click on Configuration in the main menu, then on Save To Disk. To reload data from a previously stored file, click on Configuration in the main menu, then on Load From Disk and finally on the Browse button to choose the corresponding file from your file directory. Maybe you have to click on Discard Configuration first before a new configuration can be loaded from file. To view or print the information recorded in a file after having opened it, use the View Configuration link (full screen display of all settings) or the various items in the Edit Configuration menu.
5-4
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.4.
Configuration with HMI570

In this section it is explained, how to create a configuration with the HMI570 for an NSD570 equipment. It is recommended to work through the next sections in this document and the section A of the document "Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570" (1KHW000898-EN) step by step. After that, a configuration is created which should be stored in a file. This is described in Section 5.3.
5.4.1.
Configure device type

A maximum of two devices have to be configured in the same rack (TPE 1 and TPE 2). They may be either NSD570 Analog or NSD570 Digital version. "Analog" and "Digital" represent the type of the line interface in use (Analog Interface G3LA or Digital Interface G3LD). There are four default configuration files available for each of these possible device types (TPE 1 Analog, TPE 1 Digital, TPE 2 Analog, TPE 2 Digital). Choose the one that fits the desired application by clicking on the Load From Disk link in the Configuration menu and click on the corresponding load button on the right side of the Default .xml file list.
5.4.2.
Configure device parameters

After a default configuration or a previously created xml-file has been loaded, the device parameters can be altered in order to adapt them to the protection scheme where the teleprotection equipment is used in. The possible settings and/or the setting ranges of the parameters that can be modified are listed in the document "Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570" (1KHW000898-EN). Some additional information, which may be helpful for deciding the appropriate setting, is given in the following sections.
April 2004
5-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.5. 5.5.1.
General configuration notes Status of the command outputs during a link failure
The response of the command outputs to a level or signal-to-noise ratio alarm in the analog version or to a loss of Rx synchronization, the detection of LOS/AIS, an excessive bit error rate or an address error in the digital version can be set by means of the HMI570. The following settings are possible: a) do not change The command outputs continue to correspond to the current status of tripping signal processing, i.e. they do not respond at all to the alarm. b) guard state The command outputs are set to their quiescent states (= no tripping signal). c) retain in state The command outputs retain the statuses they had immediately prior to the alarm detection. d) set permissive and blocking to command state The command outputs configured for direct tripping are set to guard state and the command outputs configured for permissive tripping or blocking are set to their tripped states. These settings apply to all signals in the case of units equipped for several commands. Alternative a) is the default setting when the units are supplied from the works. With this setting the NSD570 responds normally to changes in the status of the input signals. This is permissible in spite of the alarm condition, due to the high security of tripping signal evaluation. Sometimes setting b) is preferred to setting a), for example, when redundant sets of communications equipment are installed. Setting c) is used when the status of the command outputs - that they had in the last alarm free condition - shall be "frozen". Setting d) is only used in seldom cases with overreaching or blocking protection schemes having special logic and in certain instances for blocking auto-reclosure relays. The responses of the command outputs according to b) and d) become effective after an internal alarm processing time (e.g. less than 1 second for low level alarm) from the instant the alarm condition arises and remain so throughout the alarm condition and for a further processing time of the same quantity after it disappears. The pick-up
5-6 April 2004 Configuration and settings
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
time and the hold time can be further delayed by 0 15 seconds. This might be necessary if, for example, clamping of the command outputs should be avoided in case of recurrent noise bursts on the power line, produced by switching operations involving slow speed isolators. The interference so generated is characterized by high amplitude and relatively long duration of up to 8 seconds.
Note: Since the command outputs only respond after the above mentioned pick-up time, "freezing" of the outputs - setting c) - even in case of a continuous command requires this delay to be set to zero. The command prolongation times have to be set to a value higher than the alarm detection time (i.e. > 1 second) to ensure a steady output signal.
April 2004
5-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.6. 5.6.1.
Configuration notes for the NSD570 Analog Analog Channel selection

In case of the NSD570 Analog, channel selection means the choice of transmission bandwidth and channel center frequency. Being able to select the transmission bandwidth and to set the channel center frequency in steps of 60 Hz permits the best use to be made of any "frequency gaps" there may be. The choice of bandwidth is mainly influenced by two factors: desired command transmission time the free bands available when a communications channel is used for several purposes.
The bandwidth is usually based on the first criterion and can be chosen with the aid of the table in Section 2 of the Technical Data NSD570 (1KHW000892-EN); see annex of this manual). The bandwidths given are overall values, which apply equally to NSD570 Analog version with one or with several commands. A good compromise between bandwidth, transmission time, security and dependability is provided by channels 480 Hz and 960 Hz wide, which are suitable for most applications. Where shorter transmission times are desired, wider channels may be selected without encountering any difficulties and without diminishing the security against false tripping signals. 60 Hz steps for selecting the channel center frequency enable the ideal frequency to be chosen for the particular case. In case of a band limited carrier channel of a multiplex equipment for example, the NSD570 Analog center frequency should be close to the center of the carrier channel, because the group delay is lowest there. In the frequency multiplexing mode, i.e. when several NSD570 Analog share a common communications channel, the center frequencies must be chosen such that there is no overlapping of the frequencies of neighboring NSD570 channels. A gap between channel frequencies is not necessary, provided that adjacent NSD570 channels have the same bandwidth and the overall bandwidth does not exceed 3700 Hz (usable bandwidth is from 300 Hz to 4000 Hz; examples of channel allocation can be seen in Fig. 3.19 in Section 3.5.3.3). If the NSD570 channels have different bandwidths, some restrictions have to be taken into account. Please refer to Table 5.1 in Section 5.6.2. The instructions in Section 5.6.3 must be observed for 2-wire operation.
5-8 April 2004 Configuration and settings
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.6.2.
Parallel operation of analog NSD570s

Several NSD570s may be operated in parallel in a frequency-division multiplex mode on a four-wire connection. AF channels can thus be used simultaneously in different systems for different purposes. Since this reduces the bandwidth available to each NSD570, the transmission times increase correspondingly. Parallel operation does not require gaps between frequency bands if they use the same bandwidth, i.e. the various channels can be placed adjacent to each other. Where NSD570 with different bandwidths are operated in parallel, the following gaps between frequency bands have to be kept, i.e. the various channels can not be placed adjacent to each other:
Bandwidth Device 1 *1 120 Hz 120 Hz Bandwidth Device 2 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 2800 Hz 0 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 120 Hz 180 Hz 240 Hz 480 Hz 600 Hz 0 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 180 Hz 240 Hz 420 Hz 600 Hz 0 Hz 60 Hz 120 Hz 180 Hz 420 Hz 540 Hz
2
240 Hz
360 Hz
480 Hz
960 Hz
1200 Hz
0 Hz 120 Hz 180 Hz 360 Hz * 540 Hz 0 Hz 60 Hz 300 Hz

2
0 Hz * 240 Hz
*1 *
2
The NSD570 channels with 2400 Hz and 2800 Hz bandwidth are not mentioned here because they can not be combined with other 2400 Hz or 2800 Hz channels. Since the usable band for the NSD570 is from 300 to 4000 Hz, the resulting overall bandwidth of 3700 Hz is exceeded with the required gap taken into account!
Table 5.1
Where several NSD570s with different bandwidths are operated in parallel, it is advisable to select the transmit levels (signal powers) proportional to the bandwidth; this results in identical signal-to-noise ratios in the remote receivers. The relationship (rounded to 3 dB steps) between the levels is given in the Table 5.2.
April 2004
5-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Bandwidth 2800 Hz 2400 Hz 1200 Hz 960 Hz 480 Hz 360 Hz 240 Hz 120 Hz Table 5.2
Signal power at a point of zero relative level 0 dBm0 0 dBm0 - 3 dBm0 - 6 dBm0 - 9 dBm0 - 9 dBm0 - 12 dBm0 - 15 dBm0
Attention must be paid to correct line terminations when operating NSD570s in parallel (a maximum of three parallel devices is recommended). Only one unit may be set to 600 Ohms impedance, while the others must be set to high impedance. Alternatively, the lines may be terminated with 600 Ohm resistors at the barrier transformers and all NDS570s set to high impedance. This is the recommended setting since the devices can be taken out of operation without influencing the other devices. The input impedance is programmed on the Analog Interface G3LA, see "Programming and Testing Instructions" in the annex. The summed voltage of the transmitters operating in parallel must not exceed 3.5 Vpeak, corresponding to +10 dBm peak envelope power, to avoid that the transmitters overload each other. The summed voltage at the receivers operating in parallel has also to be taken into account. Please refer to Section 5.6.5 Receive level for NSD570 Analog. Caution When two NSD570 - operated in parallel - are using single tone commands, then the power boost ratio must not exceed 6 dB. To allow a higher boost ratio of up to 9 dB, a gap of 60 Hz has to be introduced between the two adjacent frequency bands.
5-10
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.6.3.
2-wire and 4-wire operation of NSD570 Analog

A 4-wire operation is recommended. Caution T-operation requires a 4-wire communication link.
For one unit per pair of cores, 2-wire operation is possible without a hybrid and frequency gaps; however, the following must be observed: Transmitter and receiver must use separate frequency bands, a frequency gap between them is only necessary if the bandwidth is different (please refer to Table 5.1 in Section 5.6.2.) or if the power boost ratio exceeds 6 dB when single tone commands are used (to allow a higher boost ratio of up to 9 dB, a gap of 60 Hz has to be introduced between the two adjacent frequency bands). The NSD570 receivers alarm pick-up level must be set to 12 dB The Rx-level must be set 6dB above the measured receive guard signal level, i.e. 6 dB higher than for 4-wire operation; the resulting level margin before alarm release is then 6 dB. Example: measured receive guard level is 12 dBm, the setting in HMI570 must then be Rx Level [dBm] = 6 The communication link attenuation must be less than 12 dB.
In case of higher link attenuation in 2-wire operation, the transmit and receive directions must be separated by a hybrid. The permissible link attenuation then increases in proportion to the transhybrid loss by some 15 dB. In spite of the use of a hybrid, the transmitter and receiver are not allowed to use the same frequency band.
Note: Use Rx-AF Signal Output on G3LA (X100/3, X100/4) for 2-wire operation.
April 2004
5-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.6.4.
Transmit level and power boosting for NSD570 Analog

The transmitting level can be set in a wide range using the HMI570 (refer to the "Programming and Testing Instructions" in the annex of this manual). When the communications channel is a leased line, any national regulations with respect to the transmitting levels of the guard signal and the tripping signal must be observed. In case of the NSD570 Analog, the power of the command signal can be boosted in relation to the guard signal. This is generally what is meant by power boosting. The ratio between the boosted command signal and the guard signal is referred to as boost ratio BR and usually expressed in decibels (dB). Programming is done by means of the HMI570 and enables the power boost to be set from 0 to 9 dB in steps of 1 dB. The maximum output level with power boosting, however, must not exceed +11 dBm! Boosting the power of the tripping signal is used primarily in two cases: When using leased lines for which regulations permit only a lowpower guard signal, but a higher tripping signal level of short duration. In a multi-purpose system, where the teleprotection equipment is sharing an AF channel in parallel with speech or data transmission in a frequency multiplexing mode. This is typical with PLC (power line carrier). In this case, any speech and any modem signal superimposed on it are switched off whilst tripping signals are being transmitted so that the total PLC transmitter power is available to the NSD570. This ensures the best possible signal-to-noise ratio at the NSD570 receiver. The maximum boost ratio which can be achieved depends on which other PLC signals can be switched off during the transmission of a tripping signal. The suppression of these other signals is initiated by the power boost criterion output ("BOOST") on the NSD570, which is a potential-free and polarity-free solid state output on the module G3LA, nonconducting in the quiescent state and conducting during a tripping signal.
5-12
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Caution
If the transmit level is measured by means of the HMI570 in guard state, the level will vary approx. 2.5 dB because the guard signal is modulated to transmit data via the EOC. The SNR-value displayed by the HMI570 will vary as well, depending on the packets transmitted via the EOC. The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and the Tx/Rx level measurement do only have an adequate accuracy if the EOC is switched off!
5.6.5.
Receive level for NSD570 Analog

In case of 4-wire operation and NSD570 in parallel or in case of NSD570 in 2-wire operation the maximum Rx line level depends on the Rx Level settings made by means of the HMI570. The following table shows the maximum Rx line level against the Rx Level setting:
Rx Level [dBm] 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 -15 Table 5.3 Line Level [Vp] 3.32 2.96 2.64 2.35 2.09 1.87 1.66 1.48 1.32 1.18 1.05 0.94 0.83 0.74 0.66 0.59 -16 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 -22 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 0.53 0.47 0.42 0.37 0.33 0.30 0.26 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.12 0.10 Rx Level [dBm] Line Level [Vp]
Note:
The NSD570 Analog does not support the measuring of the internal Rx level, the table above therefore represents the levels calculated for the line side.
April 2004
5-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.6.6.
NSD570 Analog over PLC equipment ETL500

The standard connection of the NSD570 to the PLC is via 4-wire port AF4 on the AF interface board type O4LE of ETL500. The level at the port has to be set to 10 dBm. This port allows boosting of the ETL500 whenever an NSD570 command is transmitted. The NSD570 boost control output must be connected to the external boost input of the ETL500 on the O4LE board. The voltage supply for the signal is provided by ETL500/O4LE.
Note: When using the NSD570 via PLC equipment type ETL500, boosting should be disabled on the NSD570, but enabled on the PLC equipment (since the power boost ratio depends on which facilities are using the PLC channel).
The single channel ETL500 allows boosting of at most one external teleprotection equipment. The ETL500 sets the boost ratio for the NSD570 signal as high as possible, but not higher than 8 dB. The dual channel ETL500 allows independent boosting of up to two external teleprotection equipment, one in channel 1 and the other in channel 2. Boosting of the NSD570 in channel 1 has priority over boosting of the NSD570 in channel 2. If the ETL500 is operated with the internal teleprotection equipment NSD550, boosting of NSD550 has priority over boosting of NSD570. If two or more NSD570 need to be operated over one channel of ETL500, the NSD570 4-wire ports have to be connected in parallel to port AF4 on the O4LE board of ETL500. To maintain the impedance of 600 Ohm at the port, one of the NSD570 must be set to 600 Ohm impedance, the others to high impedance. Alternatively, the lines may be terminated with 600 Ohm resistors at the barrier transformers and all NDS570s set to high impedance. This is the recommended setting since the devices can be taken out of operation without influencing the other devices. Similarly, the boost control outputs of all NSD570 also have to be connected in parallel to the external boost input of the O4LE board. Care has to be taken that the input and output levels at the O4LE port AF4 are correctly set. With each of the NSD570 set to an output level of 10 dBm, the input level to the ETL500 at O4LE port AF4 must be set to: - 10 dBm - 4 dBm - 0.5 dBm in case of a single NSD570, in case of two NSD570 connected in parallel, in case of three NSD570 connected in parallel.
5-14
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The O4LE output port AF4 of ETL500 will usually carry more signals than just the NSD570 signals due to other services such as speech and data transmitted by the ETL500. To prevent the NSD570 inputs connected to the AF4 port to be overdriven by these additional signals, the output filter of the AF4 port on the O4LE board of ETL500 should be enabled. The bandwidth of the filter must be set such that the frequency bands occupied by the NSD570 signals are within the passband of the filter. Refer to Figure 3-10 of the ETL500 Instruction Manual 1KHL015946EN for correct settings of NSD570 center frequency and bandwidth.
Note: The NSD570 may be placed above speech. The maximum programmable bandwidth for the NSD570 Analog is then 1200 Hz (for that purpose speech must be limited to 2400 Hz, to 2200 Hz or to 2000 Hz if an NSD550 with ETL-pilot as guard signal is used, or to 2000 Hz if an NSD550 with its own guard signal is used).
All NSD570 operating modes may be selected when using the NSD570 with the PLC equipment. If only two commands for permissive tripping are required, single tone commands are recommended (since they are virtually independent from the gain distortion of the communications channel and because they have a higher dependability, as the signal-to-noise ratio with a single tone command is better than with a dual tone command). With dual tone commands selected for the use with the PLC equipment, the gain distortion of the communications channel must not vary more than 3 dB within the NSD570 bandwidth. This can be ensured by proper equalization of the PLC channel, using the ETL500 built in equalizer. The additional delay caused by the equalization filter has to be taken into account.
April 2004
5-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.7. 5.7.1.
Configuration notes for the digital NSD570 Digital Digital Channel selection
In the case of the NSD570 Digital, channel selection means the choice of the line interface on the digital interface type G3LD. It may be either one of the two on-board interfaces (G.703 codirectional or RS530 / RS-422/V.11) or one of the possible piggyback module interfaces (E1/T1 or optical). For each interface type a subset of settings is available (to configure the operating mode or data rate for example). The main application of the digital interfaces is either a point-to-point connection of two distant NSD570 equipment or the interfacing of NSD570 to a PDH multiplexer or a data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE).
5.7.2.
G.703 interface application notes

A codirectional interface only requires two pairs of conductors (instead of the four needed by a contra-directional scheme). Each pair is used to transfer a combined data and clock signal between the two sets of terminal equipment. The combined signal comprises a 64 kbps information signal, a 64 kHz bit clock and the 8 kHz octet clock. The symbol rate of the combined clock/data signal is 256 kBaud.
Transmitter comb. data / clock signal Tx Receiver comb. data / clock signal Rx
G.703 Interface on G3LD
PCM Multiplexer
5-G703-Appl-notes.vsd
Fig. 5.1
G.703 interface application
The signals are coupled into and out of the equipment by isolating transformers such that only the voltage difference between the cores is processed. Thus the influence of common mode interference on signal evaluation depends on the degree of longitudinal balance. It may be configured whether the transmitted clock/data signal is synchronized on the internal 64 kHz timing signal only or if the timing information which is reproduced from the received clock/data signal shall be used to synchronize the transmitted clock/data signal. When interfacing NSD570 with a PCM multiplexer, the recommended setting for the G.703 Tx Clock synchronization is "Rx", considering the multiplexer as clock master.
5-16
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Note:
If two NSD570 with G.703 interfaces are operated in a point-to-point configuration, only one of them must be configured for synchronizing the transmitter clock on the received clock/data signal. With this setting a clock loop can be avoided.
Normally the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) with a G.703 codirectional interface provides the octet timing as described in the ITU-T standard. However, some modems and converters may not follow these rules and introduce a bit-shift between octet boundaries. The NSD570 Digital will not work in this case. Please contact your local representative in order to get some workaround information.
Note:
April 2004
5-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.7.3.
RS-530 (RS-422/V.11) interface application notes

The electrical characteristics of this interface conform to the standard TIA/EIA-422 (RS-422), which is electrically identical to the standards V.11 (ITU-T), X.27 (ITU-T) and Part 3 of DIN 66259. The data transfer rate is either 64 kbps or 56 kbps. The RS-530 (RS-422/V.11) interface on G3LD can be programmed for the modes of operation described below. The signal designations (SD, RD, ST, RT, TT) were taken from the TIA/EIA-449 recommendation.
5.7.3.1.
Transmit and receive timing provided by the DCE

In this case, the outgoing data signal (SD) is synchronized to the transmit timing signal (ST) and the incoming data signal (RD) is sampled at the rate of the receive timing signal (RT).
Transmitter SD (Send Data)
ST (Send Timing) Receiver RD (Receive Data)
RT (Receive Timing) RS-530 Interface G3LD
Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment (DCE)

5-RS530-Appl-notes.vsd
Fig. 5.2
RS-530 interface application with Tx and Rx timing by DCE
The basic configuration for the above application is: RS530 Rx Clock RS530 Tx Clock RS530 Rx Clock Sync RS530 Tx Clock Sync TT RS530 Terminal Timing TT set to set to set to set to set to "ext. RT" "ext. ST" "none" "none" "off"
5.7.3.2.
Transmit timing provided by the DCE

The interface only requires the transmit timing signal (ST) from the DCE. The outgoing data (SD) is synchronized to this clock. The internal clock used to sample the incoming signal is synchronized by the data signal (RD). Provision is also made for synchronizing the sampling of the incoming data to the transmit timing signal (ST). This requires that the ST signal is connected externally in parallel also to the RT input and the interface must be configured accordingly.
5-18
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
ST (Send Timing) Receiver RD (Receive Data) Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment (DCE)

5-RS530-Appl_notes.vsd
RS-530 Interface on G3LD
Fig. 5.3
RS-530 interface application with Tx timing by DCE
The basic configuration for the above application is: RS530 Rx Clock RS530 Tx Clock RS530 Rx Clock Sync RS530 Tx Clock Sync TT RS530 Terminal Timing TT set to set to set to set to set to "internal" "ext. ST" "RD" "none" "off"
5.7.3.3.
Transmit timing for the DCE provided by the G3LD

In this operating mode, the G3LD generates its own transmit timing signal (TT) and transmits it together with the data signal (SD) to the DCE. The transmit timing signal (TT) can be either synchronized to the incoming data signal (RD) (clock loop) or derived from the internal quartz oscillator.
TT (Terminal Timing) Receiver RD (Receive Data) Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment (DCE)

Fig. 5.4
RS-530 interface application with TT for DCE by G3LD
The basic configuration for the above application is: RS530 Rx Clock RS530 Tx Clock RS530 Rx Clock Sync RS530 Tx Clock Sync TT RS530 Terminal Timing TT set to set to set to set to set to "internal" "internal" "RD" "RD" or "none" "on"
April 2004
5-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.7.3.4.
Transmit and receive timing generated internally (G3LD)

Data is transferred between the G3LD and the DCE without transmitting a timing information. The receive timing signal is generated internally in the G3LD and synchronized to the incoming data (RD). The outgoing data signal (SD) can be transmitted in synchronism with the incoming data or with the internal clock frequency of G3LD.
Transmitter SD (Send Data) Receiver RD (Receive Data) Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment (DCE)
Fig. 5.5
RS-530 interface application with Tx/Rx timing internally
The basic configuration for the above application is: RS530 Rx Clock RS530 Tx Clock RS530 Rx Clock Sync RS530 Tx Clock Sync TT RS530 Terminal Timing TT set to set to set to set to set to "internal" "internal" "RD" "RD" or "none" "off"
Note:
If two NSD570 with RS-530 interfaces are operated in a point-to-point configuration, one of them has to be configured as "Master" (the send data SD are synchronized on the internal clock only, i.e. Rx Clock Sync and Tx Clock Sync TT are both "none") and the other as "Slave" (the send data are synchronized on the timing information which is reproduced from the received data signal, i.e. Rx Clock Sync and Tx Clock Sync TT are both set to "RD"). With these settings a clock loop can be avoided. For the "Master" station, alternatively the terminal timing (TT) signal provided by the remote station can be used as an external clock reference (wired on the ST inputs).
5-20
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.7.4.
E1/T1 Interface application notes

The E1/T1 interface allows to interconnect NSD570 with a PDH multiplexer or even with an SDH/SONET add/drop multiplexer featuring E1/T1 interfaces. Framing, signaling and line coding can be configured according to prevalent standards. For data transmission the NSD570 does not utilize the full payload of the 2.048 Mbps frame (PCM30/31 for SDH access) or 1.544 Mbps frame (PCM24 for SONET access). Data are transmitted in the first timeslot (TS1) after the synchronization pulse. Therefore, in a NSD570 link over a PDH system, only TS1 has to be connected through the system. For both E1/T1, when using AMI line coding, additionally TS3 has to be connected through the system. With this coding, TS3 is used for loss of signal detection.
5.7.4.1.
E1 Interface
Depending on the distance (cable length) between the E1 interface and the communication equipment (e.g. a SDH multiplexer), the receiver sensitivity can be programmed to short haul for a maximum cable attenuation of 10 dB or to long haul for a maximum cable attenuation of 43 dB. Maximum cable length: see Technical Data. The E1 interface is configured to recover the clock for transmission from the received signal, assuming the connected PDH multiplexer or SDH add/drop multiplexer is the clock master. An internal elastic buffer size can be configured individually for the input and the output circuits. This buffer may help to compensate clock deviations or clock wander between the internal and the external timing. Compensation of jitter and detection of slips is also possible by means of a higher buffer size thus introducing a higher delay. A compromise has to be found in actual tests with the used communication equipment regarding high jitter capability versus low additional delay. The E1 coding (HDB3 or AMI) and frame format (double frame or CRC4 multiframe) can be configured to comply with different communication system interfaces.
April 2004
5-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.7.4.2.
T1 Interface
Depending on the distance (cable length) between the T1 interface and the communication equipment (e.g. a SONET multiplexer), the receiver sensitivity can be programmed to short haul for a maximum cable attenuation of 10 dB or to long haul for a maximum cable attenuation of 36 dB. Maximum cable length: see Technical Data. The T1 interface is configured to recover the clock for transmission from the received signal, assuming the connected PDH multiplexer or SONET add/drop multiplexer is the clock master. An internal elastic buffer size can be configured individually for the input and the output circuits. This buffer may help to compensate clock deviations or clock wander between the internal and the external timing. Compensation of jitter and detection of slips is also possible by means of a higher buffer size thus introducing a higher delay. A compromise has to be found in actual tests with the used communication equipment regarding high jitter capability versus low additional delay. The T1 coding (B8ZS or AMI) and frame format (4 frames or extended superframe) can be configured to comply with different communication system interfaces.
5.7.5.
Optical interface application notes

The optical interface permits the transmission of protection signals via fiber optical cables at a data rate of 2.048 Mbps. The optical interface OTERM/P2P can be programmed to operate with a direct fiber connection and additionally with FOX-6+, FOX-20 and the OTERM interface of the FOX515. The optical interface IEEE C37.94 can be utilized with a multiplexer that complies with this standard for optical fiber interfaces between teleprotection and multiplexer equipment. The correct framing, signaling and line coding is automatically set after choosing the interface type out of the HMI570 pull down menu.
5.7.5.1.
Optical Direct Fiber and Optical FOX/OTERM Interface

This optical interface allows interconnecting NSD570 with a FOX515 multiplexer, using the optical 2 Mbps access card OTERM. Further a point-to-point link with a distance of up to 50 km can be realized connecting two optical interfaces directly. For data transmission NSD570 utilizes a bit orientated FOX-6Plus frame with MCMI coding where only channel 1 is used. Other channels are at free disposal.
5-22
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
In a point-to-point application a byte orientated E1 (PCM31) frame is used. Depending on the distance (cable length) between the optical interface and the communication equipment and its input saturation power, the laser output power can be programmed for long haul (< -1 dBm) or short haul (< -17 dBm, default) application. The optical interface recovers the clock for transmission from the received signal, assuming the connected FOX515 multiplexer is the clock master. A communication link over a FOX515 multiplexer enables the operation between the optical interface on one side and all other electrical interfaces of the NSD570, connected to the corresponding data I/O-board of FOX515 on the other side. There is no other manual configuration needed.
5.7.5.2.
Optical IEEE C37.94 Interface

This optical interface allows interconnecting NSD570 with a dedicated multiplexer interface according to IEEE C37.94. For data transmission NSD570 utilizes the IEEE C37.94 frame with 16 bit header, 48 bit overhead and 8 bit data as described in the corresponding standard. The coding scheme is NRZ. The output power is < -11 dBm and not selectable. The optical interface recovers the clock for transmission from the received signal, assuming the connected multiplexer is clock master. There is no manual configuration needed.
April 2004
5-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.8. 5.8.1.
Configuration examples Example of NSD570 Analog configuration

(File name: Default_TPE1_Analog.xml) Device Information
Line Interface Type Line Interface Position Serial Number Firmware Download Counter Configuration Download Counter 0 0 analog 1
Hardware Versions
Interface Power Supply Unit 1 Power Supply Unit 2 Common Interface Line Interface TPE 1 Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 Line Interface TPE 2 Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 LAN Interface Bus Plane Slot (N01) (N09) (N22) (N28) (N34) (N40) (N46) (N52) (N58) (N64) (N70) (N76) (N84) Module Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Piggyback
Firmware Versions
Microcontroller Digital Signal Processor 0.00 0.00
5-24
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Device Identification
Configuration Version Configuration Type Station Name HE Number Device Address 1.00 analog default config TPE 1 HE xxxxxx 100
Common Settings
Device Mode Unblocking Extra Delay [ms] Unblocking Pulse Duration [ms] Command Outputs During Link Failure Link Failure Pickup Time [s] Link Failure Hold Time [s] GPS Sync Embedded Operation Channel ( EOC ) Cyclic Loop Test Interval Normal 10 200 do not change 10 0 off on 6h
Analog Interface
Line Type Rx Bandwidth [Hz] Rx Center Frequency [Hz] Tx Bandwidth [Hz] Tx Center Frequency [Hz] Analog Operating Mode Power Boost [dB] Unblocking Threshold [dBm0] Tx Level [dBm] Rx Level [dBm] Tx Alarm Threshold [dB] Rx Alarm Threshold [+/- dB] four wire 480 2400 480 2400 2 single tone commands 0 -14 -6 -6 -6 6
April 2004
5-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Command Settings
Command A B C D Application permissive permissive off off Tx Trip Duration Monitoring off off off off Max Tx Trip Duration [s] 5 5 5 5 Tx Input Delay [ms] 0 0 0 0 Rx Prolongation [ms] 10 10 0 0
Relay Interfaces
TPE 1 Used Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 Output 2 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 2 Interface 1 (N34) on Command A Command B Command A Command B not used not used Interface 1 (N64) off Command A Command B Command A Command B not used not used Interface 2 (N40) off Command C Command D Command C Command D not used not used Interface 2 (N70) off Command A Command B Command A Command B not used not used Interface 3 (N46) off Command A Command B Command A Command B not used not used Interface 3 (N76) off Command A Command B Command A Command B not used not used Interface 4 (N52) off Command A Command B Command A Command B not used not used Interface 4 (N84) off Command A Command B Command A Command B not used not used
TPE 2 Used Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 Output 2 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 2
5-26
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Alarm Settings
Pickup Time [s] Hold Time [s] 15 15 User Alarm 1 HW Alarm Local HW Warning Local Link Alarm Local Tx Alarm Local Rx Alarm Local Tx Signal Local Rx Signal Local SNR / BER Local HW Alarm Remote Link Alarm Remote Tx Alarm Remote Rx Alarm Remote Tx Signal Remote Rx Signal Remote SNR / BER Remote off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off User Alarm 2 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off User Alarm 3 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off
April 2004
5-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Jumper Settings Analog Interface Jumper Settings Impedance

Rx Impedance Tx Impedance 600 Ohm 600 Ohm
Relay Interfaces Jumper Settings Nominal Battery Voltage

TPE 1 Relay Interface 1 (N34) Relay Interface 2 (N40) Relay Interface 3 (N46) Relay Interface 4 (N52) TPE 2 Relay Interface 1 (N64) Relay Interface 2 (N70) Relay Interface 3 (N76) Relay Interface 4 (N84) Input 1 125 .. 250VDC not assembled not assembled not assembled Input 1 not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled Input 2 125 .. 250V DC not assembled not assembled not assembled Input 2 not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled
Rack Assembly
Slot Power Supply Unit 1 Power Supply Unit 2 Line Interface TPE 1 Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 Line Interface TPE 2 Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 Relay Interfaces 3 TPE 2 Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 LAN Interface (N01) (N09) (N28) (N34) (N40) (N46) (N52) (N58) (N64) (N70) (N76) (N84) Module G3LH not assembled G3LA G3LR not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled Piggyback
5-28
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.8.2.
Example of NSD570 Digital configuration

(File name: Default_TPE1_Digital.xml) Device Information
Line Interface Type Line Interface Position Serial Number Firmware Download Counter Configuration Download Counter 0 0 digital 1
Hardware Versions
Interface Power Supply Unit 1 Power Supply Unit 2 Common Interface Line Interface TPE 1 Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 Line Interface TPE 2 Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 LAN Interface Bus Plane Slot (N01) (N09) (N22) (N28) (N34) (N40) (N46) (N52) (N58) (N64) (N70) (N76) (N84) Module Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Version 0 Piggyback
Firmware Versions
Microcontroller Digital Signal Processor 0.00 0.00
April 2004
5-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Device Identification
Configuration Version Configuration Type Station Name HE Number Device Address 1.00 digital default config TPE 1 HE xxxxxx 200
Common Settings
Device Mode Unblocking Extra Delay [ms] Unblocking Pulse Duration [ms] Command Outputs During Link Failure Link Failure Pickup Time [s] Link Failure Hold Time [s] GPS Sync Embedded Operation Channel ( EOC ) Cyclic Loop Test Interval Normal 5 200 do not change 10 0 off on 6h
Digital Interface
Interface Type BER Alarm Threshold ( 1E... ) Digital Address Check Local Digital Address Remote Digital Address G.703 Tx Clock Sync G703 64kbps codirectional -6 off 341 682 Rx
5-30
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Command Settings
Command A B C D E F G H Application permissive permissive off off off off off off Tx Trip Duration Monitoring off off off off off off off off Max Tx Trip Duration [s] 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Tx Input Delay [ms] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rx Prolongation [ms] 10 10 0 0 0 0 0 0
Relay Interfaces
TPE 1 Used Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 Output 2 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 2 Interface 1 (N34) on Command A Command B Command A Command B not used not used Interface 1 (N64) off Command A Command B Command A Command B not used not used Interface 2 (N40) off Command C Command D Command C Command D not used not used Interface 2 (N70) off Command C Command D Command C Command D not used not used Interface 3 (N46) off Command E Command F Command E Command F not used not used Interface 3 (N76) off Command E Command F Command E Command F not used not used Interface 4 (N52) off Command G Command H Command G Command H not used not used Interface 4 (N84) off Command G Command H Command G Command H not used not used
TPE 2 Used Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 Output 2 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 2
April 2004
5-31
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Alarm Settings
Pickup Time [s] Hold Time [s] 15 15 User Alarm 1 HW Alarm Local HW Warning Local Link Alarm Local Tx Alarm Local Rx Alarm Local Tx Signal Local Rx Signal Local SNR / BER Local HW Alarm Remote Link Alarm Remote Tx Alarm Remote Rx Alarm Remote Tx Signal Remote Rx Signal Remote SNR / BER Remote off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off User Alarm 2 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off User Alarm 3 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off
5-32
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Jumper Settings Relay Interfaces Jumper Settings Nominal Battery Voltage

TPE 1 Relay Interface 1 (N34) Relay Interface 2 (N40) Relay Interface 3 (N46) Relay Interface 4 (N52) TPE 2 Relay Interface 1 (N64) Relay Interface 2 (N70) Relay Interface 3 (N76) Relay Interface 4 (N84) Input 1 125 .. 250VDC not assembled not assembled not assembled Input 1 not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled Input 2 125 .. 250V DC not assembled not assembled not assembled Input 2 not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled
Rack Assembly
Slot Power Supply Unit 1 Power Supply Unit 2 Line Interface TPE 1 Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 Line Interface TPE 2 Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 Relay Interfaces 3 TPE 2 Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 LAN Interface (N01) (N09) (N28) (N34) (N40) (N46) (N52) (N58) (N64) (N70) (N76) (N84) Module G3LH not assembled G3LD G3LR not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled not assembled Piggyback
April 2004
5-33
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.9. 5.9.1.
Performance Criteria General

A fundamental requirement in all the applications that teleprotection equipment is used in, is that command signals are communicated reliably at the highest possible speed (transmission time). In the event of a fault on the protected unit, the command signals must be received at the remote end in the shortest possible time even if the channel is disturbed by the fault (dependability). On the other hand, interference on the communications channel must never cause unwanted operation of the protection by simulating a tripping signal when there is no fault on the power system (security). The most important features of a teleprotection equipment are therefore transmission time, dependability and security. From the communications engineering point of view, the bandwidth or data rate a teleprotection equipment uses must also be taken into account. By security is understood that the receiver does not generate spurious tripping signals in the presence of interference on the communications channel. Dependability characterizes the receiver's ability to recognize a genuine tripping signal within a given time in spite of interference on the communications channel. It is obvious that to demand maximum security at the same time as maximum dependability is contradictory and one can only be increased at the expense of the other. When using the NSD570 Analog with single tone command signals, interference with the guard signal by an alien single tone, which matches exactly one of the trip frequencies, could generate a false command if the level of the interference signal is significantly higher than the guard signal level. The security against single tone interference depends on how the command outputs are programmed to respond in case of a link alarm. Should alien single tone interference appear, select the transmission of dual tone command signals. This setting prevents an unintended tripping by a discrete sine tone.
Note: Maloperation can mean both fail to trip (sometimes called underfunction) and false trip (sometimes called overfunction).
5-34
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.9.2.
Transmission time
Traditional teleprotection have a set of fixed signal evaluation times for which the equipment delivers the requested performance (transmission time, dependability and security). For example there could be found three different evaluation times: One for blocking (T1, fast), one for permissive tripping (T2, medium) and one for direct tripping (T3, slow), each selection being compliant with the requested security and dependability for the given application. Once the equipment is programmed for direct tripping (T3, slow) for example, it will not trip very fast even if the actual prevailing channel conditions would permit to do so. For the NSD570 Analog, this disadvantage can be avoided by using patented dynamic adaptation. For the NSD570 this can be seen as two receivers connected in parallel: a fast one (T1), and a slower one (T2). Both comply with the requested security for a given application (user programmable) such as blocking, permissive tripping or direct tripping. If now the actual channel condition during command transmission is good, the NSD570 will decide to trip with its fast receiver (T1) and not wait for the slower one (T2). If the actual channel condition is worse, it will not trip with receiver T1 but wait for receiver T2 to trip. With this in mind, shorter transmission times can therefore be expected on average, compared with traditional solutions. Moreover, the decision threshold for accepting a trip is permanently and smoothly adapted to the actual prevailing received noise power: from "low" for good channels to "high" for noisy channels. This prevents noise from producing unwanted trips. For the NSD570 Digital, the dynamic adaptation works as follows: The messages (guard or trip or test) are transmitted in consecutive frames. Depending on the actual digital channel condition the receiver trips after the reception of - N error free-frames ( good channel) - M erroneous frames with max. 1 error corrected ( channel with bit errors); with M > N; N and M depend on the application setting (blocking, permissive tripping or direct tripping). The adaptation is the dynamic selection between tripping after N frames (fast, in case of no errors) or M frames (slower, in case of errors). The error correcting facility has a beneficial impact on dependability.
April 2004
5-35
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.9.2.1.
Nominal transmission time

The nominal transmission time T0 is the time elapsed from the initiating of the command input of the teleprotection transmitter until the teleprotection receiver has given an output, measured under noise or bit error free conditions, i.e. there is no interference on the channel. The measurement is carried out with the transmitter and receiver connected back-to-back via the line interface terminals. The nominal transmission time T0 is composed of three terms: T0 = TI/O + Tg + Tev TI/O Switching times of the relay interfaces at the transmitting and receiving end, TI/O approx. 1 ms if a solid state output is used or approx. 8 ms if a relay contact is used for the command. NSD570 channel delay (analog: group delay of the filters which depends on the channel bandwidth and whether the EOC is switched on or not; digital: due to conversion from digital to the format of the data interface in use). Signal evaluation time in the NSD570 receiver. It depends on the settings of the command application. Since there is no channel interference, the dynamic adaptation is not in operation and the fastest receiver will always become effective when measuring T0.
Tg
Tev
5.9.2.2.
Maximum Actual Transmission Time

In order to estimate the actual transmission time Tac in practical applications, the delay introduced by the communications channel (cable, microwave, PLC, multiplexer, cable, microwave) must be added to the nominal transmission time. Severe disturbances (noise or bit errors) on the transmission path may occasionally introduce an additional delay of a few milliseconds. Commands which are not received within Tac are considered as lost or missed commands (refer also to Section 5.9.5 Dependability). The actual transmission time of the NSD570 is measured, for example, by means of the manual or cyclic loop tests, see Section 3.5.12.
5-36
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5.9.3.
Security
The NSD570 with its dynamic adaptation of the receiver provides the best security / dependability trade-off for the chosen command application at lowest possible transmission time. Security is expressed as the "worst case" false signal rate (probability of unwanted commands Puc) for blocks of noise or bit errors of 200 ms duration. "Worst case" is defined as the level of interference at which the guard signal is completely suppressed in analog channels and corresponds to a bit error rate of 0.1 to 0.5 in digital channels. Levels of security are virtually independent of the chosen NSD570 Analog bandwidth or NSD570 Digital interface type or data rate. The security level Puc is fixed for each of the possible command applications.
5.9.4.
Security Measurements
All security measurements were performed according to the procedures prescribed in IEC 60834-1: noise/bit error burst duration of pause noise bandwidth SNR BER 200 ms 200 ms 4 kHz -10 dB -30 dB 0.1 0.5
Security is determined by coupling bursts of white noise of high amplitude into the communication channel of the analog or digital NSD570. For measuring the security of the digital NSD570, a bit error generator that introduces random bit errors of a certain quantity can be used alternatively. The number of bursts injected and the number of false commands they cause at the receiving end are counted. The probability of unwanted commands is then calculated according to the following relationship: Puc = Nuc / NB Puc = probability of an unwanted command Nuc = number of unwanted commands received NB = number of noise bursts injected
April 2004
5-37
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
5.9.5.
Dependability
For analog channels dependability is expressed as the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for a noise bandwidth of 4 kHz, which must be maintained during the transmission of a tripping signal to enable that it can be received within 1.3 times the nominal transmission time T0 (probability of missing a command Pmc < 1%). Dependability varies with the bandwidth, so the signal-to-noise ratio will differ in accordance with the chosen bandwidth. For digital channels dependability is expressed as the bit error rate BER, which must be maintained during the transmission of a tripping signal to enable that it can be received within 1.3 times the nominal transmission time T0 (probability of missing a command Pmc < 1%).
5.9.6.
Dependability Measurements
All dependability measurements were performed according to the procedures prescribed in IEC 60834-1: command duration 50 ms or 3 x T0 duration of pause 2 x command duration noise bandwidth 4 kHz SNR -6 dB +20 dB BER 1E-01 1E-06 continuous noise/bit errors Dependability is determined by sending a large number of commands to the remote station. The number of commands transmitted and the number of commands received within a specified time (normally 1.3 x T0, 1.5 x T0 and 2 x T0) are recorded. The lower the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and the higher the bit error rate (BER) at the input of the receiving NSD570, the fewer the commands which will be received in the prescribed time. The following applies for a sufficiently high number of transmitted commands: Pmc = (NT - NR) / NT Pmc NT NR = probability of missing a command = number of commands transmitted = number of commands received
5-38
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
6.
6.1. 6.2. 6.2.1. 6.3. 6.3.1. 6.3.2. 6.3.3. 6.4. 6.4.1. 6.4.2. 6.4.3. 6.5. 6.5.1. 6.5.2. 6.5.3. 6.5.3.1. 6.5.3.2. 6.5.3.2.1. 6.5.3.2.2. 6.5.3.3. 6.5.3.3.1. 6.5.3.3.2. 6.5.3.4. 6.5.3.4.1. 6.5.3.4.2. 6.5.3.5. 6.5.3.5.1. 6.5.3.5.2. 6.5.3.6. 6.5.3.6.1. 6.5.3.6.2. 6.5.3.6.3. 6.5.3.6.4. 6.5.3.7. 6.5.3.7.1. 6.5.3.7.2.
Installation and wiring

Introduction .............................................................................. 6-3 Safety instructions ................................................................... 6-3 General .................................................................................... 6-5 Unpacking................................................................................ 6-5 Inspection upon receipt............................................................ 6-5 What to do if there is transport damage ................................... 6-5 Precautions to avoid transport damage ................................... 6-5 Installation................................................................................ 6-6 Place of installation and ambient conditions ............................ 6-6 Cabinet .................................................................................... 6-6 Installing racks in cabinets ....................................................... 6-6 Wiring....................................................................................... 6-6 Introduction .............................................................................. 6-6 Grounding system.................................................................... 6-7 External connections................................................................ 6-7 Power Supply......................................................................... 6-10 Station bus and Real Time Clock synchronization................. 6-11 Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment................. 6-11 Connection via G1LB cable for RTC sync/station bus ........... 6-12 System alarm relays .............................................................. 6-12 Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment................. 6-12 Connection via G3LC cable for alarm relays.......................... 6-13 Relay Interface G3LR ............................................................ 6-14 Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment................. 6-14 Connection via G3LR cable for relay interface....................... 6-15 Analog Interface G3LA........................................................... 6-16 Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment................. 6-16 Connection via G3LA cable for analog interface.................... 6-17 Digital Interface G3LD............................................................ 6-18 RS-422 RS-449/RS-530/X.21interface ............................... 6-18 G.703 codirectional interface ................................................. 6-21 E1/T1 Interface G1LE ............................................................ 6-22 Optical Interface G1LO .......................................................... 6-24 LAN Interface G3LL ............................................................... 6-27 Ethernet 10/100BaseT LAN interface .................................... 6-27 Station bus............................................................................. 6-28
Installation and wiring April 2004 6-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.5.4. 6.5.4.1. 6.6.
Internal connections............................................................... 6-29 Display Panel G1LC............................................................... 6-29 Photographs .......................................................................... 6-30
6-2
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.
6.1.

Introduction
Installation of the equipment can only be made smoothly if it is properly planned beforehand. The system should be engineered not only to take account of immediate needs, but also allow for long-term network development.
6.2.
Safety instructions
Mechanical installation
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
Insertion and removal of plug-in modules Caution Neither removal nor insertion of modules - except for redundant power supply units - is permitted when the equipment is powered on. Before plugging modules in and out, the power supply of the equipment has to be switched OFF.
Back cover
DANGER
April 2004
6-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
DANGER
This is a Class equipment specified in IEC 60950. The equipment and the cabinet must be earthed. The equipment must be supplied over circuit breaker. The circuit breaker for the power supply of the equipment must be switched OFF. The circuit breakers for optional equipment in the cabinet must be switched OFF. Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or from the equipment. The isolating terminals from the external cables must be kept open during installation, maintenance and before storage, decommissioning and disposal. The Faston supply connectors at the rear of the rack must be covered with an isolation sleeve. The power supply is dangerous (hazardous voltage and/or hazardous energy level). Do not install the equipment with a live supply. When an analog NSD570 is connected to cables, pilot wires or leased circuits, the equipment must only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers withstanding a 15 kVrms or 20 kVrms test voltage at 50 Hz / 60 Hz for 1 minute, according to national regulations or to electric utilities' practice. Connecting a load between terminals NO (normally open) and NC (normally closed) is not allowed. Use only one contact set NO or NC.
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
Caution
Caution
Power supply for alarm Caution The alarm power supply must be short current and over current protected.
6-4
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.2.1.
General
The aim is not just to install the equipment properly, but also to ensure its long-term operational reliability. Strictly observe all safety instructions during installation so that if damage does occur, warranty and service rights do not become void.
6.3. 6.3.1.
Unpacking Inspection upon receipt

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest ABB company or agent without delay should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be found.
6.3.2.
What to do if there is transport damage

Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. Where there is evidence of transport damage, lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier, notify the nearest ABB company or agent and also ABB Switzerland Ltd, Utility Communication Systems, CH-5400 Baden, Switzerland.
6.3.3.
Precautions to avoid transport damage

Insert the modules carefully but firmly into the racks so that they cannot fall out. Modules and other loose parts that are packed separately must be packed and secured such as to preclude damage.
April 2004
6-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.4. 6.4.1.
Installation Place of installation and ambient conditions

The room where the equipment is installed should be free of dust, the floor covered if possible with a semi-conducting plastic flooring material and cement floors and walls should be suitably painted. The room must be well ventilated so that the temperature is in the range +10 to +45C and the relative humidity between 30 and 70 %. Lead/acid batteries must not be in the same room.
6.4.2.
Cabinet
The standard equipment is supplied in an ABB cabinet Type E40A. These cabinets are equipped with a hinged frame and are suitable for installation: standing against a wall, back-to-back, side-by-side, standing alone.
A gap of 2 to 3 cm should be left between cabinets standing side-byside to permit single cabinets to be removed without difficulty. Leave sufficient space in front to avoid damage when the hinged frame is opened. There must generally be enough room for carrying out maintenance and for using the associated instruments. Do not install equipment cabinets in corners, which would hinder opening the hinged frame and working on the cabinet. Free access is especially important in the case of cabinets not equipped with a hinged frame. Cabinets are normally erected on a pedestal or as a suite of cabinets on a platform to facilitate cleaning the floor and routing of cables.
6.4.3.
Installing racks in cabinets

Pay attention when determining the cabinet layout that air can circulate freely around the equipment and overheating cannot take place. To this end, a space of at least 4 cm must be left between the racks.
6.5. 6.5.1.
Wiring Introduction
While being installed, the equipment must be switched off and no external connections may be made to it.
6-6
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.5.2.
Grounding system
The grounding system must go out radially from the station ground rail. On no account may there be any loops that would permit circulating ground currents. Every cabinet must have its own ground conductor (gauge > 25 mm2) connected by adequately rated cable lugs to the station ground rail. The ground connection to the cabinet shall be clearly visible and made to the designated ground terminal. For safety reasons, looping ground conductors to or from neighboring cabinets or other equipment is not permissible. To ensure proper RF-grounding and EMC protection, the hinged frame or mounting rack inside the cabinet must be connected to the ground rail of the cabinet using a short copper band (length < 20 cm). In addition, the hinged frame or mounting rack must be blank (nonpainted) in order to ensure a low impedance RF-grounding of the NSD570 rack bolted to it. If not, then one has to connect the NSD570 rack via a short copper band (length < 20 cm) to an unpainted spot of the hinged frame.
6.5.3.
External connections
Connections are made via cables to be plugged into the connectors at the rear of the equipment. Some of these connectors (those of type Phoenix) also allow direct plugging of screwless spring clamp type terminal blocks. The external connections are then made by clamping wires into these terminal blocks. When clamping wires into the terminals plugging of screwless spring clamp type terminal blocks, do not clamp more than one wire per terminal.
Note: Do not clamp more than one wire per terminal when using screwless spring clamp type terminal blocks.
The length of the optional available connecting cables is 2500 mm.
April 2004
6-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
All external cables have to be secured to the cable rail in the rear of the equipment with the help of plastic cable binders as shown. In case of screened cables, the upper cable binder has to be replaced with the metallic spring clamp supplied with the cable, in order to ensure a low impedance electrical connection of the cable screen to the equipment chassis also at high frequencies, see Fig. 6.1.
RS-422 RS-449/RS-530/X.21
G.703
E1/T1
Plastic cable binder
Metallic spring clamp
Fig. 6.1
Mounting of external cables with cable screen
6-8
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Ethernet on LAN Interface G3LL
Plastic cable binder
Metallic spring clamp
Fig. 6.2
Mounting of external cables with cable screen (G3LL)
April 2004
6-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.5.3.1.
Power Supply
The NSD570 must always be connected via circuit breakers to the supply voltage(s). In case of redundant supply (two power supplies), circuit breakers have to be inserted in both supply lines. Recommended circuit breakers: B9AS Label E: Ident. number: Type: Max. voltage: Label E: Ident. number: Type: Max. voltage: CI-BREAK 60 VDC / 250 VAC 1KHL015141R0001 S282 K6A 60 VDC or 250 VAC CI-BREAK > 60 VDC 250 VDC 1KHL015999R0001 S282 UC-K 6A 250 VDC
B9AV
The supply connectors (Faston, 6.3 mm x 0.8 mm) are at the rear of the module rack. For exact locations refer to Fig. 6.3. View from rear:
DC+ AC L DCAC N
Power Supply 2: Positive battery pole DC supply or AC Line supply Negative battery pole DC supply or AC Neutral supply
Power Supply 1: DC+ AC L DCAC N Positive battery pole DC supply or AC Line supply Negative battery pole DC supply or AC Neutral supply
PE Protective earth connectors
Plastic cable binders
Fig. 6.3
6-10
Supply connections
April 2004 Installation and wiring
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.5.3.2. 6.5.3.2.1.
Station bus and Real Time Clock synchronization Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment
The screwless (spring-clamp) type terminal block can be plugged onto connector X103 of the supply backplane G1LB. Recommended wire size: 0.8 mm2 (unshielded twisted pairs). Wire size range: Solid and stranded 0.14 to 1.5 mm2.
SUPPLY BACKPLANE G1LB X103 1 COMMON INTERFACE G3LC A RS-485
2 3
GND
7
GPS-SYNC (IRIG-B)
+ 4 5 + 6 7
6-G1LB_Connector.vsd
EXT-SYNC (1 PPS)
Fig. 6.4
Connector for station bus and Real Time Clock synchronization
April 2004
6-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.5.3.2.2.
Connection via G1LB cable for RTC sync/station bus

The cable is equipped with screwless (spring-clamp) type terminals. Recommended wire size: 1.5 mm2 (unshielded twisted pairs). Wire size range: Solid 0.2 to 4.0 mm2, stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
COMMON INTERFACE G3LC
RS-485 A B GND
GPS-SYNC (IRIG-B)
EXT-SYNC (1 PPS)
SUPPLY BACKPLANE G1LB X103 G1LB CABLE FOR RTC SYNC/STATION BUS
RTC SYNC/STATION BUS
+ 4
+ 6
WH 1
BN 2
GN 3
GY 4
PK 5
BU 6
RD 7
YE 8
6-G1LB_Cable.vsd
Terminals
Fig. 6.5
Station bus and Real Time Clock synchronization
6.5.3.3. 6.5.3.3.1.
System alarm relays Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment

The screwless (spring-clamp) type terminal block can be plugged onto connector X102 of the common interface G3LC. Recommended wire size: 1.2 mm2. Wire size range: Solid and stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
6-12
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
X102 NO 1 ALARM RELAY 1 C 2 CONTACT RATING: 150W, 8A MAKE, 5A CARRY, 0.6A BREAK
COMMON INTERFACE G3LC NOTE : ALARM CONTACTS ARE SHOWN IN ALARM POS.
1
NC 3 4
8
5 NO 6 ALARM RELAY 2 C 7 NC 8
6-G3LC_Connector.vsd
Fig. 6.6
Connector for system alarm relays
6.5.3.3.2.
Connection via G3LC cable for alarm relays

The cable is equipped with screwless (spring-clamp) type terminals. Recommended wire size: 1.5 mm2. Wire size range: Solid 0.2 to 4.0 mm2, stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
COMMON INTERFACE G3LC
ALARM RELAY 1
ALARM RELAY 2 NOTE : ALARM CONTACTS ARE SHOWN IN ALARM POS. CONTACT RATING: 150W, 8A MAKE, 5A CARRY, 0.6A BREAK
X102 G3LC CABLE FOR ALARM RELAYS
NO 1
C 2
NC 3
NO 6
C 7
NC 8
BK Terminals 1
BK 2
BK 3
BK 4
BK 5
BK 6
GNYE PE
6-GL3C_Cable.vsd
Fig. 6.7
G3LC cable for alarm relays
April 2004
6-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.5.3.4. 6.5.3.4.1.
Relay Interface G3LR Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment

The screwless (spring-clamp) type terminal block can be plugged onto connector X101 of the relay interface G3LR. Recommended wire size: 1.2 mm2. Wire size range: Solid and stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
X101
JUMPER 1A+1B 1A+1C 1A+1D G1LR
RELAY INTERFACE G3LR
G3LR CABLE FOR RELAY INTERFACE 1 + 2
24VDC...48VDC 60VDC...110VDC 125VDC...250VDC External dry contact
U BAT nom.
G1LR (option)
1A 1B 1C 1D
TX1 INPUT (VOLT. RANGE: 24...250VDC)

JUMPER U BAT nom. 24VDC...48VDC 60VDC...110VDC 125VDC...250VDC External dry contact 2A+2B 2A+2C 2A+2D G1LR
2A 2B 2C 2D
3 + 4 5 + 6 7 + 8 NO 9 C 10 NC 11
TX2 RX1 RX2 RX/REL1
OUTPUT OUTPUT (SOLID STATE / 5...250VDC/2A) (HEAVY DUTY / 5...250VDC/5A CARRY)
14
NO 12 C 13 NC 14 RX/REL2
6-G3LR_Connector.vsd
Fig. 6.8
Connector for relay interface
6-14
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.5.3.4.2.
Connection via G3LR cable for relay interface

The cable is equipped with screwless (spring clamp) type terminals. Recommended wire size: 1.5 mm2. Wire size range: Solid 0.2 to 4.0 mm2, stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
RELAY INTERFACE G3LR

JUMPER 1A+1B 1A+1C 1A+1D G1LR U BAT nom. 24VDC...48VDC 60VDC...110VDC 125VDC...250VDC External dry contact
INPUT (VOLT. RANGE: 24...250VDC) TX1

JUMPER 2A+2B 2A+2C 2A+2D G1LR U BAT nom. 24VDC...48VDC 60VDC...110VDC 125VDC...250VDC External dry contact
OUTPUT (SOLID STATE / 5...250VDC/2A) RX1 RX2
OUTPUT (HEAVY DUTY / 5...250VDC/5A CARRY) RX/REL 1 RX/REL2
TX2
G1LR (option) X101
1C 1D
2C 2D
1B
2A
1A
2B
G3LR CABLE FOR RELAY INTERFACE
1 BK
+ 2 BK
3 BK
+ 4 BK
5 BK
+ 6 BK
7 BK
+ 8 BK
NO 9 BK
C 10 BK
NC 11 BK
NO 12 BK
C 13 BK
NC 14 BK GNYE
Terminals
10
11
12
13
14
PE
6-G3LR_Cable.vsd
Fig. 6.9
G3LR cable for relay interface
April 2004
6-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.5.3.5. 6.5.3.5.1.
Analog Interface G3LA Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment

The screwless (spring clamp) type terminal block can be plugged onto connector X100 of the Analog Interface G3LA. Recommended wire size: 1.2 mm2 (unshielded twisted pairs). Wire size range: Solid and stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
X100 JUMPER OUTPUT TA TB 600Ohm >1.5kOhm 1 TXAF 2 X303 TB ANALOG INTERFACE G3LA IMPEDANCE X301 TA X302
1
JUMPER INPUT RA RB 600Ohm >1.5kOhm IMPEDANCE X202 RA X203 RB X204
6
3 4 5 6
6-G3LA_Connector.vsd
RX-AF BOOST
Fig. 6.10
Connector for analog interface
6-16
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.5.3.5.2.
Connection via G3LA cable for analog interface

The cable is equipped with screwless (spring clamp) type terminals. Recommended wire size: 1.5 mm2 (unshielded twisted pairs). Wire size range: Solid 0.2 to 4.0 mm2, stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
ANALOG INTERFACE G3LA
IMPEDANCE X301 TA X302
TX-AF
IMPEDANCE X202 RA X203 JUMPER RA RB
RX-AF
BOOST
X303
JUMPER OUTPUT TA TB X100 G3LA CABLE FOR ANALOG INTERFACE 600Ohm >1.5kOhm 1 2
INPUT 600Ohm >1.5kOhm 3 4 5 6
WH
BN
X204 GN
TB
RB
YE
GY
PK
Terminals
6 6-G3LA_Cable.vsd
Fig. 6.11
G3LA cable for analog interface
April 2004
6-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.5.3.6. 6.5.3.6.1.
Digital Interface G3LD RS-422 RS-449/RS-530/X.21interface a) Connector at rear of equipment (male Sub-D 25 poles)
DIGITAL INTERFACE G3LD
X101 PE 1
14
SD-A 2 SD-B 14 3 RD-B 16 RD-A
SEND DATA RECEIVE RECEIVE TERMINAL SEND DATA TIMING TIMING TIMING RS-422 INTERFACE
25
13
RT-A RT-B TT-A
17 9 24 11 15 12 7
TT-B ST-A ST-B SG
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
Fig. 6.12
Connector for digital interface (male Sub-D 25 poles)
6-18
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
b) Connection via G3LD cable with isolating terminals (10 poles)

The cable is equipped with screwless (spring-clamp) type terminals. Recommended wire size: 1.5 mm2 (shielded twisted pairs). Wire size range: Solid 0.2 to 4.0 mm2, stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
DIGITAL INTERFACE G3LD RS-422 INTERFACE SEND DATA RECEIVE RECEIVE TERMINAL SEND DATA TIMING TIMING TIMING
RD-A
RD-B
SD-A
SD-B
RT-A
RT-B
ST-A
TT-B
ST-B
TT-A
PE
CHASSIS GND 12
X101 1 G3LD*CABLE WITH ISOLATING TERMINALS
14
16
17
24
11
15
WH BN
GN YE
GY PK
BU RD BK
VT
Terminals
10
PE
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
Fig. 6.13
G3LD cable with isolating terminals (10 poles)
c) Connection via G3LD cable with RS-449 interface (37 poles)

DIGITAL INTERFACE G3LD RS-422 INTERFACE SEND DATA RECEIVE RECEIVE TERMINAL SEND DATA TIMING TIMING TIMING
RD-A
RD-B
SD-A
SD-B
RT-A
RT-B
ST-A
TT-B
ST-B
TT-A
PE
CHASSIS GND 12
X101 G3LD*CABLE WITH RS-449 INTERFACE (37-P)
2 WH
14
16
17
24
11
15
BN GN
YE GY PK
BU RD
BK VT
22
24
26
17
35
23
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
Fig. 6.14
G3LD cable with RS-449 interface (male Sub-D connector 37 poles)
April 2004
6-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
d) Connection via G3LD cable with RS-530 interface (25 poles)

RS-422 INTERFACE SEND DATA RECEIVE DATA RECEIVE TIMING TERMINAL TIMING SEND TIMING
PE
CHASSIS GND
12
RD-A
RD-B
SD-A
SD-B
RT-A
RT-B
ST-A 11 15 RD BK
X101 G3LD*CABLE WITH RS-530 INTERFACE (25-P)
14
16
17
24
WH
BN
GN
YE
GY
PK
BU
TT-B
ST-B VT 15 12
TT-A
14
16
17
24
11
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
Fig. 6.15
G3LD cable with RS-530 interface (male Sub-D connector 25 poles)
e) Connection via G3LD cable with X.21 interface (15 poles)

DIGITAL INTERFACE G3LD RS-422 INTERFACE SEND DATA RECEIVE DATA RECEIVE TERMINAL TIMING TIMING SEND TIMING
RD-A
RD-B
SD-A
SD-B
RT-A
RT-B
ST-A
TT-A
ST-B
PE
CHASSIS GND 12
X101 G3LD*CABLE WITH X.21 INTERFACE (15-P)
14
16
17
24
TT-B 11
15
WH
BN
GN
YE
GY
PK
BU
RD
11
14
13
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
Fig. 6.16
G3LD cable with X.21 interface (male Sub-D connector 15 poles)
6-20
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.5.3.6.2.
G.703 codirectional interface

a) Connector at rear of equipment (RJ45, 8 poles)
G.703 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE
X201
RX DATA
+ 6 3 + 4 5
2
TX DATA
1
8
7 8 1
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
Fig. 6.17
Connector for G.703 codirectional interface (RJ45, 8 poles)
b) Connection via G3LD cable for G.703/E1/T1 interface (RJ45, 8 poles) The cable has RJ45 connectors at both ends and in addition is equipped with a connection module that allows toolless connection of wires of size 0.5 mm (AWG 24) 0.65 mm (AWG 22), shielded twisted pairs.
G.703 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE

RX DATA TX DATA
X201
G3LD*CABLE FOR G.703/E1/T1INTERFACE (RJ45 connector 8 poles)
+ 6
+ 4
CHASSIS GND
Press-fit terminals
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
RJ45 Press-Fit 1 1 2 2 3 = Rx 3 = Rx 4 = Tx + 6 = Rx + 5 = Tx 5 = Tx 6 = Rx + 4 = Tx + 7 7 8 8 View of pins: top-down, as real terminal strip
Fig. 6.18
G.703 codirectional interface with G3LD cable for G.703/E1/T1 interface (RJ45, 8 poles)
April 2004 6-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.5.3.6.3.
E1/T1 Interface G1LE

a) Connector at rear of equipment (RJ45, 8 poles) The connector is located on the optional piggyback module G1LE, mounted face down on top of the Digital Interface G3LD.
DIGITAL INTERFACE G3LD G1LE (OPTION)
X101 RL2 1 RL1 2 XL2 4 XL1 5 3 7 TX DATA RX DATA E1/T1 INTERFACE
8 1
8 6
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
Fig. 6.19
Connector for E1/T1 interface (RJ45, 8 poles)
6-22
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
b) Connection via G3LD cable for G.703/E1/T1 Interface (RJ45, 8 poles) The cable has RJ45 connectors at both ends and in addition is equipped with a connection module that allows toolless connection of wires of size 0.5 mm (AWG 24) 0.65 mm (AWG 22), shielded twisted pairs.
DIGITAL INTERFACE G3LD G1LE (OPTION)
E1/T1 INTERFACE RX DATA TX DATA
RJ45
1 = RL2 2 = RL1 3 4 = XL2 5 = XL1 6 7 8
Press-Fit
1 = RL2 2 = RL1 3 6 5 = XL1 4 = XL2 7 8
CHASSIS GND 5 3 7 8 6
RL2
RL1
XL2 2 4
X101
G3LD*CABLE FOR G.703/E1/T1INTERFACE (RJ45 connector 8 poles)
Press-fit terminals
XL1
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
View of pins: top-down, as real terminal strip
Fig. 6.20
E1/T1 interface with G3LD cable for G.703/E1/T1 interface (RJ45 8 poles)
April 2004
6-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.5.3.6.4.
Optical Interface G1LO

When handling with optical fibers please remember: Fiberoptic Installation Caution Optical connectors Clean all optical connectors by an approved method before making any optical connection. When making an optical connection, do not rotate the optical connector unnecessarily. When not connected, fit all optical plugs and couplings with captive caps. Caution Damage to optical fibers When dressing fibers, take care not to exceed the minimum bend radius (typically 35 mm) and do not over tighten binders used for dressing as damage may result. When connecting other external cables and also the rear cover, ensure that the optical fibers are not bruised or crimped. a) Connector at rear of equipment (E2000) The connector is located on the optional piggyback module G1LO, mounted face down on top of the digital interface G3LD.
X701 (OPT. CONN. E2000) RX TX
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
G1LO (OPTION) OPTICAL INTERFACE
Fig. 6.21
Connector E2000 for optical fiber
6-24
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
b) Connection via optical cable (E2000 or FC/PC) The available optical cables have E2000 connectors at both ends or E2000 and FC/PC connectors.
DIGITAL INTERFACE G3LD G1LO (OPTION) OPTICAL INTERFACE
X701 (OPT. CONN. E2000)
RX RD
TX BU
1)
1)
6-G3LD_Cable.vsd
1)
Optical cable type V9WP, V9WR V9WQ, V9WS
Connector E2000 E2000 E2000 FC/PC
Fig. 6.22
Optical Interface G1LO with optical cable
For the fiber optic connections, the NSD570 provides E-2000 Duplex Compact 0.1 dB - SM APC mating adapters with 0.1 dB insertion loss. This kind of adapter features spring loaded metal shutter that avoid laser radiation exposure when they are mated on one end only.
Fig. 6.23
E-2000 duplex compact mating adapters
These adapters match with E-2000 0.1 dB Duplex Compact and Simplex SM APC fiber optic connectors that are suitable for
Installation and wiring April 2004 6-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
termination of fiber cable types according to ITU-T G.652, G.653, G.654 and G.655. This kind of connectors features integrated black protective caps that avoid laser radiation exposure when they are unmated.
Fig. 6.24
E-2000 duplex compact fiber optic connector
Fig. 6.25
E-2000 simplex fiber optic connector
6-26
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.5.3.7. 6.5.3.7.1.
LAN Interface G3LL Ethernet 10/100BaseT LAN interface

a) Connector at rear of equipment (RJ45, 8 poles)
X201 RJ45
LAN Interface G3LL
1 8
TX+ 1 TX2 RX+ 3 RX6 4 5 7 8
Ethernet Interface
TX DATA RX DATA
75
75
PE
6-G3LL_Connector.vsd
Fig. 6.26
Connector for Ethernet interface (RJ45, 8 poles)
April 2004
6-27
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.5.3.7.2.
Station bus
b) Connection to terminal block at rear of equipment The screwless (spring clamp) type terminal block can be plugged onto connector X500 of the LAN Interface G3LL. Recommended wire size: 1.2 mm2 (unshielded twisted pairs). Wire size range: Solid and stranded 0.2 to 2.5 mm2.
X500 1 2 3
LAN Interface G3LL A RS-485 B GND
1
4 5 6
7
6-G3LL_Connector.vsd
Fig. 6.27
Connector for station bus interface (7 poles)
b) Station bus wiring For a proper operation of the NSD570 LAN Interface it is necessary to wire the station bus of the supply backplane G1LB (Pin 1, 2 and 3 of the connector X103) to the station bus of the NSD570 LAN Interface G3LL (Pin 1, 2 and 3 of the connector X500). This can be done with the optional connecting cable G3LL*CABLE FOR STATION BUS/RTC SYNC (1KHW001213R0001). The optional connecting cable G1LB*CABLE FOR STATION BUS/RTC SYNC (1KHW000668R0001) will then be dispensable.
6-28
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6.5.4.
Internal connections
All internal connections within the Module Rack G7BI are provided by Supply Backplane G1LB, Common Interface G3LC and Bus Plane with Front Cover G1LA except for the optional Display Panel G1LC.
6.5.4.1.
Display Panel G1LC

The optional Display Panel G1LC is assembled to the module rack G7BI, replacing the blanking cover plate that is mounted in front of the power supply units. An enclosed ribbon cable connects the Display Panel to the adjacent Common Interface G3LC as follows:
Fig. 6.28
Mounting of the Display Panel G1LC Caution: The ribbon cable has to be mounted abducing downwards.
Fig. 6.29
Correct connection of the ribbon cable

April 2004 6-29
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
6.6.
Photographs
Fig. 6.30
Front view of the NSD570 module rack, equipped with two line interfaces - each of them operating four Relay Interfaces G3LR - and the optional Display Panel G1LC.
Fig. 6.31
Rear view of the NSD570 module rack, equipped with an Analog Interface G3LA and a Digital Interface G3LD - each of them operating four Relay Interfaces G3LR, with connecting cables (rear cover removed).
6-30
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
7.
7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.3.1. 7.3.2. 7.3.3.
Commissioning
Safety instructions ................................................................... 7-2 Testing the communication channel ........................................ 7-4 Commissioning the equipment................................................. 7-5 Preliminary inspection and checks........................................... 7-5 Checks according to commissioning instructions..................... 7-6 HMI570 functions to support commissioning ........................... 7-6
Commissioning
April 2004
7-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
7.
7.1.
Commissioning
Safety instructions
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
Warning labels
DANGER
Inserting and removing of plug-in modules Caution Neither removal nor insertion of modules - except for redundant power supply units - is permitted when the equipment is powered on. Before plugging modules in and out, the power supply of the equipment has to be switched OFF.
7-2
April 2004
Commissioning
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Back cover
DANGER
Using HMI570 Caution The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commissioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote test mode). However, when a user is logged in with only "view permission", it is not possible to disable the device.
DANGER
DANGER
Commissioning
April 2004
7-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
LAN Interface G3LL
DANGER
The LAN Interface G3LL contains a lithium battery. Danger of explosion exists if the lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. For replacing and inserting the battery always use a potentially-free soldering iron. Check the polarity before inserting the battery.
Caution
For disposal of the lithium battery, the regional and national regulations for electrical and electronic waste have to be observed.
7-4
April 2004
Commissioning
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.2.
Testing the communication channel

It is essential that the behavior and the characteristics of the communication link between the sets of teleprotection equipment are checked prior to final commissioning. This is necessary to confirm the design criteria used for engineering the system or, if the criteria were inaccurate, to take the appropriate corrective action. When an analog communication link is installed, it is of interest whether the frequency response is appropriate and whether there are noise or spurious/interference signals present in the bandwidth used of the NSD570. When a digital communication link is installed, it is of interest whether there are bit errors present in the channel used of the NSD570. In case the NSD570s are in a point-to-point connection, it is necessary to know whether the permissible line attenuation (analog) or the permissible line length (digital) is not exceeded. It is assumed that the communication link is commissioned properly before the teleprotection equipment is set into operation. In any case it is advisable to measure the transmission delay that is introduced by the communication link. Refer to Section 5.9.2. of this manual for remarks about "Transmission Time".
7.3.
Commissioning the equipment

Once the prevailing conditions of the communication channel have been established, it is permissible to proceed with commissioning the equipment itself. Before switching on the power supply, perform the checks below. Correct any deviations or shortcomings immediately.
7.3.1.
Preliminary inspection and checks

a) Check that the cabinet is grounded in accordance with regulations. b) Check that the polarity of the power supply is correct. c) Check that the external connections to the cabinet terminals are correct in relation to users diagrams of the cabinet. d) Check that all the internal connections have been made and that they are correct. e) Check that all the modules are properly inserted in their intended slots. f) Check the configuration and settings in relation to the settings given by the customer.
Commissioning
April 2004
7-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
7.3.2.
Checks according to commissioning instructions

Since the equipment is tested according to the Programming and Testing Instructions 1KHW000898-EN prior to delivery, only those settings have to be made that are necessary to adapt the equipment to the operating conditions prevailing in the customers plant. The Commissioning Instructions are given in document 1KHW000900EN, which is available in the annex of this manual.
Caution
Do not close/establish the connections to the protection devices until the NSD570 is properly commissioned.
7.3.3.
HMI570 functions to support commissioning

The following functions of the HMI570 can be used to simplify the measurements and to reduce travel during commissioning: a) Manual loop test b) Local test mode
c) Remote test mode

Refer to Section 3.5.12. of this manual for a detailed description of the above mentioned test facilities.
7-6
April 2004
Commissioning
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
8.
8.1. 8.2. 8.2.1. 8.2.2. 8.3. 8.3.1. 8.3.1.1. 8.3.1.2. 8.3.1.3. 8.3.1.4. 8.3.1.5. 8.3.1.6. 8.3.1.7. 8.3.1.8. 8.3.1.9.
Operation and maintenance

Safety instructions ................................................................... 8-2 Operation ................................................................................. 8-5 Normal operation ..................................................................... 8-5 Equipment failure ..................................................................... 8-5 Maintenance ............................................................................ 8-6 Periodic Functional Checks ..................................................... 8-6 Check input power supply voltage ........................................... 8-6 Checks during operation .......................................................... 8-6 Check status data .................................................................... 8-7 Check alarm events ................................................................. 8-7 Alarm polling for several NSD570 in a substation.................... 8-8 Check AF line levels ................................................................ 8-8 Check bit error rates ................................................................ 8-8 Removing the equipment from service for testing.................... 8-9 Checking the entire link............................................................ 8-9
April 2004
8-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
8.
8.1.

Safety instructions
DANGER
Warning labels
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
Back cover
DANGER
April 2004 Operation and maintenance
8-2
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
DANGER
Laser / LED Caution Laser / LED Using HMI570 Caution
The isolating terminals of the external cables must be kept open during installation, maintenance and before storage, decommissioning and disposal.
Class Laser/LED Product.
The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commissioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote test mode). However, when a user is logged in with only "view permission", it is not possible to disable the device.
DANGER
DANGER
April 2004
8-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Caution
The following safety instructions must be strictly observed to prevent injury to persons and damage to plant.
It is important that these Operating Instructions are read and fully comprehended by all people involved including personnel that has already undergone training and is otherwise qualified before changing the configuration or carrying out maintenance etc. Take note of the instructions in Section 6.3 to avoid damage to the equipment while being transported. Cabinets that have not been secured to the floor can tip forwards when the hinged equipment frame is opened. Safety devices such as cover plates must not be removed or bypassed. Pay attention to high-voltage warnings. Before switching on the power supply, check that the circuit is protected by a miniature circuit breaker and the equipment/cabinet is properly grounded and check the polarity and value of the power supply. It is not permitted to insert or withdraw modules during operation; the power supply must be switched off first. The modules contain CMOS integrated circuits that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. It is important to take certain precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge before removing the packing or withdrawing them from the racks. Indispensable precautions to avoid ESD damage are earthing of people working on the modules and a working surface that protected against electrostatic discharge. Only transport modules in their original packing or installed in racks. It is not permitted to modify the equipment in any way.
8-4
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
8.2. 8.2.1.
Operation Normal operation

The LEDs on the front of the equipment indicate its status. Only the green LEDs should be lit in normal operation. The red LEDs indicate and alarm status and should not light during normal operation. Refer to Section 3.3.4. of this manual where a detailed explanation of the various LEDs is given.
8.2.2.
Equipment failure
Refer to Section 9 Troubleshooting for a list of possible failures. A faulty operation will be indicated by red LEDs on the front plate of the module rack. In case there is some fault with the system or the link, red LEDs in the "SYSTEM ALARMS" field of the line interface on the front plate will light up. If there is a hardware failure on a specific module, its "Ok / Fail" LED will turn red. Refer to Section 3.3.4. of this manual where a detailed explanation of the various LEDs is given. If any of the red alarm LEDs of the system light up, the corresponding alarm contact on the common interface G3LC will also operate after the configured alarm pick up delay. The "Upload Alarm" function or the event recorder functions of the HMI570 can be used to see the details of the alarms, see Section 4.8.9.2. and 4.8.10.2. See Section 9.3.4. List of low level alarms and corrective actions for details about causes of alarms.
April 2004
8-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
8.3.
Maintenance
All NSD570 modules are subject to a thorough final test following manufacturing and the complete equipment is calibrated and tested before shipment. The most important functions are performed digitally by the software and are therefore not subject to ageing. Because of the digital techniques involved, the settings made by means of the user interface program HMI570 and the stability of the equipment as a whole are guaranteed over a long period of time. The various processors on the modules include a number of selfmonitoring functions, which together with the loop test performed at periodic intervals continuously check the operation of the modules and the availability of the communications channel as a whole. Nevertheless, testing at periodic intervals is recommended. The frequency of testing depends very much on the operating conditions in the particular installation, but should not be less than once every two years. The following periodic measurements are recommended.
8.3.1.
Periodic Functional Checks

It is important that the reasons for readings, which diverge widely from values recorded during commissioning, be found, even if this means checking the entire equipment. Checking and testing must be carried out by qualified and authorized personnel only, using suitable instruments. Incorrect settings can impair the proper operation of the equipment.
8.3.1.1.
Check input power supply voltage

Verify that the external power supply voltage is within tolerance (48 V DC 250 V DC 20% or 100 V AC 240 V AC -15% +10%).
8.3.1.2.
Checks during operation

The ability of the equipment to function correctly can be checked by manually initiating the loop test: simply press the button "Loop Test" on the front plate of the module rack. Provided that the signal transmitted by the test is received back again within the allotted time, the LED "Trip" lights up and the "Guard" LED is deactivated for about 3 s to confirm that the test was successful. If not, the "Ok / Fail" LED flashes for about 5 s.
8-6
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Should the equipment fail the loop test in two consecutive attempts, it must be removed from service and checked according to the following Sections. In case of the NSD570 Analog, the transmitting and receiving levels shall be checked by means of the HMI570 (see Section 8.3.1.6) after completing the loop test. Readjustment is unnecessary, provided that the receiver level does not vary by more than 3 dB from its nominal value. If the discrepancy is greater, the transmitter level at the remote station and the attenuation of the communications channel should be checked before readjusting the receiver. In case of the NSD570 Digital, the quality of the communications channel shall be checked by means of the HMI570 (see Section 8.3.1.7) after completing the loop test. This may be verified for example by using a bit error rate test equipment, which provides the required data interface and transmission rate. It shall be connected to the communications channel instead of the NSD570 Digital. Corrective actions are unnecessary, provided that the measured bit error rate is less than 1E-07. The peak voltage of the output signal at the remote station and the attenuation of the communications channel (i.e. the peak voltage of the signal at the receiver) should be checked before continuing with fault diagnostics. Caution During routine tests with the NSD570 in operation the "Reset Device" link in the Maintenance menu of the HMI570 should not be activated, as this causes the NSD570 to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for approx. 10 seconds. During this time no commands can be transmitted.
8.3.1.3.
Check status data

The status data of both the local and remote equipment can be uploaded in the HMI570, using the function Upload Status in the Status / Alarm menu. A printout of the status data can be taken for documentation purpose and compared with the previous status data.
8.3.1.4.
Check alarm events

The alarms stored by the built in event recorder of the NSD570 terminals can be inspected. Upload the stored events by activating Upload Latest Events in the Event Recorder menu.
April 2004
8-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
8.3.1.5.
Alarm polling for several NSD570 in a substation

Note: This function is available only in association with the LAN Interface G3LL!
To check the alarm status of a number of NSD570 terminals connected by the station bus, the function Alarm polling can be used (see also Section 9.3.6 of this Manual). The alarm status of the addressed terminals is polled in selectable intervals and in case of any alarm, the alarm text is recorded in a file and displayed on the screen.
8.3.1.6.
Check AF line levels

The HMI570 can be used to check the levels of the AF signals transferred over the analog NSD570 link. The function is accessible by clicking on the Upload Status link in the Status / Alarm menu. A printout of the status data can be taken for documentation purpose and compared with the previous status data.
Note: The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and the Tx/Rx level measurement do only have an adequate accuracy if the EOC is switched off!
8.3.1.7.
Check bit error rates

The HMI570 can be used to check the prevailing bit error rate (BER) of the digital NSD570 link. The function is accessible by clicking on the Upload Status link in the Status / Alarm menu. A printout of the status data can be taken for documentation purpose and compared with the previous status data.
Note:
The Bit Error Rate (BER) short term measurement does only have an adequate accuracy if the prevailing BER is higher than 1E-05! The measurement of the short term average BER takes 16 seconds, the long term average BER is only displayed after the equipment is continuously powered for at least 4.5 hours (262 minutes).
8-8
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
8.3.1.8.
Removing the equipment from service for testing

1. Switch off the equipment and open all isolating terminals to the protection equipment afterwards. 2. Switch on the equipment again by closing the circuit breakers. 3. Set the equipment to the Local Test Mode by clicking on the designated button in the Commissioning menu of the HMI570. 4. Check that the unit is indeed in the local test mode (corresponding warning message appears on screen and the "Ok / Fail" LED of the line interface flashes). 5. Inject commands at the local terminal blocks and check the local command outputs for correct operation. (Note: The trip counters will count the local commands as well!). 6. Deactivate the Local Test Mode by clicking on the designated button in the Commissioning menu of the HMI570. 7. Carry out the manual loop test according to Section 8.3.1.2. 8. The isolating terminals to the protection equipment may be closed again, provided that there is no alarm. 9. If required, synchronize the trip counters in the local and in the remote station by resetting them (menu Status / Alarm -> link Trip Counter -> link Reset Trip Counter: mark check box "All" and click on the button Reset Trip Counter).
8.3.1.9.
Checking the entire link

Following any changes made to the NSD570 equipment or other components of the communications channel, it is recommended to repeat the commissioning procedure described in the document "Commissioning Instructions" 1KHW000900-EN in the annex of this manual for the units at both ends of the line. Replace any modules found to be faulty. It is not recommended to carry out any repairs on site.
April 2004
8-9
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
9.
9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.3.1. 9.3.2. 9.3.2.1. 9.3.2.2. 9.3.2.3. 9.3.2.4. 9.3.3. 9.3.4. 9.3.5. 9.3.6. 9.4. 9.5. 9.6. 9.6.1. 9.6.2. 9.7. 9.8. 9.9.
Troubleshooting
Safety instructions ................................................................... 9-2 Fuses ....................................................................................... 9-4 Alarms...................................................................................... 9-5 Alarm concept.......................................................................... 9-5 Alarm pick up and hold delay................................................... 9-6 High level alarms ..................................................................... 9-6 Low level common alarms and relay interface alarms ............. 9-7 Analog interface alarms ......................................................... 9-10 Digital interface alarms .......................................................... 9-10 Problem localization............................................................... 9-12 List of low level alarms and corrective actions ....................... 9-13 Alarm event recorder ............................................................. 9-20 Alarm polling .......................................................................... 9-21 Warnings................................................................................ 9-21 Some basic checks ................................................................ 9-22 Frequently asked questions ................................................... 9-23 General .................................................................................. 9-23 Where can I get the latest version of this FAQ?..................... 9-25 Replacing faulty modules....................................................... 9-26 Returning modules for repair ................................................. 9-26 Support .................................................................................. 9-26
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
9.
Troubleshooting
Should the communication between two NSD570 units fail, either the communications channel or one of the NSD570 modules can be defective. Following a systematic procedure is the quickest way to localize and eliminate a fault.
9.1.
Safety instructions
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
Safety and monitoring facilities
DANGER
Mechanical safety facilities such as cover plates must not be removed or by-passed.
9-2
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Back cover
DANGER
Using HMI570 Caution The teleprotection link gets disturbed while using certain functions offered by the HMI570 for commissioning the equipment (e.g. local test mode, remote test mode). However, when a user is logged in with only "view permission", it is not possible to disable the device.
DANGER
DANGER
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Caution
Read the following safety instructions carefully before attempting to locate faults.
Fault-finding may only be conducted by properly trained personnel that have been authorized to do so. It is not permitted to insert or withdraw modules during operation; the power supply must be switched off first. The modules contain CMOS integrated circuits that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. It is important to take certain precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge before removing the packing or withdrawing them from the racks. Indispensable precautions to avoid ESD damage are earthing of people working on the modules and a working surface that is protected against electrostatic discharge. Only transport modules in their original packing or installed in racks. The modules are manufactured according to the latest SMD technology. Repair at the component level is therefore neither intended nor recommended. As a rule, corrective action is confined to locating and replacing defective modules. Dangerous voltages can occur on the connections to the modules Common Interface G3LC and Relay Interface G3LR. Take care not to touch these connections under any circumstances. It is not permitted to modify the equipment in any way.
9.2.
Fuses
Used fuses in the equipment (per power supply unit): G3LH: 2.5 AT / 250 V (5 x 20 mm)
9-4
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.3. 9.3.1.
Alarms Alarm concept

The alarm concept of the NSD570 system is designed to - detect and locate the sources responsible for abnormal operation of the system, and - provide information about the kind of problems detected. The NSD570 alarms are hierarchically organized, with high level alarms on top and a variety of low level alarms at the bottom of the hierarchy. Low level alarms are grouped into 3 categories: - common alarms and relay interface alarms - analog interface alarms - digital interface alarms Begin and end of all low level alarms are recorded with date/time stamps by the event recorder integral to the NSD570. The high level alarms can be signaled - with a configurable delay/hold time - on the various outputs of the Relay Interfaces G3LR. A number of alarms are generated by the HMI570. These HMI-alarms are not mapped into high level alarms and cannot be routed to relay outputs. Three user alarms can be mapped on the outputs on G3LR. The alarm sources to generate these user alarms can be configured individually by logical OR-gating of any from the high level alarms "HW Alarm", "HW Warning", "Link Alarm", "Transmit Alarm" and "Receive Alarm" with some special alarms (Tx/Rx Signal, SNR/BER alarm). This is valid for the local alarms as well as for the remote alarms (except for "HW Warning"). The programmed pick up delay for the outputs will be activated by the first configured alarm of the list that appears, and the hold time will be counted down to zero when the last configured alarm in the list has disappeared. For each NSD570 in the rack there is an alarm relay with switch over contacts available on the Common Interface G3LC. It is activated if any of the local alarms of the corresponding device appear. The programmed alarm pick-up and hold delay is valid for these outputs too.
Note: The remote alarms are not signaled on the alarm outputs of the local G3LC. But they are included in the System Alarm which may be mapped on any available output of the Relay Interfaces G3LR.
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-5
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
9.3.2.
Alarm pick up and hold delay

The alarm pick-up time and the alarm hold time can be set in the range from 1 15 seconds. They are valid for all alarms in common, i.e. for the high level alarms and the user alarms, which are mapped on the outputs of G3LR, and for the alarm relays on G3LC that reflect the local alarm of the two devices in a rack.
9.3.2.1.
High level alarms

The following table lists the high level alarms, their meaning and output devices (red LEDs on equipment front; switch over contacts on G3LR which are programmable by means of the HMI570):
High level alarm HW Warning
Remark
Meaning The equipment is operational, but one of the redundant power supply units (PSU) failed Signals that a hardware problem in the equipment generating the alarm has been detected
Displayed by LED X Unit 1, Unit 2 X OK / Fail (on the modules concerned)
Output via G3LR contact X
HW Alarm
Link Alarm
Indicates that the quality of the received signal is insufficient. Possible reasons are excessive noise, low input level, interference, faulty transmitter at the remote side, Signals a problem detected in the equipment's transmit part Signals a problem detected in the equipment's receive part
1)
Transmit Alarm Receive Alarm Local Alarm
X Transmit X Receive X Local X Remote
X X X
OR function of all alarms of the local equipment (except HW-Warning) OR function of all alarms of the remote equipment (except HW-Warning) Local Alarm OR Remote Alarm
Remote Alarm
2)
System Alarm
Table 9.1
Remarks:
High level alarms
1) For each line interface, a switch over contact is available on G3LC 2) The alarm is sent via EOC over the link to the remote equipment, so that the following equation holds: Remote Alarm on Local Equipment = Local Alarm on Remote Equipment.
9-6
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.3.2.2.
Low level common alarms and relay interface alarms

Self-testing routines continuously monitor the operational status of the NSD570. Alarm is given in the following cases: The system detects incompatibilities with the hardware used (during startup) The short circuit supervision for the two solid state outputs on the relay interfaces has picked up (Imax > 2.5 A approx.) Tx single component failure in one of the two input circuits on the relay interfaces HW Warning: undervoltage alarm of one of the two redundant power supply modules Alarm: cyclic loop test failure (after 3 unsuccessful attempts) Rx single component failure (guard and command signals being either received simultaneously or completely lost) Tx command duration (if monitoring is enabled, the guard signal is sent again after the configured maximum Tx command duration time has elapsed) Checksum error (internal and external program and data memory) Internal system clock error / external synchronization error External power supply and internal supply voltage failure Real Time Bus communication error Hardware and/or software configuration error EOC checksum error Alarm signal from the remote station Local or remote test mode activated
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
The following table lists the low level common alarms and the relay interface alarms, and shows their influence on the high level alarms.
High Level Alarm
(Line Interface)
Low Level Alarm HW Release Common Interface and Bus Plane do not match Overcurrent in MOSFET output 2 Overcurrent in MOSFET output 1 Single component failure input 2 Single component failure input 1 Error Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84) Error Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 (N76) Error Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) Error Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) Error Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) Error Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) Error Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) Error Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) Micro controller FLASH verify error 5 V supply voltage failure Warning: Undervoltage redundant supply 2 Warning: Undervoltage redundant supply 1 Undervoltage alarm supply 2 Undervoltage alarm supply 1 Program memory internal CRC check failed Program memory SDRAM CRC check failed Data memory lookup table CRC check failed Program memory internal CRC add. segment failed SDRAM data memory check failed Internal data memory check failed Program Memory micro controller CRC check failed Remote test mode active Local test mode active Wrong time from RTC No signal (IRIG-B) on RTC More Relay Interfaces configured than plugged Wrong slot for Line Interface Configuration error Link failure: command outputs set to a predefined state Loop test error Unblocking pulse 7) 5) 6) 0.20 3) 0.19 3) 0.18 3) 0.17 3) 0.16 4) 0.14 4) 0.13 4) 0.12 4) 0.11 4) 0.10 4) 4) 4) 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.0 1.31 1.30 1.29 1.28 1.26 1.25 1.24 1.21 1.20 1.18 1.16 4) 1.12 1.10 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Flashing Flashing OK OK OK Fail Fail OK OK OK
9-8
Alarm Code HW Warning HW Alarm Link Alarm Transmit Alarm Receive Alarm Local Alarm Remote Alarm System Alarm OK / Fail
Remark
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
High Level Alarm

(Line Interface)
Low Level Alarm Remote alarm CRC failure EOC Simultaneous trip and guard received No trip and no guard Tx continuous command H Tx continuous command G Tx continuous command F Tx continuous command E Tx continuous command D Tx continuous command C Tx continuous command B Tx continuous command A Comm. error Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84) Comm. error Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 (N76) Comm. error Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) Comm. error Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) Comm. error Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) Comm. error Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) Comm. error Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) Comm. error Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) Continuous command alarm 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 4) 4.19 4) 4.18 4) 4.17 4) 4.16 4) 4.15 4) 4.14 4) 4.13 4) 4.12 4) 4.11 4) 4.10 4) 4) 4) 4) 4) 4) 4) 4.9 4.8 4.7 4.6 4.5 4.4 4.0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Table 9.2
Remarks:
Low level common alarms and relay interface alarms
3) Only in combination with other relay interface alarms; the corresponding Ok / Fail LED of the affected relay interface lights up red 4) Only in combination with other relay interface alarms 5) LED Supply Unit 2 lights red 6) LED Supply Unit 1 lights red 7) Generates an entry in the event recorder only and activates an output contact, if configured
Troubleshooting
Alarm Code HW Warning HW Alarm Link Alarm Transmit Alarm Receive Alarm Local Alarm Remote Alarm System Alarm OK / Fail
Remark
April 2004
9-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
9.3.2.3.
Analog interface alarms

The following criteria are continuously monitored and produce alarms: Tx signal level drop off below configured limit (- dB from nominal) Rx signal level out of configured limits ( dB from nominal) Signal-to-noise ratio too low (the threshold for the SNR alarm depends on the setting of the bandwidth and the operating mode; in general it is 3 dB above the specified value for Pmc < 1%) Internal supply voltage failure The following table lists the low level analog interface alarms, and shows their influence on the high level alarms.
High Level Alarm Alarm Code HW Warning HW Alarm Link Alarm Transmit Alarm Receive Alarm Local Alarm Remote Alarm System Alarm OK / Fail (Line Interface) 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X OK OK OK Fail Remark
Low Level Alarm SNR Alarm Receive level alarm Transmit level alarm +/- 12 V supply voltage failure
Table 9.3
Low level analog interface alarms
9.3.2.4.
Digital interface alarms

The following criteria are continuously monitored and produce alarms: FPGA initialization failure Address error Synchronization error Bit error rate above the configured level LOS Loss Of incoming Signal (G.703/E1/T1/Optical) AIS Alarm Indication Signal (G.703/E1/T1) LFA Loss of Frame Alignment (E1/T1) RRA Receive Remote Alarm (E1/T1/Optical Direct Fiber) Laser failure (G1LO)
9-10
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
The following criteria are monitored during start-up and produce alarms: Missing piggyback (if configured) or not supported by the firmware loaded on G3LD FPGA CRC/loading failure on G3LD Specific E1/T1 framer errors on G1LE and G1LO (see list below) The following table lists the low level digital interface alarms, and shows their influence on the high level alarms.
High Level Alarm Alarm Code HW Warning HW Alarm Link Alarm Transmit Alarm Receive Alarm Local Alarm Remote Alarm System Alarm OK / Fail (Line Interface) 3.28 3.25 3.24 3.21 3.20 3.17 8) 3.13 8) 3.12 3.8 8) 3.7 3.6 3.5 9) 3.4 3.3 3.2 3.1 3.0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Fail OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail OK OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail Fail Remark Low Level Alarm Laser Failure Remote equipment has wrong address BER Bit Error Rate alarm Alarm Indication Signal G.703 Loss of Signal G.703 Pattern synchronization error Read error from E1/T1 framer Write error to E1/T1 framer Piggyback missing LOS Loss of Signal AIS Alarm Indication Signal LFA Loss of Frame Alignment RRA Receive Remote Alarm FW version does not support piggyback Initialization failure in FPGA CRC failure while loading FPGA FPGA not loaded
Table 9.4
Remarks:
Low level digital interface alarms
8) Also applicable for Optical Interface G1LO (Optical Direct Fiber, Optical FOX/OTERM, Optical IEEE C37.94). 9) Also applicable for Optical Interface G1LO (Optical Direct Fiber).
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-11
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
9.3.3.
Problem localization
If for both equipment in a link the state of hardware alarms and link alarms are known, the source of the problem can be localized to one or several of the four major fault areas of a link marked in Fig. 9.1. Table 9.5 shows how the affected areas can be found from the alarm information. Note that an equipments link alarm is only considered to be valid when no hardware alarm is present.
Equipment A Commands NSD570 Channel B to A Equipment B NSD570 Commands
Channel A to B
9-Fault-location.vsd
Fig. 9.1
The four major fault location areas of an NSD570 link
Equipment A Hardware Alarm No No No No Yes No Yes Link Alarm No No Yes Yes X X X
Equipment B Hardware Alarm No No No No No Yes Yes Link Alarm No Yes No Yes X X X Problem localized in Channel A > B Channel B > A Channels B > A and A > B Equipment A Equipment B Equipment A and B
Table 9.5
Alarm localization with link and hardware alarms
9-12
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.3.4.
List of low level alarms and corrective actions

Once the problem has been localized, corrective actions are required to eliminate the source of the problem. The following table lists all low level alarms with explanations and proposed corrective actions (in italic). The alarms with entry HMI in column Alarm Code at the end of the following table are generated by the user interface program HMI570.
Low Level Alarm
Alarm Explanation Code Corrective Action Change the bus plane or the common interface board (whichever does have a non-compatible hardware version). Refer to document 1KHW000902 Compatibility Requirements NSD570
HW Release Common Interface and Bus 0.20 Plane do not match
Overcurrent in MOSFET output 2
0.19
This error appears always in conjunction with at least one Error Relay Interface (Alarm Code 0.7 to 0.14) that indicates the plug-in position of the affected relay board(s). 1. Disconnect the external cable from the affected relay interface and check whether the alarm disappears. 2. If after step 1 the alarm does not disappear, check for short circuits between the wires connected to output 1 or 2 of the affected boards. Decrease the externally applied voltage or increase the load impedance at output 1 or 2 of the affected relay interface.
Overcurrent in MOSFET output 1
0.18
Single component failure input 2
0.17
A hardware error on input 1 or 2 of one or more of the relay interfaces has been detected. This error appears always in conjunction with at least one Error Relay Interface (Alarm
Single component failure input 1
0.16
Code 0.7 to 0.14) that indicates the plug-in position of the affected relay board(s). Replace the affected relay interface(s). Indicates the plug-in position of the relay interface(s) generating at least one of the following low level alarms: - Overcurrent in MOSFET output 2 (Alarm Code 0.19), - Overcurrent in MOSFET output 1 (Alarm Code 0.18), - Single component failure input 2 (Alarm Code 0.17), - Single component failure input 1 (Alarm Code 0.16). Follow the instructions given for these low level alarms.
Error Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84) Error Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 (N76) Error Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) Error Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) Error Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) Error Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) Error Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) Error Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) Micro-controller FLASH verify error
0.14 0.13 0.12 0.11 0.10 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.5
Error during startup of the DSP / micro controller on the line interface, indicating a hardware defect of the micro controller or FLASH memory. Replace the line interface
5 V supply voltage failure
0.4
Supply on Common Interface faulty or contact problems at the connector. Check connectors to busplane, replace module rack.
Warning: Undervoltage redundant supply 2 Warning: Undervoltage redundant supply 1
0.3 0.2
Replace defective power supply module 2 Replace defective power supply module 1
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-13
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Low Level Alarm Undervoltage alarm supply 2
Alarm Explanation Code 0.1 Corrective Action Burden for supply module 2 too high (secondary short circuit), supply monitoring on common interface defective, supply module defective or no primary voltage. Watch the Supply LEDs while troubleshooting: pull out each individual module, otherwise replace power supply unit 2, otherwise replace module rack.
Undervoltage alarm supply 1
0.0
Burden for supply module 1 too high (secondary short circuit), supply monitoring on common interface defective, supply module defective or no primary voltage. Watch the Supply LEDs while troubleshooting: pull out each individual module, otherwise replace power supply unit 1, otherwise replace module rack.
Program memory internal CRC check failed
1.31
Indicating a hardware defect of the DSP / SDRAM on the line interface. If persistent: replace the line interface.
Program memory SDRAM CRC check failed 1.30
Data memory lookup table CRC check failed 1.29
Program
memory
internal
CRC
add. 1.28
segment failed SDRAM data memory check failed 1.26
Internal data memory check failed
1.25
Program
Memory
micro-controller
CRC 1.24
Indicating a hardware defect of the micro-controller FLASH memory on the line interface. If persistent: replace the line interface.
check failed Remote test mode active 1.21
The remote test mode is still active. Deactivate the remote test mode and conclude testing / commissioning activities before leaving the equipment.
Local test mode active
1.20
The local test mode is still active. Deactivate the local test mode and conclude testing / commissioning activities before leaving the equipment.
Wrong time from RTC
1.18
If no externally sync time (GPS Sync = IRIG-B) is available or card never operated before or not powered up for several days -> internal time not valid Set time If externally sync time (GPS Sync = IRIG-B) Check timing source and connections
No signal (IRIG-B) on RTC
1.16
Check timing source and connections
9-14
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Low Level Alarm More Relay Interfaces configured
Alarm Explanation Code than 1.12 Corrective Action This error appears always in conjunction with at least one Comm. error Relay Interface (Alarm Code 4.4 to 4.11) that indicates the plug-in position of the affected relay board(s). Plug missing relay interfaces or replace defective ones. Refer to same time appearing alarms Comm. error Relay Interface for finding faulty or missing boards. Reset the equipment using HMI570.
plugged
Wrong slot for Line Interface Initialization alarm during startup
1.10 1.9
Use correct slot Error during startup of the line interface, indicating a hardware defect of the DSP. If persistent, replace the line interface.
Configuration error
1.7
Invalid configuration or board was not configured Download valid configuration. If persistent, replace line interface.
Link failure: command outputs set to a pre- 1.6 defined state Loop test error Unblocking pulse Remote alarm CRC failure EOC Simultaneous trip and guard received No trip and no guard SNR Alarm Receive level alarm Transmit level alarm +/- 12 V supply voltage failure 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.0
Check link Check link, check settings, check hardware. Unblocking condition occurred (visible in event recorder only) Error in the remote device. Communication error in the EOC. If persistent, check link. Check link. Check link, check connections.
Check link. Check link, check connections. Check connections for possible short circuits / overload, disconnect cable; if still alarm, replace line interface Indicating a hardware defect of the internal 12 V supply on the analog line interface Replace the analog line interface if the error persists.
Laser Failure Remote equipment has wrong address
3.28 3.25
The laser does not run properly due to a hardware problem. Replace the optical interface G1LO. The device address in the configuration file does not match with the device address of the remote equipment. Correct the device address in the configuration file or in the remote equipment, so that they match.
BER Bit Error Rate alarm
3.24
The communication channel is distorted. Find the reason for the distortion in the channel or increase the BER Alarm Threshold in the configuration file.
Alarm Indication Signal G.703
3.21
The Alarm Indication Signal (all 1s bit pattern) according to G.703 is received, generated by some multiplexer on the communication channel. Check the communication channel and correct the problem.
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-15
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Low Level Alarm Loss Of Signal G.703
Alarm Explanation Code 3.20 Corrective Action There is a problem with the communication channel: The received signal level is insufficient or the channel is interrupted. Check the wiring of the communication channel and check the signal at the receiver input. Correct the communication problem.
Pattern synchronization error
3.17
There is a synchronization problem or the communication channel is distorted. Check the synchronization settings of the local and the remote device. Find the reason for the distortion in the channel and correct the problem.
Read error from E1/T1 framer
3.13
The E1/T1 framer cannot be read due to a hardware problem. Replace the digital line interface G3LD, otherwise replace the E1/T1 interface G1LE or the optical interface G1LO.
Write error to E1/T1 framer
3.12
The E1/T1 framer cannot be written due to a hardware problem. Replace the digital line interface G3LD, otherwise replace the E1/T1 interface G1LE or the optical interface G1LO.
Piggyback missing
3.8
An interface requiring a piggyback module has been configured, but the piggyback module is not plugged. Reconfigure the device or plug the piggyback module.
LOS Loss Of Signal
3.7
There is a problem with the communication channel: The received signal level is insufficient or the channel is interrupted. Check the wiring of the communication channel and check the signal at the receiver input. Correct the communication problem.
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
3.6
The Alarm Indication Signal (all 1s bit pattern) is present in the received E1/T1 data, generated by some multiplexer on the communication channel. Check the communication channel and correct the problem.
LFA Loss of Frame Alignment
3.5
There is a synchronization problem or the communication channel is distorted. Check the synchronization settings of the local and the remote device. Find the reason for the distortion in the channel and correct the problem.
RRA Receive Remote Alarm
3.4
The remote equipment reports an error in the E1/T1 or Optical Direct Fiber interface. Check the E1/T1/Optical Direct Fiber settings of both the remote or local device or replace the remote or local digital line interface or replace the remote or local E1/T1 interface or the optical interface.
FW version does not support piggyback
3.3
Update the firmware of the digital line interface to a version that supports the piggyback. Refer to documents 1KHW000902 Compatibility Requirements NSD570 and 1KHW000896 Firmware Download Description NSD570.
Initialization failure in FPGA
3.2
Some hardware in the digital line interface could not be initialized. Reset the equipment using HMI570. If the error persists, replace the digital line interface.
9-16
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Low Level Alarm CRC failure while loading FPGA
Alarm Explanation Code 3.1 Corrective Action Some hardware in the digital line interface could not be initialized. Reset the equipment using HMI570. If the error persists, replace the digital line interface.
FPGA not loaded
3.0
A hardware fault in the digital line interface has been detected. Replace the digital line interface.
Tx continuous command H Tx continuous command G Tx continuous command F Tx continuous command E Tx continuous command D Tx continuous command C Tx continuous command B Tx continuous command A Comm. error Relay Interface 4 TPE 2 (N84) Comm. error Relay Interface 3 TPE 2 (N76) Comm. error Relay Interface 2 TPE 2 (N70) Comm. error Relay Interface 1 TPE 2 (N64) Comm. error Relay Interface 4 TPE 1 (N52) Comm. error Relay Interface 3 TPE 1 (N46) Comm. error Relay Interface 2 TPE 1 (N40) Comm. error Relay Interface 1 TPE 1 (N34) Continuous command alarm
4.19 4.18 4.17 4.16 4.15 4.14 4.13 4.12 4.11 4.10 4.9 4.8 4.7 4.6 4.5 4.4 4.0
The continuous command monitoring for the corresponding command (A H) is enabled and the maximum duration as configured by HMI570 has been exceeded. This error appears always in conjunction with the Continuous command alarm (Alarm Code 4.0). Verify that the continuous command monitoring / maximum duration of the corresponding command (A H) as configured by HMI570 is correct or change the settings of the equipment generating the command so that it is not longer than allowed. Either the corresponding relay interface is not plugged, the relay interface is faulty or there is a problem with the connector of the relay interface to the bus plane. Plug the relay interface or if already plugged check its connector to the bus plane. If the error persists, replace the relay interface. If this does not help, replace the module rack.
The maximum command duration as configured by HMI570 has been exceeded for one or several of the configured commands. This error appears always in conjunction with at least one Tx continuous command (Alarm Code 4.12 to 4.19). Verify that the maximum command duration as configured by HMI570 is correct or change the settings of the equipment generating the commands so that they are not longer than allowed.
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-17
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Low Level Alarm Error! Alarm upload failed
Alarm Explanation Code HMI Corrective Action HMI570 could not upload the alarms from the device. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Can not connect to device Error! Communication incorrectly initialized Error! Configuration download failed
HMI HMI HMI
Refer to Section 4.10.7.1 Refer to Section 4.10.7.2 HMI570 could not download the configuration to the device. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Configuration file is invalid Error! Configuration is invalid
HMI HMI
The selected file is not a valid configuration file. Try to load a valid configuration file. The configuration is not valid. Correct the settings to remove the detected conflicts given in the warning text.
Error! Configuration load failed
HMI
HMI570 could not load the selected configuration from disk. Check permissions for reading from the specified directory of the disk. Check the disk.
Error! Configuration save failed
HMI
HMI570 could not save the configuration to disk. Check permissions for writing to the specified directory of the disk. Check the disk.
Error! Configuration upload failed
HMI
HMI570 could not upload the configuration from the device. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Could not save HMI570 Options
HMI
HMI570 could not save the changed RS-232 port parameter. You will have the default settings the next time you start the HMI570. Check permissions for writing to the HMI570 directory of the disk. Check the disk.
Error! Device communication failed
HMI
The communication between the HMI570 and the device failed. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Device communication is busy! Please HMI try it later again Error! Device communication timeout wrong checksum Error! Device communication, device reports HMI wrong end byte Error! Device communication, device transmission restart Error! Device could not execute this function HMI Error! Device does not allow this function Error! Device reports unknown function Error! Disconnection failed HMI HMI HMI HMI HMI
Refer to Section 4.10.7.2 Refer to Section 4.10.7.2 A communication error or a compatibility problem has probably occurred. Retry the operation. If the error persists, make sure that HMI570 and the line interface generating the alarm are compatible, using document 1KHW000902 Compatibility Requirements NSD570.
Error! Device communication, device reports HMI
HMI570 could not disconnect from the device. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
9-18
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Low Level Alarm Error! DSP boot failure
Alarm Explanation Code HMI Corrective Action On the DSP interface, the DSP could not boot correctly due to a hardware problem. Replace the DSP interface.
Error! Event recorder contains invalid data
HMI
The event recorder contains invalid data and cannot be uploaded by the HMI570. Try to upload a smaller number of events. If that does not work, you have to clear the event recorder.
Error! Event recorder file is invalid Error! Event recorder load failed
HMI HMI
The selected file is not a valid event recorder file. Try to load a valid event recorder file. HMI570 could not load the selected event recorder from disk. Check permissions for reading from the specified directory of the disk. Check the disk.
Error! Event recorder save failed
HMI
HMI570 could not save the event recorder to disk. Check permissions for writing to the specified directory of the disk. Check the disk.
Error! Event recorder upload failed
HMI
HMI570 could not upload the event recorder from the device. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! File can not be saved or loaded
HMI
HMI570 cannot save or load a file. Save error: Check permissions for reading from and writing to the specified directory of the disk. Check the disk.
Error! Firmware download failed
HMI
HMI570 could not download the selected firmware to the device. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! No configuration loaded
HMI
A configuration must be loaded. Load a configuration from disk or upload a configuration from device.
Error! No device connected
HMI
A device must be connected. Connect to the device, if this fails: Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Send task failed
HMI
HMI570 could not send a task to the device. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Status upload failed
HMI
HMI570 could not upload the Status from the device. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! The device is already connected by another user/application Error! This configuration version is not supported Error! Time and date upload failed
HMI HMI
Refer to Section 4.10.7.2 The installed HMI570 version does not support the version of the configuration running on the device. Update the HMI570 to the newest version.
HMI
HMI570 could not upload the time and date from the device. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-19
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Low Level Alarm Error! Trip counter upload failed
Alarm Explanation Code HMI Corrective Action HMI570 could not upload the trip counter from the device. Check the communication channel to the NSD570 device. Check the wiring and the connectors.
Error! Upload failed (wrong length) Error! Wrong configuration checksum Error! Wrong configuration length
HMI HMI HMI
HMI570 could not upload the configuration from the device. Retry the operation. If the error persists, make sure that HMI570 and the line interface generating the alarm are compatible, using document 1KHW000902 Compatibility Requirements NSD570.
Error! You don't have the permission to execute this function ! Invalid password
HMI
A user without modify permission is not allowed to execute some functions. Refer to Section 4.10.5
HMI
Password during user login is not correct. Type in the correct password or ask a user with admin permission to change it.
Password must be at least 4 characters long HMI You are not registered HMI
Use a password that is at least 4 characters long The HMI570 does not know the user name. Check that you typed the user name correct. If you are not registered, ask a user with admin permission to add you as a new user, refer to Section 4.10.5.
Table 9.6
Low level alarms with explanation and corrective actions
9.3.5.
Alarm event recorder

The event recorder is described in detail in Section 3.5.10. All alarm events available in the system are recorded continuously in the nonvolatile memory of G3LA or G3LD with date and time stamps supplied by the internal real time clock (RTC) of the equipment. The following events are recorded: changes of the alarm status of the system, commands or loop tests sent/received, external manipulations to the equipment, e.g. when the internal clock is set or a new configuration is downloaded. The RTC has an autonomy of about 12 hours. If the power supply to the equipment is switched off for more than 12 hours, the time-stamp supplied by the RTC will no longer be correct. Note that the RTC can be synchronized to an external clock source via two special inputs available on the Supply Backplane G1LB (refer to Section 3.5.10.5 and Section 6.5.3.2). Up to 7500 alarm events are recorded. If this number is exceeded, the oldest events are discarded.
9-20
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.3.6.
Alarm polling
Note: This function is available only in association with the LAN Interface G3LL!
The alarm polling facility allows to monitor the alarm status of a number of NSD570 terminals connected to the station bus. The alarm status of the addressed terminals is polled in selectable intervals and in case of any alarm, the alarm text is recorded to a log file and displayed on the screen. Once a list of NSD570 terminals to be polled has been configured, the alarm polling can be switched on and off. With alarm polling enabled, all devices in the list are polled at specified intervals (daily, hourly, every xx minutes) and the alarms coming back if any are written to the log file with date and time stamps. If a device cannot be reached, a communication error will be recorded for that device. If a specific device in the network has to be connected via the HMI570, the alarm polling function has to be switched off first. All low level alarms are reported via alarm polling and can be viewed on screen or in the log file. A detailed description and the configuration of the HMI570 LAN for setting up the Alarm Polling can be found in Section 4.10.13 of these Operating Instructions.
9.4.
Warnings
Warnings are used to signal that an equipment is not in normal operation state, but otherwise working properly. A warning is given from the NSD570 system when one of the two power supply modules in the redundant configuration fails (undervoltage detector on Common Interface G3LC activated).
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-21
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
9.5.
Some basic checks

It is advisable to do the following basic checks before energizing a teleprotection link. This minimizes the chance of a fault in the first place and also reduces the time for troubleshooting in case there is any. Check of the communication line (as described in Section 7.2), especially if the NSD570 Analog is used in the frequency band of a PLC link. Ensure that the wires are properly connected to the equipment. Check that Tx and Rx lines are cross-connected to the communication devices or to the remote equipment in a point-topoint configuration. Check whether the supply voltage to be applied to the equipment is correct. Ensure that all the modules are properly inserted in their intended slots. Check that the external connections are correct as per plant drawings.
9-22
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
9.6. 9.6.1.
Frequently asked questions General

Question: The "Connect" operation is not successful. What can I do to correct this problem? Answer: Check all hardware and its settings forming the communication path, starting at the PC/notebook and ending at the equipment. The Section "Communication between the HMI570 and the NSD570" in Section 4.5 gives the relevant information. If the communication path is made up of several sections as in case of connection via modem, intranet/internet, dedicated data channel and/or via EOC, proceed in steps, checking the path sections in sequence starting at the side of the PC/notebook. Question: The "Connect" operation is still not successful. What else can I do to correct this problem? Answer: Maybe the device address used is incorrect. Try the default device addresses: use 241 for the device plugged in TPE 1 respectively 246 for TPE 2. Note that the station bus of the rack must be disconnected. This is because all devices plugged in TPE 1 respectively TPE 2 share the same default address. If the "Connect Device" was successful, the programmed device address is shown and automatically used for the next interactions (e.g. Configuration Upload From Device). Question: The "Connect" operation is again not successful. What else can I do to correct this problem? Answer: For some reasons (e.g. a boot failure of the device indicated by the red Fail LED and all others off) it is only possible to connect the device with address 255. It is required to disconnect the station bus and plug off one line interface in the rack first, before connecting with 255 to the other line interface. After successfully connecting the device with address 255, a firmware download has to be executed, see Section 4.8.11.7 Firmware Download. If the problem still exists, replace the corresponding line interface module.
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-23
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Question: The teleprotection link does not work. What can I do to correct this problem? Answer: Check the alarms: If there is a hardware alarm at either side of the link, the reason of it must be found and the problem corrected. Upload the equipment status/alarm and study the alarm messages given by the HMI570. One single problem can produce a number of such messages. If for both equipment of the link no hardware alarms are reported (anymore), the problem has to be sought in the link. Upload the equipment status/alarm and study the alarm messages given by the HMI570. It may be possible to restrict the problem to one of the following 3 cases: 1. excessive signal attenuation (voltage level at the analog or digital receiver too low), 2. excessive line noise or bit errors, 3. excessive distortion or jitter. Find and correct the source(s) of the problems by measuring at different points along the communication line with data testers (for NSD570 Digital) or level generators/selective level meters (for NSD570 Analog). Question: Some alarms are present, signaled by alarm relay contacts and/or alarm LEDs. Answer: Upload status/alarm data to see the details about the causes of the alarms. If both hardware and link alarms are present, first remove the cause of the hardware alarm. After this has been done, upload system status once again and if a link alarm should still be present find the cause of the link alarm. Check whether the alarm threshold levels are appropriate. Question: Why do the AF levels and the SNR level displayed by the status of the HMI570 fluctuate? Answer: The level will vary approx. 2.5 dB because the guard signal is modulated to transmit data via the EOC. The SNR value displayed by the HMI570 will vary as well, depending on the packets transmitted via the EOC. The Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) and the Tx/Rx level measurement do only have an adequate accuracy if the EOC is switched off!
9-24 April 2004 Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Question: How can I calculate the guard and trip frequencies of the NSD570 Analog for the various operating modes and channel center frequencies? Answer: See Section 3.5.4. Analog Operating Modes. Question: How are the outputs on the Relay Interface G3LR operated, if they are configured as alarm outputs? And what about the LEDs of the outputs on the front panel? Answer: The relay contacts on G3LR are operated in the same way than the alarm relays on the Common Interface G3LC, i.e. the alarm condition is the same as the power off state of the equipment (relay coil not energized). On both modules the user can still choose by using the corresponding output contacts - whether the alarm contact shall be normally open or normally closed. The solid-state outputs are operated differently. An alarm condition is signaled with a conducting (energized) FET. Therefore the alarm condition is not the same as the power off state of the equipment. Both type of output contacts are activated only after the programmed alarm delay time has elapsed. The same applies for the alarm hold time. The LEDs of the outputs on G3LR correspond with the state of the contacts, i.e. they also light up only if the alarm delay time has elapsed and they will light on for the duration of the alarm hold time.
9.6.2.
Where can I get the latest version of this FAQ?

Send e-mail to: [email protected]
Troubleshooting
April 2004
9-25
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
9.7.
Replacing faulty modules

Modules may only be replaced by properly trained personnel authorized to do so. Strictly observe the safety instructions at the beginning of this Section. Except for the power supply G3HL, modules may not be withdrawn or inserted while the equipment is in operation. Switch off the power supply and disconnect external cables first. As stated earlier, replacement of faulty items can be done only at module level and not component level since surface mount technology is used for components of most of the modules. While replacing a faulty module with a new module, ensure that the fault is not due to some incorrect external wiring or mode of operation. Else even the new module will go faulty. Remember to program correct jumper settings (if any) on the new module before replacement.
9.8.
Returning modules for repair

A module identified and confirmed to be faulty should be sent for repairs to ABB. It should be packed preferably in the original packing or in anti-static bags with additional mechanical protection to avoid damage during transport. It should be accompanied by a short description of the observed fault. ABB is not responsible for a module received which was damaged during transport. The financial implications of the repairs depends upon the agreement with the client. Refer to document 1KHM010296 - Repair and Return Procedure in the Appendix.
9.9.
Support
Refer to document 1KHM010297 - Need Support for your Communication System? in the Appendix.
9-26
April 2004
Troubleshooting
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
10.
10.1. 10.2. 10.3. 10.4.
Storage, decommissioning and disposal

Safety instructions ................................................................. 10-2 Storage .................................................................................. 10-3 Decommissioning .................................................................. 10-3 Disposal ................................................................................. 10-3
April 2004
10-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
10.
10.1.

Safety instructions
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
ESD protection Caution ESD
The modules in this equipment contain devices, which can be damaged by electrostatic discharges. Appropriate measures must be taken before unpacking modules or withdrawing them from equipment racks. Essential precautions to prevent ESD damage when handling or working on modules are grounding straps for technical personnel and the provision of anti-static workbenches. Modules may only be shipped either in their original packing or installed in equipment racks.
DANGER
The circuit breaker for the power supply of the equipment must be switched OFF. The circuit breakers for optional equipment in the cabinet must be switched OFF. Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or from the equipment. The isolating terminals of the external cables must be kept open during installation, maintenance and before storage, decommissioning and disposal.
DANGER
DANGER
10-2
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
10.2.
Storage
The equipment must be stored at a temperature between -40 C and +70 C and a relative humidity < 95 %, non-condensing. The cabinet should be stored in its original wooden frame and plastic cover. Make sure that the plastic cover is undamaged. Where the equipment has to be stored for a long period, precautions to prevent corrosion must be taken. This is especially important in humid climates. Modules should be stored preferably in their original packing with an outer packing to protect against mechanical damage.
10.3.
Decommissioning
The procedure for decommissioning the equipment is as follows: First of all, the application in which the equipment is used, must be disabled. This is of special importance when protection signaling is concerned. Switch off the circuit breaker controlling the power supply to the equipment (OFF). Disconnect the power supply cable from the equipment. Repeat for redundant power supply, if applicable. Open the isolating terminals from the external cables. Disconnect the external wiring according to the respective wiring lists and diagrams to avoid any risk of disconnecting other equipment by mistake. If the complete cabinet has to be removed, support it in a way that it cannot fall over when its anchoring is undone and remove the bolts holding the base frame. The cabinet can then be lifted out and dismantled. Should no suitable support for the cabinet be available, it should be laid down horizontally. If the NSD570 rack has to be removed from the cabinet, disconnect the internal wiring between the NSD570 rack and the terminal blocks in the cabinet. Then remove the screws holding the rack at the front and withdraw the rack. If it is intended to use an NSD570 rack somewhere else, carefully pack it while observing the ESD rules.
10.4.
Disposal
When disposing of the equipment, do so in strict accordance with regional and national regulations for the disposal of electrical and electronic components. The modular construction of the equipment enables the printed circuit boards and housings to be easily separated for recycling.
Storage, decommissioning and disposal April 2004 10-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
LAN Interface G3LL Caution For disposal of the lithium battery, the regional and national regulations for electrical and electronic waste have to be observed.
10-4
April 2004
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
11.
11.1. 11.2. 11.3. 11.3.1. 11.3.2. 11.4.
Appendices
Abbreviations ......................................................................... 11-2 Order numbers....................................................................... 11-4 Photographs .......................................................................... 11-7 Front view of NSD570............................................................ 11-7 Rear view of NSD570 ............................................................ 11-7 Dimension Drawing Module Rack G7BI................................. 11-8
Appendices
April 2004
11-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
11.
11.1.
Appendices
Abbreviations
AC AIS AF AWG BER C DC DCE DSP DTE EMC EOC ESD FPGA FSK HF HMI HTML HTTP IEC IP ITU-T LAN LED LOS MC /C HMI570 Alternating Current Alarm Indication Signal Audio Frequency American Wire Gauge Bit Error Rate Common (terminal of switchover relays) Direct Current Data Circuit-terminating Equipment Digital Signal Processor Data Terminal Equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility Embedded Operation Channel Electrostatic Discharge Field Programmable Gate Array Frequency Shift Keying High Frequency Human Machine Interface Hyper Text Markup Language Hyper Text Transfer Protocol International Engineering Consortium Internet Protocol International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector of ITU Local Area Network Light Emitting Diode Loss Of Signal Micro Controller NSD570 User Interface Program
11-2
April 2004
Appendices
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
N.A. / n.a. NC NO PC PDH PE PLC RD RF RMS RT RT-Bus RTC Rx SD SDH SONET SMD SNR ST STP TCP TPE TT Tx UTP WAN
Not Applicable or Not Available Normally Closed (terminal of switchover relays) Normally Open (terminal of switchover relays) Personal Computer Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Protective Earth Power Line Carrier (communication via the high-voltage line) Receive Data Radio Frequency Root Mean Square Receive Timing Real Time Bus Real Time Clock Receive(r) Send Data Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Synchronous Optical Network Surface Mounted Device Signal to noise ratio Send Timing Shielded Twisted Pairs Transmission Control Protocol Teleprotection Equipment Terminal Timing Transmit(ter) Unshielded Twisted Pairs Wide Area Network
Appendices
April 2004
11-3
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
11.2.
Order numbers
Type Description Order number
Basic Equipment NSD570 Analog NSD570 Digital NSD570*BASIC EQUIPMENT ANALOG 1KHW000913R0001 Consists of G7BI, G3LH, G3LA, G3LR (one each) NSD570*BASIC EQUIPMENT DIGITAL 1KHW000914R0001 Consists of G7BI, G3LH, G3LD, G3LR (one each)
Module Rack G7BI G7BI*MODULE RACK NSD570 1KHW000911R0001
Display Panel G1LC G1LC*DISPLAY PANEL NSD570 1KHW001018R0001
Power Supply G3LH G3LH*POWER SUPPLY NSD570 1KHW000909R0001
Interface Cards G3LA G3LD G1LE G1LO G1LO G3LR G1LR G3LA*ANALOG INTERFACE NSD570 G3LD*DIGITAL INTERFACE NSD570 G1LE*E1/T1 INTERFACE NSD570 G1LO*OPTICAL INTERFACE OTERM/P2P NSD570 G1LO*OPTICAL INTERFACE IEEE C37.94 NSD570 G3LR*RELAY INTERFACE NSD570 G1LR*INPUT TRIPPING VOLTAGE NSD570 1KHW000884R0101 1KHW000886R0102 1KHW000888R0001 1KHW000965R0001 1KHW000965R0010 1KHW000880R0101 1KHW000882R0001
Electrical Connecting Cables G3LA*CABLE FOR ANALOG INTERFACE G1LB*CABLE FOR STATION BUS/RTC SYNC G3LC*CABLE FOR ALARM RELAYS G3LD*CABLE WITH X.21 INTERFACE (15-P) G3LD*CABLE WITH RS-530 INTERFACE (25-P) G3LD*CABLE WITH RS-449 INTERFACE (37-P) G3LD*CABLE WITH ISOLATING TERMINALS G3LD*CABLE FOR G.703/E1/T1 INTERFACE G3LR*CABLE FOR RELAY INTERFACE 1KHW000664R0001 1KHW000668R0001 1KHW000658R0001 1KHW000670R0001 1KHW000669R0001 1KHW000671R0001 1KHW000662R0001 1KHW001003R0001 1KHW000659R0001
11-4
April 2004
Appendices
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Type
Description
Order number
Optical Connecting Cables V9WP*FOC-CB SM 2F INTERN E2000-FC/PC 2M (2m) V9WQ*FOC-CB SM 2F INTERN E2000-E2000 2M (2m) V9WR*FOC-CB SM 2F EXTERN E2000-FC/PC 10M (10m) V9WS*FOC-CB SM 2F EXTERN E2000-E2000 10M (10m) LAN Interface G3LL G3LL*LAN INTERFACE NSD570 1KHW001016R0001 1KHW001213R0001 1KHW000580R0002 1 1KHW000581R0002 1 1KHW000582R0010 1 1KHW000583R0010 1
G3LL*CABLE FOR STATION BUS/RTC SYNC Software and Documentation NSD570*SOFTWARE & DOCUMENTATION CD BRO BAL DS Brochure NSD570 Operating Instructions NSD570 Technical Data NSD570 Software Installation Description HMI570 Firmware Download Description NSD570 PTI CI Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570 Commissioning Instructions NSD570 Compatibility Requirements NSD570 Anomaly List NSD570 Commissioning Instructions LAN Interface G3LL Copy Instructions Compact Flash Card G3LL Repair and Return Procedure Support Document
1KHW000925R0100 1KHA000746-SEN 1KHW000890 1KHW000892 1KHW000894 1KHW000896 1KHW000898 1KHW000900 1KHW000902 1KHW000904 1KHW001289 1KHW001291 1KHM010296 1KHM010297
Table 11.1
Order numbers
Other length available on request: order number above plus R00xx where xx = length in meters. April 2004 11-5
Appendices
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
Type
Description
Order number
Optional items For G7BI 1KHW000330R0001 ESD EARTHING SET 4.5MM (conductive bonded wrist strap for connection to the ESD bonding point EBP at the rear of the rack) NSD570*STANDARD ACCESSORIES (one set is delivered with each module rack) 1KHW001039R0001
For G7BI For modules
Special screwdriver from PHOENIX CONTACT SZS 0,6 x 3,5 (for releasing the tension spring of the connectors) Order No. 12 05 05 3 SZF 1 - 0,6 x 3,5 Order No. 12 04 51 7
For cables Special screwdriver from PHOENIX CONTACT (for releasing the tension spring of the terminals)
Table 11.2
Order numbers accessories
11-6
April 2004
Appendices
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
11.3. 11.3.1.
Photographs Front view of NSD570

The front view of NSD570 (see below) shows a fully equipped rack with two redundant power supply modules (not in sight) and two teleprotection equipment each with four relay interfaces.
Fig. 11.1
Front view of NSD570
11.3.2.
Rear view of NSD570

The rear view of NSD570 (see below) shows the same equipment as mentioned above with optionally available cables.
Fig. 11.2 Appendices
Rear view of NSD570 April 2004 11-7
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1KHW000890-EN
NSD570
11.4.
Dimension Drawing Module Rack G7BI

All dimensions are in [mm].
Fig. 11.3
Front view
Fig. 11.4
Top view
11-8
April 2004
Appendices
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fig. 11.5
Side view
Appendices
April 2004
11-9
NSD570
1KHW000890-EN
ABB Switzerland Ltd
April 2004
12.
Annex
Technical Data NSD570 Software Installation Description HMI570 Firmware Download Description NSD570 Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570 Commissioning Instructions NSD570 Compatibility Requirements NSD570 Anomaly List NSD570 Commissioning Instructions LAN Interface G3LL Copy Instructions Compact Flash Card G3LL Repair and Return procedure Support Document 1KHW000892 1KHW000894 1KHW000896 1KHW000898 1KHW000900 1KHW000902 1KHW000904 1KHW001289 1KHW001291 1KHM010296 1KHM010297
Annex
April 2004
12-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd
TECHNICAL DATA NSD570

The teleprotection equipment NSD570 complies with EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC. NSD570 complies with or exceeds the requirements according to IEC publication 60834-1 "Teleprotection Equipment of Power Systems - Performance and Testing Part 1: Command Systems.
Contents: System Overview ..........................................................................................................................................2 Analog System Data .....................................................................................................................................2 Digital System Data ......................................................................................................................................4 Common System Data..................................................................................................................................5 Special Operating Modes .............................................................................................................................6 Analog Interface (G3LA) ...............................................................................................................................7 Digital Line Interfaces (G3LD) ......................................................................................................................8 7.1. G.703 Codirectional Interface ...................................................................................................................8 7.2. RS-422 Interface .......................................................................................................................................9 7.3. E1/T1 Interface (G1LE) ...........................................................................................................................10 7.4. Optical Interface (G1LO) .........................................................................................................................12 8. Relay Interface (G3LR)...............................................................................................................................14 9. Power Supply (G3LH).................................................................................................................................15 10. Common Interface (G3LC) .........................................................................................................................16 11. Bus Plane With Front Cover (G1LA)...........................................................................................................17 12. Supply Backplane (G1LB) ..........................................................................................................................17 13. Internal Tripping Voltage (G1LR)................................................................................................................17 14. LCD Display Panel (G1LC).........................................................................................................................17 15. LAN Interface Data (G3LL) .........................................................................................................................17 16. HMI570 User Interface................................................................................................................................18 16.1. HMI570 PC ...........................................................................................................................................18 16.2. HMI570 LAN .........................................................................................................................................19 17. Alarms.........................................................................................................................................................20 18. Event Recorder and Counters ....................................................................................................................21 19. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .........................................................................................................21 19.1. Emission..................................................................................................................................................21 19.2. Immunity..................................................................................................................................................21 19.3. Insulation .................................................................................................................................................22 19.4. Electrical Safety.......................................................................................................................................22 20. Mechanical Data, Dimensions and Weights ...............................................................................................23 21. Ambient Conditions.....................................................................................................................................24 21.1. Operation.................................................................................................................................................24 21.2. Transport .................................................................................................................................................24 21.3. Storage....................................................................................................................................................24 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
1 / 24
Technical Data NSD570
ABB Switzerland Ltd
1. SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Application Transmission of protection commands for: Line protection - permissive tripping - direct tripping - blocking Transformer protection (direct tripping) Breaker failure protection (direct tripping) Reactor and generator protection (direct tripping) Operating mode Full duplex, bi-directional - Point-to-point - Point-to-multipoint for the protection of lines with T-offs analog and digital channels, fiberoptic channels - pilot wires - leased lines - voice frequency channels of analog or digital communication systems - PLC links - data channels of digital multiplexers - E1 or T1 circuits (SDH or SONET multiplexers) - microwave radio links 1 or 2 Mix of analogue and digital systems in the same rack in any combination 19 inch rack, 4 height units (4U) including 1U for cable tray 2 slots for single or redundant power supply 2 x 5 slots for one line interface and up to 4 relay interfaces Optional LCD front display panel Optional Ethernet/LAN/WEB interface
Communication medium
Number of NSD570 in one rack Mechanical design
2. ANALOG SYSTEM DATA

Number of commands 1, 2, 3 or 4 commands individually configurable free command allocation Bandwidth Channel center frequencies Frequency stability Line interface Command power boosting Boost criterion Power boosting ratio Operating modes analogue, type G3LA impedance free contact selectable via HMI570 1 or 2 single-tone command(s) programmable programmable independent, simultaneous, in any combination blocking, permissive or direct tripping to one or more output contacts 120, 240, 360, 480, 960, 1200, 2400, 2800 Hz from 360 Hz to 3900 Hz in steps of 60 Hz 1 Hz 4-wire or 2-wire circuit, full duplex operation 600 Ohm or high impedance closes simultaneously with command transmission 0 to 9 dB in steps of 1 dB Command signal: single tone Guard signal: single tone Test signal: single tone Command signal: 2 simultaneous tones Guard signal: single tone Test signal: 2 simultaneous tones 3 dB (between the two tones)
1 to 4 dual tone commands
Admissible gain distortion Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) -
for dual tone commands
Configuration and monitoring of the opposite station from the local terminal Needs no additional bandwidth Operates in the guard channel Disabled during command transmission End-to-end operation for configurations with T-offs (normal T-operation) Transmission rate NSD570 channel bandwidth 120 / 240 / 360 Hz ) 480 * / 960 Hz 1200 / 2400 / 2800 Hz * 4 dual-tone commands in 480 Hz Required SNR
)
data rate 20 bps 50 bps 100 bps 20 bps > 6 dB
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
2 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Nominal transmission time T0
including operating times of the relay interface (solid state outputs), EOC configured to ON, command application set to direct tripping (except for 1 single-tone command). Notes: - Figures are given for back-to-back operation (according to IEC 60834-1). - Transmission times are about 10% lower with Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) disabled.
Channel Bandwidth 120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 2800 Hz Security
1 single-tone command (blocking only) 50 ms 27 ms 19 ms 15 ms 8.5 ms 7.0 ms 4.5 ms 4.5 ms
1 or 2 single-tone commands N.A. 38 ms 26 ms 20 ms 11 ms 9.5 ms 6.0 ms 5.5 ms
1 or 2 dual-tone commands N.A. 43 ms 30 ms 23 ms 13 ms 11 ms 7.0 ms 6.0 ms
1 to 3 dual-tone commands N.A. N.A. 31 ms 24 ms 14 ms 11 ms 7.0 ms 6.0 ms
1 to 4 dual-tone commands N.A. N.A. N.A. 28 ms 15 ms 12 ms 7.0 ms 6.5 ms
Puc measured according to IEC 60834-1 Puc for worst case SNR - blocking - permissive - direct
with 200 ms noise bursts / 200 ms pause Dual-tone commands Puc < 1E-04 Puc < 1E-06 Puc < 1E-09 Puc < 1E-03 Puc < 1E-05 Puc < 1E-08 noise bandwidth 4 kHz
Single-tone commands
Dependability
Pmc measured according to IEC 60834-1
Notes: - Command application: B = Blocking; P = Permissive tripping; D = Direct tripping. - Figures are given with Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) configured to ON. - Due to the available test equipment for dependability measurements, fractional numbers for T0 in the table above had to be increased by 0.5 ms to the next higher integer number. Required SNR (dB) for Pmc < 1% in 1.3 T0 Channel Bandwidth 120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 2800 Hz 1 single-tone command B +10 +8 +8 +4 +5 +16 +7 +8 1 or 2 single-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. -1 +3 +9 +1 +5 +10 +2 +6 +12 +5 +9 +16 +4 +8 +16 +7 +10 +15 +5 +7 +9 1 or 2 dual-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. +1 +5 +11 +3 +6 +12 +4 +8 +15 +6 +9 +14 +6 +10 +14 +8 +11 +16 +9 +12 +16 1 to 3 dual-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. +2 +6 +11 +4 +7 +13 +5 +8 +13 +6 +8 +13 +8 +11 +16 +10 +12 +16 1 to 4 dual-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. -1 +2 +5 +3 +5 +8 +6 +8 +11 +8 +10 +14 +7 +10 +14
Required SNR (dB) for Pmc < 1% in 1.5 T0 Channel Bandwidth 120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 2800 Hz 1 single-tone command B -5 -1 +1 +1 +4 +5 +7 +8 1 or 2 single-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. -4 0 +8 -1 +3 +9 -1 +4 +11 0 +3 +8 0 +2 +5 +3 +5 +11 +4 +6 +8 1 or 2 dual-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. 0 +4 +10 0 +5 +11 +1 +6 +12 +4 +8 +13 +4 +8 +13 +3 +4 +6 +5 +7 +13 1 to 3 dual-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. 0 4 +10 +1 +6 +12 +2 +6 +12 +5 +8 +12 +4 +5 +7 +5 +9 +14 1 to 4 dual-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. -1 +1 +5 +2 +4 +8 +5 +7 +10 +7 +9 +13 +3 +5 +6
Required SNR (dB) for Pmc < 1% in 2.0 T0 Channel Bandwidth 120 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 480 Hz 960 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 2800 Hz 1 single-tone command B -6 -2 0 0 +3 +4 +6 +7 1 or 2 single-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. -8 -6 -2 -6 -3 0 -5 -1 +1 -3 +1 +4 -1 +2 +4 +1 +3 +6 +3 +5 +8 1 or 2 dual-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. -7 -5 -2 -5 -4 -1 -4 -1 0 -1 0 +2 -1 +1 +4 +2 +3 +6 +3 +4 +6 1 to 3 dual-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. -5 -3 -1 -4 -2 0 -1 0 +2 0 +1 +3 +3 +4 +6 +3 +5 +7 1 to 4 dual-tone commands B P D N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 0 +2 +3 +2 +3 +5 +2 +4 +5
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
3 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
3. DIGITAL SYSTEM DATA

Number of commands 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 commands individually configurable free command allocation digital, type G3LD Independent, simultaneous, in any combination blocking, permissive or direct tripping to one or more output contacts G.703.1, codirectional (RJ45 connector, 8 pole) 56 or 64 kbps RS-422/V.11 interface (Sub-D connector, 25 pole = RS-530) E1 interface: 2.048 Mbps (SDH), G.703.6 T1 interface: 1.544 Mbps (SONET) (RJ45 connector, 8 pole) X.21/X.24 (Sub-D, 15 pole), EIA RS-530 (Sub-D, 25 pole), EIA RS-449 (Sub-D, 37 pole), or terminal blocks with isolating blades RJ45 (8 pole, direct wire connection) 6.4 Hz ( 100 ppm) guard state command state test state Cyclic block code - Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem - Hamming Distance - Code structure 6 x 8 bit = 48 bit in 64 kbps mode 7 x 7 bit = 49 bit in 56 kbps mode dynamic adaptive frame evaluation - blocking - permissive tripping - direct tripping Nominal transmission time T0 guard message command message test message BCH (31,21,5) 5 21 bits for guard, commands, test, address 10 bits for error detection and correction 31 bit BCH(31,21,5) plus 17 synchronization bits 31 bit BCH(31,21,5) plus 18 synchronization bits 2 to 6 frames / correction of max. 1 bit error depending on prevailing channel condition 2 or 3 frames 3 or 5 frames 4 or 6 frames
Line interface
optional piggyback, type G1LE
optional connecting cables for RS-422/V.11
optional connecting cables for G.703/E1/T1 Frequency stability Operating principle
Message coding
Frame length Signal processing
including operating time of the relay interface (solid state outputs) - blocking - permissive tripping - direct tripping T0 4 ms T0 5 ms T0 6 ms
Security
Puc according to IEC 60834-1 with 200 ms BER bursts / 200 ms pause @BER = 0.5: - blocking - permissive - direct Puc < 1E-10 Puc < 1E-17 Puc < 1E-24 @BER = 0.15 (worst case): blocking permissive direct Puc < 1E-05 Puc < 1E-09 Puc < 1E-12
Dependability
Pmc measured according to IEC 60834-1 required BER for Pmc <1% in 1.3 T0 - blocking - permissive - direct BER < 1E-03 BER < 8 x 1E-04 BER < 5 x 1E-04 0 to 1023
Addressing facility
range of digital terminal addresses
Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) Configuration and monitoring of the opposite equipment from the local terminal Needs no additional channel Available during guard and command state Transmission rate channel data rate 56 kbps channel data rate 64 kbps 1000 bps 1333 bps
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
4 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
4. COMMON SYSTEM DATA

Device address range Send command pick up time (Tx Input Delay) Received command prolongation (Rx Prolongation) for connecting to PC via HMI programmable for each command compensation of sent commands duration programmable for each command default value for blocking default value for permissive tripping default value for direct tripping Unblocking condition analogue unblocking threshold programmable default unblocking threshold detection delay Unblocking condition digital detection delay Extra output pick-up delay Unblocking pulse duration Unblocking output freely configurable Command output status during channel alarm Programmable - Outputs are not influenced by the alarm (default) - All outputs are forced into guard state - Direct tripping O/Ps are forced to guard state, and permissive or blocking O/Ps to command state - The command outputs retain the status they had immediately prior to the alarm Pick-up time Hold time 0 to 15 s, programmable in steps of 1 s (default 10 s) 0 to 15 s, programmable in steps of 1 s (default 0 s) 1 to 240 0 to 10 ms, step 1 ms equal to the pick-up time 0 to 3 s, in steps of 1 ms 0 ms 10 ms 100 ms no guard and no trip received -20 to -10 dB from nominal level (1 dB steps) -14 dB from nominal level less than nominal command transmission time LOS or AIS received, or invalid frames less than nominal command transmission time 0 ms to 100 ms, programmable in steps of 1 ms (default 5 ms) 50 ms to 500 ms, programmable in steps of 1 ms (default 200 ms) onto free contacts of any relay interface G3LR
Unblocking output
Command acknowledge
free allocation of a command acknowledge O/P to one of the outputs of the relay interface G3LR - for sent commands - for received commands individual or collective collective
Received Guard state signaling Built-in test facilities: Cyclic loop test
free allocation to one of the outputs of the relay interface G3LR
- The loop test signal is transmitted in the same way as an unboosted tripping signal - It is recognized by the receiver and echoed back to the transmitter - A genuine tripping command is always given priority over any tests configurable test interval first loop test sent loop test alarm if a loop test fails, the test interval is lowered to event recording 1 / 3 / 6 (default) / 12 / 24, hours, or disabled 10 minutes after power-on after 3 unsuccessful trials 5 minutes sent / replied / failed loop test
Manual loop test
- Activated via HMI570, or by pressing the loop test button on the equipment front panel test success indication green Trip LED lights up for 3 seconds test failure indication red Fail LED flashes for 3 seconds HMI window displays actual transmission time (Tac) as round trip time
Local test mode
- All sent commands are looped back by the local line interface - The Guard signal is transmitted to the opposite station - Commands are not transferred to the remote end activated via test mode indication HMI570 Red Fail LED flashes (on local equipment)
Remote test mode
- Remote command outputs are blocked - All transmitted commands are sent back by the remote line interface to the local terminal activated via test mode indication HMI570 and EOC Red Fail LED flashes (on remote equipment)
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
5 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
5. SPECIAL OPERATING MODES

T-operation For the protection of cables and power lines with T-offs (multi-terminal lines) A command sent by any station is received by all other stations Transit through-connection of signals in T-stations between two NSD570 in the same rack, with minimum delay Restoring of guard signal in T-Station if one link fails EOC communication only available between outer stations (normal T-operation) for all bandwidths for all interface types / data rates < 3 ms < 3 ms
Transit delay NSD570 Analog Transit delay NSD570 Digital 1+1 protection -
For path and equipment redundancy Two NSD570 in the same rack serving two different communication channels The command inputs/outputs of the two systems are connected in parallel ("first come, first served")
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
6 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
6. ANALOG INTERFACE (G3LA)

CE standards compliance Common Technical Regulation CTR017, Technical Basis for Regulation TBR017 via HMI570 4-wire or 2-wire Boost output Max. number of NSD570 connected in parallel to the same circuit Transmitter: AF output Impedance Return loss (Rnom = 600 Ohm) Longitudinal conversion loss (compliant with TBR017) Balance-to-ground Spurious emissions Signal level single tones Isolated from ground terminated high-impedance 300 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 4 kHz 300 Hz 600 Hz 600 Hz 3.4 kHz 300 Hz 4 kHz < 8 kHz > 8 kHz guard signal command signal (incl. power boosting) Signal level dual tones (RMS) Transmitter monitor Attenuation distortion Admissible transverse application of 50/60 Hz Boost control output Contact ratings command signal (incl. power boosting) level drop off 300 Hz 4 kHz with min. receiving signal level Electrically isolated contact voltage current polarity pick-up delay voltage balanced 600 Ohm > 1.5 kOhm > 12.0 dB > 15.0 dB > 40 dB > 46 dB > 40 dB < - 38 dBm < - 56 dBm - 24 dBm to + 2 dBm adjustable in steps of 1.0 dB - 24 dBm to + 11 dBm - 27 dBm to + 8 dBm - 3 dB to -10 dB adjustable in steps of 1.0 dB 1.0 dB 10 Vp Opto-coupler max. 60 VDC max. 50 mA (limited) independent < 250 us < 80 VDC 0 to 9 dB, adjustable in steps of 1 dB 600 Ohm terminated or high impedance (jumper setting) Electrically isolated via opto-coupler 3 (recommended)
Hardware release monitoring Line interface
Operating time Overvoltage protection Power boosting ratio
Receiver: AF input Impedance Return loss (Rnom = 600 Ohm) Longitudinal conversion loss (according to TBR017) Balance-to-ground Received signal level Level monitor Receiver dynamic range Attenuation distortion Admissible transverse application of 50/60 Hz Isolated from ground terminated high-impedance 300 Hz 500 Hz 500 Hz 4 kHz 300 Hz 600 Hz 600 Hz 3.4 kHz 300 Hz 4 kHz nominal Lower and upper limit programmable from nominal 300 Hz 4 kHz with min. receiving signal level balanced 600 Ohm > 1.5 kOhm > 12.0 dB > 16.0 dB > 40 dB > 46 dB > 40 dB - 30 dBm to + 2 dBm adjustable in steps of 1.0 dB 3 dB to 12 dB adjustable in steps of 1.0 dB 15 dB 1.0 dB 10 Vp
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
7 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7. DIGITAL LINE INTERFACES (G3LD)

Hardware release monitoring via HMI570
7.1.
G.703 Codirectional Interface
Coding and electrical characteristics according to ITU-T G.703, jitter specification according to G.823. Data and Clock output: Bit rate Symbol rate Clock tolerance Longitudinal conversion loss Output jitter amplitude Test load impedance Peak voltage of a pulse (Mark) Peak voltage without a pulse (Space) Synchronization of Tx clock frequency UI = Unit Interval (1 / Symbol Rate) Data and clock input: Bit rate Symbol rate Clock tolerance Longitudinal conversion loss Input jitter acceptance 128 kHz up to 4.33 Hz 20 Hz600 Hz 3 kHz20 kHz 4 kHz 13 kHz 13 kHz 256 kHz 256 kHz 384 kHz 64 kbps 256 kBaud 100 ppm > 50 dB > 1.15 UI > 0.25 UI > 0.05 UI > 12 dB > 18 dB > 14 dB 120 Ohm 1.0 V 300 mVpp transversal programmable ON/OFF 128 kHz Band B1 (20 Hz20 kHz) Band B2 (3 kHz20 kHz) 64 kbps 256 kBaud 100 ppm > 50 dB < 0.25 UI < 0.05 UI 120 Ohm 1.0 V 0 0.1 V on receive clock
Return loss
Input impedance Voltage of a pulse Admissible transverse application of 50/60 Hz Various: Shielding, cable screen Maximum cable length (using STP = Shielded Twisted Pair) Alarms: Onboard Connector
cable attenuation 3 dB
to be earthed with metallic clamp on 22 AWG 2 (diameter 0.6438 mm = 0.3255 mm ) incoming signal level too low 4 x 8 = 32 following bits logical "1" RJ45
cable tray at rear side of rack 500 m Loss Of Signal (LOS) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
8 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.2.
RS-422 Interface
The electrical characteristics comply with TIA/EIA-422-B (RS-422) and ITU-T V.11, the pinout complies with TIA/EIA-530-A (RS-530). Signal output (SD): Bit rate Output voltage with 100 Ohm load Synchronization of Tx clock frequency (configurable via HMI) Clock Output to DCE (TT): Frequency Tolerance Output voltage with 100 Ohm load Synchronization of TT clock frequency (configurable via HMI) Signal input (RD): Bit rate Input voltage Sensitivity Input impedance Synchronization of Rx clock frequency (configurable via HMI) Clock tolerance when Rx clock is extracted from RD Clock input transmitter (ST) and receiver (RT): Bit rate Input voltage Sensitivity Input impedance Clock tolerance of external ST Clock tolerance of external RT Various: Shielding, cable screen Maximum cable length (using STP = Shielded Twisted Pair, 22 AWG) Onboard Connector to be earthed with metallic clamp on Internal clock External clock Sub-D, 25 pol, male, TIA/EIA-530-A (RS-530) cable tray at rear side of rack 1000 m 500 m 64 kbps or 56 kbps 6 V differential 7 V to signal ground 0.2 V > 100 < 120 Ohm 100 ppm 100 ppm 64 kbps or 56 kbps 6 V differential 7 V to signal ground 0.2 V > 100 < 120 Ohm off (none), RT, RD 100 ppm 64 kHz or 56 kHz 100 ppm 2 V differential off (none), RD 64 kbps or 56 kbps 2 V differential off (none), ST, RD
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
9 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.3.
E1/T1 Interface (G1LE)
Optional piggyback to be mounted on Digital Interface G3LD (configurable for E1 and T1 operation; E1 = default configuration). Hardware release monitoring Connector on piggyback: via HMI570 RJ45
E1 interface (2 Mbps) Coding and electrical characteristics comply with ITU-T recommendation G.703. Framing according to G.704, signaling according to G.775 and Q.703. Jitter performance according to G.823. Data is transmitted in timeslot 1 of the E1 frame. Signal output: Bit rate Tolerance of bit clock Output jitter amplitude Output impedance Peak voltage of a pulse (Mark) Peak voltage without a pulse (Space) Signal input: Bit rate Tolerance of bit clock Return Loss Input jitter acceptance 2048 kbps 50 ppm > 12 dB > 18 dB > 14 dB > 18 UI > 1.5 UI > 0.2 UI 120 Ohm 3.0 V 0 0.3 V 2048 kbps 50 ppm < 1.5 UI < 0.2 UI 120 Ohm 3.0 V 0 0.3 V
Band B1 (20 Hz 100 kHz) Band B2 (18 kHz 100 kHz)
51 kHz 102 kHz 102 kHz 2048 kHz 2048 kHz 3072 kHz up to 1.67 Hz 20 Hz2.4 kHz 18 kHz100 kHz
Input impedance Peak voltage of a pulse (Mark) Peak voltage without a pulse (Space) Various: Shielding, cable screen Maximum cable length (using STP = Shielded Twisted Pair) Data stream encoding/decoding to be earthed with metallic clamp on 22 AWG 2 (diameter 0.6438 mm = 0.3255 mm )
cable tray at rear side of rack 1500 m
configurable for Detection of code violations
AMI or HDB3 (default) AMI -> all violations are recognized HDB3 -> double violations and 4 subsequent zeroes 10 dB (short haul; default) 43 dB (long haul) on receive data switches automatically to free running mode 0 or 96 Bits, 1 or 2 frames (default) between internal/external timing with some additional delay high jitter tolerance versus low additional delay Sync. pattern in timeslot 0 (E1) 375 s transmission of CRC4 bits 2.125 ms Loss Of Signal (LOS) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Remote Receive Alarm (RRA) Loss of Frame Alignment (LFA) code violations Invalid framing bits CRC failure
Receiver sensitivity Clock synchronization Internal elastic buffer size
configurable for max. cable attenuation Slave mode - if no data is received (LOS) configurable individual for input/output -> compensates clock deviations and wander -> compensates jitter, detects slips compromise to be made on double-frame (default) - maximum synchronization delay CRC4-multiframe - maximum synchronization delay incoming signal too low, too few transitions all one condition alarm in remote station frame detection failed counted events per second
Framing formats
Alarms:
Status messages
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
10 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
T1 Interface (1.5 Mbps) Coding and signal comply with ITU-T recommendation G.703 and ANSI T1.102. Framing according to G.704, signaling according to G.775 and Q.703. Jitter performance according to G.823. Data is transmitted in timeslot 1 of the T1 frame. Signal output: Bit rate Tolerance of bit clock Output jitter amplitude Output impedance Tolerance of output impedance Peak voltage of a pulse Minimum voltage of a pulse Signal input: Bit rate Tolerance of bit clock Input impedance Tolerance of input impedance Peak voltage of a pulse Minimum voltage of a pulse Various: Shielding, cable screen Maximum cable length (using STP = Shielded Twisted Pair) Data stream encoding/decoding Receiver sensitivity Clock synchronisation Internal buffer size configurable for configurable for max. cable attenuation Slave mode - if no data is received (LOS) configurable individually for input/output -> compensates clock deviations/wander -> compensates jitter, detects slips compromise to be made on 4-multiframe (default) - maximum synchronization delay extended superframe (24 frames) - maximum synchronization delay Alarms: incoming signal level too low, too few transitions all one condition alarm in remote station frame detection failed counted events per second to be earthed with metallic clamp on 22 AWG 2 (diameter 0.6438 mm = 0.3255 mm ) cable tray at rear side of rack 2000 m 1544 kbps 130 ppm 100 Ohm 5% 3.6 V 2.4 V 1544 kbps 32 ppm < 5 UI < 0.1 UI 100 Ohm 5% 3.6 V 2.4 V
Band B1 (10 Hz 40 kHz) Band B2 (8 kHz 40 kHz)
AMI or B8ZS (default) 10 dB (short haul; default) 36 dB (long haul) on receiving data switches automatically to free running mode 0 or 96 Bits, 1 or 2 frames (default) (between internal/external timing) (with some additional delay) high jitter capability versus low additional delay synchronization data in bit 1 (T1) 1.5 ms additional transmission of CRC6 data (in order to detect transmission bit errors; remote alarm reception even with high BER) 6.125 ms Loss Of Signal (LOS) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Remote Receive Alarm (RRA) Loss of Frame Alignment (LFA) code violations invalid framing bits CRC failures
Framing formats
Status messages
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
11 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
7.4.
Optical Interface (G1LO)
Optional piggyback to be mounted on Digital Interface G3LD (configurable for Optical Direct Fiber and Optical FOX/OTERM operation; a special version of the module - configurable for IEEE C37.94 - is available on request). Hardware release monitoring Connector on piggyback: via HMI570 E2000/APC (others via adaptor)
Optical Direct Fiber and Optical FOX/OTERM Interface Framing complies with ITU-T recommendation G.704 for Optical Direct Fiber and with FOX-6Plus for Optical FOX/OTERM operation. The jitter performance is according to G.823. Data is transmitted in timeslot 1 of the PCM31 frame for Optical Direct Fiber and in channel 1 of the FOX-6Plus frame if Optical FOX/OTERM is selected. Signal output: Wavelength Bit rate Tolerance of bit clock Output jitter amplitude Optical output power 1310 nm 2048 kBps 50 ppm < 1.5 UI < 0.2 UI -22 -17 dBm -5 -1 dBm
Band B1 (20 Hz 100 kHz) Band B2 (18 kHz 100 kHz) Short haul Long haul
Signal input: Wavelength range Bit rate Tolerance of bit clock Input jitter tolerance Sensitivity < -32 dBm 850 1550 nm 2048 kbps 50 ppm > 18 UI > 1.5 UI > 0.2 UI < -36 dBm > - 1 dBm
up to 1.67 Hz 20 2400 Hz 18 ... 100 kHz
Receiver input sensitivity Receiver saturation power Various: Maximum cable length 9 m singlemode fiber (acc. G.652) 50 m multimode fiber (acc. G.651) CMI Slave mode - if no data is received (LOS) Fixed setting -> compensates clock deviations and wander -> compensates jitter, detects slips Double-frame - maximum synchronization delay According to FOX-6Plus - can also be connected with Too few transitions including aging
50 km 25 km
Data stream encoding/decoding Clock synchronization Internal elastic buffer size
On receive data switches automatically to free running mode 2 frames between internal/external timing with some additional delay Sync. pattern in timeslot 0 (PCM31) 375 s 32 bits with 5 Sync. bits every 15.625 s OTERM on FOX515 Loss Of Signal (LOS) 25 dB
Framing format Optical Direct Fiber Framing format Optical FOX/OTERM Alarm Optical budget
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
12 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Optical IEEE C37.94 Interface Framing, jitter performance and alarm handling comply with IEEE C37.94. Data is transmitted in the first 8 data bits of the IEEE C37.94 frame. Signal output: Wavelength Bit rate Tolerance of bit clock Output jitter amplitude Optical output power Signal input: Wavelength range Bit rate Tolerance of bit clock Input jitter tolerance Receiver input sensitivity Receiver saturation power Various: Maximum cable length Data stream encoding/decoding Clock synchronization Internal elastic buffer size Slave mode - if no data is received (LOS) Fixed setting -> compensates clock deviations and wander -> compensates jitter, detects slips According to IEEE C37.94 Too few transitions All one condition including aging 50 m multimode fiber (acc. G.651) NRZ On receive data switches automatically to free running mode 2 frames between internal/external timing with some additional delay 256 bits with 16 bit header, 48 bit overhead and 192 bit payload. Loss Of Signal (LOS) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) 10 dB 3.5 km Sensitivity < -32 dBm 850 1550 nm 2048 kbps 100 ppm > 0.1 UI < -32 dBm > - 1 dBm 850 nm 2048 kbps 100 ppm < 0.2 UI -16 -11 dBm
Framing format Alarms Optical budget
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
13 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
8. RELAY INTERFACE (G3LR)

Hardware release monitoring Signal inputs (opto couplers) Number of command send inputs Method of tripping Nominal battery voltage Input voltage ranges 2, electrically isolated by opto couplers - external contact and station battery voltage - external dry contact (24, 48, 60, 110, 125, 220, 250) VDC 3, programmable with jumpers: Jumpers .A + .B .A + .C .A + .D Operating thresholds input operates at: Jumpers .A + .B .A + .C .A + .D Contact burden Operating time Overvoltage protection Signal outputs (solid state) Number of outputs Normally Open contact DC voltage Tripping current Current limitation Short circuit cut off Leakage current Operating time Reverse polarity protection Signal outputs (Relay) Number of outputs "Heavy Duty" Normally Open contact or Normally Closed contact Max. switching power Tripping command Rated current 2 (electrically isolated) commands, alarms and special functions freely assignable mono stable, electromechanical relay see diagram 5...250 VDC 250 VAC max. 5 A carry (up to 45C) 10 A carry (for 1 sec.) 16 A make (for 200 ms) up to 1 A @ 250 VDC (depending on L and R, an external "arc suppression" may be required) ON/OFF ratio 1/3 up to 5 min./15 min. Continuous 2 electrically isolated solid-state relay commands, alarms and special functions freely assignable bounce-free, shock and vibration safe 5 250 VDC (+ 20 % max.) 2 A; 1A typ. 2.6 A after approx. 6 ms for 1 s 200 A; at 312 V / 70C 250 s (typ. 60 s) 400 VDC input current for nominal battery voltage 24 VDC 10 20 mA 5 10 mA < 750 s, 450 s typical 400 VDC Voltage 10 15 VDC 25 30 VDC 70 80 VDC Nominal battery voltage 24 VDC 60 VDC 125 VDC to to to 48 VDC 110 VDC 250 VDC commands can be freely allocated to I/Ps polarity independent with optional internal aux. tripping voltage G1LR tolerance 20 % via HMI570
Break current (DC inductive load)
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
14 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Operating time Bounce Reset time Overvoltage protection
< 8 ms (typ. 5 ms) < 1 ms (typ. 0.2 ms) < 4 ms (typ. 3.6 ms) 400 VDC
9. POWER SUPPLY (G3LH)

Only one type for all specified voltages Electrically isolated Hot pluggable Output power 60 W sufficient to supply all possible rack assemblies Single or redundant configuration (passive load sharing, decoupled by means of diodes) from 48 VDC to 250 VDC ( 20 %) from 100 VAC to 240 VAC (-15%, +10%) plugged / not plugged 12.3 VDC independent for both power supply modules DC AC not applicable on primary side on primary side on secondary side on primary side 5 x 20 mm approx. 4.7 A approx. 6 A 20 ms 2.5 AT > 80 % > 75 % (bipolar connection possible)
Nominal input voltage Plug-in Monitoring Output voltage Output voltage monitoring Efficiency Reverse polarity protection Overvoltage protection Inrush current limitation Short circuit proof Immunity against power interruptions Fuse
Power consumption for 48 VDC nominal battery voltage: basic version (rack, one supply module, one line interface, one relay interface): basic version analog (2 commands) basic version digital (2 commands) per additional supply module G3LH per additional analog interface G3LA per additional digital interface G3LD per additional relay interface G3LR optional E1/T1 interface G1LE optional optical interface G1LO optional display panel G1LC optional input tripping voltage G1LR Onboard Connector: H 15 (DIN 41612) 10 W max 10 W max. 3 W max. 3 W max. 3 W max. 1 W max. 0.5 W max. 1.5 W max. 1.5 W max. 1 W max.
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
15 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
10. COMMON INTERFACE (G3LC)

Hardware release monitoring LED indication on front panel Main functions via HMI570 Supervision of power supply output voltage on board DC/DC converter clock source (8.192 MHz) local alarm of the two NSD570 in the rack green = ok, red = failed, dark = not plugged for internal +5 V supply voltage for Real Time Bus (RTB) on busplane Two heavy duty relay with free change-over contacts
RS-232 interface (COM 1): Service interface Transmission rate Direct connection Connecting cable Hardware flow control If connected via a modem (= DCE) Protocoll TIA/EIA-232-F (RS-232), DCE programmable to COM port of a PC/notebook = DTE serial 1:1 cable, 9 pin Sub-D connector if requested from external devices Null-Modem cable necessary (male-male) 8N1, no flow control PC/notebook -> female, NSD570 -> male RTS/CTS cross connection of 103 104, 105 106 Electrically isolated (front access, 9-pole Sub-D socket, female) 9600 bps / 19200 bps / 57600 bps
G3LC alarm outputs Number of outputs "Heavy Duty" Normally Open contact or Normally Closed contact Max. switching power Alarm voltage Rated current 2 (electrically isolated) one relay for each NSD570 in the rack (to signal a local alarm) mono stable, electromechanical relay see diagram 5...250 VDC 250 VAC max. 5 A carry (up to 45C) 10 A carry (for 1 sec.) 16 A make (for 200 ms) up to 1 A @ 250 VDC (depending on L and R, an external "arc suppression" may be required) < 8 ms (typ. 5 ms) < 1 ms (typ. 0.2 ms) < 4 ms (typ. 3.6 ms) 400 VDC
Break current (DC inductive load)
Operating time Bounce Reset time Overvoltage protection
NSD570 intra-station network Serial two wire station bus interface type electrically compliant with cable max. cable length max. no. of NSD570 in local station network RS-485 TIA/EIA-485-A twisted pair (incl. screen according RS-485 recommendation -> internal isolated ground) 500 m 32
Synchronization of Real Time Clock (RTC; on line interface) One input for One input for IRIG-B synchronization signal external second impulses (GPS) TTL
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
16 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
IRIG-B input: Synchronization signal format Voltage levels Input resistance Over voltage protection Precision of synchronization GPS Sync input Synchronization signal format Voltage levels (TTL) Input resistance Over voltage protection Reverse polarity protection Precision of synchronization Pulses Input LOW Input HIGH Every second (PPS) -0.5V ... + 0.8 V + 2V + 7 V 1 kOhm 5 VDC Yes 0.5 ms Input LOW Input HIGH IRIG-B unmodulated -15V ... + 0.8 V + 2V ... + 15 V 750 Ohm 26 VDC 0.5 ms
11. BUS PLANE WITH FRONT COVER (G1LA)

Hardware release monitoring via HMI570
12. SUPPLY BACKPLANE (G1LB)

Power supply connectors Fast-On 6.3 mm AC: L / N / PE, DC: + / - / PE
13. INTERNAL TRIPPING VOLTAGE (G1LR)

Optional piggyback module to be plugged onto G3LR. If mounted, both command inputs of the module G3LR are operated by means of a dry external contact. Internal auxiliary voltage Power dissipation Insulation 24 VDC 4 V < 0.5 W per input same as command inputs (see chapter on EMC)
14. LCD DISPLAY PANEL (G1LC)

Optional front panel (instead of Blanking Cover Plate), for displaying status, counters, alarm messages and firmware versions of the local and remote NSD570. For local access only, selected configuration data are also available (e.g. line interface settings, command application or relay interface input/output assignment). Readout device Lightness Contrast Standby time after last interaction Handling Internal connection dot matrix LCD display adjustable background LED adjustable adjustable menu-driven via ribbon cable to Common Interface G3LC two lines, 16 characters in 4 steps or switched OFF in 16 steps 1 60 minutes enabled by four front panel buttons supply voltage 12 V / 2-wire data link
15. LAN INTERFACE DATA (G3LL)

Ethernet 10/100BaseT interface that allows to connect an NSD570 system to TCP/IP-networks for configuration and monitoring. The HMI570 LAN application (server version of the HMI570) runs on the NSD570 LAN Interface.
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
17 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
16. HMI570 USER INTERFACE 16.1. HMI570 PC

Browser front end Hardware requirements (minimal) Internet Explorer, Netscape, Mozilla standards: HTTP/1.1, HTML 4 PC/notebook, x86 compatible CPU CPU clock RAM free harddisk space SVGA, resolution operating system Access to the system Requirements for local access local and remote installation on PC/notebook connection PC-to-NSD570 Security HMI570 PC main functions: 3 password levels configuration on-line configuration off-line testing and commissioning status and alarm monitoring local and remote access to Local and remote access facilities - serial cable - embedded operation channel (EOC) Event recorder upload of all events recorded in an equipment text display of events events can be saved to file locally or from a remote site in case of failure on relay interfaces G3LR on analogue interface G3LA via any communication channel, via EOC of NSD570 Analog -> not recommended reverting to the previous operating condition input command tripping voltage (4 jumpers) line impedance (2 jumpers) configuration data , hardware inventory, firmware- and software versions at 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 57600 bps at 100 bps max (NSD570 analog) or at 1000 bps (NSD570 digital) with file for downloading Browser plus Software on CD-ROM with install-package via serial RS-232 interface cable, or via USB/RS-232 converter admin/modify/view Pentium III 400 MHz 128 Mbyte 50 Mbyte 1024 x 768, 256 colors Windows NT/2000/XP
Firmware download Configuration download Manual jumper settings (also stored in configuration file)
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
18 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
16.2. HMI570 LAN The HMI570 LAN requires a NSD570 LAN Interface (G3LL)
Browser front end Access to the system Requirements for remote access Internet Explorer, Netscape, Mozilla standards: HTTP/1.1, HTML 4 remote installation on PC/notebook connection to the NSD570s in a network Security HMI570 LAN main functions: 3 password levels Secure socket layer (SSL) connection configuration on-line configuration off-line testing and commissioning status and alarm monitoring local and remote access to Remote access facilities Event recorder - intranet/internet upload of all events recorded in an equipment text display of events events can be saved to file Firmware download Configuration download Manual jumper settings (also stored in configuration file) from a remote site in case of failure on relay interfaces G3LR on analogue interface G3LA via any communication channel, via EOC of NSD570 Analog -> not recommended reverting to the previous operating condition input command tripping voltage (4 jumpers) line impedance (2 jumpers) configuration data , hardware inventory, firmware- and software versions using IP with embedded web server on LAN interface type G3LL, 10/100BaseT (option) with file for downloading HTTP 1.1 browser and IP connection to the LAN interface type G3LL of NSD570 via Corporate Network (Intranet) or Internet admin/modify/view (for remote access only)
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
19 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
17. ALARMS
Alarm sources Tx signal level Rx guard signal level SNR alarm readable via the HMI drop from nominal level detection time deviation from nominal level detection time threshold depending on detection time BER alarm threshold setting via HMI570 detection time Wrong digital address Tx single component failure Rx single component failure Tx command duration detection time from relay interface 2 criteria supervision configurable for each command if monitoring is enabled of solid-state command outputs external SDRAM / internal SRAM failure CPU, Real Time Bus watchdog - 3 dB to - 10 dB (programmable, 1 dB steps) <1s > 3 dB 12 dB (programmable, 1 dB steps) <1s command application setting (security): approx. Pmc < 1 % value <1s 1E-01 / 1E-02 / 1E-03 / 1E-04 / 1E-05 / 1E-06 (default) / 1E-07 / 1E-08 / 1E-09 < 16 s (worst case) 2 frames instantaneous alarm guard and command signal state violation, Instantaneous alarm monitoring ENABLED or DISABLED sending guard signal after programmable delay: 1 to 15 s (default 5 s) instantaneous instantaneous > 3 attempts instantaneous >5s instantaneous instantaneous supervision of DC/DC converter 12 VDC / 3.3 VDC (on each board)
Rx output overload Checksum error Loop test error System clock error General system error Module hardware alarm Power supply voltage too low Internal aux. supply voltage
Alarm types The following alarms are freely configurable via the HMI onto any free output of a relay interface G3LR: System alarm / general alarm Hardware warning Hardware alarm Link alarm Transmit alarm Receive alarm Local alarm Remote alarm User-defined alarm groups 1, 2, 3 General alarm output collective for all alarm sources (local and remote) indicates that one of the two power supply modules in redundant configuration failed general hardware failure alarms indicates a link failure (SNR/BER, level/sync or loop test failure) indicates that the failure is in the local sending circuits or the Tx signal is incorrect indicates that the failure is in the local receiving circuits or the Rx signal is incorrect indicates that the alarm originates from local equipment, also available on G3LC for each NSD570 in the rack indicates that the alarm originates from remote equipment freely configurable groups, as a combination of several alarms from the local or from the remote equipment 1 free changeover contact on G3LC Alarm relay pick-up delay Alarm relay drop-off time Status and alarm LEDs One hardware status LED One status LED Two status LEDs Four alarm LEDs per system One hardware status LED One status LED on the front panel (per NSD570) per line, relay and LAN interface for each input/output and relay contact for Guard and Trip reception Transmit, Receive, Local, Remote Alarm per power supply module for the LAN interface for each NSD570 in the rack 0 to 15 s (default 15 s) 0 to 15 s (default 15 s) light up immediately after alarm source is detected green = Ok / red = Fail green = activated, dark = not activated green = signal reception, dark = no signal red = alarm green = Ok / red = Fail; dark = no module plugged green = Ethernet link established, dark = no signal
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
20 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
18. EVENT RECORDER AND COUNTERS

Event recorder: Start time and end time of transmitted commands received commands unblocking pulses alarms loop tests manipulations sent / replied / failed start up / user-reset / configuration download firmware download / set of date and time / start manual loop test / reset counter / erase of event recorder / previous configuration
Storage medium No. of recordable events Time resolution Accuracy of time stamp
non-volatile memory before overwriting of the oldest event 7500 (sequentially stored) 1 ms internal Real Time Clock free running synchronized max. + 20 seconds per day - on external GPS receiver (IRIG-B) - on external Pulses Per Second for > 12 hours 100 events per second 200 events per second for each command up to 65536 up to 65536 up to 65536 up to 65536 up to 65536 each single counter selectively or all counters at once
RTC buffer Recording rate
in case of power supply failure continuous bursts < 1 min. non-volatile storage - commands transmitted - commands received - loop tests transmitted - loop tests received - unblocking condition resetting via HMI570
Trip counters
Storage medium
non-volatile memory
19. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) 19.1. Emission

The equipment meets the EMC requirements for emission EN 50081-2: 1993 (EN 55022 class A) Conducted emission EN 55022 LF disturbance emission (48 VDC) CCITT P.53 Radiated emission EN 55022 150 kHz to 30 MHz Class A 0 kHz to 4 kHz < 3 mV (psophometrically weighted) 30 MHz to 1000 MHz Class A
19.2. Immunity
The equipment meets the EMC requirements for immunity EN 61000-6-2: 1999 Radiated electromagnetic field IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated electromagnetic field IEC 61000-4-3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2 26 to 1000 MHz, 80% AM, 1 kHz repetition rate 10 V/m 1 2.5 GHz, 80% AM, 1 kHz repetition rate 10 V/m contact 8 kV air discharge 15 kV
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
21 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Fast transient 1) burst IEC 61000-4-4 Power Supply DC supply input AC supply input Analog Line Interface 2/4-wire Boost output Digital Line Interface RS-422/RS-530 G.703.1 E1/T1 Relay Interface Command Input Solid-state Output Relay Output Common Interface Alarm Relay Output RS-485 Station Bus NMEA/IRIG-B Input GPS Sync. Input RS-232 Serial Interface
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5 4 kV CM 2 kV DM 4 kV CM 2 kV DM 2 kV CM 2 kV CM 1 kV DM 1 kV CM 5) 1.5 kV CM 1 kV CM 5) 1.5 kV CM 1 kV CM 5) 1.5 kV CM 4 kV CM 2 kV DM 4 kV CM 2 kV DM 4 kV CM 2 kV DM 4 kV CM 2 kV DM 1 kV CM 5) 1.5 kV CM 1 kV CM 1 kV CM 1 kV CM
Conducted RF 2) interference IEC 61000-4-6 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.) 10 V (e.m.f.)
Damped 3) oscillatory waves IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV CM 1.25 kV DM 2.5 kV CM 1.25 kV DM 2.5 kV CM 2.5 kV CM 1.25 kV DM 2.5 kV CM 2.5 kV CM 2.5 kV CM 2.5 kV CM 1.25 kV DM 2.5 kV CM 1.25 kV DM 2.5 kV CM 1.25 kV DM 2.5 kV CM 1.25 kV DM 2.5 kV CM 2.5 kV CM 2.5 kV CM 2.5 kV CM
Conducted CM 4) disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V 30 V
4 kV 4 kV 2 kV 2 kV 2 kV 2 kV 2 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 2 kV 2 kV 2 kV 2 kV
5/50 ns, 5 kHz repetition rate 0.15 to 80 MHz, AM 1kHz/80% 1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s burst duration Continuous mode, frequency 50 Hz Waveform 10/700 s
19.3. Insulation
Power frequency withstand test IEC 60255-5 Power Supply DC supply input AC supply input Analog Line Interface 2/4-wire Boost output Digital Line Interface RS-422/RS-530 G.703.1 E1/T1 Relay Interface Command Input Solid-state Output Relay Output Common Interface Alarm Relay Output RS-485 Station Bus NMEA/IRIG-B Input GPS Sync. Input RS-232 Serial Interface 2.5 kV 2.5 kV 1.0 kV 1.0 kV 1.0 kV 1.0 kV 1.0 kV 2.5 kV 2.5 kV 2.5 kV 2.5 kV 1.0 kV 500 V 500 V 500 V Impulse Voltage IEC 60255-5 5 kV 5 kV 1 kV 2 kV 1 kV 1 kV 1 kV 5 kV 5 kV 5 kV 5 kV 1 kV 1 kV 1 kV 1 kV Insulation resistance (@500 VDC) IEC 60255-5 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M 100 M
19.4. Electrical Safety

Meets the safety requirements according to IEC 60950 / EN 60950
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
22 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
20. MECHANICAL DATA, DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Weight basic version (rack, one supply module, one line interface, one relay interface): basic version analog (2 commands) basic version digital (2 commands) per additional supply module G3LH per additional analog interface G3LA per additional digital interface G3LD per additional relay interface G3LR optional E1/T1 interface G1LE optional optical interface G1LO optional display panel G1LC optional input tripping voltage G1LR Height Overall depth Installation width Material Color IP protection Equipment rack Dimension of modules (H x B x T) 3 units high = 133.35 mm 4 units high = 177.8 mm 300 mm 482.6 mm (19'') side panels, cover plates horizontal rails RAL 7035 / Pantone 420 degree of protection 19" wide power supply unit line and relay interfaces LAN Interface power supply unit line interfaces relay interfaces all modules labelled with barcode cabinet with hinged frame (typical) or in a open frame installation in a cubicle without hinged frame power supply module(s) line and relay interfaces front back hot-dip galvanized sheet extruded aluminium section (light grey) IP20 (according EN 60529 / IEC 60529) conforming to standard DIN 41494 3U / 8R / 220 mm 3U / 6R / 220 mm 3U / 8R / 220 mm 2 2 8 module type and serial number conforming to standard IEC 60297-3 installation set available upon request from the front side from the back side integrated in front panel (Ground layers) screening and protection cover 5.64 kg 5.60 kg 0.60 kg 0.26 kg 0.18 kg 0.22 kg 0.04 kg 0.10 kg 0.15 kg 0.02 kg (1 unit = 44.45 mm) (including labelling strip and cable tray)
No. of slots
Backtracing Installation
Removal of boards EMC shielding External connections
by means of wires connected directly to spring-clamp terminals at the back of the equipment, or by means of connecting cables with special terminations (terminal blocks with isolating blades), cable length of optional connecting cables: 2500 mm type of connecting terminals/sockets directly to the modules G3LA, G3LC, G3LR directly to the module G1LB directly to module G3LD via RJ45/Sub-D to the power supply units to optional cables with isolating terminals to optional cables with Sub-D sockets spring cage / RJ45 / Sub-D 0.2 - 2.5 mm for solid and stranded wire (AWG 24 - 12) 2 0.14 - 1.5 mm for solid and stranded wire (AWG 28 - 16) refer to paragraph 7 via Faston connector 6.3 x 0.8 mm (DIN 4624) 0.2 - 2.5 mm for stranded wire (AWG 24 - 12) 2 0.2 - 4.0 mm for solid wire (AWG 24 - 11) refer to paragraph 7
2 2
Wiring
to optional cables with RJ45 press-fit terminals 0.5 - 0.65 mm diameter (AWG 24 - 22) solid wire shield earthing ESD earthing (for service & maintenance) (EBP - Earth Bonding Point) at the rear cable tray below the equipment snap fastener 4.5 mm at the rear cable tray, for connecting an ESD wrist bracelet
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
23 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd
21. AMBIENT CONDITIONS 21.1. Operation

Climatic conditions Within specification Complies with IEC 60721-3-3 Temperature range Relative humidity (non condensing) Operational Mechanical conditions Vibration sinusoidal Shock Complies with IEC 60721-3-3 Complies with IEC 60068-2-6 Complies with IEC 60068-2-27 Class 3K5 -5 to + 45 C 95%, < 28 g/m3 - 20 to + 55 C Class 3M1
21.2. Transport
Climatic conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-2 Temperature range Relative humidity (non condensing) Mechanical conditions Vibration sinusoidal Shock Complies with IEC 60721-3-2 Complies with IEC 60068-2-6 Complies with IEC 60068-2-27 Complies with IEC 60068-2-32 Class 2K4 - 40 to +70 C 95%, < 28 g/m3 Class 2M1
Free fall (0.25 m/equipment packed)
21.3. Storage
Climatic conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-1 Temperature range Relative humidity (non condensing) Mechanical conditions Complies with IEC 60721-3-1, Class 1M1 Class 1K5 - 40 to + 70 C 95%, < 28 g/m3
All technical data are subject to change without notice.
ABB Switzerland Ltd Utility Communications CH-5400 Baden/Switzerland Call Center: E-mail: Internet: +41 844 845 845 [email protected] http://www.abb.com/utilitycommunications
1KHW000892-EN
Edition 2004-04-16
24 / 24
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Software Installation Description: < HMI570 >
Responsible Department: Prepared: Approved: Distribution:
1KHW000894
Archive No.: Rev. Date:
Classification-No.: File:
A
Lang.:
03-09-01
Page:
PTUKT2
Valid for:
02-10-01 sig. Schnyder

Derived from:
02-12-20 sig. Strittmatter

Replaces:
EN
1/4
Teleprotection Equipment: NSD570

Software Installation Description: < HMI570 >
Contents: 1 2 Purpose of document HMI570 Installation on Microsoft Windows 2.1 System requirements 2.2 Technical data 2.3 Installation of the HMI570 2.4 Deinstallation 2.5 Updates 1 1 1 2 2 4 4
List of equipment: PC with Windows NT / 2000 / XP HMI570 (Version 1.04 or higher) Note: Please refer 1KHW000902 for compatibility between software HMI570, firmware and hardware of NSD570.
Purpose of document
This document describes the software installation process for the HMI570.
2
2.1
HMI570 Installation on Microsoft Windows

System requirements
The minimum requirements for installing and running the HMI570 are as follows: x86 compatible Processor (AMD Athlon / Duron or Intel Pentium), 400 MHz 128 MB of RAM SVGA Controller with min. 1024 x 768 resolution and 256 colors 50 MB of free disk space CD ROM drive Microsoft Windows NT4, 2000 or XP Web-browser supporting HTTP/1.1 and HTML 4 (Internet Explorer 5 and higher, Netscape 6 and higher, Mozilla 1.x) 8. 1 free serial port (RS-232) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. ABB Switzerland Ltd, Utility Automation Systems
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
2/4
1KHW000894
2.2
Technical data
Java Virtual Machine (JVM) Version 1.3.1
2.3
Installation of the HMI570

An Installation Package is provided for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, 2000 and XP. 1. Insert the HMI570 CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Double-click on the HMI570-install.exe to start the installation. 3. A welcome window will appear. If you are running other programs at the moment, choose Cancel and close all other programs first, before starting the installation again. If no other applications are running, choose Next to continue the installation.
4. Choose the folder where the HMI570 should be installed in. To install to a different folder, either type in a new path or click on Change to browse for existing folder. Click on Next to continue.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
3/4
1KHW000894
5. Choose the shortcut folder. To install to a different folder, type in the path or select an existing folder from the list. The shortcut will be used to start the HMI570. Continue with Next.
6. The installation program will now search for a Java Virtual Machine (JVM) on your system. This could take a few moments. The JVM has to be version 1.3.1_09. If one or several suitable JVMs were found, a list will be shown, where you can choose the JVM for the HMI570. Go on with Next. If no JVM Version 1.3.1_09 could be found, the installer can install it automatically. Click on Next to install it. Already installed JVM of other versions - even newer ones - will not be affected. Important: If you decide to install the JVM 1.3.1_9 of the installation package, do not change the installation path of the JVM. After the successful installation of JVM do not reboot the system, if a prompt window appears. Click on No and then the installation of the HMI570 will continue.
7. The current window shows a summary, which installation and shortcut folder you have chosen and where the JVM is or will be installed, depending on if a JVM was found or not. Click on Next to continue. The files will now be copied into the folders. 8. Click on Finish to complete the installation.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
4/4
1KHW000894
2.4
Deinstallation
Start Settings Control Panel Add/Remove Software Choose HMI570 and click on Add/Remove All the files and folders, that were installed, are being removed from your system. Only the files installed to the JVM folder and the JVM remain on the system.
2.5
Updates
1. Uninstall the old version of the HMI570 Start Settings Control Panel Add/Remove Software Choose HMI570 and click on Add/Remove 2. Install the new version of the HMI570 It is possible to install different version of the HMI570 on the same PC / notebook. Every version must be installed in a separate directory and must be given a different shortcut name.
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Firmware Download Description: < NSD570 >
1KHW000896
B
Lang.:
04-04-16
Page:
PTUKT2
Valid for:

Derived from:

Replaces:
EN
1/3

Firmware Download Description: < NSD570 >
Contents: 1 2 Purpose of document General 2.1 Necessity for a firmware download 2.2 Risks of a firmware download 2.3 Firmware download files Firmware download Troubleshooting 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
3 4
List of equipment: PC with Windows NT / 2000 / XP HMI570 (Version 1.04 or higher) Firmware download files PC NSD570 (1:1 serial RS-232) cable
Note:
Please refer 1KHW000902 for compatibility between software HMI570, firmware and hardware of NSD570.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
2/3
1KHW000896
Purpose of document
This document describes the firmware download process for the teleprotection equipment NSD570, supported by the user interface program HMI570.
General
The HMI570 user interface program supports firmware download for the modules G3LA and G3LD. The firmware download gives the opportunity to update the equipment to the latest release or to modify a module ordered from stock to the actual release in the existing equipment.
2.1
Necessity for a firmware download

The firmware download has to be used in the following cases: 1. Update already configured equipment with the newest available firmware versions. Typically, this might become necessary when firmware versions are available with new functionality. 2. Modify equipment if the configuration download (with HMI570) detects an incompatibility. Possible situations are if a configuration is downloaded to virgin equipment or the HMI570 has extended functionality, which is not available on the firmware in the equipment.
2.2
Risks of a firmware download

The firmware download procedure should be performed exclusively by instructed service personnel. The operator is not allowed to perform this operation.
Caution
ACTIVATING A FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD WILL CAUSE MALFUNCTION OF THE TELEPROTECTION-LINK. If the protective system is already in use, open the connections to it in the local and in the remote station. Install the firmware in both stations and recommission the link according the document Commissioning Instructions NSD570 before the connections to the protection devices are closed again.
Caution
NEVER SWITCH OFF THE POWER TO THE EQUIPMENT WHILE A FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD IS IN PROGRESS. Violation of this rule will produce a system with incomplete firmware, so that it will not work anymore. If this should happen, a new firmware download has to be executed.
Caution
Should the communication to the equipment be interrupted during the download process, correct the communication problem WITHOUT switching off the power to the equipment and restart the firmware download. Keep your hands away from keyboard and mouse while a firmware download is in progress.
Caution
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
3/3
1KHW000896
2.3
Firmware download files

To perform a firmware download of the system, the firmware files (*.ldr) are needed. These files are either supplied together with the HMI570 software or separately in case of updates. If supplied with the NSD570 Software and Documentation CD, the files are stored in the release directory. Release directories can be found in the directory 'Firmware'. Make sure that the latest version of the firmware is used to update the equipment. Hardware module G3LA G3LD Firmware file NSD570_Analog_Vx_yz.ldr NSD570_Digital_Vx_yz.ldr Example NSD570_Analog_V1_05.ldr NSD570_Digital_V1_23.ldr
Caution
Never edit a firmware download file (*.ldr)
Caution
Never download a firmware file to a module that is not destined for, e.g. never download the file NSD570_Digital_V1_23.ldr to a G3LA module.
Firmware download
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start the HMI570 Log in as User with modify permission Connect the device that shall be the target for the firmware download Click Maintenance --> Firmware Download Click the Browse button and a file selector window appears Select the firmware file and click the Open button Click the Download button The firmware download will now take some minutes to complete. Keep your hands away from keyboard and mouse while the download is in progress. 9. The following message informs about the success of the firmware download. 10. To activate the new firmware, the device must be reset Click Maintenance --> Reset Device
Troubleshooting
If a firmware download was not successful, e.g. caused by a power off situation during the download, it is - in most cases - possible to revitalize the module by another firmware download. A few basic principles have to be taken into account for the module concerned: It can be accessed neither with its configured device address nor with the default addresses (241 or 246). Use the device address 255 instead. After power up the equipment rack again it can take up to 15 minutes until a connection to the device by means of HMI570 is possible. Should the communication to the equipment be interrupted during the download process (e.g. a crashed PC, an unplugged RS-232 cable or everything else except a power off situation), correct the communication problem WITHOUT switching off the power supply and WITHOUT executing a reset of the device, simply restart the firmware download. If the power supply is switched off or the device is reset, it will be necessary to wait up to 15 minutes and to use the address 255 for connecting the device.
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Programming and Testing Instructions: < NSD570 >
1KHW000898-EN
B
Lang.:
04-04-16
Page:
PTUKT2
Valid for:

Derived from:

Replaces:
EN
1/37
Teleprotection Equipment: Series NSD570

Programming and Testing Instructions: < NSD570 >
This document describes programming and testing of the teleprotection equipment NSD570 Analog and NSD570 Digital, including the optical interface for the NSD570 Digital. Contents: A A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 A.10 A.11 B B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 B.6 B.7 B.8 B.9 B.10 B.11 B.12 B.13 B.14 Programming Instructions for the NSD570 Equipment................................ 3 General......................................................................................................... 3 Create a configuration for the equipment using the HMI570 ....................... 3 Check interfaces in the rack G7BI ............................................................... 3 Common settings for both types of equipment NSD570 Analog/Digital ...... 4 Settings for the analog line interface............................................................ 6 Settings for the digital line interface ............................................................. 8 Settings for the individual commands ........................................................ 10 Settings for the relay interface(s) ............................................................... 11 Alarm settings ............................................................................................ 13 Display Panel ............................................................................................. 14 LAN Interface ............................................................................................. 14 Testing Instructions for the NSD570 Equipment........................................ 15 General....................................................................................................... 15 Check power supply................................................................................... 15 Preparing the equipment............................................................................ 16 Change configuration ................................................................................. 17 Remarks for T-operation ............................................................................ 18 Configure Real Time Clock (RTC) ............................................................. 18 Analog line interface................................................................................... 19 Digital line interface.................................................................................... 20 Relay interfaces ......................................................................................... 20 System alarm indication ............................................................................. 22 System functions........................................................................................ 22 Display Panel ............................................................................................. 23 LAN Interface ............................................................................................. 23 Concluding works....................................................................................... 24
Sheet NSD570 System Settings................................................................... A1 - A7 Sheet NSD570 System Test Report............................................................. B1 - B5
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
2/37
1KHW000898-EN
Basic test equipment PC with Windows NT, 2000 or XP Software HMI570 (user interface program) PC COM 1 cable (1:1 serial RS-232) One male, one female plug Sub-D, 9 pin ABB Metrawatt M2012 or equivalent General purpose (True RMS or selective) General purpose Tektronix 2235 or equivalent Digital multimeter Level meter Power supply unit 0...100 VDC Oscilloscope bandwidth 1 MHz Optional test equipment Level transmitter Selective level meter Storage oscilloscope Fs 1 Ms/s Test box for teleprotection equipment Modem tester RS-232 interface tester Optical power meter 850 nm / 1310 nm Optical attenuator Notes: This document is part of the Operating Instructions NSD570 (1KHW000890). Please refer to document "Compatibility Requirements for NSD570" (1KHW000902) for compatibility between software HMI570, firmware "Analog", firmware "Digital" and hardware of NSD570 PS-33 (Acterna) or equivalent SPM-32 (Acterna) or equivalent Tektronix 2430A or equivalent MK11 or equivalent DT-24 (Acterna) or equivalent DV-24 (Acterna) or equivalent WWG OLP-16C or equivalent ANDO AQ3150 or equivalent
Designations and abbreviations used: Designation ( .. ) [ .. ] [ [ ]D ] [X ] G3LR RTC LED HMI570 N1, , N84 Rx Tx PC X100, , X701 X1, , X99 PLC Meaning Measured value Programmed value Preferred setting (default) Test passed or jumper is set Not tested or jumper is not set Module type Real Time Clock Light Emitting Diode found on the front panel User Interface for NSD570 running on a PC/notebook Position in rack. Slot number N1, , N84 Receiver Transmitter Personal Computer or Notebook Computer Onboard connector of the plug in modules Connector designation of the optional connecting cables Power Line Carrier equipment (e.g. ETL500 series)
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
3/37
1KHW000898-EN
A
A.1
Programming Instructions for the NSD570 Equipment

General
Most settings for the line interfaces, the relay interfaces and the command application of the teleprotection equipment NSD570 are performed with the configuration program HMI570. Typically this data are configured off-line and stored as a file on a disk. All these settings are loaded from a file and downloaded to the equipment. A few settings have to be done by means of jumper plugs, e.g. the impedance of the analog line interface. These settings can be entered in the configuration data file as well and downloaded to the equipment by the HMI570 (for information purpose only, e.g. for remote read out). One or two NSD570 systems can be accommodated in the rack. They can be of the same type or even a mix of analog and digital system in the same rack is possible. Access to both systems is possible via the serial COM 1 interface on the frontpanel of the rack G7BI (using the HMI570 and the device address number for connection to the equipment). The programming instructions as well as the testing instructions cover all possible rack configurations. Follow systematically, step-by-step this instruction and the equipment will work properly!
A.2
Create a configuration for the equipment using the HMI570

To configure a system from scratch, the HMI570 software has to be installed on the PC/notebook first (see document "HMI570 Software Installation Description" 1KHW000894). After starting the HMI570, a default configuration file for the analog or for the digital version can be loaded for easy adaptation to the application needs of the system. This can be done "off-line" (i.e. without connection to the system) and even without performing a "login" to the HMI570. The modified configuration file can be saved afterwards to the local disk or be downloaded to the equipment (after performing a "login" and a "connect" to the designated system). It is also possible to load and modify a pre-configured file, which is saved in your local file system. If the equipment was already configured earlier, the configuration can also be uploaded, modified, saved to disk or downloaded again (after changing the desired settings). For more detailed information about the configuration procedure with the help of HMI570 please refer to the Operating Instructions NSD570, 1KHW000890, section 5, "configuration and settings".
A.3
Check interfaces in the rack G7BI

Most of the modules (including hardware releases) of the rack assembly are auto-detected by the NSD570 system and can be viewed after connecting to the equipment and uploading the configuration. For information purposes, the complete rack assembly may also be entered and stored in the configuration data (e.g. for remote read out).
A.3.1
Check position of interfaces

If the configuration was done "off-line", check if all required interfaces are present and inserted at the correct position in the module rack (as given in the HMI570 configuration pages), before downloading the new configuration to the system. If desired, complete the rack assembly in the configuration data, save it to disk and download it to the equipment. The rack assembly data can be entered in the device configuration by clicking on the Rack Assembly link in the configuration menu and choosing the module and piggyback type from a pull down menu for each slot in the rack.
A.3.2
Check presence of cover plates

The front of the rack must be covered completely. Check that a blanking cover plate or the optional Display Panel type G1LC is present on the left hand side (width x height = 94 x 128 mm). Check, if the screening cover at the rear of the rack is present (width x height = 430 x 130 mm; covering all the modules and the external connections to the modules).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
4/37
1KHW000898-EN
A.4
A.4.1
Common settings for both types of equipment NSD570 Analog/Digital

Power supply
If the equipment is mounted in a cabinet, check that the following circuit breakers (or equivalent) are installed: 48 / 60 VDC, 100 - 240 VAC Circuit breaker B9AS (1KHL015141R0001, type S282 K 6A) 72 - 250 VDC Circuit breaker B9AV (1KHL015999R0001, type S282 UC-K 6A) Before powering the module rack for the first time, check the wiring of protective earth and power supply polarity. Also check the voltage source for the power supply.
Caution
A.4.2
Device identification
The following information can be entered and saved into the configuration data (to identify the equipment in the rack): Station Name: A name consisting of 20 characters can be entered (e.g. to designate the substation) HE Number: The module rack type G7BI is usually marked with a unique HE number ex works. This 6-digit number (or any other text with 20 characters max.) can be entered. Device Address: The address of the device may be chosen out of the range 1 240. After the initial configuration, a connection to the NSD570 is later on established using this device address. If two NSD570 are equipped in the same rack, different addresses have to be selected. The same applies if several NSD570 module racks are locally interconnected via the RS-485 station bus. In this network different addresses have to be used for each NSD570.
A.4.3
Operating mode of the equipment

The NSD570 Analog and the NSD570 Digital can be configured for the following operating modes: "Normal" "1+1" "T-Operation" (Teed) "Inverse T-Operation" (Inv Teed) Standard type for point-to-point connection via any transmission media (default) Line interface redundancy to protect against equipment and communication path failures Protection of power lines with teed feeders (having single or multiple tee-offs) For power lines with one or several teed terminals protected by a permissive overreach transfer tripping scheme
A.4.4
Unblocking
An unblocking command used in directional comparison or in permissive tripping schemes with overreaching first zone can be allocated to one or more outputs on the relay interface module. Note that unblocking commands are not transmitted from the remote end, but automatically produced by certain types of line faults (PLC channels). Should the communication channel be almost completely lost, i.e. when the NSD570 is receiving neither guard nor tripping signals and the unblocking threshold is exceeded, the unblocking contacts close for a predefined time. After detection of the unblocking condition the release of this pulse can be delayed (filtered) for a certain time whilst the channel may recover. Unblocking Extra Delay configurable from 0...100 ms in steps of 1 ms; default NSD570 Analog: 10 ms, default NSD570 Digital: 5 ms Unblocking Pulse Duration configurable from 50 500 ms in steps of 1 ms; default: 200 ms
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
5/37
1KHW000898-EN
A.4.5
Command outputs during link failure

It can be programmed how the command outputs respond to a channel failure, i. e. to SNR/BER alarm or Rx level/Sync lost alarm and in case the AIS/LOS is received by the digital NSD570: - do not change: alarm does not influence the command outputs (default) - guard state: alarm sets command outputs to guard state - retain in state: the command outputs retain the status they had immediately prior to the alarm - set permissive and blocking to command state: alarm sets command outputs for direct tripping to guard state and command outputs for permissive tripping or blocking to command state The response of the command outputs becomes effective after an internal alarm processing time from the instant the alarm condition arises and remains so throughout the alarm condition and for a further processing time of the same quantity after it disappears. The alarm-condition pick-up time and the hold time for the command outputs can be further delayed: Link failure pick up time configurable from 0 15 seconds in steps of 1 sec default: 10 sec Link failure hold time configurable from 0 15 seconds in steps of 1 sec default: 0 sec
A.4.6
Synchronization of internal Real Time Clock (RTC)

The timing information for the system and especially for the event recorder is provided by the builtin real time clock (RTC). The date and time of this RTC is set via the HMI570. If the accuracy of this time setting procedure is not sufficient and an external time source is available (e.g. a GPS receiver), the RTC can be synchronized using an external sync pulse (every second) which is automatically detected by the line interfaces, and/or using an external IRIG-B synchronization signal. External Synchronization Signal (GPS Sync) configurable to OFF (default) or ON
A.4.7

For certain equipment operating modes, an EOC may be encoded into the channel used for transmitting guard, command and test signals (without needing additional bandwidth). Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) configurable to OFF or ON (default)
A.4.8
Cyclic Loop Test

An cyclic loop test sequentially checks the integrity of the teleprotection channel. The test signal simulates the transmission of a genuine tripping signal and is recognized as such at the receiving end, from whence it is echoed back to the transmitter. Cyclic Loop Test Interval configurable to OFF / 1 h / 3 h / 6 h (default) / 12 h / 24 h
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
6/37
1KHW000898-EN
A.5
A.5.1
Settings for the analog line interface

Barrier transformers
If the equipment is connected to cables, pilot wires or leased circuits, check that the following barrier transformers are installed:
Caution
If connected to cables, pilot wires or leased circuits: This apparatus must only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers withstanding a test voltage of 15 kVrms or 20 kVrms at 50 Hz / 60 Hz for 1 minute, according to national regulations or to electric utilities' practice.
A.5.2
Connection to the AF communication circuits

Operation of the NSD570 Analog is possible over 2-wire and 4-wire voice frequency communication circuits. 4-wire operation is recommended. For 2-wire operation the transmitter and receiver must have separate frequency bands (not overlapping) and the Tx impedance has to be programmed to "high impedance" (refer to A.5.9). Further constraints for 2-wire operation e.g. level settings and admissible line attenuation are described in the Operating Instructions NSD570.
A.5.3
Analog channel bandwidth

The Tx and the Rx bandwidth can be set individually. The usable frequency range is from 3003960 Hz. Tx bandwidth configurable to 120 / 240 / 360 / 480 (default) / 960 / 1200 / 2400 / 2800 Hz Rx bandwidth configurable to 120 / 240 / 360 / 480 (default) / 960 / 1200 / 2400 / 2800 Hz
A.5.4
Analog channel center frequency

The Tx and the Rx center frequencies can be set individually. The Tx and Rx center frequencies can be configured from 360 Hz to 3900 Hz in 60 Hz steps. Default Tx center frequency: 2400 Hz / default Rx center frequency: 2400 Hz 360 Hz 420 Hz 480 Hz 540 Hz 600 Hz 660 Hz 720 Hz 780 Hz 840 Hz 900 Hz 960 Hz 1020 Hz 1080 Hz 1140 Hz 1200 Hz 1260 Hz 1320 Hz 1380 Hz 1440 Hz 1500 Hz 1560 Hz 1620 Hz 1680 Hz 1740 Hz 1800 Hz 1860 Hz 1920 Hz 1980 Hz 2040 Hz 2100 Hz 2160 Hz 2220 Hz 2280 Hz 2340 Hz 2400 Hz 2460 Hz 2520 Hz 2580 Hz 2640 Hz 2700 Hz 2760 Hz 2820 Hz 2880 Hz 2940 Hz 3000 Hz 3060 Hz 3120 Hz 3180 Hz 3240 Hz 3300 Hz 3360 Hz 3420 Hz 3480 Hz 3540 Hz 3600 Hz 3660 Hz 3720 Hz 3840 Hz 3900 Hz
Note: Center frequency (0.5 x bandwidth) must be in the range 3003960 Hz
A.5.5
Analog operating mode

In the guard state, i.e. when there is no command actuated at the inputs, the NSD570 transmits a single tone guard signal. In the command state, the NSD570 interrupts the guard signal to transmit the tripping signal, which can be a single tone signal or a dual tone signal (simultaneously transmitted - each having half the amplitude of a single tone command), depending on the operating mode. There are two operating modes with single tone commands and 3 operating modes with dual tone commands available. All commands and command combinations can be transmitted simultaneously and are fully independent from each other. If a maximum of two commands is required when using the NSD570 over PLC channels, the operating modes with single tone commands are recommended. It is further recommended, only to select the number of commands that is really needed (in order to let the equipment make best possible use of the available bandwidth).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
7/37
1KHW000898-EN
Selectable operating modes: - 1 single tone command A (configurable for all bandwidths) - 2 single tone commands A, B, A&B (default; not configurable for 120 Hz bandwidth) - 2 dual tone commands A, B, A&B (not configurable for 120 Hz bandwidth) - 3 dual tone commands A, B, C and all combinations of the commands, e.g. B&C (not configurable for 120 Hz and 240 Hz bandwidth) - 4 dual tone commands A, B, C, D and all combinations of the commands, e.g. A&C&D (not configurable for 120 Hz, 240 Hz and 360 Hz bandwidth)
A.5.6
Power boosting
The power of the tripping signal can be boosted and be transmitted at a higher power in relation to the guard signal. The ratio between the boosted tripping signal and the guard signal is referred to as boost ratio and expressed in dB. This is recommended for transmission over cables, leased lines or pilot wires. When the NSD570 is connected to a PLC equipment, the boost ratio should not be set on the NSD570, but on the PLC according to how its channels are used and which other signal may be suppressed during command transmission (in order to release the necessary output power for boosting the tripping signal). The suppression of these other signals is initiated by the power boost criterion output on the Analog Interface type G3LA. For further details refer to the Operating Instructions NSD570. Power boosting configurable for 0 to 9 dB in steps of 1 dB (default: 0 dB)
A.5.7
Unblocking threshold
Further to the unblocking condition "no guard and no trip signals being received", the total signal level in the chosen bandwidth must be below a configurable threshold (compared to the guard signal level) before an unblocking impulse is generated (which can be signaled on one or more outputs of the relay interfaces). Unblocking threshold configurable for -20 to -10 dBm0 in steps of 1 dBm0 (default: -14 dBm0)
A.5.8
Signal and alarm levels

Tx signal level: - single tone guard signal configurable from - 24 dBm to + 2 dBm in steps of 1 dBm (default: -6 dBm)
This leads to the following levels: -> single tone command signal - 24 dBm to + 11 dBm (incl. power boosting) -> dual tone command signals - 27 dBm to + 8 dBm (RMS; incl. power boosting) Rx signal level (nominal) Tx alarm (level drop off) Rx alarm (lower / upper limit) configurable from - 30 dBm to + 2 dBm in steps of 1 dBm (default: -6 dBm) configurable from - 10 dB to -3 dB in steps of 1 dB (default: -6 dB) configurable from 3 dB to 12 dB in steps of 1 dB (default: 6 dB)
A.5.9
Manual jumper settings on G3LA

Tx Impedance Rx Impedance matched to line high-impedance matched to line high-impedance 600 Ohm > 1.5 kOhm 600 Ohm > 1.5 kOhm Jumper TA (default) Jumper TB Jumper RA (default) Jumper RB
Maximum number of devices running parallel over the same circuit: 3 (recommended, for details refer to the Operating Instructions). The jumper settings can be entered in the device configuration by clicking on the Jumper Settings link in the Edit Configuration menu and choosing the appropriate value from a pull down menu.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
8/37
1KHW000898-EN
A.6
Settings for the digital line interface

After clicking on the link Digital Interface in the Edit Configuration menu, a choice has to be made which interface type shall be used. Click on the edit button and a pull down menu will appear for selecting the desired digital interface type (G.703 64 kbps codirectional, RS-530, E1 2048 kbps, T1 1544 kbps, Optical Direct Fiber, Optical FOX/OTERM, Optical IEEE C37.94). After you have chosen the interface type, click on the update button and the entire interface specific settings will appear on screen. They can be changed by clicking on the edit button again. Default setting for the interface type is G.703 64 kbps codirectional.
A.6.1
Interface independent settings

BER Alarm Threshold: If the bit error rate (BER) reaches the pre-defined threshold, alarm is given and dependent actions are taken (e.g. the command outputs will go to the quiescent state if configured). The BER is determined in 16 seconds (short term average) and in 262 minutes (long term average). BER Alarm Threshold (1E) configurable for 1E-09, 1E-08, 1E-07, 1E-06 (default) 1E-05, 1E-04, 1E-03, 1E-02, and 1E-01 Digital Address: If the addressing facility is enabled, a digital address is added into the data stream used for transmitting guard, test and trip messages. The receiver continuously monitors whether the incoming data stream includes the address of the remote station. If not, the command outputs are blocked and alarm is given. This feature is used to protect against channel crossovers in switched or routed networks. Digital Address Check configurable to OFF (default) or ON Local Digital Address configurable from 0 to 1023 (default 341) Remote Digital Address configurable from 0 to 1023 (default 682)
A.6.2
G.703 codirectional interface

It may be configured whether the transmitted clock/data signal is synchronized on the internal 64 kHz timing signal only or if the timing information which is reproduced from the received clock/data signal shall be used to synchronize the transmitted clock/data signal. G.703 Tx Clock Sync configurable to "None" or to "Rx" (default)
A.6.3
RS-530 interface
The RS-530 interface data rate can be set to 64 kbps (default) or 56 kbps. The clock source for both the send data (SD) and the receive data (RD) may be selected. If an external timing signal is available, the interface can be programmed to synchronize the incoming and outgoing data on to these signals (ST = Send Timing; RT = Receive Timing). If no external clock source is available, the internal timing signal can be chosen. RS-530 Rx Clock configurable to "internal" (default) or "ext. RT" RS-530 Tx Clock configurable to "internal" (default) or "ext. ST" If no external clock source (RT) for the receive data is available, it may be configured whether the receive data is synchronized on the internal timing signal only or if the timing information which is reproduced from the received data signal shall be used to synchronize the internal clock of the receiver. RS-530 Rx Clock Sync configurable to "RD" (default) or to "none" If no external clock source (ST) for the send data is available, it may be configured whether the send data is synchronized on the internal timing signal only or if the timing information that is reproduced from the received data signal shall be used to synchronize the internal clock of the transmitter. This setting is also valid for the terminal timing (TT) signal, which sometimes has to be provided from the interface to the communication equipment (e.g. a multiplexer). RS-530 Tx Clock Sync TT configurable to "RD" (default) or to "none" If no external clock signal is available at all (ST, RT), the Rx Clock Sync and the Tx Clock Sync TT have both be programmed either to "RD" or both be programmed to "none".
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
9/37
1KHW000898-EN
The RS-530 terminal timing (TT) signal can be set to "off" (default) or to "on" (if requested from the application and/or multiplexer). If two NSD570 with RS-530 interfaces are operated in a point-to-point configuration, one of them has to be configured as "Master" (the send data SD are synchronized on the internal clock only, i.e. Rx Clock Sync and Tx Clock Synch TT are both "off") and the other as "Slave" (the send data are synchronized on the timing information which is reproduced from the received data signal, i.e. Rx Clock Sync and Tx Clock Synch TT are both set to "RD"). With these settings a clock loop can be avoided. For the "Master" station, alternatively the terminal timing (TT) signal provided by the remote station can be used as an external clock reference (wired on the ST inputs).
A.6.4
E1 interface
Depending on the distance (cable length) between the E1 interface and the communication equipment (e.g. a multiplexer), the receiver sensitivity can be programmed for short haul (max. cable attenuation 10 dB) or long haul (max. cable attenuation 43 dB) application. Long Haul configurable to off (default = short haul) or on An internal elastic buffer size can be configured individually for the input and the output circuits. This buffer may help to compensate clock deviations or clock wander between the internal and the external timing. Compensation of jitter and detection of slips is also possible by means of a higher buffer size thus introducing a higher delay. A compromise has to be found in actual tests with the used communication equipment regarding high jitter capability versus low additional delay. Rx Buffer configurable to 1 frame 2 frames (default), 96 bit, bypass Tx Buffer configurable to 1 frame 2 frames (default), 96 bit, bypass The following combinations are not possible: Rx Buffer = bypass and Tx Buffer = bypass Rx Buffer = bypass and Tx Buffer = 96 bit Rx Buffer = 96 bit and Tx Buffer = bypass Rx Buffer = 96 bit and Tx Buffer = 96 bit The E1 coding format can be adjusted to the one that is used by the communication equipment. E1 Coding configurable to HDB3 (default) or AMI The E1 frame format can be adjusted to the one that is used by the communication equipment. E1 Frame Format configurable to double frame (default) or CRC4 multiframe For details refer to the Operating Instructions NSD570.
A.6.5
T1 interface
Depending on the distance (cable length) between the T1 interface and the communication equipment (e.g. a multiplexer), the receiver sensitivity can be programmed for short haul (max. cable attenuation 10 dB) or long haul (max. cable attenuation 36 dB) application. Long Haul configurable to off (default = short haul) or on An internal elastic buffer size can be configured individually for the input and the output circuits. This buffer may help to compensate clock deviations or clock wander between the internal and the external timing. Compensation of jitter and detection of slips is also possible by means of a higher buffer size thus introducing a higher delay. A compromise has to be found in actual tests with the used communication equipment regarding high jitter capability versus low additional delay. Rx Buffer configurable to 1 frame 2 frames (default), 96 bit, bypass Tx Buffer configurable to 1 frame 2 frames (default), 96 bit, bypass The following combinations are not possible: Rx Buffer = bypass and Tx Buffer = bypass Rx Buffer = bypass and Tx Buffer = 96 bit Rx Buffer = 96 bit and Tx Buffer = bypass Rx Buffer = 96 bit and Tx Buffer = 96 bit Rx Buffer = bypass and Tx Buffer = 1 frame Rx Buffer = bypass and Tx Buffer = 2 frames Rx Buffer = 1 frame and Tx Buffer = bypass Rx Buffer = 2 frames and Tx Buffer = bypass
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
10/37
1KHW000898-EN
The T1 coding format can be adjusted to the one that is used by the communication equipment. T1 Coding configurable to B8ZS (default) or AMI The T1 frame format can be adjusted to the one that is used by the communication equipment. T1 Frame Format configurable to 4 frames (default) or extended superframe For details refer to the Operating Instructions NSD570.
A.6.6
Optical interfaces
Depending on the distance (cable length) between the optical interface and the communication equipment and its optical input saturation power, the laser output power can be programmed for short haul (< -17 dBm) or long haul (< -1 dBm) application. This is only applicable for the Optical Direct Fiber and the Optical FOX/OTERM interface, as the laser output power of the Optical IEEE C37.94 interface cannot be varied. Long Haul configurable to off (default = short haul) or on
A.6.7
Grounding the shield of optional connecting cables

The cable shield of the optional connecting cables for the Digital Interface type G3LD must be grounded at the cable tray below the module slots in the back of the rack. If the connections are made directly to the interfaces, shielded twisted pair cables have to be used and the customer must properly ground them at the cable tray. For details refer to the Operating Instructions NSD570.
A.7
A.7.1
Settings for the individual commands

Command Application
Each command can be configured individually for transmitting protection signals in blocking, permissive tripping or direct tripping protection schemes. Choosing the application of the command determines the individual evaluation of the corresponding tripping signals regarding security/dependability. The transmission time depends on the channel quality (SNR/BER). The processing of the line signal is adaptive and therefore always ensures the shortest possible transmission times for the chosen command application. The NSD570 Analog can transmit up to 4 commands (A - D), the NSD570 Digital can transmit up to 8 commands (A - H). Each of these commands can be set for: - Off (not used) - Blocking - Permissive - Direct Usually the commands A - D or A - H respectively are configured in ascending order regarding security requirements of the command application (for example: A for blocking, B and C for permissive and D for direct tripping). Nevertheless alternative configurations are possible.
A.7.2
Tx Trip Duration Monitoring

For each command a Tx trip duration monitoring can be programmed to OFF (default) or ON, i.e. the transmission of persistent commands can be disabled. The duration of each single command injected at the relay interface inputs is separately and continuously monitored (if the Tx trip duration alarm is enabled for this command). Alarm is given and if no persistent command is injected simultaneously - the guard signal is transmitted instead of the tripping signal should the command duration exceed the predefined value. Also the boost criterion is set inactive before the guard signal is transmitted again. Max. Tx Trip Duration configurable from 1 15 seconds in steps of 1 sec (default: 5 seconds)
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
11/37
1KHW000898-EN
A.7.3
Tx input command delay

Warning: If an input command delay is configured, it has a direct influence on the transmission time of the equipment. It is delayed correspondingly and thus means a artificial deterioration of the equipment performance. Normally the receiver at the remote station decides whether it was a genuine command of adequate length or only a transient spark on a command input. Therefore the command inputs are not delayed in the default operating modes. If there is a request for some special applications (e.g. direct tripping when using digital communication systems) a pick up time for the command inputs can be configured. A command is transmitted only after the corresponding command input was activated for the preset delay time. The command sending duration is then prolonged by the same time. The preset input command delay can be configured for each command separately. Tx input command delay configurable from 0 10 ms in steps of 1 ms (default 0 ms)
A.7.4
Rx command prolongation
A command prolongation ensures a steady output command even in the event of discontinuations of the signal being received. The NSD570 receiver compensates the time needed for evaluating the tripping signals, i.e. the command duration at the output has almost the same pulse width as the transmitted command at the remote station (if no prolongation time is configured). A command prolongation can be programmed for each command separately. Rx command prolongation configurable from 0 3000 ms in steps of 1 ms Default Blocking 0 ms Default Permissive Tripping 10 ms Default Direct Tripping 100 ms
A.8
Settings for the relay interface(s)

The inputs / outputs on the interface module are programmable; if a command requires two output contacts, for example, both outputs can be assigned to one interface or even to different interfaces. More inputs / outputs are easily obtained by inserting additional relay interfaces. Each Relay Interface type G3LR provides the following electrically isolated inputs and outputs: - 2 opto-coupler inputs, used for command injection - 2 solid state outputs and 2 heavy duty relays with change-over contacts, used for command issuing and signalling of various alarms and special functions (e.g. unblocking) A maximum of 4 relay interfaces per NSD570 in the rack can be configured. First of all, the relay interfaces that are plugged in the module rack and which shall also be used for the NSD570 system have to be switched to "on" in the corresponding configuration list of the HMI570.
A.8.1
Configuration of the inputs

Each of the configured commands can individually be mapped on one or several inputs. The inputs can also be configured as "not used" (if, for example, three commands has to be transmitted using two relay interfaces).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
12/37
1KHW000898-EN
A.8.2
Configuration of the solid state and relay outputs

The following signals can individually be mapped on one or several outputs (solid state or relay contacts). For a detailed description of the alarms refer to the Operating Instructions NSD570. - Each output can also be configured as "not used" (if, for example, more outputs are available on the used relay interfaces than signals has to be mapped) - Each of the configured commands (A - D for the analog version or A - H for the digital version) - Tx command acknowledge (programmable for each command: the Tx command injected is then looped back from the line interface to the configured output to acknowledge that the corresponding command was sent. This is, however, no confirmation that the command has also been received by the opposite station) - Tx command summary acknowledge (for acknowledging when any command is sent) - Rx command summary acknowledge (for acknowledging when any command is received) - Tx or Rx command summary acknowledge (for acknowledging when any command is sent or received) - Rx Guard State (indicating the received guard signal state) - Unblocking - Hardware Warning (local) - Hardware Alarm (local) - Link Alarm (local) - Transmit Alarm (local) - Receive Alarm (local) - Local Alarm - Remote Alarm - System Alarm (incl. remote) - User Alarm 1 - User Alarm 2 - User Alarm 3
A.8.3
Nominal input voltage

This has to be set manually via jumpers on G3LR. Preparation for programming: Switch off the NSD570 supply (via external circuit breakers) and pull out the G3LR modules from the rack G7BI. If optional connecting cables are used, they have to be removed from the module beforehand. The input circuits can be set to operate in one of the following ranges for the nominal station battery voltage: 24 VDC 48 VDC 60 VDC 110 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC (default setting) jumper plugs 1A and 1B for input 1 jumper plugs 2A and 2B for input 2 jumper plugs 1A and 1C for input 1 jumper plugs 2A and 2C for input 2 jumper plugs 1A and 1D for input 1 jumper plugs 2A and 2D for input 2
The jumper settings can be entered in the device configuration by clicking on the Jumper Settings link in the Edit Configuration menu and choosing the voltage range from a pull down menu for each input of the relay interfaces.
A.8.4
Tripping of the inputs on a contact basis

If no station battery is available or if it shall not be used, the command inputs can also be tripped by an external dry contact only. For that purpose, the optional module type G1LR (internal tripping voltage 24 VDC) has to be plugged on to the Relay Interface G3LR. The module G1LR covers both inputs of a relay interface, it is therefore not possible to have an external tripping voltage on one input and the internal tripping voltage on the other input of the same board. But a mix of internal and external tripping voltage on neighboring relay interfaces is possible.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
13/37
1KHW000898-EN
Preparation for mounting G1LR: Switch off the NSD570 supply (via external circuit breakers) and pull out the G3LR modules from the rack G7BI. If optional connecting cables are used, they have to be removed from the module beforehand. Remove the four jumper plugs and put them to a safe place if they shall be reused later. Mount the piggyback module into the jumper plug sockets (since the sockets are not all mounted equidistantly, a mistaken placing of the module is not possible). Tripping on a contact basis can be entered in the device configuration by clicking on the Jumper Settings link in the configuration menu and choosing Internal 24 VDC from a pull down menu for both inputs of the corresponding relay interface.
A.8.5
Relay contacts
The relay outputs can be operated as normally open (NO) or normally close (NC) contacts. Since all three terminals of the relays (NO/NC/Common) are available on the module socket or on the terminal block of the optional connecting cable, NO or NC contacts are obtained by wiring the output contacts correspondingly. Warning: do not use NO and NC simultaneously!
A.9
A.9.1
Alarm settings
Alarm pick up and hold delays
A system alarm for each NSD570 in the rack is given on the common interface outputs. Several further alarms (including system alarm) may be mapped on the relay interface outputs (refer to A.8.2). The signaling of an alarm on the alarm outputs may be delayed after detection of the alarm source (pick up time). Also a prolongation of the alarm signaling after the alarm source has disappeared can be programmed (hold time). If several alarm sources appear or disappear in a sequence, the pick up time for combined alarms (e.g. system alarm) will be triggered with the first appearing alarm and the hold time will start when the last alarm has disappeared. Alarm pick up time configurable from 0 15 seconds in steps of 1 sec. (default 15 sec) Alarm hold time configurable from 0 15 seconds in steps of 1 sec. (default 15 sec)
A.9.2
Alarm relay contacts

The alarm relay outputs on the common interface can be operated as normally open (NO) or normally close (NC) contacts. Since all three terminals of the relays (NO/NC/Common) are available on the module socket or on the terminal block of the optional connecting cable, NO or NC contacts are obtained by wiring the output contacts correspondingly. Warning: do not use NO and NC simultaneously!
A.9.3
Configuration of user alarms

It is possible to combine some of the different alarm sources (by logical OR gating) into three different user defined alarm signals. These user alarms (1 3) are individually configurable on each output (solid state or relay contact) of the relay interfaces. The following alarm sources can be combined in user alarm 1, 2 or 3: HW Warning Local HW Alarm Local Link Alarm Local Tx Alarm Local Rx Alarm Local Tx Signal Local Rx Signal Local SNR / BER Local HW Alarm Remote Link Alarm Remote Tx Alarm Remote Rx Alarm Remote Tx Signal Remote Rx Signal Remote SNR / BER Remote
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
14/37
1KHW000898-EN
A.10
Display Panel
The optional display panel G1LC provides various information such as trip counter reading or alarm messages from the NSD570 Teleprotection Equipment - without having the need of a PC/notebook. As readout device a dot matrix LCD display with two lines, 16 characters each, and a yellow/green background LED is used. The lightness of the background LED, the contrast of the LCD and the standby time of the display are adjustable. Four buttons that enable the menu-driven handling are accessible on the front of the display panel. Preparation for mounting G1LC: Switch off the NSD570 supply (via external circuit breakers) and remove the blanking cover plate from the rack G7BI. Connect the enclosed ribbon cable from the display panel to the adjacent Common Interface G3LC (refer to Operating Instructions, Section 6). Fix the Display Panel G1LC on the rack by means of the four captive screws. Switch on the NSD570 supply again, the ABB intro appears on the display. The following display settings may be modified (please refer to the Operating Instructions for a detailed description how to navigate through menu structure of the display panel): - Increase/decrease the contrast setting of the LCD-module (16 steps); default: step 10 - Increase/decrease the backlight setting of the LCD-module (4 steps and OFF); default: step 3 - Change the standby time of the display panel (1 60 minutes); default: 10 minutes
A.11
LAN Interface
The optional LAN Interface G3LL is an Ethernet 10/100BaseT interface. It can be used to connect one or more NSD570 systems to TCP/IP-networks for configuration, monitoring and maintenance. The LAN Interface is plugged into the most left slot (N84) of the Module Rack G7BI. Therefore the TPE 2 in this rack can only utilize a maximum number of three Relay Interfaces G3LR. Other NSD570 devices may be connected via the local station bus (RS-485) to the LAN Interface G3LL. There is a special document available that describes the programming, testing and commissioning of the LAN Interface G3LL (please refer to 1KHW001289 Commissioning Instructions LAN Interface G3LL in the annex of the Operating Instructions NSD570).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
15/37
1KHW000898-EN
B
B.1
Testing Instructions for the NSD570 Equipment.

General
Some of the tests for the NSD570 system can be done with assistance of the HMI570 user interface program. For example: the transmission time of one direction can be verified with a manually initiated loop test, the result is immediately displayed on screen. The guard signal of the NSD570 Analog version is QPSK modulated to accommodate also an Embedded Operation Channel (EOC). As a result the level of the guard signal changes continuously. Its exact level can therefore only be measured, if the EOC is switched off by means of the HMI570.
B.1.1
Test conditions
Temperature range: 20 C to 35 C. The connections for the tests can be made either directly at the rear of equipment (spring-clamp terminals, Sub-D and RJ45 sockets) or at the terminals and sockets of the optional connecting cables.
B.1.2
Visual checks before powering the equipment
DANGER
Check the wiring of protective earth to the equipment. If the NSD570 module rack is mounted in a cabinet, check that the rack is properly earthed at the cabinet. Check if a protective earth wire of at least 25 mm2 has been connected visibly to the earth bolt of the cabinet. Check the voltage source and the polarity for the power supply. In case of battery supply and if the NSD570 module rack is mounted in a cabinet: check if the positive pole (+) of the battery is grounded. If it is, place an earth jumper to the positive pole of the cabinet supply. 48 VDC and higher battery voltages are hazardous. Beware of electric shock. Do not make any installation under energized condition.
Caution
DANGER
Note:
Now the equipment can be powered by closing the external circuit breaker(s) or switching on the external power supply unit.
B.2
Check power supply

Check the auxiliary supply voltage at the inputs of G3LH. It must be in the range from 48 VDC to 250 VDC ( 20 %) for nominal battery voltage and from 100 VAC to 240 VAC (-15%, +10%) for nominal mains voltage 50/60 Hz. In case of dual (redundant) power supply, the supply voltage for both modules must be checked. Two LEDs on the front panel indicate the status of the power supply modules (green = Ok, red = fail, dark = not assembled). There is no easy access to the internal DC voltages generated by the power supply modules (+12.3 V), generated by the common interface type G3LC (+12 V and +5 V) or generated by the various plug-in modules (+3.3 V). However in case these voltages go outside their limits, it will be indicated by the corresponding status LED of the module on the front panel and by a hardware alarm.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
16/37
1KHW000898-EN
B.3
Preparing the equipment

Follow the steps below for connecting to the equipment, downloading the configuration and preparing the system for testing:
B.3.1
Connecting to the equipment

1. 2. Start the HMI570, log yourself in, load the pre-configured file and connect to the equipment as described in the Operating Instructions NSD570, 1KHW000890, chapter 4, section "Communication to the NSD570". If no configuration was downloaded to the systems in the rack before, make sure that no connection is made to the RS-485 station bus interface at the rear of the rack while connecting to the equipment with the default device address. After setting of all (unique!) device addresses of the NSD570 systems that are supposed to be connected to the local station bus, the corresponding wires can be reconnected to the RS-485 interface terminals. Connect the equipment using the default device addresses: type "241" in the Local Device Address entry field when you want to connect to the NSD570 in the left rack half (TPE 1); type "246" in the Local Device Address entry field when you want to connect to the NSD570 in the right rack half (TPE 2). This method with the default addresses can also be used to determine the configured device address of the systems in a rack (not having a RS-485 connection to the local station bus!).
3.
B.3.2
Download the configuration

4. In the Configuration menu, click on Download Configuration. Compatibility checks are now performed to verify if downloaded functionality and settings can be handled by the equipment. Three grades of compatibility are possible: Full compatibility: The download operation is possible without restrictions. Go on with step 5 Restricted compatibility: The download operation is possible with some alterations of the settings to be downloaded. An on-screen message will report each of these alterations. It is recommended in this case to change the settings responsible for the reported alterations or to update the firmware of the system as described in document "Firmware Download Description NSD570", 1KHW000896. No compatibility: the download operation is not possible due to incompatibility between HMI570 and hardware/firmware. Solve the problem by getting compatible versions for HMI570, hardware and firmware as given by document "Compatibility Requirements for NSD570", 1KHW000902. Perhaps it is only necessary to update the firmware of the system as described in document "Firmware Download Description NSD570", 1KHW000896. Afterwards restart the programming and testing procedure. No compatibility: the download operation is not possible due to missing functions in the hardware/firmware. Changing the settings responsible for the reported incompatibility may solve this problem. Otherwise update the firmware as described in document "Firmware Download Description NSD570", 1KHW000896. 5. 6. 7. If the download operation is possible, a message will appear, which informs you that the configuration download was successful. Reset the device using the Reset Device link in the Maintenance Menu, a message will appear when the task was sent successfully. Disconnect Device - ignore the error messages that might appear on screen (because the device address has changed) and reconnect to the system with the new device address. Note: If two NSD570 are equipped in the same rack and by mistake the same device address was configured, a connection to any of the two devices is no longer possible. In this case proceed as follows: Switch off the NSD570 supply (via external circuit breakers) and pull out one of the two line interfaces (G3LA/G3LD). Switch on the supply again, connect to the remaining device and reconfigure the device address. Switch off the NSD570 supply (via external circuit breakers) and plug in the other line interfaces. Switch on the supply again.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
17/37
1KHW000898-EN
8.
If you like to see whether your new configuration has become effective, wait until the green "Ok" LED lights up again, click then on the Discard Configuration link in the Configuration menu and on the Upload Configuration link afterwards. With View Configuration you can see the uploaded configuration including Device Info, Hardware Versions and Firmware Versions (which are not configurable but readable from the device).
B.3.3
Preparing the system for testing

9. Synchronize the internal time and date of the NSD570 system on your local PC/notebook time information: click on the link Set Time and Date in the Maintenance menu (see B.6). A message will appear when the task was sent successfully. Note: this has initially to be done so that no alarms from the RTC will appear later on. If an external time information signal is connected to the synchronization inputs of the equipment rack, the internal clock has not to be set but to be checked using the Get Time and Date link in the Maintenance menu. Check whether the Jumper Settings in the Configuration menu correspond to the actual requirements. If not, update the entries for the Analog Interface (if plugged) and for the Relay Interfaces, save the configuration to disk, download it and reset the equipment. The same as described in the previous step applies also for the Configuration menu item Rack Assembly - edit the rack assembly list if it does not represent the current state. Switch off the NSD570 supply, connect the two units under test: analog, digital or optical terminals back-to-back (cross-connected) or via the communication channel (e. g. PLC equipment ETL or digital multiplexer equipment FOX). Switch on the NSD570 supply again, the green "Guard" LED of the NSD570 systems TPE 1 and TPE 2 (if available) should light up.
10. 11. 12. 13.
B.4
Change configuration
If it is necessary to change configuration parameters, refer to section 5 of the Operating Instructions NSD570, chapter "Configuration and Settings" or in section "A" of this document. It may be necessary to change parameters temporarily only (e.g. switching off the EOC in the NSD570 Analog for measuring the exact guard level). They have to be set to the original entries again after the tests have been concluded. If the system does not work properly after downloading the modified configuration and after the manual reset has been performed, use the link Previous Configuration in the Maintenance menu to switch back to the last configuration, which will properly work out as before, after resetting the equipment again.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
18/37
1KHW000898-EN
B.5
Remarks for T-operation

NSD570 Analog in T-operation: When a link with NSD570 Analog in T-operation has to be tested, the preparation has to be done as follows: - Adjust transmitter level at both outer stations of the T-ed line - Adjust receiver level at both devices in the T-station - Adjust transmitter level at both devices in the T-station - Adjust receiver level at both outer stations of the T-ed line Normal T-operation mode: Measure the transmission time (and command prolongation time): - The T-ed-configuration can be regarded as two individual links (outer station A <-> T-station and outer station B <-> T-station). The transmission time (and the command prolongation time) can now be measured as in case of a standard link. Pay attention to the fact, that in the T-station the command inputs and outputs have to be connected in parallel directly at the relay interfaces or at the isolating terminals. - Measure the transmission time from outer station A to outer station B and vice-versa according B.11.2 of this Testing Instructions. An additional delay of 3 ms has to be expected compared to the point-to-point operating time of a standard link. Inverse T-operation mode: Measure the transmission time (and command prolongation time): - The T-ed-configuration cannot be regarded as two individual links (outer station A <-> Tstation and outer station B <-> T-station). The transmission time (and the command prolongation time) can only be measured from A to T and from B to T. Pay attention to the fact, that in the T-station the command inputs have to be connected in parallel and the outputs have to be connected in series directly at the relay interfaces or at the isolating terminals. - Measure the transmission time from outer station A to outer station B and vice-versa according B.11.2 of this Testing Instructions For this measurement a continuous command has to be injected in the T-station while commands are injected in A or B. An additional delay of 3 ms has to be expected compared to the point-to-point operating time of a standard link.
B.6
Configure Real Time Clock (RTC)

The internal real time clock (RTC; mounted on the line interfaces) has to be set to the actual date and time for proper operation of the event recorder.
B.6.1
Setting real time clock

1. Check if the time and date of your PC is exact. 2. Setting the date and time using the HMI570: click on the link Set Time and Date in the Maintenance menu, the RTC will be adjusted to your PC time and date. 3. Click Get Time and Date in the Maintenance menu, the date and time displayed on screen should be the same as that of your PC.
B.6.2
Testing external real time clock synchronization (if available)

The external synchronization - either a signal with a pulse each second or a signal having IRIG-B format or both - has to be connected to the corresponding G3LC inputs (connector X103 on supply backplane type G1LB or terminals of the external connecting cable for G1LB, if used). a) If only an external sync pulse (each second) is available: Set the RTC according B.6.1 b) If an external GPS signal having IRIG-B format is available: Set the time on the PC running HMI570 a few hours back/forward. Click on the link Set Time and Date in the Maintenance menu, the RTC would normally be adjusted to your PC time and date.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
19/37
1KHW000898-EN
Click Get Time and Date in the Maintenance menu, the date and time displayed on screen should not be the same as that of your PC but is the exact time as provided by the GPS receiver. Set the time on the PC back to the exact time.
B.7
Analog line interface

The frequency of the guard and trip tones in the used channel cannot be easily determined and also not be viewed by the HMI570. They depend on the channel bandwidth, the center frequency and the analog operating mode. It is therefore recommended to measure signal levels with a broadband level meter (to a reference of 600 Ohm), assuring that no other signals are existent on the line outside the NSD570 channel. Alternatively, a selective level meter with peak level search can be used. For calculation of guard and trip frequencies please refer to the Operating Instructions NSD570.
B.7.1
Transmitter
Measure the guard level level that is fed into the 600 Ohm line (for this measurement the EOC in the local station has to be switched off): - Switch off the EOC (if it is enabled) - Measured guard level = [ Tx level according setting 2 ] dBm - Switch on the EOC again, if requested Measure the command level that is fed into the 600 Ohm line (for this measurement, a command signal has to be injected at the command inputs, the boost ratio has to be set to 0 dB): - Set the boost ratio to 0 dB - Measure Single Tone command level = [ Tx level according setting 2 ] dBm - Measure Dual Tone command level = [ Tx level according setting - 3 dB 2 ] dBm - Remove the command signal from the command inputs - Set the boost ratio back to the initial value
B.7.2
Power boosting / Boost output

Measure the boosted command level that is fed into the 600 Ohm line (for this measurement, a command signal has to be injected at the command inputs; boost ratio = BR according setting): - Measure Single Tone command level = [ Tx level according setting + BR 2 ] dBm - Measure Dual Tone command level = [ Tx level according setting - 3 dB + BR 2 ] dBm - Remove the command signal from the command inputs If the NSD570 is connected to a PLC equipment, it may be possible that the boosted command level - due to its tolerance range of 2 dB - overmodulates the PLC amplifier. Therefore the signal level has to be reduced to the maximum level that is allowed at the protection input of the PLC equipment. Check that the boost output contact is activated as long as a command is injected (this measurement is only necessary if the contact is really needed, e.g. if connected to a PLC equipment): - The boost output is closed as long as a command is transmitted on the line
B.7.3
Receiver
Measure the guard level that is received at the 600 Ohm line input (for this measurement the EOC in the remote station has to be switched off): - Switch off the EOC (if it is enabled) - Measured guard level = [ Rx level according setting 2 ] dBm - Switch on the EOC again, if requested
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
20/37
1KHW000898-EN
B.8
B.8.1
Digital line interface

Transmitter / Receiver
There are no special measurements foreseen for the digital line interface. Nevertheless, the settings made for the chosen interface type (G.703, RS-530, E1, T1) should be verified with the actual used communication equipment (whether timing, synchronization, buffering, coding and formats match the best possible way). This can be checked and optimized for example by monitoring the BER and the manual loop test time for different settings (click on the link Status / Alarm in the main menu and Upload Status afterwards).
B.8.2
Optical output power / optical receiver sensitivity

The optical power meter must be sensitive to a wavelength of 1310 nm for the Optical Direct Fiber and the Optical FOX/OTERM interface. A single mode adapter cable has to be used for connecting the power meter to G1LO. The optical output power can be measured for both, the short haul and long haul setting: - Switch to short haul (if not already set) - Measured output power = [ -22 -17 ] dBm - Switch to long haul - Measured output power = [ -5 -1 ] dBm - Switch to short haul again, if requested The optical power meter must be sensitive to a wavelength of 850 nm for the Optical IEEE C37.94 interface. A multi mode adapter cable has to be used for connecting the power meter to G1LO. The optical output power is measured as follows: - Measured output power = [ -16 -11 ] dBm To determine the optical receiver sensitivity the output signal of the optical interface has to be attenuated and looped back to the input. The guard LED of the NSD570 must always be on while increasing the optical attenuation. The optical receiver sensitivity for the Optical Direct Fiber and the Optical FOX/OTERM interface can be measured as follows: - Switch to long haul (if not already set) - Measured maximum attenuation > 25 dB - Switch to short haul again, if requested The optical receiver sensitivity for the Optical IEEE C37.94 interface can be measured as follows: - Measured maximum attenuation > 10 dB
B.8.3
Address check
This test is only necessary for high performance measurements or a custom approval of the equipment. For this test, the remote digital address has to be changed in the local device. After resetting the local device it must immediately raise an alarm. Note that the Digital Address Check has to be enabled for this test by means of the HMI570 (refer to A.6.1 Interface independent settings).
B.9
Relay interfaces
Designations and abbreviations used: Designation (T.22/..1) Meaning Connector 1 of terminal block connected to rack position N22
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
21/37
1KHW000898-EN
B.9.1
Inputs
How to activate a command input depends on the jumper settings on G3LR If no optional module type G1LR (internal tripping voltage 24 VDC) is mounted on G3LR: By means of an external contact, inject a tripping voltage at the command inputs with the voltage level U1 according to the jumper settings on G3LR (48 VDC, 110 VDC, 220 VDC) If the optional module type G1LR (internal tripping voltage 24 VDC) is mounted on G3LR: Short circuit the command input by means of an external contact only.
Activate the command inputs and check if the corresponding Input LED lights up on the front panel.
B.9.2
Outputs
Depending upon the programmed criteria, activate the required action using the following table. Check the contact closure of the programmed outputs on G3LR by means of an auxiliary tripping voltage (of the same level as used for the command inputs) and an external current limitation. Check if the corresponding Output LED lights up on the front panel. Set the link back to an alarm free condition after this test. Output on G3LR Rx Command A-H Ack Tx Command A-H Ack Tx Summary Ack Rx Summary Ack Tx/Rx Summary Rx Guard State Unblocking HW Warning Action to enforce the output Inject a Tx command at the corresponding input of the remote station Inject a Tx command at the corresponding input of the local station Inject any Tx command at the inputs of the local station Inject any Tx command at inputs of the remote station Inject any Tx command at the inputs of the local station and any Tx command at the inputs of the remote station Disconnect the line interface input signal Disconnect the line interface input signal Only applicable if two (redundant) power supply modules are plugged: remove the input supply voltage from one of the two power supply modules Not applicable (this alarm can not easily be generated since it would require short-circuiting of signals or even a destruction of components) Disconnect the line interface input signal Inject a continuous Tx command > 10 sec Disconnect the line interface input signal Disconnect the line interface input signal Disconnect the line interface input signal at the remote station Disconnect the line interface input signal Not applicable (this alarm depends on the alarm settings, i.e. the logical OR gating of several internal alarm sources; some of them can be generated - see above - others would require short-circuiting of signals or even a destruction of components) This test is only necessary for the Rx commands. Other signals on the outputs must only be monitored for high performance measurements or a custom approval of the equipment. Precise measurement of the programmed alarm delay times is not necessary - only operating of the contact shall be monitored.
Hardware alarm
Link alarm Transmit alarm Receive alarm Local Alarm Remote alarm System alarm User alarm 1-3
Note:
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
22/37
1KHW000898-EN
B.10
System alarm indication

The system alarm may be triggered by interrupting the connection to the line interface (disconnecting of at least the input = receiver circuit). After the programmed delay time the corresponding system alarm relay on G3LC operates. Check that the relay output is changing its state (precise measurement of the programmed alarm delay time is not necessary). Now restore the connection to the line interface. The alarm LEDs will immediately go off and the relay output will change its state after the programmed delay time.
B.11
B.11.1
System functions
NSD570 loop test
The NSD570 is tested by issuing a loop test via HMI570 or by pressing the "Loop Test" button on the front panel of the module rack. In the Maintenance menu click on the link Manual Loop Test. If the loop test is successful, the "Trip" LED on the front panel will light up for three seconds and a message will appear on the PC screen indicating the measured loop test time for one direction (TLink). The transmission time of the loop test depends on the chosen bandwidth for the NSD570 Analog, the used interface type of the NSD570 Digital, as well as - for both types of devices - on the settings for the command application (the loop test is always transmitted as the command configured for the highest requirements regarding security) and on the delay introduced by the communication link (e.g. PLC).
B.11.2
Command transmission time

Check the transmission time of the NSD570 commands over the link. Transmit at few commands with a command / pause duration of about 100 ms / 1000 ms and measure the actual transmission time for the command from the local station to the remote station. Note: The nominal transmission time as given in the Operating Instructions NSD570 shall serve as a guideline for the mean value of several commands. This is valid only, if the two NSD570 are connected back-to-back. If there is a communication link connected in between, the delay of this link has to be added to the nominal transmission time.
B.11.3
Command prolongation time

This test is only necessary for high performance measurements or a custom approval of the equipment. If available, a well-suited test instrument for this purpose (e.g. the MK11) would simplify this measurement. Measure the difference between the received command signal pulse length and the transmitted command signal pulse length.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
23/37
1KHW000898-EN
B.12
Display Panel
With the following minimized test procedure the four buttons on the front of the display panel (which enable the menu-driven handling) as well as the communication of the display panel with the line interface(s) present in the module rack shall be tested: 1. 2. 3. Press the button with the arrow towards down -> SELECT DEVICE / TPE1 will appear Press the Enter button -> MAIN MENU / Trip Counter will appear Press the Enter button -> Cmd A Tx: .. / Cmd A Rx: .. will appear (press the up button repeatedly to see all counter readings) 4. Press the Loop Test button of the TPE 1 device in the rack -> after some seconds LOOP TEST TIME / TPE 1 .. ms will appear 5. If the rack is equipped with only one teleprotection device TPE 1, proceed with step 10; else press the Back button -> SELECT DEVICE / TPE1 will appear 6. Press the button with the arrow towards up -> SELECT DEVICE / TPE2 will appear 7. Press the Enter button -> MAIN MENU / Trip Counter will appear 8. Press the Enter button -> Cmd A Tx: .. / Cmd A Rx: .. will appear (press the up button repeatedly to see all counter readings) 9. Press the Loop Test button of the TPE 2 device in the rack -> after some seconds LOOP TEST TIME / TPE 2 .. ms will appear 10. Continuously press the Back button for more than 6 seconds -> the display panel will reset, the backlight will go off and the ABB intro will restart
B.13
LAN Interface
A description of the test procedure can be found in 1KHW001289 Commissioning Instructions LAN Interface G3LL in the annex of the Operating Instructions NSD570.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
24/37
1KHW000898-EN
B.14
B.14.1
Concluding works
Reset counters
After all NSD570 tests have passed successfully, reset the counters by using the HMI570. In the Status / Alarm menu click on Trip Counter, then on Reset Trip Counter, activate the checkbox "All" and click on the Reset button.
B.14.2
Clear event recorder

In the menu Event Recorder click on the link Clear Event Recorder.
B.14.3
Manual reset
In the Maintenance menu click on the link Reset Device.
B.14.4
Save the initial configuration data ex works

In the Configuration menu click on the link Upload Configuration and then on Save Configuration. Save the "XML" configuration file on a disk with the Serial No. of the NSD570 rack and the No. of the device (TPE 1 or TPE2) coded in the file name, e.g. HE501249_1_B0.XML. Click on the link and choose Save this file to disk. This action saves the active configuration to disk under the chosen name. All settings you have made and downloaded to the equipment will be saved, including the manual entries (Jumper Settings, Rack Assembly) and also the information that can only be read from the device (Device Information, Hardware and Firmware Versions).
B.14.5
Documentation
Create a printout of the active configuration data that was uploaded and saved to disk before (see B.14.4). Click on the link View Configuration in the Configuration menu and use the Print icon of your browser to generate a handout of all settings and all available device information.
B.14.6
Collect back tracing data

All components of the NSD570 system are marked with a barcode label including the type designation and the manufacturer's series number. By collecting this data with a barcode reader and saving it into a project database (with the serial "HE" No. of the rack as a reference), a back tracing of the system with all its modules can be ensured. The barcode reader must be able to read the barcode 128 format. Read the following barcodes from the back side of the rack: - On the right side plate: G7BI, G1LA, G3LC, G1LB (module rack with basic components) - From the right to the left: G3LA, G3LD, G3LR (interfaces plugged in the intended slots); if the Digital Interface G3LD is equipped with an optional piggyback module (either E1/T1 interface G1LE or Optical Interface G1LO), read its barcode label that is located on the soldering side of the module. Read the following barcodes from the front side of the rack: - Behind the blanking cover plate: G3LH (one or two modules) - Optional Display Panel G1LC (if it is mounted instead of the blanking cover plate)
B.14.7
Mount covers
After collecting the barcode data, the Blanking Cover Plate or the optional Display Panel G1LC must be screwed again on the front side of the rack (covering the power supply modules) and the screening cover must be snapped on the back side of the rack.
NSD570 System Settings
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
A1/A7
HE
Selected alternative or setting
No.
Function
Rack or module
Item to be programmed or fitted
Remarks
A.1 A.2
General Create a configuration for the equipment using the HMI570 Check interfaces in the rack G7BI Check position of interfaces Check presence of cover plates Common settings for both types of equipment NSD570 Analog/Digital Power supply Circuit breaker Circuit breaker G3LH B9AS B9AV
Unit 1 Unit 2
[ ]
A.3 A.3.1 A.3.2 A.4
left
right *
[ ]
front
[ ]
back
[ ]
[ ]
A.4.1
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ]
right *
All voltages except 72 - 250 VDC
A.4.2
Device identification Station Name HE Number Device address G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D ____________ ____________ ID= ____/____
[ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ] [ ]
right *
A.4.3
Operating mode of the equipment Normal 1+1 T-operation Inverse T-operation G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ]
Default
A.4.4
Unblocking Unblocking Extra Delay Unblocking Pulse Duration G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LR G3LR G3LR G3LA/D G3LA/D ____/____ [s] ____/____ [s] ____/____ [ms] ____/____ [ms]
right *
[ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ]
right *
A.4.5
Command outputs during link Responding to channel failure Command outputs not influenced Cmd. outputs set to guard state Cmd. outputs retain in state Channel failure pick up time Channel failure hold up time
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Default
Direct = guard, others = command G3LR
"left" and "right" stands for NSD570 in the left half / right half of the rack (front view)
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
ABB Switzerland Ltd, Utility Automation Systems
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
A2/A7
HE
No.
Function
Rack or module
Remarks
A.4.6
Synchronization of internal Real Time Clock (RTC) External Sync Pulse (per second) Ext. Synchronization Signal (GPS) G3LC G3LC G3LA/D G3LA/D Interval available type IRIG-B enabled enabled ____/____ [h] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ]
left * right *
Connector on G1LB Connector on G1LB
A.4.7
Embedded Operation Channel (EOC) Cyclic Loop Test
[ ]
right *
A.4.8
[ ]
[ ]
A.5
Settings for the analog line interface Barrier transformers G3LA installed
left *
A.5.1
[ ]
left *
right * If connected to cables, [ ] pilot wires or leased circuits right *
A.5.2
Connection to the AF communication circuits
G3LA
2-wire 4-wire Tx: _____ [Hz] Rx: _____ [Hz] Tx: _____ [Hz] Rx: _____ [Hz]
[ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ]
right *
Default
A.5.3
Analog channel bandwidth
G3LA
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left * right *
A.5.4
Analog channel center frequency
G3LA
Tx: _____ [Hz] Rx: _____ [Hz] Tx: _____ [Hz] Rx: _____ [Hz]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left * right *
A.5.5
Analog operating mode
G3LA
No of cmds 1 single tone 2 single tone 2 dual tone 3 dual tone 4 dual tone
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
right *
Default
A.5.6 A.5.7
Power boosting Unblocking threshold
G3LA G3LA
____/____ [dB] ___/___ [dBm0]
[ ]
left *
[ ]
right *
[ ]
[ ]
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
A3/A7
HE
Selected alternative or setting left * right *
No.
Function
Rack or module
Remarks
A.5.8
Signal and alarm levels
G3LA
Signal levels: Tx: ____ [dBm] Rx: ____ [dBm] Tx: ____ [dBm] Rx: ____ [dBm]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left * right *
G3LA
Alarm levels: Tx: - ____ [dB] Rx: ____ [dB] Tx: - ____ [dB] Rx: ____ [dB]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left * right *
A.5.9
Manual jumper settings
G3LA
Impedance Tx: 600 Ohm Tx: > 1.5 kOhm Rx: 600 Ohm Rx: > 1.5 kOhm
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Default Default
A.6 A.6.1
Settings for the digital line interface Interface independent settings BER alarm threshold Digital Address Check Local address Remote address G3LD G3LD G3LD G3LD G3LD 1E-0_ / 1E-0_ enabled _____ / _____ _____ / _____
left * right *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
right *
A.6.2
G.703 codirectional interface G.703 Tx Clock Sync None on Rx Signal 56 kbps 64 kbps internal external ST internal external RT on RD none on RD none off on Master Slave
[ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ]
right *
Default
A.6.3
RS-530 interface Interface data rate Clock source for send data (SD) Clock source for receive data (RD) If no external ST is available: Rx Clock synchronization If no external RT is available: Tx Clock & TT synchronization Terminal Timing (TT) signal G3LD G3LD G3LD G3LD G3LD G3LD
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Default Default Default Default Default Default
If two NSD570 in a link are operated G3LD point-to-point (without MUX)
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
A4/A7
HE
Selected alternative or setting left * right *
No.
Function
Rack or module
Remarks
A.6.4
E1 interface Receiver sensitivity Internal elastic Rx buffer size G3LD/ G1LE G3LD/ G1LE Short haul Long haul 1 Frame 2 Frames 96 Bit Bypass 1 Frame 2 Frames 96 Bit Bypass HDB3 AMI Double Frame CRC4 Multi Fr. Short haul Long haul 1 Frame 2 Frames 96 Bit Bypass 1 Frame 2 Frames 96 Bit Bypass B8ZS AMI 4 Frames Ext. Super Fr. Short haul Long haul
[ ] [ ] [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
[ ] [ ] [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
Default
Default
Internal elastic Tx buffer size
G3LD/ G1LE
Default
E1 Coding E1 Frame Format A.6.5 T1 interface Receiver sensitivity Internal elastic Rx buffer size
G3LD/ G1LE G3LD/ G1LE G3LD/ G1LE G3LD/ G1LE
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
right *
Default Default
[ ] [ ] [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
[ ] [ ] [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ]
Default
Default
Internal elastic Tx buffer size
G3LD/ G1LE
Default
T1 Coding T1 Frame Format A.6.6 Optical interface Receiver sensitivity (Optical Direct Fiber or Optical FOX/OTERM only) A.6.7 Grounding the shield of optional connecting cables Proper grounding at the cable tray
G3LD/ G1LE G3LD/ G1LE G3LD/ G1LO
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
right *
Default Default
[ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ]
right *
Default
G3LD
Earth clip
[ ]
[ ]
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
A5/A7
HE
A.7
Settings for the individual commands Command Application Not used Blocking Permissive Tripping Direct Tripping Not used Blocking Permissive Tripping Direct Tripping G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D Command TPE 1 TPE 1 TPE 1 TPE 1 TPE 2 TPE 2 TPE 2 TPE 2 Command G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LA/D TPE 1 TPE 1 TPE 2 TPE 2 Command G3LA/D G3LA/D TPE 1 TPE 2 Command G3LA/D G3LA/D TPE 1 TPE 2 A B C D E F G H
A.7.1
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] A B C D E F G H
A.7.2
Tx Trip Duration Monitoring Monitoring enabled Maximum trip duration [s] Monitoring enabled Maximum trip duration [s]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ A B C D E F G H
A.7.3
Tx input command delay Delay before sending [ms] Delay before sending [ms]
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ A B C D E F G H
A.7.4
Rx command prolongation Rx Prolongation [ms] Rx Prolongation [ms]
__ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
A.8
Settings for the relay interface(s) Configuration of the inputs Mapping according setting Mapping according setting G3LR G3LR Command TPE 1 TPE 2 Command G3LR G3LR G3LR G3LR TPE 1 TPE 2 Slot TPE 1 TPE 2 A B C D E F G H
A.8.1
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] A B C D E F G H
A.8.2
Configuration of the solid state and relay outputs Cmd mapping acc. setting Cmd mapping acc. setting Other signals acc. setting Other signals acc. setting
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
N34 N40 N46 N52 N64 N70 N76 N84
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
A6/A7
HE
A.8.3
Nominal input voltage Input 1 24 VDC 48 VDC 60 VDC 110 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC Input 2 24 VDC 48 VDC 60 VDC 110 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC G3LR G3LR Jumper plugs 1A, 1B 1A, 1C 1A, 1D Jumper plugs 2A, 2B 2A, 2C 2A, 2D
N34 N40 N46 N52 N64 N70 N76 N84
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Default
N34 N40 N46 N52 N64 N70 N76 N84
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Default
A.8.4
Tripping of the inputs on a contact basis Input 1 and Input 2 G3LR
N34 N40 N46 N52 N64 N70 N76 N84
G1LR mounted [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
A.8.5
Relay contacts Relay 1 contacts Normally open Normally closed Relay 2 contacts Normally open Normally closed G3LR NO NC G3LR NO NC ext. connecting ext. connecting
N34 N40 N46 N52 N64 N70 N76 N84
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
N34 N40 N46 N52 N64 N70 N76 N84
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
No.
Function
Rack or module
Remarks
A.9 A.9.1
Alarm settings Alarm pick up and hold delays Alarm pick up time Alarm hold up time G3LA/D G3LA/D G3LC NO NC ____/____ [s] ____/____ [s] ext. connecting
left * right *
[ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ]
right *
A.9.2
Alarm relay contacts Normally open Normally closed
[ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ]
right *
A.9.3
Configuration of user alarms User Alarm 1 User Alarm 2 User Alarm 3 G3LR G3LR G3LR acc. setting acc. setting acc. setting
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
A7/A7
HE
No.
Function
Rack or module
Remarks
A.10
Display Panel Contrast setting of the LCD-module Backlight setting of the LCD-module Standby time of the display panel G1LC G1LC G1LC 16 steps 4 steps or OFF 1 60 minutes step [ . ] default: step 10 step [ . ] default: step 3 min. [ . ] default: 10 min.
A.11
LAN Interface Settings acc. separate document G3LL 1KHW001289 [ ]
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
NSD570 System Test Report
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
B1/B5
HE
Test Units result
Test No. Test procedure Test point
Permissible value
B.1 B.1.1 B.1.2
General Test conditions Visual checks before powering the equipment Correct wiring of protective earth Correct wiring of power supply Equipment connected to adequate voltage source G7BI G3LH (unit 1 / unit 2) Via circuit breaker B9AS or B9AV PE wired polarity ok [ ] [ ] [ ] Temperature range 20 35 C [ ]
B.2
Check power supply

Unit 1 Unit 2
DC battery voltage AC mains voltage LED indication on the front panel B.3 B.3.1 B.3.2 B.3.3 Preparing the equipment Connecting to the equipment Download the configuration
G3LH (+ to -) G3LH (L to N) G3LH (unit 1 / unit 2)
38.4 300 85.0 264 green
V DC V AC
[ ] [ ] [ ]
left
[ ] [ ] [ ]
right *
Check communication TPE 1 /TPE 2 between PC & NSD570 Download successful Update jumper settings Update rack assembly Establish link
HExxxxxxAy.XML
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
right *
Preparing the system for testing Set time and date
no RTC alarm HMI570 HMI570 Guard LED
B.4 B.5
Change configuration Remarks for T-operation
If necessary Adjusting level Measuring T0 Measuring T0 Analog T Normal T Inverse T
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ]
B.6 B.6.1
Configure Real Time Clock (RTC) Setting real time clock Check PC time / date Set time and date Get time and date Actual / exact Actual / exact
right *
[ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ]
right *
B.6.2
Testing external real time clock synchronization (if available) External sync pulse only External GPS signal Set time and date Adjust PC time / date Set time and date Get time and date Adjust PC time / date Actual / exact Actual / exact Wrong time
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
B2/B5
HE
Test Units result
Permissible value
B.7 B.7.1
Analog line interface Transmitter Guard level Command level If connected to PLC G3LA; X100/1-2 G3LA; X100/1-2 PLC protection input [ setting 2 ] [ setting 2 ] Max. level dBm dBm dBm
left * right *
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
____ ____ (..) (..)
-> reduce level setting if necessary G3LA; X100/1-2 B.7.2 Power boosting / Boost output Command level Boost output activation B.7.3 Receiver Guard level B.8 B.8.1 Digital line interface Transmitter / Receiver Communication established B.8.2 Optical output power / optical receiver sensitivity Output power (Optical Direct Fiber or Optical FOX/OTERM only) G3LD/G1LO; X701/Tx G3LD/G1LO; X701/Tx Optical output power (Optical IEEE G3LD/G1LO; X701/Tx C37.94 only) Max. attenuation (Optical Direct G3LD/G1LO; X701/Rx Fiber or Optical FOX/OTERM only) Max. attenuation (Optical IEEE C37.94 only) B.8.3 Address check Change device address G3LD/G1LE/G1LO G3LD/G1LO; X701/Rx G3LD/G1LE/G1LO G3LA; X100/3-4 G3LA; X100/1-2 G3LA; X100/5-6
measure level dBm
[ setting 2 ] with cmd.
dBm
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ setting 2 ]
dBm
[ ]
[ ]
left *
right *
acc. interface
[ ]
left *
[ ]
right *
[ -22 -17 ] (short haul) [ -5 -1 ] (long haul) [ -16 -11 ] > 25 (long haul) > 10
dBm dBm dBm dB dB
(..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..)
left * right *
Local alarm
[ ]
[ ]
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16

Test No. Test procedure
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
B3/B5
HE
Test Units result
Permissible Test point value
B.9 B.9.1
Relay interfaces Inputs Input 1 Activate Input 1 Check LED Input 1 G3LR (T/1) (T.../2) LED Input 1 U1, see System settings ON V DC
N34 N40 N46 N52
[ ]
N64
[ ]
N70
[ ]
N76
[ ]
N84
[ ] Input 2 Activate Input 2 Check LED Input 2 G3LR (T/3) (T.../4) LED Input 1 U1, see System settings ON V DC
N34
[ ]
N40
[ ]
N46
[ ]
N52
[ ]
N64
[ ]
N70
[ ]
N76
[ ]
N84
[ ] B.9.2 Outputs Enforce action for Output 1 Check Output 1 Check LED Output 1 Enforce action for Output 2 Check Output 2 Check LED Output 2 Enforce action for Relay 1 Check Relay 1 Check LED Relay 1 Enforce action for Relay 2 Check Relay 2 Check LED Relay 2 LED Relay 2 LED Relay 1 LED Output 2 G3LR (T/9) (T.../10) LED Output 1 G3LR (T/7) (T.../8) G3LR (T/5) (T.../6) U1, see System settings closed ON U1, see System settings closed ON U1, see System settings closed ON V DC V DC V DC
N34
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
N40
N46
N52
[ ]
N64
[ ]
N70
[ ]
N76
[ ]
N84
[ ]
N34
[ ]
N40
[ ]
N46
[ ]
N52
[ ]
N64
[ ]
N70
[ ]
N76
[ ]
N84
[ ] V DC
N34
[ ]
N40
[ ]
N46
[ ]
N52
[ ]
N64
[ ]
N70
[ ]
N76
[ ]
N84
[ ]
N34
[ ]
N40
[ ]
N46
[ ]
N52
G3LR U1, see (T/12) (T.../13) System settings closed ON
[ ]
N64
[ ]
N70
[ ]
N76
[ ]
N84
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
Permissible value Units
Test result
B.10
System alarm indication Activate alarm by interrupting receive line connection State of alarm relay after programmed delay Deactivate alarm by restoring the link State of alarm relay after programmed delay
To be measured only if requested LEDs "Local", "Receive" G3LC; X102/1-2 (left) and X102/6-7 (right) LEDs "Local", "Receive" G3LC; X102/1-2 (left) and X102/6-7 (right) LED to be ON changed LED to be OFF changed
left *
right *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
B4/B5
HE
Test Units result
Permissible value
B.11 B.11.1
System functions NSD570 loop test Check actual transmission time TLink HMI570 / Loop Test Button < 1.3*T0 ms
left * right *
(..)
left *
(..)
right *
B.11.2
Command transmission time Command A Tx command A Rx command A Command B Tx command B Rx command B Command C Tx command C Rx command C Command D Tx command D Rx command D Command E Tx command E Rx command E Command F Tx command F Rx command F Command G Tx command G Rx command G Command H Tx command H Rx command H Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Refer to manual for rated value Mean value T0 Refer to manual for rated value Mean value T0 Refer to manual for rated value Mean value T0 Refer to manual for rated value Mean value T0 Refer to manual for rated value Mean value T0 Refer to manual for rated value Mean value T0 Refer to manual for rated value Mean value T0 Refer to manual for rated value Mean value T0 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms
_______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..)
_______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..)
B.11.3
Command prolongation To be measured time only if requested Rx Command A Rx Command B Rx Command C Rx Command D Rx Command E Rx Command F Rx Command G Rx Command H See above See above See above See above See above See above See above See above Setting 0.25 x T0 ms Setting 0.25 x T0 ms Setting 0.25 x T0 ms Setting 0.25 x T0 ms Setting 0.25 x T0 ms Setting 0.25 x T0 ms Setting 0.25 x T0 ms Setting 0.25 x T0 ms
left *
right *
(..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..)
(..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..)
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
B5/B5
HE
Test Units left * result right *
Permissible value
B.12
Display Panel Connecting to the device Return information Reset the display panel G1LC <-> TPE 1/2 Counter readings TPE1/2 -> G1LC G1LC Back Loop Test time ABB intro
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
B.13
LAN Interface Separate document G3LL<-> TPE 1/2 1KHW001289

left *
[ ]
right *
B.14 B.14.1
Concluding works Reset counters Reset all counters HMI570 All counters = 0
[ ]
[ ]
B.14.2
Clear event recorder Clear event recorder HMI570 1 event only [ ] [ ]
B.14.3
Manual reset Reset device HMI570 Reset / start up [ ] [ ]
B.14.4
Save the initial configuration data ex works Upload/save config. HMI570 HExxxxxxBy.XML [ ] [ ]
B.14.5
Documentation View/print configuration HMI570 Barcode reader # printout pages G7BI, G1LA, G3LC, G1LB, G3LA, G3LD, G3LR, G3LL G1LE, G1LO, G3LH, G1LC Front and back (..) [ ] (..) [ ]
B.14.6
Collect back tracing data
B.14.7
Mount covers
Rack G7BI
[ ]
[ ]
Company: Department: Date: Signed: Visa:
_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________
Form 1KHW000898-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Commissioning Instructions: < NSD570 >
1KHW000900-EN
B
Lang.:
04-04-16
Page:
PTUKT2
Valid for:
02-09-04 sig. Maag

Derived from:

Replaces:
EN
1/14

Commissioning Instructions: < NSD570 >
This document describes commissioning of the teleprotection equipment NSD570 Analog and NSD570 Digital, including the optical interface for the NSD570 Digital. Contents: C C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5 C.6 C.7 C.8 C.9 C.10 C.11 C.12 C.13 Commissioning Instructions for the NSD570 Equipment............................. 3 General......................................................................................................... 3 Check power supply..................................................................................... 3 Preparing the equipment.............................................................................. 4 Change configuration ................................................................................... 4 Remarks for T-operation .............................................................................. 5 Configure Real Time Clock (RTC) ............................................................... 5 Analog line interface..................................................................................... 6 Digital line interface...................................................................................... 7 System alarm indication ............................................................................... 7 System functions.......................................................................................... 7 Display Panel ............................................................................................... 8 LAN Interface ............................................................................................... 8 Concluding works......................................................................................... 9
Sheet NSD570 Commissioning Report ....................................................... C1 C4
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
2/14
1KHW000900-EN
Basic test equipment PC with Windows NT, 2000 or XP Software HMI570 (user interface program) PC COM 1 cable (1:1 serial RS-232) One male, one female plug Sub-D, 9 pin ABB Metrawatt M2012 or equivalent General purpose (True RMS or selective) General purpose Tektronix 2235 or similar Digital multimeter Level meter Power supply unit 0...100 VDC Oscilloscope bandwidth 1 MHz Optional test equipment Level transmitter Selective level meter Storage oscilloscope Fs 1 Ms/s Test box for teleprotection equipment Modem tester RS-232 interface tester Optical power meter 850 nm / 1310 nm Notes: This document is part of the Operating Instructions NSD570 (1KHW000890). Please refer to document "Compatibility Requirements for NSD570" (1KHW000902) for compatibility between software HMI570, firmware "Analog", firmware "Digital" and hardware of NSD570 PS-33 (Acterna) or equivalent SPM-32 (Acterna) or equivalent Tektronix 2430A or equivalent MK11 or equivalent DT-24 (Acterna) or equivalent DV-24 (Acterna) or equivalent WWG OLP-16C or equivalent
Designations and abbreviations used: Designation ( .. ) [ .. ] [ [ ]D ] [X ] G3LR RTC LED HMI570 N1, , N84 Rx Tx PC X100, , X701 X1, , X99 PLC Meaning Measured value Programmed value Preferred setting (default) Test passed or jumper is set Not tested or jumper is not set Module type Real Time Clock Light Emitting Diode found on the front panel User Interface for NSD570 running on a PC/notebook Position in rack. Slot number N1, , N84 Receiver Transmitter Personal Computer or Notebook Computer Onboard connector of the plug in modules Connector designation of the optional connecting cables Power Line Carrier equipment (e.g. ETL500 series)
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
3/14
1KHW000900-EN
C
C.1
Commissioning Instructions for the NSD570 Equipment.

General
Some of the tests for the NSD570 system can be done with assistance of the HMI570 user interface program. For example: the transmission time of one direction can be verified with a manually initiated loop test, the result is immediately displayed on screen. The guard signal of the NSD570 Analog version is modulated to accommodate also an Embedded Operation Channel (EOC). As a result the level of the guard signal changes slightly but continuously. Its exact level can therefore only be measured, if the EOC is switched off by means of the HMI570.
C.1.1
Test conditions
Temperature range: -5 C to 45 C. The connections for the tests can be made either directly at the rear of equipment (spring-clamp terminals, Sub-D and RJ45 sockets) or at the terminals and sockets of the optional connecting cables.
C.1.2
DANGER
Check the wiring of protective earth to the equipment. If the NSD570 module rack is mounted in a cabinet, check that the rack is properly earthed at the cabinet. Check if a protective earth wire of at least 25 mm2 has been connected visibly to the earth bolt of the cabinet. Check the voltage source and the polarity for the power supply. In case of battery supply and if the NSD570 module rack is mounted in a cabinet: check if the positive pole (+) of the battery is grounded. If it is, place an earth jumper to the positive pole of the cabinet supply. 48 VDC and higher battery voltages are hazardous. Beware of electric shock. Do not make any installation under energized condition. If the protective system is already in use, open the connections to it while commissioning the NSD570. Open the isolating terminals of the optional external connecting cables in the local and in the remote station or interrupt the direct wire connection to the equipment if no connecting cables are used.
Caution
DANGER
Caution
Note:
Now the equipment can be powered by closing the external circuit breaker(s) or switching on the external power supply unit.
C.2
Check power supply

Check the auxiliary supply voltage at the inputs of G3LH. It must be in the range from 48 VDC to 250 VDC ( 20 %) for nominal battery voltage and from 100 VAC to 240 VAC (-15%, +10%) for nominal mains voltage 50/60 Hz. In case of dual (redundant) power supply, the supply voltage for both modules must be checked. Two LEDs on the front panel indicate the status of the power supply modules (green = Ok, red = fail, dark = not assembled).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
4/14
1KHW000900-EN
C.3

Follow the steps below for connecting to the equipment, uploading the configuration and preparing the system for commissioning.
C.3.1
Connecting to the equipment

1. 2. Start the HMI570, log in and connect to the equipment as described in the Operating Instructions, 1KHW000890, chapter 4, section "Communication to the NSD570". If no configuration was downloaded to the systems in the rack before, make sure that no connection is made to the RS-485 station bus interface at the rear of the rack while connecting the equipment with the default device address. Connect the equipment using the default device addresses: type "241" in the Local Device Address entry field when you want to connect to the NSD570 in the left rack half (TPE 1); type "246" in the Local Device Address entry field when you want to connect to the NSD570 in the right rack half (TPE 2). This method with the default addresses can also be used to determine the configured device address of the systems in a rack (not having a RS-485 connection to the local station bus!). After setting of all (unique!) device addresses of the NSD570 systems that are supposed to be connected to the local station bus, the corresponding wires can be reconnected to the RS-485 interface terminals.
3.
4.
C.3.2
Upload the configuration

5. In the Configuration menu, click on Upload Configuration. With View Configuration you can see the uploaded configuration including Device Information, Hardware Versions and Firmware Versions (which are not configurable but readable from the device). In case of configuration parameters have to be changed, refer to the Operating Instructions NSD570, chapter "Configuration and Settings" and to the document "Programming and Testing Instructions" in the annex of the manual. If the firmware has to be updated, refer of the Operating Instructions NSD570, chapter "User Interface Program" and to the document "Firmware Download Description" in the annex of the manual. Make sure that both devices in a link have the same firmware version!
C.3.3
Preparing the system for testing

6. Synchronize the internal time and date of the NSD570 system to your local PC/notebook time information: click on the link Set Time and Date in the Maintenance menu (see C.6). A message will appear when the task was sent successfully. Note: this has initially to be done so that no alarms from the RTC will appear later on. If an external time information signal is connected to the synchronization inputs of the equipment rack, the internal clock has not to be set but to be checked using the Get Time and Date link in the Maintenance menu. Check whether the Jumper Settings in the Configuration menu correspond to the actual requirements. If not, update the entries for the Analog Interface (if plugged) and for the Relay Interfaces, save the configuration to disk, download it and reset the equipment. The same as described in the previous step applies also for the Configuration menu item Rack Assembly - edit the rack assembly list if it does not represent the current state.
7.
8.
C.4
Change configuration
If it is necessary to change configuration parameters, refer to section 5 of the Operating Instructions NSD570, chapter "Configuration and Settings" or to the document "Programming and Testing Instructions". It may be necessary to change parameters temporarily only (e.g. switching off the EOC in the NSD570 Analog for measuring the exact guard level). They have to be set to the original entries again after the tests have been concluded. If the system does not work properly after downloading the modified configuration and after the manual reset has been performed, use the link Previous Configuration in the Maintenance menu to switch back to the last configuration, which will properly work as before, after resetting the equipment again.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
5/14
1KHW000900-EN
C.5
Remarks for T-operation

NSD570 Analog in T-operation: When a link with NSD570 Analog in T-operation has to be commissioned, the preparation has to be done as follows: - Adjust transmitter level at both outer stations of the T-ed line - Adjust receiver level at both devices in the T-station - Adjust transmitter level at both devices in the T-station - Adjust receiver level at both outer stations of the T-ed line Normal T-operation mode: Measure the transmission time: - The T-ed-configuration can be regarded as two individual links (outer station A <-> T-station and outer station B <-> T-station). The transmission time can now be measured as in case of a standard link (i.e. the commands have to be looped on a contact basis at the remote site if the transmission time is measured from the local station). Pay attention to the fact that in the T-station the command inputs and outputs have to be connected in parallel directly at the relay interfaces or at the isolating terminals. - Measure the transmission time from outer station A to B and vice-versa according C.10.3 of this Commissioning Instructions. Inverse T-operation mode: Measure the transmission time: - The T-ed-configuration cannot be regarded as two individual links (outer station A <-> Tstation and outer station B <-> T-station). The transmission time can only be measured from A to T and from B to T. Pay attention to the fact that in the T-station the command inputs have to be connected in parallel and the outputs have to be connected in series directly at the relay interfaces or at the isolating terminals. - Measure the transmission time from outer station A to T, respectively from outer station B to T according C.10.3 of this Commissioning Instructions.
C.6
Configure Real Time Clock (RTC)

The internal real time clock (RTC; mounted on the line interfaces) has to be set to the actual date and time for proper operation of the event recorder.
C.6.1
Setting real time clock

1. 2. 3. Check if the time and date of your PC is exact. Setting the date and time using the HMI570: click on the link Set Time and Date in the Maintenance menu, the RTC will be adjusted to your PC time and date. Click Get Time and Date in the Maintenance menu, the date and time displayed on screen should be the same as that of your PC.
C.6.2
Testing external real time clock synchronization (if available)

The external synchronization - either a signal with a pulse each second or a signal having IRIG-B format or both - has to be connected to the corresponding G3LC inputs (connector X103 on supply backplane type G1LB or terminals of the external connecting cable for G1LB, if used). a) If only an external sync pulse (each second) is available: Set the RTC according C.6.1 b) If an external GPS signal having IRIG-B format is available: Set the time on the PC running HMI570 a few hours back/forward. Click on the link Set Time and Date in the Maintenance menu, the RTC would normally be adjusted to your PC time and date. Click Get Time and Date in the Maintenance menu, the date and time displayed on screen should not be the same as that of your PC but is the exact time as provided by the GPS receiver. Set the time on the PC back to the exact time.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
6/14
1KHW000900-EN
C.7
Analog line interface

The frequency of the guard and trip tones in the used channel cannot be easily determined and also not be viewed by the HMI570. They depend on the channel bandwidth, the center frequency and the analog operating mode. It is therefore recommended to measure signal levels with a broadband level meter (to a reference of 600 Ohm), assuring that no other signals are existent on the line outside the NSD570 channel. Alternatively, a selective level meter with peak level search can be used. For calculation of guard and trip frequencies please refer to the Operating Instructions NSD570.
C.7.1
Transmitter
Measure the guard level that is fed into the 600 Ohm line (for this measurement the EOC in the local station has to be switched off): - Switch off the EOC (if it is enabled) - Measured guard level = [ Tx level according setting 2 ] dBm - Switch on the EOC again, if requested Measure the command level that is fed into the 600 Ohm line (for this measurement, a command signal has to be injected at the command inputs, the boost ratio has to be set to 0 dB): - Set the boost ratio to 0 dB - Measure Single Tone command level = [ Tx level according setting 2 ] dBm - Measure Dual Tone command level = [ Tx level according setting - 3 dB 2 ] dBm - Remove the command signal from the command inputs - Set the boost ratio back to the initial value
C.7.2
Power boosting / Boost output

Measure the boosted command level that is fed into the 600 Ohm line (for this measurement, a command signal has to be injected at the command inputs; boost ratio = BR according setting): - Measure Single Tone command level = [ Tx level according setting + BR 2 ] dBm - Measure Dual Tone command level = [ Tx level according setting - 3 dB + BR 2 ] dBm - Remove the command signal from the command inputs If the NSD570 is connected to a PLC equipment, it may be possible that the boosted command level - due to its tolerance range of 2 dB - overmodulates the PLC amplifier. Therefore the signal level has to be reduced to the maximum level that is allowed at the protection input of the PLC equipment. Check that the boost output contact is activated as long as a command is injected (this measurement is only necessary if the contact is really needed, e.g. if connected to a PLC equipment): - The boost output is closed as long as a command is transmitted on the line
C.7.3
Receiver
Measure the guard level that is received at the 600 Ohm line input (for this measurement the EOC in the remote station has to be switched off): - Switch off the EOC (if it is enabled) - Measured guard level = [ Rx level according setting 2 ] dBm - Switch on the EOC again, if requested
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
7/14
1KHW000900-EN
C.8
C.8.1
Digital line interface

Transmitter / Receiver
There are no special measurements foreseen for the digital line interface. Nevertheless, the settings made for the chosen interface type (G.703, RS-530, E1, T1) should be verified with the actual used communication equipment (whether timing, synchronization, buffering, coding and formats match the best possible way). This can be checked and optimized for example by monitoring the BER and the manual loop test time for different settings (click on the link Status / Alarm in the main menu and Upload Status afterwards).
C.8.2
Optical output power / optical input power

The optical power meter must be sensitive to a wavelength of 1310 nm for the Optical Direct Fiber and the Optical FOX/OTERM interface. A single mode adapter cable has to be used for connecting the power meter to G1LO. The optical output power is measured for the actual setting, short haul or long haul: - Measured output power short haul = [ -22 -17 ] dBm - Measured output power long haul = [ -5 -1 ] dBm The optical power meter must be sensitive to a wavelength of 850 nm for the Optical IEEE C37.94 interface. A multi mode adapter cable has to be used for connecting the power meter to G1LO. The optical output power is measured as follows: - Measured output power = [ -16 -11 ] dBm The optical input power for all optical interfaces is measured as follows: - Measured input power = [ -36 -1 ] dBm
C.9
System alarm indication

The system alarm may be triggered by interrupting the connection to the line interface (disconnecting of at least the input = receiver circuit). After the programmed delay time the corresponding system alarm relay on G3LC operates. Check that the relay output is changing its state (precise measurement of the programmed alarm delay time is not necessary). Now restore the connection to the line interface. The alarm LEDs will immediately go off and the relay output will change its state after the programmed delay time.
C.10
C.10.1
System functions
Transmission Channel
Check the transmission channel quality: measure the actual SNR/BER by clicking on the Upload Status link in the Status / Alarm menu.
C.10.2
NSD570 loop test

The NSD570 is tested by issuing a loop test via HMI570 or by pressing the "Loop Test" button on the front panel of the module rack. In the Maintenance menu click on the link Manual Loop Test. If the loop test is successful, the "Trip" LED on the front panel will light up for three seconds and a message will appear on the PC screen indicating the measured loop test time for one direction (TLink). The transmission time of the loop test depends on the chosen bandwidth for the NSD570 Analog, the used interface type of the NSD570 Digital, as well as - for both types of devices - on the settings for the command application (the loop test is always transmitted as the command configured for the highest requirements regarding security) and on the delay introduced by the communication link (e.g. PLC).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
8/14
1KHW000900-EN
C.10.3
Command transmission time

Check the transmission time of the NSD570 commands over the link. Activate the command inputs by injecting an appropriate tripping voltage or by using an external contact only, if the module G1LR (internal tripping voltage 24 VDC) is mounted on the Relay Interface G3LR. Check the command outputs by means of an auxiliary tripping voltage (of the same level as used for the command inputs) and an external current limitation. 1. Connect to the remote equipment and start the remote test mode (Commissioning menu -> Start Remote Test Mode). 2. Transmit at few commands with a command / pause duration of about 100 ms / 1000 ms and measure the actual transmission time of the looped command. 3. After measuring the transmission time the remote test mode has to be disabled (Commissioning menu -> Stop Remote Test Mode). Notes: The remote test mode can only be enabled if the EOC is activated. The times measured are the loop times there and back. The transmission time for one direction is thus half the measured time. Two times the nominal transmission time T0 as measured in the system test report may serve as a reference for the upper limit. If there is an additional communication link connected in between (compared to the measurements conducted in the systems test field), the delay of this link has to be added to the nominal transmission time.
C.11
Display Panel
With the following minimized test procedure the four buttons on the front of the display panel (which enable the menu-driven handling) as well as the communication of the display panel with the line interface(s) present in the module rack shall be tested: 1. Press the button with the arrow towards down -> SELECT DEVICE / TPE1 will appear 2. Press the Enter button -> MAIN MENU / Trip Counter will appear 3. Press the Enter button -> Cmd A Tx: .. / Cmd A Rx: .. will appear (press the up button repeatedly to see all counter readings) 4. Press the Loop Test button of the TPE 1 device in the rack -> after some seconds LOOP TEST TIME / TPE 1 .. ms will appear 5. If the rack is equipped with only one teleprotection device TPE 1, proceed with step 10; else press the Back button -> SELECT DEVICE / TPE1 will appear 6. Press the button with the arrow towards up -> SELECT DEVICE / TPE2 will appear 7. Press the Enter button -> MAIN MENU / Trip Counter will appear 8. Press the Enter button -> Cmd A Tx: .. / Cmd A Rx: .. will appear (press the up button repeatedly to see all counter readings) 9. Press the Loop Test button of the TPE 2 device in the rack -> after some seconds LOOP TEST TIME / TPE 2 .. ms will appear 10. Continuously press the Back button for more than 6 seconds -> the display panel will reset, the backlight will go off and the ABB intro will restart
C.12
LAN Interface
A description of the commissioning procedure can be found in 1KHW001289 Commissioning Instructions LAN Interface G3LL in the annex of the Operating Instructions NSD570.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
9/14
1KHW000900-EN
C.13
C.13.1
Concluding works
Reset counters
After all NSD570 tests have passed successfully, reset the counters by using the HMI570. In the Status / Alarm menu click on Trip Counter, then on Reset Trip Counter, activate the checkbox "All" and click on the Reset button.
C.13.2
Clear event recorder

In the menu Event Recorder click on the link Clear Event Recorder.
C.13.3
Manual reset
In the Maintenance menu click on the link Reset Device.
C.13.4
Save the configuration data

In the Configuration menu click on the link Upload Configuration and then on Save Configuration. Save the "XML" configuration file on a disk with the Serial No. of the NSD570 rack and the No. of the device (TPE 1 or TPE2) coded in the file name, e.g. HE501249_1_C0.XML. Click on the link and choose Save this file to disk. This action saves the active configuration to disk under the chosen name. All settings you have made and downloaded to the equipment will be saved, including the manual entries (Jumper Settings, Rack Assembly) and also the information that only can be read from the device (Device Information, Hardware and Firmware Versions).
C.13.5
Documentation
Create a printout of the active configuration data that was uploaded and saved to disk before (see C.13.4). Click on the link View Configuration in the Configuration menu and use the Print icon of your browser to generate a handout of all settings and all available device information.
C.13.6
Mount covers
Make sure that the Blanking Cover Plate or the optional Display Panel G1LC is screwed on the front side of the rack (covering the power supply modules) and the screening cover is snapped on the back side of the rack.
C.13.7
Reconnect protection devices

After commissioning the NSD570, close the connections to the protection devices: Close the isolating terminals of the optional external connecting cables in the local and in the remote station or reconnect the direct wire connection to the equipment if no connecting cables are used.
NSD570 Commissioning Report
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
C1/C4
HE
Test Units result
Permissible value
C.1 C.1.1 C.1.2
General Test conditions Visual checks before powering the equipment Correct wiring of protective earth Correct wiring of power supply Equipment connected to adequate voltage source Connection to protection devices G7BI G3LH (unit 1 / unit 2) Via circuit breaker B9AS or B9AV Open or interrupted local / remote PE wired polarity ok [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Temperature range -5 45 C [ ]
C.2
Check power supply DC battery voltage AC mains voltage LED indication on the front panel G3LH (+ to -) G3LH (L to N) G3LH (unit 1 / unit 2) 38.4 300 85.0 264 green V DC V AC
Unit 1
Unit 2
[ ] [ ] [ ]
left
[ ] [ ] [ ]
right *
C.3 C.3.1 C.3.2 C.3.3
Preparing the equipment Connecting to the equipment Upload the configuration Check communication TPE 1 /TPE 2 between PC & NSD570 Upload of valid configuration successful Update jumper settings Update rack assembly Establish link
HExxxxxxBy.XML
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
right *
Preparing the system for testing Set time and date
no RTC alarm HMI570 HMI570 Guard LED
C.4 C.5
Change configuration Remarks for T-operation
If necessary Adjusting level Measuring T0 Measuring T0 Analog T Normal T Inverse T
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
left *
[ ]
C.6 C.6.1
Configure Real Time Clock (RTC) Setting real time clock Check PC time / date Set time and date Get time and date Actual / exact Actual / exact
right *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
C.6.2
Testing external real time clock synchronization (if available) External sync pulse only External GPS signal Set time and date Adjust PC time / date Set time and date Get time and date Adjust PC time / date Actual / exact Actual / exact Wrong time
left *
right *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Form 1KHW000900-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
C2/C4
HE
Test Units result
Permissible value
C.7 C.7.1
Analog line interface Transmitter Guard level Command level If connected to PLC G3LA; X100/1-2 G3LA; X100/1-2 PLC protection input [ setting 2 ] [ setting 2 ] Max. level dBm dBm dBm
left * right *
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
____ ____ (..) (..)
-> reduce level setting if necessary G3LA; X100/1-2 C.7.2 Power boosting / Boost output Command level Boost output activation C.7.3 Receiver Guard level C.8 C.8.1 Digital line interface Transmitter / Receiver Communication established C.8.2 Optical output power / optical input power Output power (Optical Direct Fiber or Optical FOX/OTERM only) G3LD/G1LO; X701/Tx G3LD/G1LO; X701/Tx Optical output power (Optical IEEE G3LD/G1LO; X701/Tx C37.94 only) Optical input power (Optical Direct G3LD/G1LO; X701/Rx Fiber or Optical FOX/OTERM only) Optical input power (Optical IEEE C37.94 only) G3LD/G1LO; X701/Rx G3LD/G1LE/G1LO G3LA; X100/3-4 G3LA; X100/1-2 G3LA; X100/5-6
measure level dBm
[ setting 2 ] with cmd.
dBm
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ setting 2 ]
dBm
[ ]
[ ]
left *
right *
acc. interface
[ ]
[ ]
left *
right *
[ -22 -17 ] (short haul) [ -5 -1 ] (long haul) [ -16 -11 ] [ -36 -1 ] [ -32 -1 ]
dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm
(..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..) (..)
Permissible value Units
Test result
C.9
System alarm indication Activate alarm by interrupting receive line connection State of alarm relay after programmed delay Deactivate alarm by restoring the link State of alarm relay after programmed delay
To be measured only if requested LEDs "Local", "Receive" G3LC; X102/1-2 (left) and X102/6-7 (right) LEDs "Local", "Receive" G3LC; X102/1-2 (left) and X102/6-7 (right) LED to be ON changed LED to be OFF changed
left *
right *
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Form 1KHW000900-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
C3/C4
HE
Test Units result
Permissible value
C.10 C.10.1
System functions Transmission Channel Check actual transmission channel quality HMI570 / Upload Status BER (16 sec.) SNR 1E-0x x dB
left * right *
(..)
left *
(..)
right *
C.10.2
NSD570 loop test Check actual transmission time TLink HMI570 / Loop Test Button < 2*T0 ms
(..)
(..)
C.10.3
Command transmission time Command A Tx command A Rx command A Command B Tx command B Rx command B Command C Tx command C Rx command C Command D Tx command D Rx command D Command E Tx command E Rx command E Command F Tx command F Rx command F Command G Tx command G Rx command G Command H Tx command H Rx command H Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Terminal, (T/...) (T.../) (T/...) (T.../) Refer to manual for 2*rated value Refer to manual for 2*rated value Refer to manual for 2*rated value Refer to manual for 2*rated value Refer to manual for 2*rated value Refer to manual for 2*rated value Refer to manual for 2*rated value Refer to manual for 2*rated value ms
left *
right *
Mean value 2*T0 ms ms
_______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..)
left *
_______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..) _______ (..)
right *
Mean value 2*T0 ms
C.11
Display Panel Connecting to the device Return information Reset the display panel G1LC <-> TPE 1/2 Counter readings TPE1/2 -> G1LC G1LC Back Loop Test time ABB intro
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
C.12
LAN Interface Separate document G3LL<-> TPE 1/2 1KHW001289 [ ]
Form 1KHW000900-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
C4/C4
HE
Permissible value Units left *
Test result right *
C.13 C.13.1
Concluding works Reset counters Reset all counters HMI570 All counters = 0
[ ]
[ ]
C.13.2
Clear event recorder Clear event recorder HMI570 1 event only [ ] [ ]
C.13.3
Manual reset Reset device HMI570 Reset / start up [ ] [ ]
C.13.4
Save the configuration data Upload/save config. HMI570 HExxxxxxCy.XML [ ] [ ]
C.13.5
Documentation View/print configuration HMI570 Rack G7BI Connection to protection devices # printout pages Front and back Closed or reconnected local / remote (..) [ ] [ ] (..) [ ] [ ]
C.13.6 C.13.7
Mount covers Reconnect protection devices
_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________
Form 1KHW000900-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Compatibility Requirements: < NSD570 >
1KHW000902-EN
C
Lang.:
04-04-16
Page:
PTUKT2
Valid for:
02-11-01 sig. M. Buhl

Derived from:
03-02-28 sig. M. Strittmatter

Replaces:
EN
1/6

Compatibility Requirements: < NSD570 >
Contents:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Purpose of Document General Release and Version Management Compatibility Rules NSD570 Basic Equipment Analog/Digital NSD570 Options 1 1 1 2 2 6
Purpose of Document
Description of the compatibility requirements for the NSD570 system.
General
The NSD570 system comprises: 1. Hardware, consisting of a number of modules. 2. Firmware, residing on some of the modules and making the processors on these modules execute various functions such as modulation, digital filtering, etc. 3. Web browser based software, implementing the user interface for configuration, testing and monitoring of the equipment.
Release and Version Management

ABB continuously enhances the NSD570 system by upgrading hardware, firmware and software. An NSD570 system release, identified by a release number, is a product of defined functionality comprising hardware modules, firmware and software. Firmware and software are identified with version numbers of the form NN.nn., e.g. 5.08 (leading zeros may be omitted). Releases are identified by release numbers of the form RR.r, e.g. 3.1 (leading zeros may be omitted). Hardware modules are identified with type codes consisting of 4 characters like G3LA, G3LC, G3LD or G3LR. Sometimes, a fifth character - the revision index - is appended to identify an upgraded version of a module. Example: G3LDa would be an upgraded version of G3LD; G3LDb would be an upgraded version of G3LDa and so on. Hardware modules may have different versions within the same type code (when there are only minor differences between the versions). Hardware versions do only consist of a one-digit number, e.g. 1.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
2/6
1KHW000902-EN
Note:
The information content of type codes in case of modules containing firmware depends on the possibility to download firmware from HMI570 to the module: If for a module firmware download is not possible, the type code of that module identifies the hardware including the firmware version. Example: G3LR If for a module firmware download is possible, the type code of that module identifies the hardware excluding the firmware version. The download files for the firmware of such modules are included on the Software & Documentation CD. Example: G3LA, G3LD
Compatibility Rules
Rule Nr. 1: The modules of an NSD570 terminal and the firmware on these modules must belong to the same release as given in the next Paragraph(s). If system contains modules of different releases, it will generally not work correctly. Rule Nr. 2: The two NSD570 terminals of a link must belong to the same release. Moreover, the firmware loaded on the line interfaces (G3LA, G3LD) must have the identical version (valid only for firmware that can be downloaded, i.e. not applicable for the micro controller firmware!). Caution There is no reliable operation possible when violating this rule!
Rule Nr. 3: The HMI570 software must have full or restricted compatibility to the NSD570 terminals being connected to. The term "restricted compatibility" is used when the functionality has been changed between releases as long as the HMI570 program can handle these changes in a reasonable way.
NSD570 Basic Equipment Analog/Digital

The NSD570 basic equipment consists of the following hardware, firmware and software versions: Hardware Versions G7BI Vers. 0 Description and update/upgrade information Initial version The back cover of Module Rack version 1 would not fit on version 0 Module Rack G7BI. Since module rack and back cover are always delivered as a set -> no specific action required. Actual version (identifiable by the additional ESD bonding point (EBP) on the left side of the earthing rail) Initial version (Power Supply G3LH version 0 was not released and distributed) Initial version If both, the Busplane G1LA and the Common Interface G3LC have version 0 -> no specific action required. If the Busplane G1LA has version 0 and the Common Interface G3LC has version 1 -> an upgrade of the busplane is recommended (ask your local representative about the procedure). However, since the module rack including G1LA and G3LC is always delivered as a set, typically no specific action is required. Actual version
G7BI Vers. 1 G3LH Vers. 1 G1LA Vers. 0
G1LA Vers. 1
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
3/6
1KHW000902-EN
Hardware Versions G1LB Vers. 0
Description and update/upgrade information Initial version Minor layout redesign of the module for Supply Backplane G1LB version 1, which has no consequences for the external connections or for the compatibility (version 1 is identifiable by the additional capacitors on the left side of the terminal block X103) -> no specific action required. Actual version (also identified by new rubric of the board -> R0002) Initial version If both, the Busplane G1LA and the Common Interface G3LC have version 0 -> no specific action required. If the Common Interface G3LC has version 0 and Busplane G1LA has version 1 -> an upgrade of the busplane is required (ask your local representative about the procedure). However, since the module rack including G1LA and G3LC is always delivered as a set, typically no specific action is required. Actual version Initial version There is an improved amplitude response (gain distortion) of the Tx/Rx filters in Analog Interface G3LA version 1 -> no specific action required. If the NSD570 Analog system is used in a T-operation mode, G3LA version 1 modules are recommended (but not required) at least in the T-station. By ignoring the Compatibility Rules (see Section 4) in this only case, it would also be possible to use a G3LA version 0 and a G3LA version 1 in a link. Actual version Initial version Minor layout redesign of the module for Digital Interface G3LD version 1; the performance of the serial on-board interfaces RS-530 and G.703 was improved. Under normal operating conditions and if the cable length to the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) is not significantly above 100 meter -> no specific action required. Actual version (also identified by new rubric of the board -> R0102) Initial version A FLASH memory has been replaced by a PROM in Relay Interface G3LR version 1 -> no specific action required. If the firmware version 1.00 is stored in the FLASH see label it is recommended (but not required) to update it at the factory; ask your local representative about the procedure). Actual version
G1LB Vers. 1 G3LC Vers. 0
G3LC Vers. 1 G3LA Vers. 0
G3LA Vers. 1 G3LD Vers. 0
G3LD Vers. 1 G3LR Vers. 0
G3LR Vers. 1
Note:
All hardware versions can be viewed by means of the HMI570, except for: Module Rack G7BI, Supply Backplane G1LB, Power Supply G3LH.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
4/6
1KHW000902-EN
Firmware Versions NSD570 Analog Vers. 1.05
Description and update/upgrade information Actual version If the current version is less than 1.04 -> an update to the latest version is recommended at the earliest convenience. If the current version is 1.04 -> an update to the latest version is not immediately necessary but recommended e.g. during the next regular maintenance check. Ask your local representative for a free upgrade version of the Software & Documentation CD including the actual NSD570 Analog firmware version. Take the NSD570 link out of service, update the firmware according the Firmware Download Description (1KHW000896) and re-commission the equipment according the Commissioning Instructions (1KHW000900). If the current version is less than 1.14 -> an update to the latest version is recommended at the earliest convenience (see remarks in actual version). If the current version is 1.14 -> an update to the latest version is not immediately necessary but recommended e.g. during the next regular maintenance check. For this version the signal pulse shape of the T1 interface was slightly adjusted (only applicable if the G1LE option is used on G3LD) -> an update to the latest version is not immediately necessary but recommended e.g. during the next regular maintenance check (see remarks in actual version). For this version the G.703 jitter performance was improved and the start up time of the RS-422 interface after power off/on or reset was reduced -> an update to the latest version is not immediately necessary but recommended e.g. during the next regular maintenance check (see remarks in actual version). With this version also the optical interfaces of the optional module G1LO are supported -> an update to the latest version is not immediately necessary but recommended e.g. during the next regular maintenance check (see remarks in actual version). For this version the inverse T-operation function was improved and the mixed-mode operation via a FOX515 link was enabled (e.g. local connection to OTERM and remote connection to GECOD) -> an update to the latest version is not immediately necessary but recommended e.g. during the next regular maintenance check (see remarks in actual version). Actual version This version also operates via low-end converters and communication devices equipped with G.703 codirectional interfaces - that ignore octetboundaries (which is usually not the case for sophisticated PCM multiplex or time slot access equipment). Ask your local representative for a free upgrade version of the Software & Documentation CD including the actual NSD570 Digital firmware version. Take the NSD570 link out of service, update the firmware according the Firmware Download Description (1KHW000896) and re-commission the equipment according the Commissioning Instructions (1KHW000900).
NSD570 Digital Vers. 1.14
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
5/6
1KHW000902-EN
Note:
The firmware NSD570 Analog can be downloaded to the Analog Interface G3LA, the firmware NSD570 Digital to the Digital Interface G3LD. The firmware versions can be viewed by means of the HMI570. The newest firmware version can always be used for updating an analog NSD570 link. The same applies for updating a digital NSD570 link, regardless which interface is operated (G.703, RS-530, E1, T1, optical). Description and update/upgrade information If the current version is higher than 1.00 -> no specific action required. If the current version is 1.00 -> it is recommended (but not required) to update the module at the factory (ask your local representative about the procedure). Actual version This version is only needed if the additional features of the Display Panel G1LC (with C firmware Vers. 1.01) shall be utilized. In all other cases -> no specific action required (see C Vers. 1.03) Actual version If the firmware version 1.00 is stored in the FLASH on the module see label it is recommended (but not required) to update the module at the factory (ask your local representative about the procedure). The micro controller firmware (C) is the same for both line interfaces, G3LA and G3LD. It may not be upgraded by the customer/user (the module has to be returned to the factory). The firmware version can be viewed by means of the HMI570. The firmware version of G3LR is visible on the module only. There is an adhesive label on PROM A203, indicating the firmware version. Beginning with version 1.01 the firmware is stored in a PROM. It is therefore not possible (and not necessary) to update it.
Firmware Versions G3LA/G3LD C Vers. 1.03
G3LA/G3LD C Vers. 1.04
G3LR FPGA Vers. 1.01
Note:
Software Versions HMI570 PC Vers. 1.03
Description and update/upgrade information If the current version is less than 1.03 -> an update to the latest version is recommended at the earliest convenience (see remarks in actual version). If the current version is 1.03 -> an update to the latest version is not immediately necessary but recommended (see remarks in actual version). Actual version With this version also the optical interfaces of the optional module G1LO are supported. Some comfort features have been added. Ask your local representative for a free upgrade version of the Software & Documentation CD including the HMI570 Version 1.04. Uninstall the previous version of the HMI570 on your PC/notebook. Install the new version on your PC/notebook according the Software Installation Description (1KHW000894). Initial version
HMI570 PC Vers. 1.04
HMI570 LAN Vers. 1.10 Note:
The software version of the HMI570 can be viewed by clicking on the About HMI570 link in the HMI570 Options menu.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
6/6
1KHW000902-EN
NSD570 Options
The NSD570 options consist of following hardware and firmware versions: Hardware Versions G1LE Vers. 0 Description and update/upgrade information Initial version The signal pulse shape and the input resistance of the E1/T1 Interface G1LE version 1 was marginally modified in order to fully meet the E1 standard -> no specific action required. Actual version Initial version (Internal Tripping Voltage G1LR version 0 was not officially released) Initial version (Optical interface G1LO version 0 was not officially released) G1LO requires Firmware NSD570 Digital Version. 1.22 or higher and Software HMI570 Version 1.04 or higher. Initial version
G1LE Vers. 1 G1LR Vers. 1 G1LO Vers. 1
G1LC Vers. 0
Note:
All hardware versions can be viewed by means of the HMI570, except for: Internal Tripping Voltage G1LR (not viewable), Display Panel G1LC (viewable on the display itself).
Firmware Versions G1LC C Vers. 1.00 G1LC C Vers. 1.01
Description and update/upgrade information Initial version Actual version With this version a counter reset on the two line interfaces G3LA/D in the module rack by means of the Display Panel G1LC is possible (if required, this feature can be disabled mechanically). A sent or received command on G3LA/D will automatically activate the Display Panel and display an accordant message. The configured baud rate for the RS-232 communication of the connected line interface can be viewed with the Display Panel. All the mentioned features above are only available if the micro controller firmware version of the line interfaces G3LA or G3LD is greater or equal to Vers. 1.04.
Note:
The micro controller firmware (C) for G1LC may not be upgraded by the customer/user (the module has to be returned to the factory). The firmware version can be viewed by means of the Display Panel G1LC itself.
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Anomaly List: < NSD570 >
1KHW000904-EN
03-02-28 sig. M. Strittmatter

Replaces:
C
Lang.:
04-04-16
Page:
PTUKT2
Valid for:
03-02-25 sig. M. Buhl

Derived from:
EN
1/4

Anomaly List: < NSD570 >
Contents 1 Purpose of document 2 Anomalies 2.1 Common Functions

2.1.1 Manual Loop Test (remote activation) 2.1.2 No incoming GPS synchronization signal (IRIG-B) 2.1.3 Configuration of individual relay interfaces per line interface
1 1 2
2 2 2
2.2
NSD570 Analog
2.2.1 Accuracy of signal to noise and level measurement 2.2.2 T-operation with different center frequency of Tx and Rx channel
3
3 3
2.3
NSD570 Digital
2.3.1 Accuracy of bit error rate measurement 2.3.2 Interchanging the two digital line interfaces in the same rack
3
3 4
2.4
HMI570 LAN
2.4.1 Communication between LAN interface and line interfaces
4
4
Purpose of document
This document describes the currently known anomalies in the behavior of the NSD570 teleprotection system. Such anomalies express themselves in unexpected system behavior not described in the Operating Instructions NSD570 (1KHW000890-EN), 4th Edition (April 2004). This document is updated immediately after a new anomaly has been discovered and verified. For that reason, the approval date instead of a revision index is normally used to identify consecutive versions of this document (if no regular revision of the Operating Instructions including the annex is at issue). The actual version can therefore be derived from the newer date in either the Rev. box or in the Approved box in the header of this page.
Anomalies
For each anomaly, the following information is given: - the types of the hardware modules and/or the versions of firmware or software taken to be responsible for the observed anomaly, - a description of the anomaly, - a workaround (if any).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
2/4
1KHW000904-EN
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.1.1
Common Functions
Manual Loop Test (remote activation)
Hardware, software and/or firmware versions G3LA, NSD570 Analog FW Vers. 1.05, G3LD, NSD570 Digital FW Vers. 1.14, 1.15, 1.16, 1.20, 1.22, 1.23 HMI570 SW Vers. 1.03, 1.04 Description If a remote manual loop test is activated by means of the HMI570 (connected with remote device -> Manual Loop Test), the displayed status information is outdated. Workaround For G3LA / NSD570 Analog -> wait a few minutes (depending on the programmed bandwidth) and perform a remote status upload to get the actual loop test time. For G3LD / NSD570 Digital -> wait a few seconds and perform a remote status upload to get the actual loop test time.
2.1.1.2
2.1.1.3
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
No incoming GPS synchronization signal (IRIG-B)

Hardware, software and/or firmware versions G3LA, NSD570 Analog FW Vers. 1.05, G3LD, NSD570 Digital FW Vers. 1.14, 1.15, 1.16, 1.20, 1.22, 1.23 HMI570 SW Vers. 1.03, 1.04 Description If the GPS synchronization for the internal RTC is configured to ON but there is no incoming IRIG-B signal, an alarm Begin no signal (IRIG-B) on RTC will be generated correctly by the device. However, in addition the alarm Wrong time from RTC will appear and disappear approx. every minute and will therefore fill the event recorder with dispensable alarm messages. Workaround Remove the external source for the alarm condition. Check the wiring and source of the IRIG-B signal and also check connector X103 on G1LB.
2.1.2.2
2.1.2.3
2.1.3
2.1.3.1
Configuration of individual relay interfaces per line interface

Hardware, software and/or firmware versions G3LA, NSD570 Analog FW Vers. 1.05, G3LD, NSD570 Digital FW Vers. 1.14, 1.15, 1.16, 1.20, 1.22, 1.23, HMI570 SW Vers. 1.03, 1.04 Description If more than four relay interfaces are configured per line interface, equipment faults may occur. Two line interfaces in the module rack may accidentally be configured for using the same relay interface. This cannot be detected and therefore not be avoided by the HMI570, because each line interface is configured separately. In both above cases, inadmissible operating conditions may arise and even malfunctions have to be expected! Workaround If only one line interface is plugged in the module rack, make sure that a maximum of four relay interfaces are configured (if required, they may be plugged in any assigned slot of the rack). If two line interfaces are plugged in the rack, make sure that only a maximum of four relay interfaces in the corresponding rack half are configured (i.e. line interface TPE 1 uses relay interfaces in the left rack half only and TPE 2 uses relay interfaces in the right rack half only).
2.1.3.2
2.1.3.3
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
3/4
1KHW000904-EN
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.1.1
NSD570 Analog
Accuracy of signal to noise and level measurement
Hardware, software and/or firmware versions G3LA, NSD570 Analog FW Vers. 1.05, HMI570 SW Vers. 1.03, 1.04 Description The guard signal of the NSD570 Analog version is modulated to accommodate also the Embedded Operation Channel (EOC). As a result the measured level of the received guard signal, which can be viewed by means of the HMI570 status display, changes continuously (approx. 2.5 dB). Also the SNR value will vary (since it is also determined in the guard channel), depending on the packets that are currently transmitted via the EOC. The measured Tx level (which can also be viewed in the HMI570 status display) is only accurate if the line impedance matches approx. 600 Ohm. Workaround For exact Rx level and SNR measurements of the received signal, switch off the EOC by means of the HMI570. For exact Tx level measurement, make sure that the line impedance matches approx. 600 Ohm. To verify this, a comparison measurement can be done by opening the terminals to the line and terminate the output circuit with a 600 Ohm resistor.
2.2.1.2
2.2.1.3
2.2.2
2.2.2.1
T-operation with different center frequency of Tx and Rx channel

Hardware, software and/or firmware versions G3LA, NSD570 Analog FW Vers. 1.05, HMI570 SW Vers. 1.03, 1.04 Description As mentioned in the Operating Instructions in Section 3, the send and receive channel of the analog version must use the same bandwidth and center frequencies in normal T-operation (while point-to-pont operation allows a different send and receive channel). Workaround T-operation requires a 4-wire communication link. In most cases it should therefore be possible to use the same Tx / Rx center frequency and bandwidth. If not, the two links can still be configured for point-to-point operation with different Tx / Rx center frequency and bandwidth. The commands have then to be looped on a contact basis in the T-station. This workaroud will increase the transmission time between the outer stations in a T configuration (depending of the chosen bandwidths).
2.2.2.2
2.2.2.3
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.1.1
NSD570 Digital
Accuracy of bit error rate measurement
Hardware, software and/or firmware versions G3LD, NSD570 Digital FW Vers. 1.14, 1.15, 1.16, 1.20, 1.22, 1.23 HMI570 SW Vers. 1.03, 1.04 Description The short term bit error rate (BER) measurement, which can be viewed by means of the HMI570 status display, is only estimation for low bit error rates and may differ from the prevailing channel BER by up to factor 3. The BER alarm threshold is not affected by this anomaly but the BER alarm may flicker (event recorder entries) when a threshold of 1E-05 or lower is configured.
2.3.1.2
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
4/4
1KHW000904-EN
2.3.1.3
Workaround No specific action required (a BER alarm threshold of 1E-04 or 1E-03 may be configured if too many event recorder entries shall be avoided).
2.3.2
2.3.2.1
Interchanging the two digital line interfaces in the same rack

Hardware, software and/or firmware versions G3LD, NSD570 Digital FW Vers. 1.20, 1.22, 1.23, HMI570 SW Vers. 1.03, 1.04 Description Misconfiguration of relay interfaces can result in a continuing system reset and a connection to the equipment by means of the HMI570 may become impossible in the following case: Assuming that a Digital Interface G3LD is configured as TPE 1 with one or more Relay Interfaces G3LR assigned. If this card is removed and plugged into slot 6 (N58) of TPE 2, the Digital Interface G3LD will not recognize the configured relay interfaces (actually for TPE 1) and will perform a continuing system reset. Note that the anomaly described above is not true for digital line interfaces ex-works, which have not been configured before. They can be plugged in both available slots of the rack and will start up (unless they are not damaged). Workaround Plug the Digital Interface G3LD into slot 1 (N28), configure the relay interfaces of TPE 1 to off and the required relay interfaces of TPE 2 to on. Download the modified configuration to the device and activate Reset Device. Now the G3LD module can be plugged into slot 6 (N58). A connection by means of the HMI570 should be possible (if not, the line interface is damaged and must be replaced). Continue with configuration of the line interface for TPE 2.
2.3.2.2
2.3.2.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.1.1
HMI570 LAN
Communication between LAN interface and line interfaces
Hardware, software and/or firmware versions G3LA, NSD570 Analog FW Vers. 1.05, G3LD, NSD570 Digital FW Vers. 1.14, 1.15, 1.16, 1.20, 1.22, 1.23 G3LL, HMI570 LAN SW Vers. 1.10 Description The LAN Interface G3LL communicates with the line interfaces G3LA or G3LD in the same rack via the station bus interface. Caused by massive interferences on the station bus this communication may be blocked eventually. Workaround Use the following menu item of the user interface HMI570 LAN to reset the communication: Menu: HMI570 Options - LAN Interface - Reset communication If this happens every once a while, the wiring of the station bus should also be checked.
2.4.1.2
2.4.1.3
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Commissioning Instructions: < NSD570 LAN Interface >
1KHW001289-EN
_
Lang.:
04-04-16
Page:
PTUKT2
Valid for:

Derived from:

Replaces:
EN
1/16

Commissioning Instructions: < NSD570 LAN Interface >
This document describes commissioning of the NSD570 LAN Interface type G3LL, an optional module for the NSD570 Teleprotection System. Contents: C C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5 Commissioning Instructions for the NSD570 LAN Interface ........................ 3 General......................................................................................................... 3 Check power supply..................................................................................... 3 Preparing the equipment.............................................................................. 4 Physical connection to the LAN Interface .................................................... 4 Configure the networking parameters.......................................................... 6
Sheet NSD570 Commissioning Report ....................................................... C1 C2
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
2/16
1KHW001289-EN
Basic test equipment PC with Windows NT, 2000 or XP Ethernet cross connect cable SSH client Software SSH Secure Shell for Windows 3.0.0 (SSHWin-3.0.0) Commissioning PC
Notes: This document is part of the Operating Instructions NSD570 (1KHW000890). Please refer to document "Compatibility Requirements for NSD570" (1KHW000902) for compatibility between software HMI570, firmware "Analog", firmware "Digital" and hardware of NSD570
Caution
During commissioning of the NSD570 LAN Interface, the networking parameters will be changed and stored in the Compact Flash card. A misconfiguration of this parameters can inhibit any access to the LAN Interface after reboot. There will be no way to change or redo the misconfigured parameters except to replace the Compact Flash card or to reprogram it with the image file. The reprogramming can only be done with the Flash Card Copy Station, see Copy Instructions Compact Flash Card G3LL (1KHW001291). For commissioning of the NSD570 LAN Interface it is therefore highly recommended to take along the Flash Card Copy Station and the image file or at least a programmed Compact Flash card as spare part.
Designations and abbreviations used: Designation ( .. ) [ .. ] [ [ ]D ] [X] G3LR RTC LED HMI570 N1, , N84 Rx Tx PC X100, , X701 X1, , X99 PLC Meaning Measured value Programmed value Preferred setting (default) Test passed or jumper is set Not tested or jumper is not set Module type Real Time Clock Light Emitting Diode found on the front panel User Interface for NSD570 running on a PC/notebook Position in rack. Slot number N1, , N84 Receiver Transmitter Personal Computer or Notebook Computer Onboard connector of the plug in modules Connector designation of the optional connecting cables Power Line Carrier equipment (e.g. ETL500 series)
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
3/16
1KHW001289-EN
C
C.1
Commissioning Instructions for the NSD570 LAN Interface

General
This document is part of the Operating Instructions NSD570 (1KHW000890) and describes the programming, testing and commissioning of the NSD570 LAN Interface type G3LL. Please note that NSD570 devices in the rack (Analog/Digital) should be programmed and tested or commissioned properly before the LAN Interface is put into service (the checks in Section C.1.2 may then be skipped because they are already done; please refer to documents 1KHW000898 Programming and Testing Instructions NSD570 and 1KHW000900 Commissioning Instructions NSD570 in the annex of the Operating Instructions). After the NSD570 devices are tested or commissioned, switch of the power supply of the module rack, insert the LAN Interface in slot N84, connect the optional connecting cables and follow the steps below for setting up the LAN connection.
C.1.1
Test conditions
Temperature range: -5 C to 45 C. The connections for the tests can be made either directly at the rear of equipment (spring-clamp terminals and RJ45 socket) or at the terminals and sockets of the optional connecting cables.
C.1.2
DANGER
Check the wiring of protective earth to the equipment. If the NSD570 module rack is mounted in a cabinet, check that the rack is properly earthed at the cabinet. Check if a protective earth wire of at least 25 mm2 has been connected visibly to the earth bolt of the cabinet. Check the voltage source and the polarity for the power supply. In case of battery supply and if the NSD570 module rack is mounted in a cabinet: check if the positive pole (+) of the battery is grounded. If it is, place an earth jumper to the positive pole of the cabinet supply. 48 VDC and higher battery voltages are hazardous. Beware of electric shock. Do not make any installation under energized condition. If the protective system is already in use, open the connections to it while commissioning the NSD570. Open the isolating terminals of the optional external connecting cables in the local and in the remote station or interrupt the direct wire connection to the equipment if no connecting cables are used. Now the equipment can be powered by closing the external circuit breaker(s) or switching on the external power supply unit.
Caution
DANGER
Caution
Note:
C.2
Check power supply

Check the auxiliary supply voltage at the inputs of G3LH. It must be in the range from 48 VDC to 250 VDC ( 20 %) for nominal battery voltage and from 100 VAC to 240 VAC (-15%, +10%) for nominal mains voltage 50/60 Hz. In case of dual (redundant) power supply, the supply voltage for both modules must be checked. Two LEDs on the front panel indicate the status of the power supply modules (green = Ok, red = fail, dark = not assembled).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
4/16
1KHW001289-EN
C.3
C.3.1

Install the SSH client software
Before you can access a LAN Interface over an SSH connection it is necessary to install an SSH client on the PC. This has to be done only the first time. It is recommended to use the SSH Secure Shell application. Execute the file SSHWinClient-3.0.0-build203.exe to install this software on your PC. To be able to use the backspace key, it is necessary to change the following setting of the SSH Secure Shell application. Choose Edit Settings Keyboard and mark Backspace sends Delete.
C.4
Physical connection to the LAN Interface

To commission an NSD570 LAN Interface, there is an Ethernet connection to the G3LL card necessary. The LAN Interface can be connected directly to the Commissioning PC over an Ethernet cross connect cable or over a Switch or Hub.
C.4.1
Connection over an Ethernet Switch or Hub

The RJ45 connector (X203) of the LAN Interface (G3LL) must be connected with an Ethernet Switch or Hub. The connecting cable must be an Ethernet patch cable (not a cross connect cable). Now it is possible to connect the LAN Interface from every PC that is connected to the Ethernet LAN.
Ethernet Switch / Hub
Ethernet patch cable
Ethernet
Commissioning PC
A Connect G3LL
Note:
The factory default IP address of the LAN Interface (172.20.162.54) must not be used by another device in the Ethernet LAN.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
5/16
1KHW001289-EN
C.4.2
Direct connection over an Ethernet cross connect cable

The RJ45 connector (X203) of the LAN Interface (G3LL) must be connected with the Ethernet port of the Commissioning PC. The connecting cable must be an Ethernet cross connect cable (a normal patch cable will not work).
Commissioning PC Ethernet cross connect cable
A Connect G3LL
C.4.3
Subnet Mask
The Subnet Mask of the Commissioning PC must be configured to 255.255.255.0. The command ipconfig in the DOS Box shows the settings (see below).
Windows 2000 IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection: Connection-specific DNS Suffix . : ##### IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : ##### Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . : #####
Change the Subnet Mask of the Commissioning PC The following steps show, how the Subnet Mask can be configured (Windows 2000). Start Settings Network and Dial up Connections Local Area Connection Properties The window Local Are Connection Properties (the left one below) should appear. Mark Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and press Properties. The window Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties appears (the right one below) and there the Subnet Mask can be configured.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
6/16
1KHW001289-EN
C.4.4
Ethernet connection test (ping)

The ping command in the DOS box can be used to test the IP connection to the LAN Interface. C:\Documents and Settings\userxy>ping 172.20.162.54 Pinging 172.20.162.54 with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 172.20.162.54: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=62 Reply from 172.20.162.54: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=62 Reply from 172.20.162.54: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=62 Reply from 172.20.162.54: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=62 Ping statistics for 172.20.162.54: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
C.5
C.5.1
Configure the networking parameters

Establish an SSH connection
There must be a SSH connection between the Commissioning PC and the NSD570 LAN Interface in order to set the following parameters: Network parameters (IP Address etc.) using the ctool Time and date Root password 1. Start the application SSH Secure Shell Client 2. Press Quick Connect in the menu bar
3. The Dialog Box Connect to Remote Host appears. Type in the currently configured IP Address of the NSD570 LAN Interfaces (default is 172.20.162.54) in the field Host Name and root as User Name. Press the Connect Button.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
7/16
1KHW001289-EN
4. The first time you connect an NSD570 LAN Interface, the Host Identification dialog box will be shown. Press Yes to store the public key locally on your PC / Notebook and the dialog box will not be shown anymore the next time.
5. Enter the password for the root user. The factory default for root password is TfATEwimt5ya (first character of every word of the sentence The first ABB Teleprotection Equipment was installed more than 50 years ago).
6. The SSH connection to the NSD570 LAN Interface is now established. It is now possible to execute commands on the LAN interface. Caution Through this SSH connections you are able to execute a number of Linux console commands. Do not execute any unknown commands because this could cause malfunction of the NSD570 LAN Interface.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
8/16
1KHW001289-EN
C.5.2
Connection termination
An established connection can be terminated with Disconnect in the Menu File.
C.5.3
Start the ctool

The ctool can be started with the following commands in the SSH console: cd /ctool . /ctool.sh The Main Menu appears
C.5.4
Networking Parameter
Note: The NSD570 LAN Interface must be rebooted after changing the network settings. The modified network settings will be active after the reboot. It is very important to remember the values of the modified settings. It will not be possible to access the NSD570 LAN Interface without knowing the current IP Address !! If the value of a modified IP Address is forgotten, the Compact Flash card of the NSD570 LAN Interface must be rewritten with the image file, see Copy Instructions Compact Flash Card G3LL (1KHW001291). Afterwards the default IP Address can be used to access the LAN Interface.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
9/16
1KHW001289-EN
C.5.4.1 Selection: Function: Default:
DHCP or Static IP-Address Press 1 and Enter in the Main Menu The submenu allows to change between DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) and Static IP Address. Static IP Address Caution DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is not recommended with the NSD570 LAN Interface. The NSD570 LAN Interface in DHCP mode will not start without the presence of a DHCP server.
C.5.4.2 Selection: Function: Remarks: Default: C.5.4.3 Selection: Function: Remarks: Default: C.5.4.4 Selection: Function: Remarks: Default:
IP Address Press 2 and Enter in the Main Menu The currently configured IP address is displayed. Enter the new IP address. Only valid IP addresses will be accepted. The IP Address can only be configured if Static IP Address is set (see DHCP or static IPAddress). 172.20.162.54 Subnet Mask Press 3 and Enter in the Main Menu The currently configured Subnet Mask is displayed. Enter the new Subnet Mask. Only valid Subnet Masks will be accepted. The Subnet Mask can only be configured if Static IP Address is set (see DHCP or static IPAddress). 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway Press 4 and Enter in the Main Menu The currently configured Default Gateway is displayed. Enter the new Default Gateway. Only valid Default Gateways will be accepted. The Default Gateway can only be configured if Static IP Address is set ( see DHCP or static IPAddress) 172.20.162.1
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
10/16
1KHW001289-EN
C.5.4.5 Selection: Function: Remarks: Default: C.5.4.6 Selection: Function: Default: C.5.4.7 Selection: Function:
Computer Name Press 5 and Enter in the Main Menu Displays the currently configured Computer Name. Enter the new Computer Name. The Computer Name appears as console prompt. NSD570LAN Domain Name Press 6 and Enter in the Main Menu Displays the currently configured Domain Name. Enter the new Domain Name noname.com Domain Nameserver (DNS) Press 7 and Enter in the Main Menu Displays the currently configured Domain Nameservers. Enter first the number of Domain Nameservers to configure. Afterwards enter the IP Addresses of the Domain Nameservers. Only valid IP addresses will be accepted. A maximal number of 3 Domain Nameservers can be configured. FTP Server ON/OFF Press 8 and Enter in the Main Menu Toggles the FTP Server of the G3LL on/off. FTP Server disabled. Note: For security reasons, the FTP server should be disabled if it is not momentarily needed for transfer of large file structures (e.g. replacing the whole HMI570). For a small number of files (e.g. backupped configuration files, as described in Section 0) the use of the SSH Secure File Transfer is recommended instead.
Remarks: C.5.4.8 Selection: Function: Default:
C.5.4.9 Selection:
System Logging Options Press 9 and Enter in the Main Menu - a submenu appears:
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
11/16
1KHW001289-EN
Note:
System logging in this section always means the logging of the Linux system itself. Note that the web server and the HMI570 both keep their own separate logging mechanisms, which are always enabled. The system logging should only be turned on temporarily for debugging purposes!
C.5.4.9.1 Selection: Function: C.5.4.9.2 Selection: Function: Remark: C.5.4.9.3 Selection: Function:
Logging ON/OFF NOW Press 1 and Enter in the Logging Options Menu Immediately starts or shuts down the Linux system logging on the running system. Logging OFF for All Coming Bootups Press 2 and Enter in the Logging Options Menu There will be no system logging from the next restart on. This setting is the default for logging. Logging ON only on Next Bootup Press 3 and Enter in the Logging Options Menu The system logging will be active upon the next restart until the system is shut down again. Afterwards the system logging will be turned off again if the settings are not changed manually. Logging ON for All Coming Bootups Press 4 and Enter in the Logging Options Menu From the next restart on, the system logging will always be active (even after further restarts) until it is turned off in the ctool again. Save Log Files from tmpfs to CompactFlash Press 5 and Enter in the Logging Options Menu You will be prompted for a directory name. Enter a name (e.g. bak_logfiles) and copies of all log files will be placed in a corresponding subdirectory of /tmp (e.g. /tmp/bak_logfiles). Note: The log files are kept in RAM (tmpfs). They are deleted when the system is being shut down or reset. To keep the logfiles for later debugging purposes, save them to the CompactFlash.
C.5.4.9.4 Selection: Function:
C.5.4.9.5 Selection: Function:
C.5.4.9.6 Selection: Function: C.5.4.9.7 Selection: Function: C.5.4.10 Selection: Function:
Show Logging Status Press 6 and Enter in the Logging Options Menu Displays if the logging is active at the moment and the logging settings after coming bootups. Back to Main Menu Press 7 and Enter in the Logging Options Menu Exits the Logging Submenu and displays the Main Menu again. Local Backup Press 10 and Enter in the Main Menu All files containing network configuration parameters will be copied into the backup directory (/ctool/backup).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
12/16
1KHW001289-EN
C.5.4.11 Selection: Function:
Local Restore Press 11 and Enter in the Main Menu All files containing network configuration parameters will be copied from the backup directory (/ctool/backup) to their appropriate location in file system of the NSD570 LAN Interface. Set Time and Date Press 12 and Enter in the Main Menu Adjusts time and date.
C.5.4.12 Selection: Function:
Enter new time and data in the following format. Values in [ ] are optional. Format to use: MMDDhhmm[YYYY][.ss] MM - month (2 digits) DD - day within month (2 digits) hh - hour (2 digits) mm - minute (2 digits) YY - year (4 digits, optional) ss - second (2 digits, optional) C.5.4.13 Selection: Function: Show all Network Parameters Press 17 and Enter in the Main Menu Lists all network parameters that can be set within ctool. (Logging parameters are listed separately in the System Logging Options submenu under Show Logging Status) Note: Please note, that if you have changed the settings, they will not be in effect until the system has been restarted, but already be shown.
C.5.4.14 Selection: Function: C.5.4.15 Selection: Function:
Reset LAN Interface Press 19 and Enter in the Main Menu Resets the LAN Interface Exit ctool Press 20 and Enter in the Main Menu Exits the ctool Note: Please note, you must reboot the NSD570 LAN Interface after changing the network settings.
C.5.5
Backup and restore of the network configuration parameters

The files containing the NSD570 LAN Interface network configuration parameters can be backed up to the Commissioning PC and restored from there back to the NSD570 LAN Interface.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
13/16
1KHW001289-EN
C.5.5.1
Create Backup Execute the following steps to create a backup of the NSD570 LAN Interface network configuration parameters and download them to the Commissioning PC. 1. Establish a SSH connection to the LAN interface (see C.5.1) 2. Start ctool and execute Local Backup (see C.5.3) 3. Open an SSH Secure File Transfer Window Window New File Transfer 4. Change to directory /ctool/backup and select all files, press right mouse button and Download to the Commissioning PC
C.5.5.2
Restore Backup Execute the following steps to restore a backup of the NSD570 LAN Interface network configuration parameters. The files are uploaded from the Commissioning PC. 1. Establish a SSH connection to the LAN interface (see C.5.1) 2. Open an SSH Secure File Transfer Window Window New File Transfer 3. Change to directory /ctool/backup, select all files and delete them 4. Press right mouse button and choose Upload. The Upload Select Files window appears. Select the files that shall be restored from the Commissioning PC to the NSD570 LAN Interface.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
14/16
1KHW001289-EN
5. Start ctool and execute Local Restore (see C.5.3) 6. The NSD570 LAN Interface must be rebooted after changing the network settings.
C.5.6
Change root password

The linux root password is necessary to access the LAN Interface over an SSH connection. The factory default for root password is TfATEwimt5ya (first character of every word of the sentence The first ABB Teleprotection Equipment was installed more than 50 years ago). Type passwd in the SSH console to change the linux root password. You must type in the new password twice.
Note:
The linux root password must be changed after commissioning or by the customer itself. The default password must not be used anymore for security reasons. The customer must keep the altered password safely. It is not possible to connect the LAN Interface over SSH without knowing the root password.
C.5.7
Test HMI570 LAN functionality

At the end of the commissioning of the NSD570 LAN Interface, test the access and the basic functionality of the HMI570 LAN. 1. 2. 3. Power up the NSD570 LAN Interface G3LL and wait the startup delay (approx. 3 minutes) Start a web browser on a PC that is connected to LAN and has therefore access to the NSD570 LAN Interface Enter the URL http://<IP_LAN_Interface>/hmi570/index.jsp where IP_LAN_Interface is the IP address of the LAN Interface that shall be connected (eg. http://172.20.162.54/hmi570/index.jsp). Click HMI570 ( Human Machine Interface ) Log In with User name Service and Password welcome Click Connect Device and the button TPE 1 Device connected must appear Click Configuration, Upload From Device Configuration upload successful must appear
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Click Exit HMI570, press button Exit and close the browser
G3LL Commissioning Report
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
C1/C2
HE
Test Units result
Permissible value
C.1 C.1.1 C.1.2
General Test conditions Visual checks before powering the equipment Correct wiring of protective earth Correct wiring of power supply Equipment connected to adequate voltage source Connection to protection devices G7BI G3LH (unit 1 / unit 2) Via circuit breaker B9AS or B9AV Open or interrupted local / remote PE wired polarity ok [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Unit 1 Unit 2
Temperature range
-5 45
[ ]
C.2
Check power supply DC battery voltage AC mains voltage LED indication on the front panel LED indication on the front panel G3LH (+ to -) G3LH (L to N) G3LH (unit 1 / unit 2) G3LH (unit 1 / unit 2) 38.4 300 85.0 264 green green V DC V AC
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
C.3 C.3.1 C.4 C.4.1 C.4.2 C.4.3 C.4.4 C.5 C.5.4.1 C.5.4.2 C.5.4.3 C.5.4.4 C.5.4.5 C.5.4.6
Preparing the equipment Install the SSH client software Physical connection to the LAN Interface Connection over an Ethernet Switch or Hub Direct connection over an Ethernet cross connect cable Subnet Mask Subnet Mask of the Commissioning PC 255.255.255. 0. [ ] or [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Ethernet connection test (ping) Ping test successful Configure the networking parameters DHCP or Static IP-Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway(s) Computer Name Domain Name Static IP Address DHCP
[ ] [ ]
(........) (........) (........) (........) (........)
Form 1KHW001289-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
G3LL Commissioning Report
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
C2/C2
HE
Test Units result
Permissible value
C.5.4.7
Domain Nameserver (DNS)
(........) (........) (........)
C.5.4.8 C.5.4.9 C.5.4.12 C.5.6 C.5.7
FTP Server ON/OFF System Logging Options Set Time and Date Change root password Test HMI570 LAN functionality
FTP Server setting Logging for all coming bootups Time and date correct? Root password HMI570 LAN
DISABLED OFF Ok changed? running? Ok Ok
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
_________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________ _________________________________
Form 1KHW001289-EN Rev. 2004-04-16
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Copy Instructions: < NSD570 Compact Flash Card G3LL >
1KHW001291-EN
_
Lang.:
04-04-16
Page:
PTUKT2
Valid for:
04-04-06 sig. Braun

Derived from:

Replaces:
EN
1/14

Copy Instructions: < NSD570 Compact Flash Card G3LL >
Contents: 1 2 Purpose of document FC CopyStation Driver and Application Installation on Microsoft Windows 2.1 Manufacturer Information 2.2 Online Manual 2.3 System Requirements 2.4 Installation of FC CopyStation Driver and Software under Windows 2000 2.5 Installation of FC CopyStation Driver and Software under Windows XP Utilization of the Altec FlashCard CopyStation Mobile 3.1 Connecting the Device 3.2 Starting the application program 3.3 Copying the CompactFlash contents into an image on the PC 3.4 Copying an image on the PC onto the CompactFlash 3.5 Verifying the contents of a CompactFlash towards an image file 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 10 10 10 10 12 13
List of equipment: PC with Windows 2000 / XP Altec FlashCard CopyStation Mobile with included driver CD
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
2/14
1KHW001291-EN
Purpose of document
This document describes the driver and software installation of the Altec FlashCard CopyStation Mobile device (hereafter called FC CopyStation) and its usage to read and write images of CompactFlash cards.
2
2.1
FC CopyStation Driver and Application Installation on Microsoft Windows

Manufacturer Information
The FlashCard CopyStation Mobile is manufactured by altec ComputerSysteme GmbH. In case of problems with the installation and usage, their support may be of some help: altec ComputerSysteme GmbH Bayernstrae 10 30855 Langenhagen Germany www.altec-computersysteme.com Their technical support hotline is reachable under phone no. +49 (0)511-98381-70 on Monday through Friday from 11am to 3pm (CET) or over the email address [email protected]
2.2
Online Manual
There is some online reference to the Flash Card Copy Station software, however much of the information there applies to the non-mobile version of the Flash Card Copy Station. Youll find it in the Menu Help Help topics of the mobile Flash Card Copy Station application.
2.3
System Requirements
IBM PC or 100% compatible computer, Windows NT 4.0 SP 5 or later, Windows 2000 Professional, or Windows XP Professional 64 MB RAM memory 3 MB available hard disk space (plus additional for CF image files) One unused PCMCIA slot
2.4
Installation of FC CopyStation Driver and Software under Windows 2000

The Installation Package works with Microsoft Windows 2000 and XP. Some steps however differ, so the installation under the two operating systems is described separately from each other. 1. Insert the CD-ROM labelled FlashCard CopyStation Mobile Software & Driver into the CDROM drive. 2. Open the folder english on that CD-ROM and double-click on the file setup.cmd. A command window will pop up for a short time and display some status information about the installation (on your PC system this may be too quick to really see anything).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
3/14
1KHW001291-EN
There is a shortcut to the FlashCardCopyStation program placed on the Windows desktop by the setup script. There are installation instructions contained in this folder on the CD, however in most cases, whats described there will not be enough to get the device running. Instead, there are some further steps necessary. 3. The name of the installed application should be cfcopy.exe, however it is cfcopy.exe.exe instead. Due to this it may be necessary to adjust the target of the shortcut on the desktop to the correct location (right-click on the shortcut, choose Properties and adjust the filename to cfcopy.exe.exe under Target, leave the path before as it is, so there should be an entry like C:\Program Files\altec\FlashCardCopy\cfcopy.exe.exe , note that the whole path has to stand in quotes ).
4. Attach the cable with the PCMCIA-Adapter to the FC CopyStation and plug it into the PCMCIA slot of your PC. Microsoft Windows will discover the newly added hardware and install a PCMCIA IDE/ATAPI device driver for it. This, however, is not the correct driver for our device. We will deal with that issue as described in the following steps.
5. Right-click on My Computer and choose Properties. In the window, which opens up, switch over to the Hardware tab, there press the Device Manager button.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
4/14
1KHW001291-EN
6. As the window of the device manager opens up, find the PCMCIA IDE/ATAPI Controller in the IDE ATA/ATAPI section and choose Properties from the context menu (right-click on PCMCIA IDE/ATAPI Controller).
7. In that window switch over to the Driver tab, where you now press the Update Driver... button.
8. In the wizard that opens up, first click Next >. After that, you are given the choice of having the system search for a suitable driver or getting a list displayed to choose a driver from. Choose the second option (Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that I can choose a specific driver).
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
5/14
1KHW001291-EN
9.
After clicking Next >, in the following window a list of drivers will be displayed. Pick mobile Flash Card Copy Station from that list and click on Next > twice again.
10. The wizard will complain about not finding a digital signature for that driver. This is the normal behaviour and not to worry about (no signed driver exists for the device we are installing). Just click Yes to continue the installation.
11. After this a message will tell you to enter the CD labelled FlashCardCopyStation Install Disk into your CD-ROM drive. Do so and click the OK button. 12. Now the location of the file cfcopy2k is needed, enter <driveletter>:\english (where <driveletter> is the letter of your CD-ROM drive) into the field Copy files from and click the OK button.
13. Now the new drivers are being installed. When done, you can click the Finish button to close the wizard. Now the driver should be fully functional. A double click on the FlashCardCopyStation icon on the desktop should not generate any error messages.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
6/14
1KHW001291-EN
2.5
Installation of FC CopyStation Driver and Software under Windows XP

The Installation Package works with Microsoft Windows 2000 and XP. Some steps however differ, so the installation under the two operating systems is described separately from each other. 1. Insert the CD-ROM labelled FlashCard CopyStation Mobile Software & Driver into the CDROM drive. 2. Open the folder english on that CD-ROM and doubleclick on the file setup.cmd. A command window will pop up for a short time and display some status information about the installation (on your system this may be too quick to really see anything).
Theres a shortcut to the FlashCardCopyStation program placed on the Windows desktop by the setup script. There are installation instructions contained in this folder on the CD, however in most cases, whats described there will not be enough to get the device running. Instead, there are some further steps necessary. 3. The name of the installed application should be cfcopy.exe, however it is cfcopy.exe.exe instead. Due to this it may be necessary to adjust the target of the shortcut on the desktop to the correct location (right-click on the shortcut, choose Properties and adjust the filename to cfcopy.exe.exe under Target, leave the path before as it is, so there should be an entry like C:\Program Files\altec\FlashCardCopy\cfcopy.exe.exe , note that the whole path has to stand in quotes ).
4. Attach the cable with the PCMCIA-Adapter to the FC CopyStation and plug it into the PCMCIA slot of your PC. Microsoft Windows will discover the newly added hardware and install a PCMCIA IDE/ATAPI device driver for it. This, however, is not the correct driver for our device. We will deal with that issue as described in the following steps.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
7/14
1KHW001291-EN
5. Right-click on My Computer and choose Properties. In the window that opens up, on the Hardware tab, click the button Device Manager.
6. As the window of the device manager opens up, find the PCMCIA IDE/ATAPI Controller in the IDE ATA/ATAPI section and choose Properties from the context menu (right-click on PCMCIA IDE/ATAPI Controller).
7. Switch to the tab Driver and click on the button Update Driver...
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
8/14
1KHW001291-EN
8. A wizard opens up. First click on Next >. Then you have to choose how to install the software. Here you should select the Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) option and click on Next >.
9. The following screen asks about search and installation options. Do not let Windows search for the best driver by itself, instead choose Dont search. I will choose the driver to install. This is necessary because the driver provided on the Altec CD is not signed for Windows compatibility, so Windows will not choose that one by itself.
10. On the following screen, you get to pick the Driver you want to use. mobile Flash Card Copy Station is the choice to take. Then click Next >.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
9/14
1KHW001291-EN
11. Now Windows will complain that the chosen driver has not passed the Windows Logo testing to verify compatibility with Windows XP. This is normal and nothing to worry about. So click on the Continue Anyway button.
12. Next the program will ask you to enter the CD FlashCardCopyStation Install Disk into the CD-ROM drive. Do so and click OK. Hereafter you will be prompted for the location of the file cfcopy2k.sys on the CD-ROM. Enter <driveletter>:\english (where <driveletter> is the letter of your CD-ROM drive) into the field Copy files from and click the OK button. 13. Now the new drivers are being installed. When done, you can click the Finish button to close the wizard. Now the driver should be fully functional. A double click on the FlashCardCopyStation icon on the desktop should not generate any error messages.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
10/14
1KHW001291-EN
3
3.1
Utilization of the Altec FlashCard CopyStation Mobile

Connecting the Device
The Altec FlashCard CopyStation Mobile consists of a box with two PCMCIA slots in the front, a cable with a PCMCIA adapter on one side, and two PCMCIA adapters for compact flash cards.
To connect the device, plug the cable into the socket in the back of the box and insert the PCMCIA adapter on the other side of the cable into the PCMCIA slot of your (notebook) PC.
3.2
Starting the application program

The application program can be started by double-clicking onto the FlashCardCopyStation icon created on the desktop by the installation program. If there is any problem detecting the device (maybe its not plugged into the PCMCIA slot), an error message Flash Card Copy Station Service not running ! will appear on startup. The same message also appears if the wrong driver is installed. So if everything seems connected correctly, but that message still appears on program startup, you might want to try again steps 5 through 13 of the installation instructions. If everything works correctly, the program window mobile Flash Card Copy Station will appear.
3.3
Copying the CompactFlash contents into an image on the PC

1. In the application window, there are two buttons representing the two PCMCIA slots. After inserting the PCMCIA adapter with the CompactFlash into the upper slot of the CF CopyStation, the writing on the upper button should change from No Card to some information about what CompactFlash card was entered (e.g. SanDisk SDCFB). Note: To copy data from a CompactFlash down to an image file, the source CompactFlash must be inserted into the upper slot! Otherwise it will not work. (The error No Card Inserted ! will be displayed in a message dialog.) If there are two CompactFlash cards inserted, it will always read from the one in the upper slot.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
11/14
1KHW001291-EN
2. A click onto that button reveals some further information about the CompactFlash card, as seen in the following picture.
3. To create an image file, you first have to choose a filename. Click on the Select button right next to the field Image File. An Open window pops up where a file name can be entered or an existing image file can be chosen.
4. After the file name is entered, click on the Open button. If the filename does not exit yet, you will be asked whether or not to create a file of that name. Choose Yes.
5. In the application window, the name of the image file now is entered in the respective field. Now be sure to choose Read Master under Action and click on the Start button to get the copying process going.
6. After the Progress bar has filled up, a message box Operation successful! appears on the screen indicating that the image file has been successfully written.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
12/14
1KHW001291-EN
3.4
Copying an image on the PC onto the CompactFlash

The FlashCard CopyStation Mobile has two slots for PCMCIA cards with an inserted CompactFlash. They can both be used to copy an image onto a card one or the other or both simultaneously. The image always is written to all the entered cards. 1. In the application window, there are two buttons representing the two PCMCIA slots. After inserting the PCMCIA adapter with the CompactFlash into one of the slots of the CF CopyStation, the writing on the respective button should change from No Card to some information about what CompactFlash card was entered (e.g. SanDisk SDCFB).
2. A click onto that button reveals some further information about the CompactFlash card, as seen in the following picture.
3. First you have to select an image file to read from. Click on the Select button right next to the field Image File. An Open window pops up where a file can be chosen.
4. After the file is chosen, click on the Open button. In the application window, the name of the image file now is entered in the respective field. Now choose Write all cards under Action and click on the Start button to get the copying process going.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
13/14
1KHW001291-EN
Note:
It is possible, to write the image of a CompactFlash of some size onto a CompactFlash of some larger size! For example, the image of a 64 MB CompactFlash card can be copied onto a card of 128 MB size. However, the question One or more cards do not have correct capacity! Continue? will be displayed and should be answered with Yes.
5.
After the Progress bar has filled up, a message box Operation successful! appears on the screen indicating that the contents of the image file have been successfully written onto the CompactFlash card(s).
6. In case the CompactFlash is worn out or damaged in some other way, the data written onto the CompactFlash might not have been saved the right way. So its wise to verify at this point that the image data on the CompactFlash matches the contents of the image file. The following section covers how to do that.
3.5
Verifying the contents of a CompactFlash towards an image file

Verifying ensures that the CompactFlash contains the exact data as found in the image file its compared to. This is especially helpful to check whether the image that has been written onto CompactFlash has been stored there correctly. The FlashCard CopyStation Mobile has two slots for PCMCIA cards with an inserted CompactFlash. They can both be used to verify an image with a card one or the other or both simultaneously. The image always is compared to all the inserted cards. 1. In the application window, there are two buttons representing the two PCMCIA slots. After inserting the PCMCIA adapter with the CompactFlash into one of the slots of the CF CopyStation, the writing on the respective button should change from No Card to some information about what CompactFlash card was entered (e.g. SanDisk SDCFB). A click onto that button reveals some further information about the CompactFlash card, as seen in the following picture.
2.
Revision:
Language:
Page:
EN
14/14
1KHW001291-EN
3. First you have to select an image file to compare to. Click on the Select button right next to the field Image File. An Open window pops up where a file can be chosen.
4. After the file is chosen, click on the Open button. In the application window, the name of the image file now is entered in the respective field. Now choose Verify all cards under Action and click on the Start button to get the copying process going.
5. The image file is compared to all entered CompactFlash cards. If they all match, a message box Operation successful! is shown on the screen. If at least one of the card contents does not match the image file, the message Operation not Successful! is displayed when done.
In case of two inserted CompactFlash cards the question remains, which card the error message applies to. The answer is given by the output on the buttons which represent the two PCMCIA slots. If the image and the CompactFlash contents do not match, the button will show the label Comp Error. If they match, the label will still contain the information about the type of flash card which is entered. For example, in the picture shown, the contents of the card in the upper slot did not match the image while the comparison for the lower slot resulted in a match.
Note:
After the button label has changed to Comp Error, it will remain that way until a new CompactFlash is entered into the slot! So in case a verification process results in a mismatch and the image is afterwards written and compared once more, the label may still be Comp Error even though the image and the card contents now match. So in that case, before verifying again, remove and reinsert the CompactFlash, so the button label is set back to the card information.
ABB
ABB Switzerland Ltd Utility Automation Systems PTUAB Repair Center CH-5400 Baden / Switzerland e-mail: LN : Fax: Tel :
[email protected] utilitycommunication@ABB_CH01
++ 41 58 585 65 65 ++ 41 58 589 37 35
Repair & Return Procedure 1) General

All our equipment and parts are warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period as agreed in the order or in the SERVICE CONTRACT. All faulty parts returned to us should have a FAULT REPORT.
The Repair & Return Procedure have following benefit for you:
N N N Quality of response Single Point-of- Entry to ensure the process efficiency and reliability Expedite service for all Service Contracts
2) Repair & Return Process ABB Switzerland Ltd

Customer
Modules for Repair
Utility Automation Systems
Dept. PTUAB / Repair Center 5400 Baden / Switzerland
1 . Send Modules with Fault Report (Please send a fax copy of the Fault Report to PTUKS to follow-up your delivery)
2 . Check the Modules and Repair Type
(If Warranty Repair or Service Contract send the modules to repair and fax an acknowledgement of receipt to customer. If Out of Warranty Repair send an offer to customer)
3 . Send an Offer to Customer
(Within 5 working days after receiving faulty modules with fault report for Out of Warranty Repair)
4 . Send Formal Purchase Order 5. Repair of Modules
6.
Delivery with Repair Report
(Invoicing in case of Out of Warranty Repair)
09.01.2004
Page 1 of 3
1KHM010296 RevE
ABB
++ 41 58 585 65 65 ++ 41 58 589 37 35
Repair & Return Procedure (continued)
3) Guide to Complete Fault Report

Always ensure that a separate Fault Report form accompanies your material when it is returned to PTUAB. Always fax copy of Fault Report to PTUAB to check the arrival of your delivery. Always complete Section 2 - Fault Symptoms. Always include the name and contact details of an engineer who can be contacted by the PTUAB repair technicians to discuss technical issues relating to the fault. This information should be recorded at the bottom of the Fault Report form. Always record the serial number and the release number (if any) of your faulty module on the Fault Report. Always record the contract number of SERVICE CONTRACT on the Fault Report Advance Replacements If you require an Advance Replacement please record this on the Fault Report form. A purchase order is required before the shipment of any Advance Replacement. The customer will be invoiced the full price for the advance replacement unit. Please also note that PTUAB does not guarantee that it will have replacement items available at all times, except for replacement on SERVICE CONTRACT. Unit for Checking This service will be charged with US$ 350.00 for each unit. 4) Purchase Order for Out of Warranty Repair After receiving modules with fault report we will repair the modules if it is under warranty or under Service Contract, otherwise we will send a quotation for the repair cost. No repairs will be commenced by PTUAB until a purchase order for the amount quoted for repair is received by PTUAB. All items received by PTUAB without a Fault Report Form and Purchase Order will be placed in Isolation and no repair actions will be commenced until all the above documentation is completed. 5) Packaging When packaging the item please use anti-static bags especially when using foam chips as packing material. Please ensure that the packaging is sufficient to protect the equipment from damage during shipment. Ideally, equipment should be returned in the same packaging it was supplied in. Any items that are received in a damaged condition, that appears to have arisen from inadequate packing, will be placed in Isolation until a new quote has been provided to you to cover repair of the additional damage and a purchase order is received by PTUAB.
09.01.2004
Page 2 of 3
1KHM010296 RevE
ABB
++ 41 58 585 65 65 ++ 41 58 589 37 35
Fault Report
A separate Fault Report must be completed for each individual faulty item you intend to return to PTUAB.
Section 1: General Information

Equipment Type: Module Type: Serial Number / Release Number_ PTUK Order No / Delivery date: Your Original PO No: _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________ _____________________________________________
Section 2: Fault Symptoms

Problem Occurred: During Installation Other:_____________________ Observed Faults: During Commissioning In Service Underfunction Sporadic error Outside tolerance Unit for checking
Overfunction Abnormal temperature
Fault Description ; ____________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Section 3: Repair & Delivery Type

Out of Warranty Repair In-Warranty Repair Expedited Repair Express Delivery Advanced Replacement Service Contract Service Contract No. -----------------------
Section 4: Customer Address Customers delivery address for repaired items

Company: ________________________________ ________________________________________ Attn.: ___________________________________ Contact Tel No: __________________________ Contact Fax No: __________________________ Contact e-mail: __________________________
Customer Billing Address

Company: ________________________________ _________________________________________ ATTN: ___________________________________ Contact Tel No: ___________________________ Contact Fax No: ___________________________ Contact e-mail: ___________________________
Section 5: Fault Report issued by:

Company: ______________________________ Engineer's Name: _________________________ Contact Details:__________________ Date:_____________
(Phone /e-mail)
09.01.2004
Page 3 of 3
1KHM010296 RevE
NEED SUPPORT FOR YOUR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM?
Questions, Technical Support
1. Support request
Customer Support Center

[email protected] or +41 844 845 845
2. Formal acceptance of price and delivery terms
3. Service delivery
Goals of the process:
Quality of response Short response time to customers Clear pricing of services Single Point-of-Entry to ensure process efficiency and reliability
1KHM010297Rev.A
ABB Switzerland Ltd

02-01-17
Notification Form for Errors in this Document Dear User We constantly endeavour to improve the quality of our technical publications and would like to hear your suggestions and comments. Would you therefore please fill in this questionnaire and return it to the address given below. ABB Switzerland Ltd Utility Automation Systems Betreuung Dokumentation, PTU-BD1 Bruggerstrasse 72 CH-5401 Baden Telefax +41 58 585 35 82 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Concerns publication: 1KHW000890-EN (NSD570) Have you discovered any mistakes in this publication? If so, please note here the pages, sections etc.
Do you find the publication readily understandable and logically structured? Can you make any suggestions to improve it?
Is the information sufficient for the purpose of the publication? If not, what is missing and where should it be included?
Name Company Postal code Town
Date
Country
IMPORTANT NOTICE! Experience has shown that reliable operation of our products is assured, providing the information and recommendations contained in these Operating Instructions are adhered to. It is scarcely possible for the instructions to cover every eventuality that can occur when using technical devices and systems. We would therefore request the user to notify us directly or our agent of any unusual observations or instances, in which these instructions provide no or insufficient information. In addition to these instructions, any applicable local regulations and safety procedures must always be strictly observed both when connecting up and commissioning this equipment. Any work such as insertion or removal of soldered jumpers or setting resistors, which may be necessary, may only be performed by appropriately qualified personnel. We expressly accept no responsibility for any direct damage, which may result from incorrect operation of this equipment, even if no reference is made to the particular situation in the Operating Instructions.
ABB Switzerland Ltd Utility Automation Systems Bruggerstrasse 72 CH-5400 Baden / Switzerland Phone +41 58 589 37 35 Fax +41 58 585 16 85 E-mail [email protected] www.abb.com/utilitycommunications
The IndustrialIT wordmark and all mentioned product names in the form XXXXXXIT are registered or pending trademarks of ABB. Printed in Switzerland (0404-0000-0)

NSD570

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

NSD570

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NSD570

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CommunicateIT NSD570

2002 ABB Switzerland Ltd Baden

Release Date 2002-12-20 2003-01-31 2003-09-01 2004-04-16

4. User interface program

5. Configuration and settings

6. Installation and wiring

8. Operation and maintenance

10. Storage, decommissioning and disposal

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Front view of NSD570

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Using these Operating Instructions

Personnel qualifications Operating personnel

Installation and wiring Commissioning Troubleshooting Storage, decommissioning and disposal

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Specific information with regard to the optimum use of the appliance.

Safety signs marked on the equipment itself:

Hazardous voltage and hazardous energy level. Beware of electric shock.

Specific information to prevent equipment damage by electrostatic discharge.

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Safety and monitoring facilities

Alteration of the equipment is not allowed.

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Alteration of the equipment is not allowed.

The equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Working on the equipment

Electrical strength test

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Common Interface G3LC

Relay Interface G3LR

LAN Interface G3LL

Laser / LED Caution Laser / LED Class Laser/LED Product.

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

3.6.7. 3.6.7.1. 3.6.7.2. 3.6.7.3. 3.6.7.4. 3.6.8. 3.6.8.1. 3.6.8.2.

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

General NSD570 Features

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Features of the NSD570 Analog

Features of the NSD570 Digital

ABB Switzerland Ltd

ABB Switzerland Ltd

System Architecture System Block Diagram

SYNC GPS Station Bus DC / MAINS 1 DC / MAINS 2

Power Supply 2 G3LH

LAN Interface / Web Server

Line Interface (analog, digital or optical) G3LL G3LA or G3LD

Relay Interface G3LR

3-System block diagram.vsd